Mercedes-Benz GLS 2017 Owner Manual

É1665844305dËÍ

1665844305

Order no. P166 0188 13 Part no. 1665844305 Edition A 2017

GLS

Operator's Manual

Symbols

Registered trademarks:

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

Bluetooth ® is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG Inc.

DTS™ is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc.

Dolby ® and MLP™ are registered trademarks of DOLBY Laboratories.

BabySmart™, ESP ® and PRE-SAFE ® istered trademarks of Daimler AG.

HomeLink

® are regis a registered trademark of Johnson Controls.

iPod

® of Apple Inc.

Logic7 and iTunes

®

® are registered trademarks is a registered trademark of Harman

International Industries.

Microsoft

®

R

R

R

R and Windows media

® are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.

SIRIUS ® is a registered trademark of Sirius

XM Radio Inc.

HD Radio™ is a registered trademark of iBiquity Digital Corporation.

Gracenote

® is a registered trademark of

Gracenote, Inc.

ZAGAT Survey

®

R and related brands are registered trademarks of Zagat Survey, LLC.

In this Operator's Manual you will find the following symbols:

G

WARNING

Warning notes make you aware of dangers which could pose a threat to your health or life, or to the health and life of others.

H

Environmental note

Environmental notes provide you with information on environmentally aware actions or disposal.

!

Notes on material damage alert you to dangers that could lead to damage to your vehicle.

i

Practical tips or further information that could be helpful to you.

X

X

This symbol indicates an instruction that must be followed.

Several of these symbols in succession indicate an instruction with several steps.

(Y page)

This symbol tells you where you can find more information about a topic.

YY This symbol indicates a warning or an instruction that is continued on the next

Dis‐ play page.

This text indicates a message on the multifunction display/multimedia display.

Publication details

Internet

Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehicles and about Daimler AG can be found on the following websites: http://www.mbusa.com (USA only) http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada only)

Editorial office

You are welcome to forward any queries or suggestions you may have regarding this Operator's

Manual to the technical documentation team at the following address:

Customer Assistance Center

Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC

3 Mercedes Drive

Montvale, NJ 07645-0350

© Daimler AG: not to be reprinted, translated or otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, without written permission from Daimler AG.

Vehicle manufacturer

Daimler AG

Mercedesstraße 137

70327 Stuttgart

Germany

As at 28.09.2015

Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz

We urge you to read this Operator's Manual carefully and familiarize yourself with the vehicle before driving. For your own safety and a longer vehicle life, follow the instructions and warning notices in this Operator's Manual.

Ignoring them could result in damage to the vehicle or personal injury to you or others.

Vehicle damage caused by failure to follow instructions is not covered by the Mercedes-

Benz Limited Warranty.

The equipment or product designation of your vehicle may vary depending on:

R

R

R

R

Model

Order

Country specification

Availability

Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right to introduce changes in the following areas:

R

R

Design

Equipment

R

Technical features

The equipment in your vehicle may therefore differ from that shown in the descriptions and illustrations.

The following are integral components of the vehicle:

R

R

R

R

Digital Operator's Manual

Printed Operator's Manual

Maintenance Booklet

Equipment-dependent supplements

Keep these documents in the vehicle at all times. If you sell the vehicle, always pass all documents on to the new owner.

Your Operator's Manual:

Digital form inside the vehicle

The Digital Operator's Manual provides comprehensive and specifically adapted information on your vehicle's equipment and multimedia system. It contains informative animations, individual language settings and an intuitive search function.

Booklet inside the vehicle

In addition to this manual and the aforementioned digital media, you also have the option to obtain a comprehensive printed version of the Supplement for your multimedia system from your authorized

Mercedes-Benz Center.

Digital form via the Internet

The Operator's Manual on the Internet provides easy access to all information regarding your vehicle and multimedia system. It also provides helpful animations, interesting background information and a wide array of search options.

Digital form as an App

Using the Mercedes-Benz Guides App, you can view all the information on your vehicle and multimedia system via mobile Internet or download it independently of network access. Available for smartphones or tablets.

You can also use the Mercedes-Benz Guides

App:

Please note that the Mercedes-Benz Guides App may not yet be available in your country.


Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.

A Daimler Company

1665844305

É1665844305dËÍ

2

Contents

Index ....................................................... 4

Introduction ......................................... 25

Protecting the environment ................... 25

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ............... 25

Operator's Manual ................................. 26

Service and vehicle operation ................ 26

Operating safety .................................... 28

QR codes for the rescue card ................ 30

Data stored in the vehicle ...................... 30

Information on copyright ....................... 32

Interior lighting .................................... 116

Replacing bulbs (vehicles with LED headlamps) .......................................... 117

Replacing bulbs (vehicles with halogen headlamps) ................................... 117

Windshield wipers ................................ 119

Climate control ................................. 123

Overview of climate control systems ... 123

Operating the climate control systems .................................................... 129

Setting the air vents ............................ 134

At a glance ........................................... 33

Cockpit .................................................. 33

Instrument cluster ................................. 34

Multifunction steering wheel ................. 35

Center console ...................................... 36

Overhead control panel ......................... 39

Door control panel ................................. 40

Driving and parking .......................... 137

Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle ..... 137

Driving ................................................. 137

DYNAMIC SELECT controller ............... 145

Automatic transmission ....................... 146

Refueling ............................................. 153

Parking ................................................ 159

Driving tips .......................................... 162

Driving systems ................................... 172

Towing a trailer .................................... 221

Safety ................................................... 41

Panic alarm ............................................ 41

Occupant safety .................................... 41

Children in the vehicle ........................... 57

Pets in the vehicle ................................. 62

Driving safety systems ........................... 63

Protection against theft ......................... 72

On-board computer and displays .... 229

Important safety notes ........................ 229

Displays and operation ........................ 229

Menus and submenus ......................... 232

Display messages ................................ 243

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster ............................... 274

Opening and closing ........................... 74

SmartKey ............................................... 74

Doors ..................................................... 80

Cargo compartment ............................... 81

Side windows ......................................... 85

Sliding sunroof ....................................... 89

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .... 94

Correct driver's seat position ................ 94

Seats ..................................................... 94

Steering wheel ..................................... 105

Mirrors ................................................. 107

Memory function ................................. 110

Multimedia system ........................... 287

General notes ...................................... 287


Function restrictions ............................ 287

Operating system ................................ 288

Stowage and features ...................... 294

Stowage areas ..................................... 294

Features .............................................. 302

Lights and windshield wipers .......... 112

Exterior lighting ................................... 112

Maintenance and care ...................... 319

Engine compartment ........................... 319

ASSYST PLUS ...................................... 323

Care ..................................................... 324

Breakdown assistance ..................... 331

Where will I find...? .............................. 331

Flat tire ................................................ 331

Battery (vehicle) .................................. 336

Jump-starting ....................................... 338

Towing and tow-starting ...................... 341

Fuses ................................................... 343

Wheels and tires ............................... 346


Operation ............................................ 346

Winter operation .................................. 348

Tire pressure ....................................... 349

Loading the vehicle .............................. 356

All about wheels and tires ................... 359

Changing a wheel ................................ 366

Wheel and tire combinations ............... 371

Emergency spare wheel ....................... 372

Technical data ................................... 376

Information regarding technical data ... 376

Vehicle electronics .............................. 376

Identification plates ............................. 377

Service products and filling capacities ...................................................... 378

Vehicle data ......................................... 384

Vehicle data for off-road driving .......... 385

Trailer tow hitch ................................... 387

Contents

3

4

Index

1, 2, 3 ...

4ETS (Electronic Traction System)

see ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System)

4MATIC (permanent four-wheel

drive) .................................................. 215

12 V socket

see Sockets

115 V socket ...................................... 307

360° camera

Cleaning ......................................... 328

Display in the multimedia system .. 202

Function/notes ............................. 201

A

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

Display message ............................ 245

Function/notes ................................ 63

Important safety notes .................... 63

Warning lamp ................................. 277

Accident

Automatic measures after an accident ................................................. 56

Activating media mode

General notes ................................ 292

Activating/deactivating cooling

with air dehumidification ................. 130

Active Blind Spot Assist

Activating/deactivating (onboard computer) ............................ 238

Display message ............................ 265

Function/information .................... 210

Trailer towing ................................. 213

Active Brake Assist

Activating or deactivating .............. 237

Display message ............................ 250

Function/notes ................................ 64

Active Brake Assist with crosstraffic function

Activating or deactivating .............. 237

Display message ............................ 251

Function/notes ................................ 69


Warning lamp ................................. 285

Active Curve System

Display message ............................ 262

Function/notes ............................. 187

Active Lane Keeping Assist

Activating/deactivating (onboard computer) ............................ 238

Display message ............................ 264

Function/information .................... 213

Trailer towing ................................. 215

Active light function ......................... 114

ADAPTIVE BRAKE ................................. 69

Adaptive Brake Assist

Function/notes ................................ 65

Adaptive Damping System

Function/notes ............................. 189

Adaptive Highbeam Assist

Display message ............................ 257

Function/notes ............................. 115

Switching on/off ........................... 116

Additives (engine oil) ........................ 382

Address book

see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 287

Adjusting the volume

Audio 20 ........................................ 288

COMAND ....................................... 288

ADS (Adaptive Damping System)

Function/notes ............................. 186

Air bags

Deployment ..................................... 53

Display message ............................ 254

Front air bag (driver, front passenger) ....................................... 47


Introduction ..................................... 46

Knee bag .......................................... 47

Occupant Classification System

(OCS) ............................................... 48

PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps ............................................... 42

Side impact air bag .......................... 48

Window curtain air bag .................... 48

Air filter (display message) .............. 260

AIR FLOW ........................................... 130

Air vents

Glove box ....................................... 135

Important safety notes .................. 134

Rear ............................................... 135

Setting ........................................... 134

Index

5

Setting the center air vents ........... 134

Setting the side air vents ............... 135

Air-conditioning system

see Climate control

AIRMATIC package

ADS (Adaptive Damping System) ... 186

Function/notes ............................. 186

Alarm

ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 72

Switching off (ATA) .......................... 72

Switching the function on/off

(ATA) ................................................ 72

Alarm system

see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)

AMG

Adaptive sport suspension system ................................................ 189

AMG menu (on-board computer) ..... 241

Anti-lock braking system

see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

Anti-Theft Alarm system

see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)

Approach/departure angle .............. 171

Ashtray ............................................... 305

Assistance display (on-board com-

puter) .................................................. 237

Assistance menu (on-board com-

puter) .................................................. 236

ASSYST PLUS

Displaying a service message ........ 323

Hiding a service message .............. 323

Resetting the service interval display ................................................ 323

Service message ............................ 323

Special service requirements ......... 323

ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)

Activating/deactivating ................... 72

Function ........................................... 72

Switching off the alarm .................... 72

ATTENTION ASSIST

Activating/deactivating ................. 237

Display message ............................ 261

Function/notes ............................. 205

Audio 20

Switching on/off ........................... 288

Audio menu (on-board computer) .... 234

Audio system

see separate operating instructions

Authorized Mercedes-Benz Center

see Qualified specialist workshop

Authorized workshop


AUTO lights

Display message ............................ 256 see Lights

Automatic car wash (care) ............... 324

Automatic engine start (ECO start/

stop function) .................................... 143

Automatic engine switch-off (ECO

start/stop function) .......................... 142

Automatic headlamp mode .............. 112

Automatic transmission

Accelerator pedal position ............. 149

Changing gear ............................... 149

DIRECT SELECT lever ..................... 146

Display message ............................ 270

Drive program ................................ 149

Drive program display .................... 148

Driving tips .................................... 149

DYNAMIC SELECT controller ......... 145

Emergency running mode .............. 153

Engaging drive position .................. 148

Engaging neutral ............................ 147

Engaging park position automatically ............................................... 147

Engaging reverse gear ................... 147

Engaging the park position ............ 146

Kickdown ....................................... 149

Manual shifting .............................. 150

Oil temperature (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ..... 241

Overview ........................................ 146

Problem (malfunction) ................... 153

Pulling away ................................... 141

Starting the engine ........................ 140

Steering wheel paddle shifters ...... 150

Trailer towing ................................. 149

Transmission position display ........ 148

Transmission positions .................. 148

Automatic transmission emer-

gency mode ....................................... 153

AUX jacks

CD/DVD drive ............................... 293

6

Index

Axle load, permissible (trailer tow-

ing) ...................................................... 387

B

Back button ....................................... 288

Bag hook ............................................ 299

Ball coupling

Installing ........................................ 223

Removing ....................................... 227

BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 64

Battery (SmartKey)

Checking .......................................... 77


Replacing ......................................... 77

Battery (vehicle)

Charging ........................................ 338

Display message ............................ 258


Jump starting ................................. 338

Overview ........................................ 336

Belt

see Seat belts

Blind Spot Assist


Display message ............................ 265

Notes/function .............................. 207

Trailer towing ................................. 209 see Active Blind Spot Assist

Blootooth

®

Connecting a different mobile phone ............................................ 292

BlueTEC

Adding DEF .................................... 156

BlueTEC (DEF) .................................... 381

Bluetooth

®

Searching for a mobile phone ........ 291 see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 287

Telephony ...................................... 290

Brake Assist

see BAS (Brake Assist System)

Brake fluid

Display message ............................ 250

Notes ............................................. 382

Brake force distribution

see EBD (electronic brake force distribution)

Brake lamps

Display message ............................ 256

Brakes

ABS .................................................. 63

Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 65

BAS .................................................. 64

Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 382

Display message ............................ 245

High-performance brake system .... 166

Hill start assist ............................... 141


Maintenance .................................. 165

Parking brake ................................ 160

Riding tips ...................................... 164

Warning lamp ................................. 276

Breakdown

Where will I find...? ........................ 331 see Flat tire see Towing away

Brightness control (instrument

cluster lighting) ................................... 34

Bulbs

see Replacing bulbs

C

California

Important notice for retail customers and lessees .......................... 26

Calling up a malfunction

Car

see Display messages see Vehicle

Care

360° camera ................................. 328

Car wash ........................................ 324

Carpets .......................................... 330

Display ........................................... 329

Exhaust pipe .................................. 328

Exterior lights ................................ 327

Gear or selector lever .................... 329

Interior ........................................... 329

Matte finish ................................... 326

Notes ............................................. 324

Paint .............................................. 326

Plastic trim .................................... 329

Power washer ................................ 325

Rear view camera .......................... 328

Index

7

Roof lining ...................................... 330

Seat belt ........................................ 330

Seat cover ..................................... 330

Sensors ......................................... 328

Side running board ........................ 327

Steering wheel ............................... 329

Trim pieces .................................... 330

Washing by hand ........................... 325

Wheels ........................................... 326

Windows ........................................ 327

Wiper blades .................................. 327

Wooden trim .................................. 330

Cargo compartment cover

Notes/how to use ......................... 300

Cargo compartment enlargement


Cargo compartment floor


Opening/closing ............................ 301

Stowage well (under) ..................... 301

Cargo tie down rings ......................... 299

CD


CD player (on-board computer) ........ 235

Center console

Lower section .................................. 37

Upper section .................................. 36

Central locking

Automatic locking (on-board computer) ............................................. 239

Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ........ 74

Child

Restraint system .............................. 58

Child seat

Forward-facing restraint system ...... 61

LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat anchors ............................................ 59

On the front-passenger seat ............ 61

Rearward-facing restraint system .... 61

Top Tether ....................................... 60

Child-proof locks


Rear doors ....................................... 62

Children

Special seat belt retractor ............... 57

Cigarette lighter ................................ 306

Cleaning

Mirror turn signal ........................... 327

Trailer tow hitch ............................. 329

Climate control

3-zone automatic climate control with additional rear-compartment climate control ............................... 127

Automatic climate control (3zone) .............................................. 125

Controlling automatically ............... 130

Cooling with air dehumidification .. 130

Defrosting the windows ................. 132

Defrosting the windshield .............. 132

Dual-zone automatic climate control ................................................. 123

General notes ................................ 123

Indicator lamp ................................ 130

Ionization ....................................... 134

Maximum cooling .......................... 132

Notes on using the automatic climate control .................................. 129

Overview of systems ...................... 123

Problem with the rear window defroster ........................................ 133

Problems with cooling with air dehumidification ............................ 130

Rear control panel ......................... 125

Rear control panel (3-zone automatic climate control with additional rear-compartment climate control) .......................................... 127

Refrigerant ..................................... 383

Refrigerant filling capacity ............. 384

Setting the air distribution ............. 131

Setting the air vents ...................... 134

Setting the airflow ......................... 131

Setting the climate mode (AIR

FLOW) ............................................ 130

Setting the temperature ................ 131

Switching air-recirculation mode on/off ............................................ 133

Switching on/off ........................... 129

Switching residual heat on/off ...... 133

Switching the rear window defroster on/off ............................ 133

Switching the ZONE function on/off ............................................ 132

Coat hooks ......................................... 300

8

Index

Cockpit

Overview .......................................... 33 see Instrument cluster

Collapsible spare wheel

Inflating ......................................... 374 see Emergency spare wheel

COMAND

Driving dynamics display ............... 221

Switching on/off ........................... 288

COMAND display

Cleaning ......................................... 329

Combination switch .......................... 113

Connecting a USB device


Consumption statistics (on-board

computer) .......................................... 232

Controller ........................................... 288

Convenience closing feature .............. 87

Convenience opening feature ............ 87

Coolant (engine)

Checking the level ......................... 322

Display message ............................ 257

Filling capacity ............................... 383


Temperature (on-board computer,

Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 241

Temperature gauge ........................ 230

Warning lamp ................................. 283

Cooling

see Climate control

Copyright ............................................. 32

Cornering light function

Display message ............................ 256

Crash-responsive emergency light-

ing ....................................................... 117

Crosswind Assist ................................. 69

Crosswind driving assistance ............ 69

Cruise control

Activating ....................................... 173

Activation conditions ..................... 173

Cruise control lever ....................... 172

Deactivating ................................... 173

Display message ............................ 267

Driving system ............................... 172

Function/notes ............................. 172


Storing and maintaining current speed ............................................. 173

Cup holder

Center console .............................. 303


Rear compartment ......................... 303

Temperature controlled ................. 303

Third row of seats .......................... 304

Customer Assistance Center

(CAC) ..................................................... 29

Customer Relations Department ....... 29

D

Data

see Technical data

Data carrier

Selecting ........................................ 235

Daytime running lamps

Display message ............................ 256

Function/notes ............................. 112

Switching on/off (on-board computer) ............................................. 239

Declarations of conformity ................. 28

DEF

Adding ........................................... 156

Display message ............................ 260



Diagnostics connection ...................... 29

Differential lock (display mes-

sage) ................................................... 263

Digital speedometer ......................... 233

DIRECT SELECT lever

Automatic transmission ................. 146

Display messages

ASSYST PLUS ................................ 323

Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 244

Driving systems ............................. 261

Engine ............................................ 257

General notes ................................ 243

Hiding (on-board computer) ........... 243

KEYLESS-GO .................................. 273

Lights ............................................. 256

Safety systems .............................. 245

SmartKey ....................................... 273

Tires ............................................... 268

Vehicle ........................................... 270

Index

9

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC

Activating ....................................... 176

Activation conditions ..................... 176

Cruise control lever ....................... 175

Display Message ............................ 266

Displays in the instrument cluster .. 179

Driving tips .................................... 180

Function/notes ............................. 174


Setting the specified minimum distance ......................................... 178

Stopping ........................................ 177

Switching off .................................. 178

Warning lamp ................................. 285

Distance recorder

see Odometer see Trip odometer

Distance warning (warning lamp) .... 285

Distance warning function

Function/notes ................................ 65

Warning lamp ................................. 285

Doors

Automatic locking (on-board computer) ............................................. 239

Automatic locking (switch) ............... 81

Central locking/unlocking

(SmartKey) ....................................... 74

Control panel ................................... 40

Display message ............................ 272

Emergency locking ........................... 81

Emergency unlocking ....................... 81


Opening (from inside) ...................... 80

Overview .......................................... 80

Power closing .................................. 81

Drinking and driving ......................... 163

Drive program


Off-Road program (vehicles without Off-Road Engineering package) ............................................... 217

Off-road programs (vehicles with

Off-Road Engineering package) ...... 218

SETUP (on-board computer) .......... 241

Drive programs

Display (DIRECT SELECT lever) ...... 148

Driver's door

see Doors

Driving


Driving abroad

Mercedes-Benz Service ................. 324

Driving Assistance PLUS package ... 210

Driving in mountainous terrain

Approach/departure angle ............ 171

Driving lamps

see Daytime running lamps

Driving off-road

see Off-road driving

Driving safety system

Active Brake Assist .......................... 64

Driving safety systems

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 63

Active Brake Assist with crosstraffic function ................................. 69

ADAPTIVE BRAKE ............................. 69

Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 65

BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 64

Distance warning function ............... 65

EBD (electronic brake force distribution) ............................................. 69

ESP ® (Electronic Stability Program) ............................................... 66

Important safety information ........... 63

Overview .......................................... 63

STEER CONTROL ............................. 72

Driving system

AIRMATIC package ........................ 186

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC ............. 174

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC with

Steering Pilot ................................. 180

Parking assist PARKTRONIC .......... 190

Parking Pilot .................................. 193

Driving systems

360°camera .................................. 201

Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 210

Active Curve System ...................... 187

Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 213

ADS ............................................... 186

AMG adaptive sport suspension system ........................................... 189

ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 205

Blind Spot Assist ............................ 207

Cruise control ................................ 172

Display message ............................ 261

Driving Assistance Plus package ... 210

10

Index

HOLD function ............................... 185

Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 209

Level control (vehicle with the Off-

Road Engineering package) ........... 182

Rear view camera .......................... 197

Traffic Sign Assist .......................... 206

Driving tips


Brakes ........................................... 164

Break-in period .............................. 137


Downhill gradient ........................... 164

Drinking and driving ....................... 163

Driving in winter ............................. 167

Driving on flooded roads ................ 166

Driving on sand .............................. 170

Driving on wet roads ...................... 166

Driving over obstacles ................... 170

Exhaust check ............................... 163

Fuel ................................................ 162

General .......................................... 162

Hydroplaning ................................. 166

Icy road surfaces ........................... 167

Limited braking efficiency on salted roads ....................................... 165

Off-road driving .............................. 168

Off-road fording ............................. 167

Snow chains .................................. 348

The first 1000 miles (1500 km) ..... 137

Tire ruts ......................................... 170

Towing a trailer .............................. 222

Traveling uphill ............................... 171

Wet road surface ........................... 165

DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation)

Display message ............................ 263

Function/notes ............................. 216

DVD video

Operating (on-board computer) ..... 235 see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 287

DYNAMIC SELECT controller


E

EASY-ENTRY feature


Function/notes ............................. 106

EASY-EXIT feature

Crash-responsive ........................... 107

Function/notes ............................. 106

Switching on/off ........................... 240

EBD (electronic brake force distribution)

Display message ............................ 247

Function/notes ................................ 69

ECO display

Function/notes ............................. 163

On-board computer ....................... 232

ECO start/stop function

Automatic engine start .................. 143

Automatic engine switch-off .......... 142

Deactivating/activating ................. 143

General information ....................... 142


Introduction ................................... 142

Electronic Stability Program

see ESP

®

(Electronic Stability Program)

Emergency


Emergency release

Driver's door .................................... 81

Vehicle ............................................. 81

Emergency spare wheel

General notes ................................ 372


Removing ....................................... 373

Storage location ............................ 373

Stowing .......................................... 373

Emergency Tensioning Devices

Activation ......................................... 53

Emergency unlocking

Tailgate ............................................ 85

Emissions control

Service and warranty information .... 26

Engine

Check Engine warning lamp ........... 283

Display message ............................ 257

ECO start/stop function ................ 142

Engine number ............................... 378

Irregular running ............................ 144

Jump-starting ................................. 338

Starting (important safety notes) ... 139

Starting problems .......................... 144

Index

11

Starting the engine with the

SmartKey ....................................... 140

Starting via smartphone ................ 140

Starting with KEYLESS-GO ............. 140

Switching off .................................. 160

Tow-starting (vehicle) ..................... 343

Engine electronics


Engine jump starting

see Jump starting (engine)

Engine oil

Adding ........................................... 321

Additives ........................................ 382

Checking the oil level ..................... 320

Checking the oil level using the dipstick .......................................... 321

Display message ............................ 259


Notes about oil grades ................... 381

Notes on oil level/consumption .... 320

Temperature (on-board computer,


Engine switch-off

see ECO start/stop function

Entering an address

see also Digital Operator's Man-

ESP

ual .................................................. 287

® gram)

(Electronic Stability Pro-

AMG menu (on-board computer) ... 241

Characteristics ................................. 67

Deactivating/activating ................... 67

Display message ............................ 245

Function/notes ................................ 66

General notes .................................. 66


Trailer stabilization ........................... 68

Warning lamp ................................. 279

ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction Sys-

tem) ...................................................... 66

Exhaust check ................................... 163

Exhaust pipe (cleaning instruc-

tions) .................................................. 328

Exterior lighting

see Lights

Exterior mirrors

Adjusting ....................................... 107

Dipping (automatic) ....................... 109

Folding in when locking (on-board computer) ...................................... 240

Folding in/out (automatically) ....... 108

Folding in/out (electrically) ........... 108

Out of position (troubleshooting) ... 109

Setting ........................................... 108

Storing settings (memory function) ............................................... 110

Storing the parking position .......... 109

Eyeglasses compartment ................. 296

F

Favorites

Overview ........................................ 289

Filler cap

see Refueling

Flat tire

MOExtended tires .......................... 332

Preparing the vehicle ..................... 331

TIREFIT kit ...................................... 333 see Emergency spare wheel

Floormats ........................................... 318

Fog lamps (extended range) ............. 115

Folding the rear bench seat for-

wards/back ....................................... 297

Fording

Off-road ......................................... 167

On flooded roads ........................... 166

Frequencies

Mobile phone ................................. 376

Fuel

Two-way radio ................................ 376

Additives ........................................ 380

Consumption statistics .................. 232

Displaying the current consumption ................................................ 233

Displaying the range ...................... 233

Driving tips .................................... 162

Fuel gauge ....................................... 34

Grade (gasoline) ............................ 379


Low outside temperatures ............. 380


Quality (diesel) ............................... 380

Refueling ........................................ 153

Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 379

12

Index

Fuel filler flap

Opening ......................................... 155

Fuel filter (display message) ............ 260

Fuel level

Calling up the range (on-board computer) ...................................... 233

Fuel tank

Capacity ........................................ 379


Fuses

Allocation chart ............................. 343

Before changing ............................. 344

Dashboard fuse box ....................... 344

Fuse box in the engine compartment .............................................. 344

Fuse box under rear bench seat .... 345


G

Garage door opener

Clearing the memory ..................... 318

General notes ................................ 315


Opening/closing the garage door .. 317

Problems when programming ........ 317

Programming (button in the rearview mirror) ................................... 316

Synchronizing the rolling code ....... 316

Gear indicator (on-board com-

puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ....... 241

Genuine parts ...................................... 25

Glove box ........................................... 295

Google™ Local Search


GTW (Gross Trailer Weight) (defini-

tion) .................................................... 365

H

Handbrake

see Parking brake

Hazard warning lamps ...................... 114

Head restraints

Adjusting ......................................... 96

Adjusting (electrically) ..................... 97

Adjusting (manually) ........................ 96

Adjusting (rear) ................................ 97

Installing/removing (rear) ................ 98

Luxury .............................................. 97

Headlamps

Fogging up ..................................... 116 see Automatic headlamp mode

Heating

see Climate control

High beam flasher ............................. 113

High-beam headlamps

Adaptive Highbeam Assist ............. 115

Display message ............................ 256

Replacing bulbs ............................. 119

Switching on/off ........................... 113

Highway mode ................................... 114

Hill start assist .................................. 141

HOLD function

Deactivating ................................... 185

Display message ............................ 264

Function/notes ............................. 185

Home address


Hood

Closing ........................................... 320

Display message ............................ 272


Opening ......................................... 319

Horn ...................................................... 33

Hydroplaning ..................................... 166

I

Ignition lock

see Key positions

Immobilizer .......................................... 72

Indicator lamps

see Warning and indicator lamps

Indicators

see Turn signals

Insect protection on the radiator .... 320

Instrument cluster

Overview .......................................... 34

Warning and indicator lamps ........... 34

Instrument cluster lighting .............. 229

Intelligent Light System


Overview ........................................ 114

Index

13

Interior lighting

Automatic control .......................... 117

Emergency lighting ........................ 117

General notes ................................ 117

Manual control ............................... 116

Overview ........................................ 116

Reading lamp ................................. 116

iPod

®


J

Jack


Using ............................................. 368

Jump starting (engine) ...................... 338

K

Key positions

KEYLESS-GO .................................. 138

SmartKey ....................................... 138

KEYLESS-GO

Activating ......................................... 75

Convenience closing feature ............ 88

Deactivation ..................................... 75

Display message ............................ 273

Locking ............................................ 75

Removing the Start/Stop button ... 139

Start function ................................... 76

Start/Stop button .......................... 138


Unlocking ......................................... 75

Kickdown

Driving tips .................................... 149

Manual gearshifting ....................... 152

Knee bag .............................................. 47

L

Lamps

see Warning and indicator lamps

Lane Keeping Assist


Display message ............................ 264

Function/information .................... 209 see Active Lane Keeping Assist

Lap time (RACETIMER) ...................... 241

LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat

anchors ................................................ 59

Level control

AIRMATIC ...................................... 188

Level control (display message) ...... 261

Level control (vehicle with the Off-

Road Engineering package)

Basic settings ................................ 182

Function/notes ............................. 182


License plate lamp (display mes-

sage) ................................................... 256

Light function, active

Display message ............................ 256

Light sensor (display message) ....... 256

Lights

Activating/deactivating the Intelligent Light System ........................ 239

Active light function ....................... 114

Adaptive Highbeam Assist ............. 115

Automatic headlamp mode ............ 112

Fog lamps (extended) .................... 115

Hazard warning lamps ................... 114

High beam flasher .......................... 113

High-beam headlamps ................... 113

Highway mode ............................... 114

Light switch ................................... 112

Low-beam headlamps .................... 113

Off-road lights ................................ 115

Parking lamps ................................ 113

Rear fog lamp ................................ 113

Standing lamps .............................. 113

Switching the daytime running lamps on/off (on-board computer) ............................................. 239

Turn signals ................................... 113 see Interior lighting see Replacing bulbs

Loading guidelines ............................ 294

Locking

see Central locking

Locking (doors)

Automatic ........................................ 81

Emergency locking ........................... 81

From inside (central locking button) .................................................. 80

14

Index

Locking centrally

see Central locking

Locking verification signal (on-

board computer) ............................... 239

LOW RANGE

Display message ............................ 263

Off-road gear ................................. 219

LOW RANGE off-road gear ................ 219

Low-beam headlamps

Display message ............................ 256

Replacing bulbs ............................. 118

Switching on/off ........................... 113

Lumbar support

Adjusting (on the seat) .................. 103

Luxury head restraints ....................... 97

M

M+S tires ............................................ 348

Malfunction message

see Display messages

Matte finish (cleaning instruc-

tions) .................................................. 326

mbrace

Call priority .................................... 311

Display message ............................ 250

Downloading destinations

(COMAND) ..................................... 312

Downloading routes ....................... 314

Emergency call .............................. 309

General notes ................................ 308

Geo fencing ................................... 315

Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 313

MB info call button ........................ 311

Remote fault diagnosis .................. 313

Remote vehicle locking .................. 313

Roadside Assistance button .......... 310

Search & Send ............................... 312

Self-test ......................................... 309

Speed alert .................................... 314

System .......................................... 308

Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 315

Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 313

Mechanical key

Function/notes ................................ 76

General notes .................................. 76

Inserting .......................................... 76

Locking vehicle ................................ 81

Removing ......................................... 76

Unlocking the driver's door .............. 81

Media Interface

USB port in the armrest of the center console ............................... 295 see Digital Operator's Manual

Memory card (audio) ......................... 235

Memory function ............................... 110

Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive

360°camera .................................. 201



ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 205



Distance Pilot DISTRONIC with

Steering Pilot ................................. 180

General notes ................................ 172

Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 209

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC .......... 190

Parking Pilot .................................. 193

PRE-SAFE ® PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection PLUS) .............. 56

Rear view camera .......................... 197

Traffic Sign Assist .......................... 206

Message memory (on-board com-

puter) .................................................. 244

Mirror

Vanity mirror (sun visor) ................ 304

Mirror turn signal

Cleaning ......................................... 327

Mirrors

see Exterior mirrors see Rear-view mirror see Vanity mirror (in the sun visor)

Mobile phone

Connecting (Bluetooth

® interface) .............................................. 290

Connecting another mobile phone ............................................ 292

Frequencies ................................... 376

Installation ..................................... 376

Menu (on-board computer) ............ 235

Transmission output (maximum) .... 376

Modifying the programming

(SmartKey) ........................................... 76

MOExtended tires .............................. 332

Index

15

Mounting wheels

Lowering the vehicle ...................... 370

Mounting a new wheel ................... 369

Preparing the vehicle ..................... 367

Raising the vehicle ......................... 368

Removing a wheel .......................... 369

Securing the vehicle against rolling away ........................................ 367

MP3

Operation ....................................... 235 see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 287 see separate operating instructions

Multifunction display

Function/notes ............................. 231

Permanent display ......................... 238

Multifunction steering wheel

Operating the on-board computer .. 230

Overview .......................................... 35

Multimedia system

see Separate operating instructions

Music files


N

Navigation

Menu (on-board computer) ............ 233 see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 287 see separate operating instructions

Notes on breaking-in a new vehi-

cle ....................................................... 137

O

Occupant Classification System

(OCS)

Conditions ....................................... 49

Faults ............................................... 52

Operation ......................................... 49

System self-test ............................... 51

Occupant safety

Air bags ........................................... 46


Children in the vehicle ..................... 57


Introduction to the restraint system .................................................. 41

Occupant Classification System

(OCS) ............................................... 48

PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps ............................................... 42

Pets in the vehicle ........................... 62

PRE-SAFE

®

®

(anticipatory occupant protection) ............................... 55

PRE-SAFE PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection PLUS) .............. 56

Restraint system warning lamp ........ 42

Seat belt .......................................... 42

OCS

Conditions ....................................... 49

Faults ............................................... 52

Operation ......................................... 49

System self-test ............................... 51

Odometer ........................................... 232

Off-road driving


Checklist after driving off-road ...... 169

Checklist before driving off-road .... 169

Fording depth ................................ 385

General information ....................... 168


Maximum gradient climbing ability .................................................. 386

Traveling uphill ............................... 171

Off-road lights .................................... 115

Off-Road program (vehicles without Off-Road Engineering package)

Function/notes ............................. 217

Off-road programs (vehicles with

Off-Road Engineering package)

Function/notes ............................. 218

Off-road drive program .................. 218

Offroad Plus drive program ............ 218

Off-road programs (vehicles with the Off-Road Engineering package)

Displays in the COMAND display ... 221

Off-road system

4MATIC .......................................... 215

DSR ............................................... 216

LOW RANGE off-road gear ............. 219

Off-road 4ETS .................................. 67

Off-road ABS .................................... 64

16

Index

Off-road ESP

®

.................................. 68

Off-road programs (vehicles with

Off-Road Engineering package) ...... 218

Oil

see Engine oil

On and Offroad menu (on-board

computer) .......................................... 241

On-board computer

AMG menu ..................................... 241

Assistance menu ........................... 236

Audio menu ................................... 234

Convenience submenu .................. 240

Display messages .......................... 243

Displaying a service message ........ 323


Factory settings submenu ............. 240


Instrument cluster submenu .......... 238

Lighting submenu .......................... 239

Menu overview .............................. 232

Message memory .......................... 244

Navigation menu ............................ 233

On and Offroad menu .................... 241

Operation ....................................... 230

RACETIMER ................................... 241

Settings menu ............................... 238

Standard display ............................ 232

Telephone menu ............................ 235

Trip menu ...................................... 232

Vehicle submenu ........................... 239

Video DVD operation ..................... 235

Operating safety

Declaration of conformity ................ 28


Operating system

see On-board computer

Operator's Manual

Overview .......................................... 26

Vehicle equipment ........................... 26

Outside temperature display ........... 229

Overhead control panel ...................... 39

Override feature

Rear side windows ........................... 62

P

Paddle shifters

see Steering wheel paddle shifters

Paint code number ............................ 377

Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ... 326

Panic alarm .......................................... 41

Panorama roof with power tilt/ sliding panel


Opening/closing the roller sunblind ................................................. 92

Operating ......................................... 91

Operating the roller sunblinds for the sliding sunroof ........................... 91

Problem (malfunction) ..................... 92

Reversing feature ............................. 90

Parking


Parking brake ................................ 160

Position of exterior mirror, frontpassenger side ............................... 109

Rear view camera .......................... 197 see PARKTRONIC

Parking aid

Parking Pilot .................................. 193 see 360° camera see Exterior mirrors see PARKTRONIC

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC

Deactivating/activating ................. 192

Driving system ............................... 190

Function/notes ............................. 190


Problems (malfunctions) ................ 193

Sensor range ................................. 191

Towing a trailer .............................. 190

Warning display ............................. 192

Parking brake

Applying automatically ................... 161

Applying or releasing manually ...... 161

Display message ............................ 247

Electric parking brake .................... 160

Emergency braking ........................ 162

General notes ................................ 160

Releasing automatically ................. 161

Warning lamp ................................. 282

Parking lamps

Switching on/off ........................... 113

Parking Pilot

Display Message ............................ 265

Exiting a parking space .................. 196

Index

17

Function/notes ............................. 193


Parking .......................................... 195

PASSENGER AIR BAG

Display message ............................ 254

Indicator lamps ................................ 42


Pets in the vehicle ............................... 62

Phone book


Plastic trim (cleaning instruc-

tions) .................................................. 329

Power locks ......................................... 81

Power washers .................................. 325

Power windows

see Side windows

PRE-SAFE ® (anticipatory occupant protection)

Display message ............................ 251

Operation ......................................... 55

PRE-SAFE

®

PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection PLUS)

Display message ............................ 251

Operation ......................................... 56

Protection against theft

ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 72

Immobilizer ...................................... 72

Protection of the environment

General notes .................................. 25

Pulling away


General notes ................................ 141

Hill start assist ............................... 141

Trailer ............................................ 141

Q

QR code

Mercedes-Benz Guide App ................. 1

Rescue card ..................................... 30

Qualified specialist workshop ........... 29

R

RACETIMER (on-board computer) .... 241

Radiator cover ................................... 320

Radio

Selecting a station ......................... 234 see separate operating instructions

Radio mode


Radio-wave reception/transmission in the vehicle

Declaration of conformity ................ 28

Reading lamp ..................................... 116

Rear bench seat

Folding forwards/back .................. 298

Rear compartment

Exit/entry position (3rd row of seats) ............................................. 100

Setting the air vents ...................... 135

Setting the temperature ................ 131

Rear fog lamp

Display message ............................ 256

Switching on/off ........................... 113

Rear Seat Entertainment System

AUX jacks ...................................... 293

AUX jacks CD/DVD drive .............. 293

Rear seats

Adjusting ......................................... 98

Display message ............................ 272

Rear view camera

Cleaning instructions ..................... 328

Display in the multimedia system .. 198

Function/notes ............................. 197

Switching on/off ........................... 198

Rear window defroster


Switching on/off ........................... 133

Rear window wiper

Replacing the wiper blade .............. 121

Switching on/off ........................... 120

Rear-view mirror

Anti-glare (manual) ........................ 107

Dipping (automatic) ....................... 109

Refrigerant (air-conditioning system)


Refueling

Fuel gauge ....................................... 34


Refueling process .......................... 154 see Fuel

18

Index

Remote control

Garage door opener ....................... 315

Programming (garage door opener) .......................................... 316

Replacing bulbs

General notes ................................ 117

High-beam headlamps ................... 119


Installing/removing the cover

(front wheel arch) .......................... 118

Low-beam headlamps .................... 118

Overview of bulb types .................. 118

Turn signals (front) ......................... 119

Reporting safety defects .................... 30

Rescue card ......................................... 30

Reserve (fuel tank)

see Fuel

Reserve fuel

Display message ............................ 259

Warning lamp ................................. 283

Residual heat (climate control) ........ 133

Restraint system

Display message ............................ 252

Introduction ..................................... 41

Warning lamp ................................. 282

Warning lamp (function) ................... 42

Reversing feature

Panorama sliding sunroof ................ 90

Roller sunblinds ............................... 91

Side windows ................................... 86

Sliding sunroof ................................. 90

Tailgate ............................................ 82

Reversing lamps (display mes-

sage) ................................................... 256

Roadside Assistance (breakdown) .... 27

Roller sunblind

Panorama roof with power tilt/ sliding panel ..................................... 91

Rear side windows ......................... 304

Roof carrier ........................................ 302

Roof lining and carpets (cleaning

guidelines) ......................................... 330

Roof load (maximum) ........................ 384

Route (navigation)

see Route guidance (navigation)

Route guidance


Route guidance (navigation) ............ 233

S

Safety

Children in the vehicle ..................... 57 see Occupant safety see Operating safety

Safety system

see Driving safety systems

SD card

Inserting ........................................ 292

Inserting/removing ........................ 292

Removing ....................................... 292

SD memory card


Selecting ........................................ 235

Search & Send


Seat belts

Adjusting the driver's and frontpassenger seat belt ......................... 45

Adjusting the height ......................... 44

Cleaning ......................................... 330

Correct usage .................................. 44

Fastening ......................................... 44

Important safety guidelines ............. 43

Introduction ..................................... 42

Releasing ......................................... 45

Switching belt adjustment on/off

(on-board computer) ...................... 240

Warning lamp ................................. 275

Warning lamp (function) ................... 45

Seats

Adjusting (electrically) ..................... 96

Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support ................................................ 103

Adjusting the head restraint ............ 96

Calling up a stored setting (memory function) .................................. 111

Cleaning the cover ......................... 330

Correct driver's seat position ........... 94

Entry position (3rd row of seats) .... 100

Index

19

Exit position (3rd row of seats) ...... 101

Folding down/up (third row of seats) ............................................... 99

Folding the 2nd row of seats forward electrically ........................ 102

Folding the 2nd row of seats forward manually ........................... 100

Folding the rear bench seat forwards/back ................................... 297


Overview .......................................... 94

Seat heating problem .................... 105

Seat ventilation problem ................ 105


Switching seat heating on/off ....... 103

Switching seat ventilation on/off .. 104

Section

Sliding sunroof ................................. 89

Selector lever

Cleaning ......................................... 329

Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 328

Service message

see ASSYST PLUS

Service products

Brake fluid ..................................... 382

Coolant (engine) ............................ 382

DEF special additives ..................... 381

Engine oil ....................................... 381

Fuel ................................................ 379


Refrigerant (air-conditioning system) ............................................... 383

Washer fluid ................................... 383

Setting the air distribution ............... 131

Setting the airflow ............................ 131

Setting the date/time format


Setting the language


Setting the time


Settings

Factory (on-board computer) ......... 240

On-board computer ....................... 238

SETUP (on-board computer) ............. 241

Side impact air bag ............................. 48

Side marker lamp (display mes-

sage) ................................................... 256

Side windows

Cleaning ......................................... 327


Convenience opening feature .......... 87

Hinged side windows ....................... 86


Opening/closing .............................. 86

Overview .......................................... 85


Resetting ......................................... 88

Reversing feature ............................. 86

SIRIUS services


Sliding sunroof


Opening/closing .............................. 90


Resetting ......................................... 91 see Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel

SmartKey

Changing the battery ....................... 77

Changing the programming ............. 76

Checking the battery ....................... 77


Convenience opening feature .......... 87

Display message ............................ 273

Door central locking/unlocking ....... 74


KEYLESS-GO start function .............. 76

Loss ................................................. 78

Mechanical key ................................ 76

Overview .......................................... 74

Positions (ignition lock) ................. 138



Smartphone


SMS


Snow chains

Information .................................... 348

20

Index

Sockets

Center console .............................. 306

General notes ................................ 306

Luggage compartment ................... 307

Rear compartment ......................... 306

Sound

Switching on/off ........................... 288

Special seat belt retractor .................. 57

Specialist workshop ............................ 29

Speed, controlling

see Cruise control

Speedometer

Digital ............................................ 233

In the Instrument cluster ................. 34

Segments ...................................... 229

Selecting the display unit ............... 238

Standing lamps

Display message ............................ 256

Switching on/off ........................... 113

Start/Stop button


Start/stop function

see ECO start/stop function

Starting (engine) ................................ 139

STEER CONTROL .................................. 72

Steering

Display message ............................ 272

Steering Pilot


Display message ............................ 267

Steering wheel

Adjusting (electrically) ................... 106

Adjusting (manually) ...................... 105

Button overview ............................... 35

Buttons (on-board computer) ......... 230

Cleaning ......................................... 329


Steering wheel heating .................. 106


Steering wheel heating


Switching on/off ........................... 106

Steering wheel paddle shifters ........ 150

Stopwatch (RACETIMER) ................... 241

Stowage areas ................................... 294

Stowage compartments

Armrest (under) ............................. 295

Center console .............................. 296

Center console (rear) ..................... 296

Cup holders ................................... 302

Eyeglasses compartment ............... 296

Glove box ....................................... 295

Important safety information ......... 294

Stowage net ................................... 296

Stowage net ....................................... 296

Summer tires

In winter ........................................ 348

Sun visor ............................................ 304

Suspension setting

AMG adaptive sport suspension system ........................................... 189

Suspension settings

SETUP (on-board computer) .......... 241

SUV

(Sport Utility Vehicle) ....................... 28

Switching air-recirculation mode

on/off ................................................. 133

Switching on media mode

Via the device list .......................... 292

T

Tachometer ........................................ 229

Tailgate

Display message ............................ 271



Limiting the opening angle ............... 85

Opening dimensions ...................... 384

Opening/closing (automatically from inside) ...................................... 84

Opening/closing (automatically from outside) ................................... 83

Opening/closing (from outside) ....... 82

Power closing .................................. 81

Tank

see Fuel tank

Tank content

Fuel gauge ....................................... 34

Technical data

Capacities ...................................... 378

Information .................................... 376

Tires/wheels ................................. 371

Index

21

Trailer loads ................................... 387

Vehicle data ................................... 384

Telephone

Accepting a call (multifunction steering wheel) .............................. 236

Authorizing a mobile phone (connecting) ......................................... 291

Connecting a mobile phone (general information) ............................ 290

Display message ............................ 272

Menu (on-board computer) ............ 235

Number from the phone book ........ 236

Redialing ........................................ 236

Rejecting/ending a call ................. 236 see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 287

Switching between mobile phones ........................................... 292

Temperature

Coolant (display in the instrument cluster) .......................................... 230

Coolant (on-board computer,


Engine oil (on-board computer,


Outside temperature ...................... 229

Setting (climate control) ................ 131

Transmission oil (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ..... 241

Through-loading feature ................... 297

Time

see separate operating instructions

Timing (RACETIMER) ......................... 241

Tire pressure

Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 353

Checking manually ........................ 352

Display message ............................ 268

Maximum ....................................... 352

Not reached (TIREFIT) .................... 334

Notes ............................................. 351

Reached (TIREFIT) .......................... 335

Recommended ............................... 349

Tire pressure loss warning system

General notes ................................ 352


Restarting ...................................... 353

Tire pressure monitor

Checking the tire pressure electronically ........................................ 355

Function/notes ............................. 353

General notes ................................ 353


Radio type approval for the tire pressure monitor ........................... 356

Restarting ...................................... 355

Warning lamp ................................. 286

Warning message .......................... 355

TIREFIT kit



Tire pressure not reached .............. 334

Tire pressure reached .................... 335

Using ............................................. 333

Tires

Aspect ratio (definition) ................. 365

Average weight of the vehicle occupants (definition) .................... 364

Bar (definition) ............................... 364

Changing a wheel .......................... 366

Characteristics .............................. 364

Checking ........................................ 346

Curb weight (definition) ................. 365

Definition of terms ......................... 364

Direction of rotation ...................... 367

Display message ............................ 268

Distribution of the vehicle occupants (definition) ............................ 366

DOT (Department of Transportation) (definition) ............................. 364

DOT, Tire Identification Number

(TIN) ............................................... 363

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)

(definition) ..................................... 364

GTW (Gross Trailer Weight) (definition) ............................................ 365

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) (definition) ........................................... 365

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) (definition) .............................. 365


Increased vehicle weight due to optional equipment (definition) ...... 364

Information on driving .................... 346

Kilopascal (kPa) (definition) ........... 365

22

Index

Labeling (overview) ........................ 361

Load bearing index (definition) ...... 366

Load index ..................................... 363

Load index (definition) ................... 365

M+S tires ....................................... 348

Maximum load on a tire (definition) ............................................... 365

Maximum loaded vehicle weight

(definition) ..................................... 365

Maximum permissible tire pressure (definition) ............................. 365

Maximum tire load ......................... 363

Maximum tire load (definition) ....... 365

MOExtended tires .......................... 348

Optional equipment weight (definition) ............................................ 366

PSI (pounds per square inch) (definition) ........................................... 365

Replacing ....................................... 366

Service life ..................................... 347

Sidewall (definition) ....................... 366

Snow chains .................................. 348

Speed rating (definition) ................ 365

Storing ........................................... 367

Structure and characteristics

(definition) ..................................... 364

Summer tires in winter .................. 348

Temperature .................................. 360

TIN (Tire Identification Number)

(definition) ..................................... 366

Tire bead (definition) ...................... 365

Tire pressure (definition) ................ 365

Tire pressures (recommended) ...... 364

Tire size (data) ............................... 371

Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity, speed rating .................... 361

Tire tread ....................................... 347

Tire tread (definition) ..................... 365

Total load limit (definition) ............. 366

Traction ......................................... 360

Traction (definition) ....................... 366

Tread wear ..................................... 360

TWR (permissible trailer drawbar noseweight) (definition) ................. 366

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Standards ...................................... 359

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Standards (definition) .................... 364

Wear indicator (definition) ............. 366

Wheel and tire combination ........... 371

Wheel rim (definition) .................... 364 see Flat tire

Tool

see Vehicle tool kit

Top Tether ............................................ 60

Tow-starting

Emergency engine starting ............ 343


Towing a trailer

Axle load, permissible .................... 387

Cleaning the trailer tow hitch ......... 329

Coupling up a trailer ...................... 225

Decoupling a trailer ....................... 226

Driving tips .................................... 222

®

ESP (Electronic Stability Program) ............................................... 68


Installing the ball coupling ............. 223

Lights display message .................. 256

Mounting dimensions .................... 387

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC .......... 190

Power supply ................................. 227

Pulling away with a trailer .............. 141

Removing the ball coupling ............ 227

Trailer loads ................................... 387

Towing away

Important safety guidelines ........... 341

Installing the towing eye ................ 342

Notes for 4MATIC vehicles ............ 343

Removing the towing eye ............... 342

Transporting the vehicle ................ 343

With both axles on the ground ....... 342

Towing eye ......................................... 331

Traffic reports


Traffic Sign Assist

Display message ............................ 264

Function/notes ............................. 206


Instrument cluster display ............. 206

Trailer coupling

see Towing a trailer

Trailer loads and drawbar nose-

weights ............................................... 227

Index

23

Trailer towing




Permissible trailer loads and drawbar noseweights ..................... 227

Transfer case ..................................... 153

Transmission

see Automatic transmission

Transmission position display ......... 148

Transporting the vehicle .................. 343

Traveling uphill

Brow of hill ..................................... 171

Driving downhill ............................. 172

Maximum gradient-climbing capability ............................................... 171

Trim pieces (cleaning instruc-

tions) .................................................. 330

Trip computer (on-board com-

puter) .................................................. 232

Trip odometer

Calling up ....................................... 232

Resetting (on-board computer) ...... 233

Trunk

see Tailgate

Turn signals

Display message ............................ 256

Replacing bulbs (front) ................... 119

Switching on/off ........................... 113

Two-way radio

Frequencies ................................... 376

Installation ..................................... 376

Transmission output (maximum) .... 376

TWR (Tongue Weight Rating) (defi-

nition) ................................................. 366

Type identification plate

see Vehicle identification plate

U

Unlocking


From inside the vehicle (central unlocking button) ............................. 80

Upshift indicator (on-board com-

puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ....... 241

USB devices

Connecting to the Media Interface ............................................... 292

V

Vanity mirror (in the sun visor) ........ 304

Vehicle

Correct use ...................................... 29

Data acquisition ............................... 30

Display message ............................ 270

Equipment ....................................... 26

Individual settings .......................... 238

Limited Warranty ............................. 30

Loading .......................................... 356

Locking (in an emergency) ............... 81

Locking (SmartKey) .......................... 74

Lowering ........................................ 370

Maintenance .................................... 27

Operating safety .............................. 28

Parking .......................................... 159

Parking for a long period ................ 162

Pulling away ................................... 141

Raising ........................................... 368

Reporting problems ......................... 29

Securing from rolling away ............ 367

Towing away .................................. 341

Transporting .................................. 343

Unlocking (in an emergency) ........... 81

Unlocking (SmartKey) ...................... 74

Vehicle data ................................... 384

Vehicle battery

see Battery (vehicle)

Vehicle data ....................................... 384

Vehicle data (off-road driving)


Fording depth ................................ 385

Maximum gradient climbing ability .................................................. 386

Vehicle dimensions ........................... 384

Vehicle emergency locking ................ 81

Vehicle identification number

see VIN

Vehicle identification plate .............. 377

Vehicle level

AIRMATIC ...................................... 188

Vehicle level (display message) ....... 261

Vehicle tool kit .................................. 331

24

Index

Video

Operating the DVD ......................... 235 see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 287

VIN ...................................................... 377

Seat ............................................... 378

Type plate ...................................... 377

W

Warning and indicator lamps

ABS ................................................ 277

Brakes ........................................... 276

Check Engine ................................. 283

Coolant .......................................... 283


Distance warning ........................... 285

ESP

®

ESP

®

.............................................. 279

OFF ....................................... 280

Fuel tank ........................................ 283

Overview .......................................... 34

Parking brake ................................ 282

PASSENGER AIR BAG ...................... 42

Reserve fuel ................................... 283

Restraint system ............................ 282

Seat belt ........................................ 275

Tire pressure monitor .................... 286

Warranty .............................................. 26

Washer fluid

Display message ............................ 273

Weather display (COMAND)


Wheel and tire combinations

Tires ............................................... 371

Wheel bolt tightening torque ........... 370

Wheel chock ...................................... 367

Wheels

Changing a wheel .......................... 366

Checking ........................................ 346

Cleaning ......................................... 326

Emergency spare wheel ................. 372


Information on driving .................... 346

Interchanging/changing ................ 366

Mounting a new wheel ................... 369

Mounting a wheel .......................... 367

Overview ........................................ 346

Removing a wheel .......................... 369

Snow chains .................................. 348

Storing ........................................... 367

Tightening torque ........................... 370

Wheel size/tire size ....................... 371

Window curtain air bag

Display message ............................ 253

Operation ......................................... 48

Windows

see Side windows

Windshield

Defrosting ...................................... 132

Windshield washer fluid

see Windshield washer system

Windshield washer system

Adding washer fluid ....................... 322


Windshield wipers


Rear window wiper ........................ 120

Replacing the wiper blades ............ 120

Switching on/off ........................... 119

Winter driving

Slippery road surfaces ................... 167

Winter operation

Overview ........................................ 348

Radiator cover ............................... 320

Winter tires

M+S tires ....................................... 348

Wiper blades

Cleaning ......................................... 327

Replacing ....................................... 120

Replacing (rear window) ................ 121

Replacing (windshield) ................... 121

Wooden trim (cleaning instruc-

tions) .................................................. 330

Workshop


Z

ZONE function

Switching on/off ........................... 132

Introduction

25

Protecting the environment

General notes

H


Daimler's declared policy is one of comprehensive environmental protection.

The objectives are for the natural resources that form the basis of our existence on this planet to be used sparingly and in a manner that takes the requirements of both nature and humanity into account.

You too can help to protect the environment by operating your vehicle in an environmentally responsible manner.

Fuel consumption and the rate of engine, transmission, brake and tire wear are affected by these factors:

R operating conditions of your vehicle

R your personal driving style

You can influence both factors. You should bear the following in mind:

Operating conditions:

R avoid short trips as these increase fuel consumption.

R always make sure that the tire pressures are correct.

R do not carry any unnecessary weight.

R remove roof racks once you no longer need them.

R a regularly serviced vehicle will contribute to environmental protection. You should therefore adhere to the service intervals.

R always have service work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Personal driving style:

R do not depress the accelerator pedal when starting the engine.

R do not warm up the engine when the vehicle is stationary.

R drive carefully and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front.

R avoid frequent, sudden acceleration and braking.

R change gear in good time and use each gear only up to Ô of its maximum engine speed.

R switch off the engine in stationary traffic.

R keep an eye on the vehicle's fuel consumption.

Environmental concerns and recommendations

Wherever the operating instructions require you to dispose of materials, first try to regenerate or re-use them. Observe the relevant environmental rules and regulations when disposing of materials. In this way you will help to protect the environment.

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts

H


Daimler AG also supplies reconditioned major assemblies and parts which are of the same quality as new parts. They are covered by the same Limited Warranty entitlements as new parts.

!

Air bags and Emergency Tensioning Devices, as well as control units and sensors for these restraint systems, may be installed in the following areas of your vehicle:

R doors

R door pillars

R door sills

R seats

R cockpit

R instrument cluster

R center console

Do not install accessories such as audio systems in these areas. Do not carry out repairs or welding. You could impair the operating efficiency of the restraint systems.

Have aftermarket accessories installed at a qualified specialist workshop.

You could jeopardize the operating safety of your vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheels as well as accessories relevant to safety which have not been approved by Mercedes-Benz. This could lead to malfunctions in safety-relevant

Z

26

Introduction

systems, e.g. the brake system. Use only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts of equal quality. Only use tires, wheels and accessories that have been specifically approved for your vehicle.

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject to strict quality control. Every part has been specifically developed, manufactured or selected for and adapted to Mercedes-Benz vehicles.

Therefore, only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts should be used.

More than 300,000 different genuine

Mercedes-Benz parts are available for

Mercedes-Benz models.

All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers maintain a supply of genuine Mercedes-Benz parts for necessary service and repair work. In addition, strategically located parts delivery centers provide quick and reliable parts service.

Always specify the vehicle identification number

(VIN) when ordering genuine Mercedes-Benz parts (

Y page 377).

Service and vehicle operation

Warranty

The Limited Warranty for your vehicle applies in accordance with the warranty terms and conditions in the Service and Warranty Information booklet.

Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will replace and repair all factory-installed parts in accordance with the following warranty terms and conditions:

R

R

R

R

New Vehicle Limited Warranty

Emission System Warranty

Emission Performance Warranty

California, Connecticut, Maine, Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island and Vermont Emission Control System Warranty

State warranty enforcement laws (lemon

R laws)

Replacement parts and accessories are covered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and Accessories warranties. These are available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

i

Should you lose your Service and Warranty

Information booklet, have an authorized

Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for a replacement. The new Service and Warranty Information booklet will be posted to you.

Operator's Manual

Vehicle equipment

i

This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of going to print. Country-specific differences are possible. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not feature all functions described here. This also applies to safety-relevant systems and functions. The equipment in your vehicle may therefore differ from that shown in the descriptions and illustrations.

The original purchase contract documentation for your vehicle contains a list of all the systems in your vehicle.

Should you have any questions concerning equipment and operation, please consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

The Operator's Manual and Maintenance Booklet are important documents and should be kept in the vehicle.

Information for customers in California

Under California law you may be entitled to a replacement of your vehicle or a refund of the purchase price or lease price, if after a reasonable number of repair attempts Mercedes-Benz

USA, LLC and/or its authorized repair or service facilities fail to fix one or more substantial defects or malfunctions in the vehicle that are covered by its express warranty.

During the period of 18 months from original delivery of the vehicle or the accumulation of

18,000 miles (approximately 29,000 km) on the odometer of the vehicle, whichever occurs first, a reasonable number of repair attempts is presumed for a retail buyer or lessee if one or more of the following occurs:

(1) the same substantial defect or malfunction results in a condition that is likely to cause

Introduction

27

death or serious bodily injury if the vehicle is driven, that defect or malfunction has been subject to repair two or more times, and you have directly notified Mercedes-Benz USA,

LLC in writing of the need for its repair.

(2) the same substantial defect or malfunction of a less serious nature than category (1) has been subject to repair four or more times and you have directly notified

Mercedes-Benz in writing of the need for its repair.

(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason of repair of the same or different substantial defects or malfunctions for a cumulative total of more than 30 calendar days.

Please send your written notice to:



One Mercedes Drive


Change of address or change of ownership

In the event of a change of address, please send us the "Notification of Address Change" in the

Service and Warranty Booklet or simply call the

Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center

(USA) at the hotline number

1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or

Customer Service Center (Canada) at

1-800-387-0100. This will assist us in contacting you in a timely manner should the need arise.

If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all literature in the vehicle so that it is available to the next owner.

If you have purchased a used car, please send us the "Notification of Used Car Purchase" in the

Service and Warranty Booklet or simply call the


(USA) at the hotline number

1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or

Customer Service (Canada) at 1-800-387-0100.

Maintenance

The Service and Warranty Booklet describes all the necessary maintenance work which should be done at regular intervals.

Always have the Service and Warranty Booklet with you when you bring the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The service advisor will record every service for you in the

Service and Warranty Booklet.

Roadside Assistance

The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program offers technical help in the event of a breakdown. Calls to the toll-free Roadside Assistance Hotline are answered by our agents 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.

1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372)

(USA)

1-800-387-0100(Canada)

For additional information, refer to the

Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program brochure (USA) or the "Roadside Assistance" section in the Service and Warranty Booklet

(Canada). You will find both in the vehicle document wallet.

Vehicle operation outside the USA and Canada

When you are abroad with your vehicle, observe the following points:

R

R

R

Service facilities or replacement parts may not be readily available.

Lead-free fuel for vehicles with a catalytic converter may not be available. Leaded fuel can cause damage to the catalytic converter.

The fuel may have a considerably lower octane number. Unsuitable fuel can cause engine damage.

Some Mercedes-Benz models are available for delivery in Europe through our European Delivery Program. For details, consult an authorized

Mercedes-Benz Center or write to one of the following addresses.

In the USA


European Delivery Department

One Mercedes Drive


In Canada


European Delivery Department

98 Vanderhoof Avenue

Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

Z

28

Introduction

Sports Utility Vehicle

G

WARNING

Due to the high center of gravity, the vehicle may start to skid and roll over in the event of an abrupt steering maneuver and/or when the vehicle's speed is not adapted to the road conditions. There is a risk of an accident.

Always adapt your speed and driving style to the vehicle's driving characteristics and to the prevailing road and weather conditions.

Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles.

Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in an accident, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal injury.

In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt.

You and all vehicle occupants should always wear your seat belts.

Operating safety

Important safety notes

G

WARNING

If you do not have the prescribed service/ maintenance work or any required repairs carried out, this can result in malfunctions or system failures. There is a risk of an accident.

Always have the prescribed service/maintenance work as well as any required repairs carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

G

WARNING

Flammable material such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk of fire.

When driving off road or on unpaved roads, check the vehicle's underside regularly. In particular, remove parts of plants or other flammable materials which have become trapped. In the case of damage, contact a qualified specialist workshop.

G

WARNING

Modifications to electronic components, their software as well as wiring can impair their function and/or the function of other networked components. In particular, systems relevant to safety could also be affected. As a result, these may no longer function as intended and/or jeopardize the operating safety of the vehicle. There is an increased risk of an accident and injury.

Never tamper with the wiring as well as electronic components or their software. You should have all work to electrical and electronic equipment carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

!

There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if:

R the vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a high

R curb or an unpaved road you drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g. a

R curb, speed bumps or a pothole in the road a heavy object strikes the underbody or parts of the chassis

In situations like this, the body, the underbody, chassis parts, wheels or tires could be damaged without the damage being visible.

Components damaged in this way can unexpectedly fail or, in the case of an accident, no longer withstand the strain they are designed to.

If the underbody paneling is damaged, combustible materials such as leaves, grass or twigs can gather between the underbody and the underbody paneling. If these materials come in contact with hot parts of the exhaust system, they can catch fire.

In such situations, have the vehicle checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. If on continuing your journey you notice that driving safety is impaired, pull over and stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. In such cases, consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Declarations of conformity

USA: "The wireless devices of this vehicle comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the two following two conditions: 1)

Introduction

29

These devices may not cause harmful interference, and 2) These devices must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment."

Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehicle comply with Industry Canada license-exempt

RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) These devices may not cause interference, and (2) These devices must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device." mation being reset, for example. This may lead to the vehicle failing to meet the requirements of the next emissions test during the main inspection.

Qualified specialist workshop

An authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is a qualified specialist workshop. It has the necessary specialist knowledge, tools and qualifications to correctly carry out the work required on your vehicle. This is especially the case for work relevant to safety.

Observe the notes in the Maintenance Booklet.

Always have the following work carried out at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center:

R

R

R

R

R work relevant to safety service and maintenance work repair work alterations, installation work and modifications work on electronic components

Diagnostics connection

The diagnostics connection is only intended for the connection of diagnostic equipment at a qualified specialist workshop.

G

WARNING

If you connect equipment to a diagnostics connection in the vehicle, it may affect the operation of vehicle systems. As a result, the operating safety of the vehicle could be affected. There is a risk of an accident.

Only connect equipment to a diagnostics connection in the vehicle, which is approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.

G

WARNING

Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.

The operating and road safety of the vehicle is jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.

Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter the driver's footwell. Install the floormats securely and as specified in order to ensure sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use loose floormats and do not place floormats on top of one another.

!

If the engine is switched off and equipment on the diagnostics connection is used, the starter battery may discharge.

Connecting equipment to the diagnostics connection can lead to emissions monitoring infor-

Correct use

If you remove any warning stickers, you or others could fail to recognize certain dangers.

Leave warning stickers in position.

Observe the following information when driving your vehicle:

R

R

R

R the safety notes in this manual the vehicle technical data traffic rules and regulations laws and safety standards pertaining to motor vehicles

Problems with your vehicle

If you should experience a problem with your vehicle, particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation, we urge you to contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have the problem diagnosed and rectified. If the problem is not resolved to your satisfaction, please discuss the problem again with the Mercedes-Benz Center or, if necessary, contact us at one of the following addresses.

In the USA


Z

30

Introduction


3 Mercedes Drive


In Canada

Customer Relations Department


98 Vanderhoof Avenue

Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

QR codes for the rescue card

The QR codes are secured in the fuel filler flap and on the opposite side on the B-pillar. In the event of an accident, rescue services can use the QR code to quickly find the appropriate rescue card for your vehicle. The current rescue card contains the most important information about your vehicle in a compact form, e.g. the routing of the electric cables.

You can find more information under http:// portal.aftersales.i.daimler.com/public/ content/asportal/en/communication/ informationen_fuer/QRCode.html.

Reporting safety defects

USA only:

The following text is reproduced as required of all manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S.

Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the

National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of

1966.

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the

National Highway Traffic Safety Administration

(NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz

USA, LLC.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Mercedes-Benz

USA, LLC.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle

Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236

(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://

www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator,

NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington,

DC 20590.

You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from

http://www.safercar.gov

Limited Warranty

!

Follow the instructions in this manual about the proper operation of your vehicle as well as about possible vehicle damage. Damage to your vehicle that arises from culpable contraventions against these instructions is not covered either by the Mercedes-Benz Limited

Warranty or by the New or Used-Vehicle Warranty.

Data stored in the vehicle

Data storage

A wide range of electronic components in your vehicle contain data memories.

These data memories temporarily or permanently store technical information about:

R

R the vehicle's operating state incidents

R malfunctions

In general, this technical information documents the state of a component, a module, a system or the surroundings.

These include, for example:

R

R

R

R

R operating conditions of system components, e.g. fluid levels the vehicle's status messages and those of its individual components, e.g. number of wheel revolutions/speed, deceleration in movement, lateral acceleration, accelerator pedal position malfunctions and defects in important system components, e.g. lights, brakes vehicle reactions and operating conditions in special driving situations, e.g. air bag deployment, intervention of stability control systems ambient conditions, e.g. outside temperature

Introduction

31

This data is of an exclusively technical nature and can be used to:

R

R assist in recognizing and rectifying malfunctions and defects analyze vehicle functions, e.g. after an accident

R optimize vehicle functions

The data cannot be used to trace the vehicle's movements.

When your vehicle is serviced, technical information can be read from the event data memory and malfunction data memory.

Services include, for example:

R

R

R

R repair services service processes warranties quality assurance

The vehicle is read out by employees of the service network (including the manufacturer) using special diagnostic testers. More detailed information is obtained from it, if required.

After a malfunction has been rectified, the information is deleted from the malfunction memory or is continually overwritten.

When operating the vehicle, situations are conceivable in which this technical data, in connection with other information (if necessary, under consultation with an authorized expert), could be traced to a person.

Examples include:

R

R accident reports damage to the vehicle

R witness statements

Further additional functions that have been contractually agreed upon with the customer allow certain vehicle data to be conveyed by the vehicle as well. The additional functions include, for example, vehicle location in case of an emergency.

COMAND/mbrace (Canada: TELEAID)

If the vehicle is equipped with COMAND or mbrace, additional data about the vehicle's operation, the use of the vehicle in certain situations, and the location of the vehicle may be compiled through COMAND or the mbrace system.

For additional information please refer to the

COMAND User Manual or the Digital Operator's

Manual and/or the mbrace Terms and Conditions.

COMAND/mbrace

If the vehicle is equipped with COMAND or mbrace, additional data about the vehicle's operation, the use of the vehicle in certain situations, and the location of the vehicle may be compiled through COMAND or the mbrace system.

For additional information please refer to the

COMAND User Manual or the Digital Operator's

Manual and/or the mbrace Terms and Conditions.

Event data recorders

This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.

The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:

R

R

R

How various systems in your vehicle were operating

Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened

How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal and

R

How fast the vehicle was traveling.

These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g. name, gender, age and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.

Access to the vehicle and/or the EDR is needed to read data that is recorded by an EDR, and

Z

32

Introduction

special equipment is required. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties that have the special equipment, such as law enforcement, can read the information by accessing the vehicle or the EDR.

EDR data may be used in civil and criminal matters as a tool in accident reconstruction, accident claims and vehicle safety. Since the Crash

Data Retrieval CDR tool that is used to extract data from the EDR is commercially available,

Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC ("MBUSA") expressly disclaims any and all liability arising from the extraction of this information by unauthorized

Mercedes-Benz personnel.

MBUSA will not share EDR data with others without the consent of the vehicle owners or, if the vehicle is leased, without the consent of the lessee. Exceptions to this representation include responses to subpoenas by law enforcement; by federal, state or local government; in connection with or arising out of litigation involving MBUSA or its subsidiaries and affiliates; or, as required by law.

Warning: The EDR is a component of the

Restraint System Module. Tampering with, altering, modifying or removing the EDR component may result in a malfunction of the Restraint System Module and other systems.

State laws or regulations regarding EDRs that conflict with federal regulation are pre-empted.

This means that in the event of such conflict, the federal regulation governs. As of February 2013,

13 states have enacted laws relating to EDRs.

Information on copyright

General information

Information on license for free and open-source software used in your vehicle and its electronic components is available on the following website: http://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource

Cockpit

33

Cockpit

Function

: Steering wheel paddle shifters

; Combination switch

= Instrument cluster

?

Horn

A DIRECT SELECT lever

B Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning display

C Overhead control panel

D Climate control systems

E Ignition lock

Start/Stop button

Page

150

113

34

146

192

39

123

138

138

Function

F Adjusts the steering wheel manually

G Adjusts the steering wheel electrically

Steering wheel heating

H Cruise control lever

I Opens the hood

J Diagnostics connection

K Electric parking brake

L Light switch

Page

105

105

106

172

319

29

160

112

34



Function

: Speedometer with segments

Warning and indicator lamps:

å ESP

®

OFF

! ABS

Braking

$ (USA only)

J (Canada only)

L Low-beam headlamps

T Parking lamps

÷ ESP ®

K High-beam headlamps

Electric parking brake (red)

F (USA only)

! (Canada only)

! Electric parking brake

(yellow)

· Distance warning

; #! Turn signals

= Multifunction display

Page

229

279

277

276

113

113

279

113

282

282

285

113

231 i

Information on displaying the outside temperature in the multifunction display can be

Function

?

Tachometer


R Rear fog lamp

; Engine diagnostics h Tire pressure monitor

6 Restraint system

ü Seat belts

% Diesel engine: preglow

A Coolant temperature gauge


? Coolant

B

Fuel level indicator


8 Reserve fuel with fuel filler flap location indicator

(right-hand side)

C Instrument cluster lighting

Page

229

113

283

286

42

275

140

230

283

283

229 found under "Outside temperature display"

(

Y page 229).



35

Function

: Multifunction display

; Multimedia system display

= ?

Switches on voice-operated navigation or the Voice Control System

8

Mute

W X

Adjusts the volume

~

Rejects or ends a call

Exits phone book/redial memory

6

Makes or accepts a call

Switches to the redial memory

Page

231

235

Function

?

= ;

Selects a menu

9 :

Selects a submenu or scrolls through lists a

Confirms a selection

Hides display messages

%

Back

Switches off voice-operated navigation or the Voice Control System

Page

230 i

In vehicles with multimedia system

COMAND you can find further information:

R on the multimedia system in the Digital

R

Operator's Manual on the DVD changer or single DVD drive in

R the Digital Operator's Manual on the Voice Control System in the separate operating instructions i

In vehicles with multimedia system Audio 20 you can find further information:

R on the multimedia system in the Digital

R

Operator's Manual on the voice-operated control of the navigation in the manufacturer's operating instructions

230

230

243

230

36

Center console

Center console

Center console, upper section

Function

: Multimedia system (see the separate operating instructions)

; c Seat heating

= s Seat ventilation

?

c Parking Assist

PARKTRONIC

A è ECO start/stop function

Page

103

104

190

142

Function

B £ Hazard warning lamps

C PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp

ATA indicator lamp

D

å ESP

®

Page

114

42

72

67

Center console, lower section

Center console

37

i

Vehicles with the Off-Road Engineering package

Function

F Stowage compartment

Cup holder

Ashtray

Cigarette lighter

Socket

G Selector wheel for level control

H Ã DSR (Downhill Speed

Regulation)

I Manual gearshifting (permanent setting)

J DYNAMIC SELECT controller

K Stowage compartment with

Media Interface

Page

296

302

305

306

306

182

216

150

145

295

Function

L Touchpad (see the separate operating instructions)

M Back button (see the separate operating instructions)

N Multimedia system controller (see the separate operating instructions)

O g Switches to the favorites button (see the separate operating instructions)

P Switches to the display of the vehicle settings; see the separate operating instructions

Q + LOW RANGE off-road gear

Page

219

38

Center console

i

Vehicles with the AIRMATIC package and

Mercedes-AMG vehicles

Function

F Stowage compartment

Cup holder

Ashtray

Cigarette lighter

Socket

G Ã DSR (Downhill Speed

Regulation)

H Manual gearshifting (permanent setting)

I DYNAMIC SELECT controller

J Stowage compartment with

Media Interface

K Touchpad (see the separate operating instructions)

Page

296

302

305

306

306

216

150

145

295

Function

L Back button (see the separate operating instructions)

M Multimedia system controller (see the separate operating instructions)

N g Switches to the favorites button (see the separate operating instructions)

O Switches to the display of the vehicle settings; see the separate operating instructions

AMG adaptive sport suspension system (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)

P Á Level control

Page

189

188

Overhead control panel

Overhead control panel

39

Function

: p Switches the left-hand reading lamp on/off

; c Switches the front interior lighting on

= u Switches the rear interior lighting on or off

?

| Switches the front interior lighting/automatic interior lighting control off

A p Switches the righthand reading lamp on/off

B 3 Opens/closes the panorama roof with power tilt/ sliding panel and roller sunblinds

Page

116

116

116

117

116

91

Function

C Eyeglasses compartment

D F Roadside Assistance call button (mbrace system)

E G SOS button (mbrace system)

F ï MB Info call button

(mbrace system)

G Rear-view mirror

H Buttons for the garage door opener

I Microphone for mbrace

(emergency call system), telephone and LINGUA-

TRONIC 1

Page

296

310

309

311

107

317

1 LINGUATRONIC is only available in combination with COMAND. Please observe the separate operating instructions.

40

Door control panel

Door control panel

Function

: Opens the door

; % & Unlocks/locks the vehicle

= r 4 5 =

Stores settings for the seat, exterior mirrors and steering column (memory function)

?

Adjusts the seats

A 7Zö\

Adjusts and folds the exterior mirrors in/out electrically

Page

80

80

110

94

107

Function

B W Opens/closes the side windows

C ± Opens/closes the hinged power side windows

D p Opens/closes the tailgate

E n Activates/deactivates the override feature for the side windows in the rear compartment

Page

86

86

84

62

Occupant safety

41

Panic alarm

X

X or

X or

To activate: press ! button : for at least one second.

A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the alarm system is armed.

To deactivate: press ! button : again.

Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.

X

Press the KEYLESS-GO Start/Stop button.

The KEYLESS-GO key must be in the vehicle.

As the driver, you also have to make sure that the steering wheel is adjusted correctly.

Observe the information relating to the correct driver's seat position (

Y page 94).

You also have to make sure that an air bag can inflate properly if deployed (

Y page 46).

An air bag supplements a correctly worn seat belt. As an additional safety device, the air bag increases the level of protection for vehicle occupants in the event of an accident. For example, if, in the event of an accident, the protection offered by the seat belt is sufficient, the air bags are not deployed. When an accident occurs, only the air bags that increase protection in that particular accident situation are deployed. However, seat belts and air bags generally do not protect against objects penetrating the vehicle from the outside.

Information on restraint system operation can be found under "Triggering of the Emergency

Tensioning Devices and air bags" (

Y page 53).

For information on children traveling with you in the vehicle and on child restraint systems, see

"Children in the vehicle" (

Y page 57).

Occupant safety

Introduction to the restraint system

The restraint system can reduce the risk of vehicle occupants coming into contact with parts of the vehicle's interior in the event of an accident.

The restraint system can also reduce the forces to which vehicle occupants are subjected during an accident.

The restraint system comprises:

R

R

R

R seat belt system air bags child restraint system child seat securing systems

The components of the restraint system work in conjunction with each other. They can only deploy their protective function if, at all times, all vehicle occupants:

R

R have fastened their seat belts correctly

(

Y page 44) have adjusted their seat and head restraint properly (

Y page 94).


G

WARNING

Modifications to the restraint system may cause it to no longer work as intended. The restraint system may then not perform its intended protective function and may fail in an accident or trigger unexpectedly, for example.

This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.

Never modify parts of the restraint system.

Never tamper with the wiring, the electronic components or their software.

If it is necessary to modify components of the restraint system to accommodate a person with disabilities, contact an authorized

Mercedes-Benz Center for details. USA only: for further information contact our Customer

Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes

(1‑800‑367‑6372).

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use driving aids which have been approved specifically for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.

Z

42

Occupant safety

Restraint system warning lamp

The functions of the restraint system are checked after the ignition is switched on and at regular intervals while the engine is running.

Therefore, malfunctions can be detected in good time.

The 6 restraint system warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the ignition is switched on. It goes out no later than a few seconds after the vehicle is started. The components of the restraint system are in operational readiness.

A malfunction has occurred if the 6 restraint system warning lamp:

R

R

R does not light up after the ignition is switched on does not go out after a few seconds with the engine running lights up again while the engine is running

G

WARNING

If the restraint system is malfunctioning, restraint system components may be triggered unintentionally or may not deploy as intended during an accident. This can affect for example the Emergency Tensioning

Device or the air bag. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.

Have the restraint system checked and repaired in a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible.

PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp

The indicator lamps display the status of the front-passenger front air bag.

R

R

PASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up for 60 seconds, subsequently both indicator lamps are off (PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF): the front-passenger front air bag is able to deploy in the event of an accident.

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up: the frontpassenger front air bag is deactivated. It will then not be deployed in the event of an accident.

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp shows the status of the front-passenger front air bag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp may be lit continuously or be off.

Depending on the person in the front-passenger seat, the front-passenger front air bag must either be deactivated or enabled; see the following points. You must make sure of this both before and during a journey.

R

R

Children in a child restraint system:

whether the front-passenger front air bag is enabled or deactivated depends on the installed child restraint system, and the age and size of the child. Therefore, be sure to observe the notes on the "Occupant Classification

System (OCS)" (

Y page 48) and on "Children in the vehicle" (

Y page 57). There you will also find instructions on rearward and forward-facing child restraint systems on the front-passenger seat.

All other persons: depending on the classification of the person in the front-passenger seat, the front-passenger front air bag is enabled or deactivated (

Y page 48). Be sure to observe the notes on "Seat belts“ (

Y page 42) and "Air bags"

(

Y page 46). There you can also find information on the correct seat position.

PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp : and

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp ; are part of the Occupant Classification System

(OCS).

Seat belts

Introduction

Seat belts are the most effective means of restricting the movement of vehicle occupants in the event of an accident or the vehicle rolling over. This reduces the risk of vehicle occupants coming into contact with parts of the vehicle interior or being ejected from the vehicle. Furthermore, the seat belt helps to keep the vehicle

Occupant safety

43

occupant in the best position in relation to the air bag.

The seat belt system comprises:

R

R

R

Seat belts

Emergency Tensioning Devices for the front seat belts and the outer seat belts in the second row of seats as well as the seat belts in the third row

Seat belt force limiters for the front seat belts and the outer seat belts in the second row of seats as well as the seat belts in the third row

If the seat belt is pulled out of the belt outlet quickly or with a jerky movement, the belt retractor locks. The belt strap cannot be extracted any further.

The Emergency Tensioning Device tightens the seat belt in an accident, pulling the belt close against the body. However it does not pull the vehicle occupant back in the direction of the backrest.

The Emergency Tensioning Device does not correct an incorrect seat position or the routing of an incorrectly fastened seat belt.

When triggered, a seat belt force limiter helps to reduce the force exerted by the seat belt on the vehicle occupant.

The seat belt force limiters for the front seats are synchronized with the front air bags, which absorb part of the deceleration force. This can reduce the force exerted on the vehicle occupants during an accident.

!

If the front-passenger seat is unoccupied, do not insert the belt tongue into the buckle of the front-passenger seat. This may otherwise lead to the triggering of the Emergency Tensioning Device in the event of an accident, which will then need to be replaced.


The use of seat belts and child restraint systems is required by law in:

R

R

R

R all 50 states the U.S. territories the District of Columbia all Canadian provinces

Even where this is not required by law, all vehicle occupants should correctly fasten their seat belts before starting the journey.

G

WARNING

If the seat belt is not worn correctly, it cannot perform its intended protective function. An incorrectly fastened seat belt can also cause injuries, for example, in the event of an accident or when braking or changing direction abruptly. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.

Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting properly.

G

WARNING

The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the backrest to an almost vertical position. When braking or in the event of an accident, you could slide underneath the seat belt and sustain abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.

Adjust the seat properly before beginning your journey. Always ensure that the backrest is in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder section of your seat belt is routed across the center of your shoulder.

G

WARNING

Persons less than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall cannot wear the seat belt correctly without an additional and suitable restraint system. If the seat belt is not worn correctly, it cannot perform its intended protective function. An incorrectly fastened seat belt can also cause injuries, for example, in the event of an accident or when braking or changing direction abruptly. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.

For this reason, always secure persons under

5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable additional restraint systems.

If a child younger than twelve years old and under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in the vehicle:

R always secure the child in a child restraint system suitable for this Mercedes-Benz vehi-

Z

44

Occupant safety

R

R cle. The child restraint system must be appropriate to the age, weight and size of the child always observe the instructions and safety notes on "Children in the vehicle"

(

Y page 57) in addition to the child restraint system manufacturer's installation and operating instructions be sure to observe the instructions and safety notes on the "Occupant classification system

(OCS)" (

Y page 48)

G

WARNING

The seat belts may not perform their intended protective function if:

R they are damaged, modified, extremely dirty, bleached or dyed

R the seat belt buckle is damaged or extremely dirty

R the Emergency Tensioning Devices, belt anchorages or inertia reels have been modified.

Seat belts may be damaged in an accident, although the damage may not be visible, e.g.

due to splinters of glass. Modified or damaged seat belts may tear or fail, e.g. in an accident.

Modified Emergency Tensioning Devices could accidentally trigger or fail to deploy when necessary. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.

Never modify the seat belts, Emergency Tensioning Devices, belt anchorages and inertia reels. Make sure that the seat belts are undamaged, not worn out and clean. Following an accident, have the seat belts checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

Only use seat belts that have been approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.

Proper use of the seat belts

Observe the safety notes on the seat belt

(

Y page 43).

All vehicle occupants must be wearing the seat belt correctly before beginning the journey. Also make sure that all vehicle occupants are always wearing the seat belt correctly while the vehicle is in motion.

When fastening the seat belt, always make sure that:

R

R

R

R

R

R

R the seat belt tongue is only inserted to the belt buckle belonging to that seat.

the seat belt is tight across your body.

Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter coat.

the seat belt is not twisted.

Only then can the forces which occur be distributed over the area of the belt.

the shoulder section of the belt is always routed across the center of your shoulder.

The shoulder section of the belt must not come into contact with your neck or be routed under your arm. Where possible, adjust the seat belt to the appropriate height.

the lap belt passes tightly and as low down as possible across your lap.

The lap belt must always be routed across your hip joints and not across your abdomen.

This applies particularly to pregnant women.

If necessary, push the lap belt down to your hip joint and pull it tight using the shoulder section of the belt.

the seat belt is not routed across sharp, pointed or fragile objects.

If you have such items located on or in your clothing, e.g. pens, keys or eyeglasses, store these in a suitable place.

only one person is using a seat belt at a time.

Infants and children must never travel sitting on the lap of a vehicle occupant. In the event of an accident, they could be crushed between the vehicle occupant and seat belt.

R objects are never secured with a seat belt if the seat belt is also being used by one of the vehicle's occupants.

Also ensure that there are never objects between a person and the seat, e.g. cushions.

Seat belts are only intended to secure and restrain vehicle occupants. Always observe the

"Loading guidelines" for securing objects, luggage or loads (

Y page 294).

Fastening and adjusting the seat belts


(

Y page 43) and the notes on correct use of seat belts (

Y page 44).

Occupant safety

45

Basic illustration

X

X

X

Adjust the seat (

Y page 94).

The seat backrest must be in an almost vertical position.

Pull the seat belt smoothly from the belt outlet and engage belt tongue ; into belt buckle :.

The seat belt on the driver’s seat and the front-passenger seat may be tightened automatically, see "Belt adjustment"

(

Y page 45).

If necessary, pull upwards on the shoulder section of the seat belt to tighten the belt across your body.

The shoulder section of the seat belt must always be routed across the center of the shoulder. Adjust the belt outlet if necessary.

X

X

X

To raise: slide the belt outlet upwards.

The belt outlet will engage in various positions.

To lower: hold belt outlet release = and slide belt outlet downwards.

Let go of belt outlet release = in the desired position and make sure that the belt outlet engages.

All seat belts except the driver's seat belt are equipped with a special seat belt retractor to securely fasten child restraint systems in the vehicle. Further information can be found under

"Special seat belt retractor" (

Y page 57).

Releasing seat belts

!

Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled up.

Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue will be trapped in the door or in the seat mechanism.

This could damage the door, the door trim panel and the seat belt. Damaged seat belts can no longer fulfill their protective function

X and must be replaced. Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Press the release button in the belt buckle, hold the belt tongue firmly and guide the belt back.

Seat belt adjustment

The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part of the PRE-SAFE

® convenience function. This function adjusts the driver's and front-passenger seat belt to the upper body of the occupants.

The belt strap is tightened slightly when:

R

R the belt tongue is engaged in the buckle and the ignition is switched on

The seat-belt adjustment will apply a certain retraction force if any slack is detected between the vehicle occupant and the seat belt. Do not hold on to the seat belt tightly while it is adjusting.

You can switch the seat-belt adjustment on and off in the on-board computer (

Y page 240).

Belt warning for the driver and front passenger

The 7 seat belt warning lamp in the instrument cluster is a reminder that all vehicle occupants must wear their seat belts. It may light up continuously or flash. In addition, there may be a warning tone.

Regardless of whether the driver's seat belt has already been fastened, the 7 seat belt warning lamp lights up for six seconds each time the engine is started. If, after six seconds, the driver or front-passenger seat belt has not been fastened and the doors are closed, the 7 seat belt warning lamp lights up. As soon as the driver's and front-passenger seat belts are fastened or a front door is opened again, the 7 seat belt warning lamp goes out.

If the driver's seat belt is not fastened after the engine is started, an additional warning tone will sound. The warning tone switches off after six seconds or once the driver's seat belt is fastened.

If the vehicle's speed exceeds 15 mph

(25 km/h) once and the driver's and frontpassenger seat belts are not fastened, a warning tone sounds. A warning tone also sounds with increasing intensity for 60 seconds or until the

Z

46

Occupant safety

driver or front passenger have fastened their seat belts.

If the driver or front passenger unfasten their seat belts during the journey, the seat belt warning is activated again.

Air bags

Introduction

The installation point of an air bag can be recognized by the AIR BAG symbol.

An air bag complements the correctly fastened seat belt. It is no substitute for the seat belt. The air bag provides additional protection in applicable accident situations.

Not all air bags are deployed in an accident. The different air bag systems function independently from one another (

Y page 53).

However, no system available today can completely eliminate injuries and fatalities.

It is also not possible to rule out a risk of injury caused by an air bag due to the high speed at which the air bag must be deployed.


G

WARNING

If you do not sit in the correct seat position, the air bag cannot protect as intended and could even cause additional injury when deployed. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.

To avoid hazardous situations, always make sure that all of the vehicle's occupants:

R have fastened their seat belts correctly, including pregnant women

R are sitting correctly and maintain the greatest possible distance to the air bags

R follow the following instructions

Always make sure that there are no objects between the air bag and the vehicle's occupants.

R

Adjust the seats properly before beginning your journey. Always make sure that the seat is in an almost upright position. The center of

R

R

R

R the head restraint must support the head at about eye level.

Move the driver's and front-passenger seats as far back as possible. The driver's seat position must allow the vehicle to be driven safely.

Only hold the steering wheel on the outside.

This allows the air bag to be fully deployed.

Always lean against the backrest while driving. Do not lean forwards or lean against the door or side window. You may otherwise be in the deployment area of the air bags.

Always keep your feet in the footwell in front of the seat. Do not put your feet on the dashboard, for example. Your feet may otherwise be in the deployment area of the air bag.

For this reason, always secure persons less

R than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable restraint systems. Up to this height, the seat belt cannot be worn correctly.

If a child is traveling in your vehicle, also observe the following notes:

R

R

R

R

Always secure children under twelve years of age and less than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable child restraint systems.

Child restraint systems should be installed on the rear seats.

Only secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat when the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is permanently lit, the frontpassenger front air bag is deactivated

(

Y page 42).

Always observe the instructions and safety notes on the "Occupant Classification System

(OCS)" (

Y page 48) and on "Children in the vehicle" (

Y page 57) in addition to the child restraint system manufacturer's installation and operating instructions.

Objects in the vehicle interior may prevent

an air bag from functioning correctly. Before starting your journey and to avoid risks resulting from the speed of the air bag as it deploys, make sure that:

R

R

R there are no people, animals or objects between the vehicle occupants and an air bag.

there are no objects between the seat, door and B-pillar.

no hard objects, e.g. coat hangers, hang on the grab handles or coat hooks.

Occupant safety

47

R

R no accessories, such as cup holders, are attached to the vehicle within the deployment area of an air bag, e.g. to doors, side windows, rear side trim or side walls.

no heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects are in the pockets of your clothing. Store such objects in a suitable place.

G

WARNING

If you modify the air bag cover or affix objects such as stickers to it, the air bag can no longer function correctly. There is an increased risk of injury.

Never modify an air bag cover or affix objects to it.

G

WARNING

Sensors to control the air bags are located in the doors. Modifications or work not performed correctly to the doors or door paneling, as well as damaged doors, can lead to the function of the sensors being impaired. The air bags might therefore not function properly anymore. Consequently, the air bags cannot protect vehicle occupants as they are designed to do. There is an increased risk of injury.

Never modify the doors or parts of the doors.

Always have work on the doors or door paneling carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Driver's air bag : deploys in front of the steering wheel. Front-passenger front air bag ; deploys in front of and above the glove box.

When deployed, the front air bags offer additional head and thorax protection for the occupants in the front seats.

The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp informs you about the status of the frontpassenger front air bag (

Y page 42).

The front-passenger front air bag will only deploy if:

R

R the system, based on the OCS weight sensor readings, detects that the front-passenger seat is occupied (

Y page 48). The

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is not lit (

Y page 49) the restraint system control unit predicts a high accident severity

Driver's knee bag

Front air bags

!

Do not place heavy objects on the frontpassenger seat. This could cause the system to identify the seat as being occupied. In the event of an accident, the restraint systems on the front-passenger side may be triggered and have to be replaced.

Driver's knee bag : deploys under the steering column. The driver's knee bag is triggered together with the front air bag.

The driver's knee bag offers additional thigh, knee and lower leg protection for the occupant in the driver's seat.

Z

48

Occupant safety

Side impact air bags

G

WARNING

Unsuitable seat covers can obstruct or prevent deployment of the air bags integrated into the seats. Consequently, the air bags cannot protect vehicle occupants as they are designed to do. In addition, the operation of the occupant classification system (OCS) could be adversely affected. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.

You should only use seat covers that have been approved for the respective seat by

Mercedes-Benz.

of whether the front-passenger seat is occupied or not.

Window curtain air bags

Front side impact air bags : and second row rear side impact air bags ; deploy next to the outer bolster of the seat backrest.

When deployed, the side impact air bag offers additional thorax protection. It also offers additional pelvis protection for occupants in the front seats. However, it does not protect the:

R

R head neck

R arms

In the event of a side impact, the side impact air bag is deployed on the side on which the impact occurs.

The side impact air bag on the front-passenger side deploys under the following conditions:

R

R the OCS system detects that the frontpassenger seat is occupied or the belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckle of the front-passenger seat

If the belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckle, the side impact air bag on the front-passenger side deploys if an appropriate accident situation occurs. In this case, deployment is independent

Window curtain air bags : are integrated into the side of the roof frame and deploy in the area extending from the front door (A-pillar) to the rear side window (D-pillar).

When deployed, the window curtain air bag enhances the level of protection for the head.

However, it does not protect the chest or arms.

In the event of a side impact, the window curtain air bag is deployed on the side on which the impact occurs.

If the system determines that they can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat belt, a window curtain air bag may be deployed in other accident situations

(

Y page 53).

Occupant Classification System

(OCS)

Introduction

The Occupant Classification System (OCS) categorizes the person in the front-passenger seat.

Depending on that result, the front-passenger front air bag is either enabled or deactivated.

The system does not deactivate:

R

R

R the side impact air bag the window curtain air bag the Emergency Tensioning Devices

Occupant safety

49

In the following situation, the side impact air bag and the Emergency Tensioning Device are deactivated:

R

R

OCS has not categorized the person on the front-passenger seat as an adult or a person of corresponding stature and the seat belt tongue of the seat belt is not inserted into the front-passenger seat belt buckle

Requirements

To be classified correctly, the front passenger must sit:

R

R

R with the seat belt fastened correctly in an almost upright position with their back against the seat backrest with their feet resting on the floor, if possible

If the front passenger does not observe these conditions, OCS may produce a false classification, e.g. because the front passenger:

R

R transfers their weight by supporting themselves on a vehicle armrest sits in such a way that their weight is raised from the seat cushion

If it is absolutely necessary to install a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat, be sure to observe the correct positioning of the child restraint system. Never place objects under or behind the child restraint system, e.g. a cushion. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must lie as flat as possible against the backrest of the frontpassenger seat.

The child restraint system must not touch the roof or be subjected to a load by the head restraint. Adjust the angle of the seat backrest and the head restraint position accordingly.

Only then can OCS be guaranteed to function correctly. Always observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation and operating instructions.

Occupant Classification System operation (OCS)

:

;

PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp

The indicator lamps inform you whether the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated or enabled.

X

Press the Start/Stop button once or twice, or turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock.

The system carries out self-diagnostics.

The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER

AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simultaneously for approximately six seconds.

The indicator lamps display the status of the front-passenger front air bag.

R

R

PASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up for 60 seconds, subsequently both indicator lamps are off (PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF): the front-passenger front air bag is able to deploy in the event of an accident.

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up: the frontpassenger front air bag is deactivated. It will then not be deployed in the event of an accident.


If the status of the front-passenger front air bag changes while the vehicle is in motion, an air bag display message appears in the instrument cluster (

Y page 254). When the front-passenger seat is occupied, always pay attention to the

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp. Be aware of the status of the front-passenger front air bag both before and during the journey.

Z

50

Occupant safety

G

WARNING

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, the front-passenger front air bag is disabled. It will not be deployed in the event of an accident and cannot perform its intended protective function. A person in the frontpassenger seat could then, for example, come into contact with the vehicle's interior, especially if the person is sitting too close to the dashboard. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.

When the front-passenger seat is occupied, always ensure that:

R the classification of the person in the frontpassenger seat is correct and the frontpassenger front air bag is enabled or disabled in accordance with the person in the front-passenger seat

R the front-passenger seat has been moved back as far back as possible.

R the person is seated correctly.

Make sure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front-passenger front air bag is correct.

G

WARNING

If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off, the front-passenger front air bag may deploy in the event of an accident. The child could be struck by the air bag. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.

Make sure that the front-passenger front air bag has been disabled. The PASSENGER AIR

BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp stays off, do not install a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat.

You can find more information on OCS under

"Problems with the Occupant Classification System" (

Y page 52).

G

WARNING

If you secure a child in a forward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat and you position the front-passenger seat too close to the dashboard, the child could, in the event of an accident:

R come into contact with the vehicle's interior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, for example

R be struck by the air bag if the PASSENGER

AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off

This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.

Move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible. Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the vehicle belt sash guide to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards and downwards from the vehicle belt sash guide. If necessary, adjust the vehicle belt sash guide and the front-passenger seat accordingly. Always observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.

If OCS determines that:

R

R the front-passenger seat is unoccupied, the

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up after the system self-test and remains lit. This indicates that the frontpassenger front air bag is deactivated.

the front-passenger seat is occupied by a child of up to twelve months old, in a standard child restraint system, the PASSENGER AIR

BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up after the system self-test and remains lit. This indicates that the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated.

But even in the case of a twelve-month-old child, in a standard child restraint system, the

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp can go out after the system self-test. This indicates that the front-passenger front air bag is activated. The result of the classification is dependent on, among other factors, the child restraint system and the child's stature. It is recommended that you install the child restraint system on a suitable rear seat.

Occupant safety

51

R

R

-

the front-passenger seat is occupied by a person of smaller stature (e.g. a teenager or small adult), the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up and remains lit after the system self-test depending on the result of the classification or, alternatively, goes out.

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off, move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible. Alternatively, a person of smaller stature can sit on a rear seat.

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, a person of smaller stature should not use the front-passenger seat.

the front-passenger seat is occupied by an adult or a person of adult stature, the

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp goes out after the system self-test. This indicates that the front-passenger front air bag is activated.

If children are traveling in the vehicle, be sure to observe the notes on "Children in the vehicle"

(

Y page 57).

When the occupant classification system (OCS) is malfunctioning, the red 6 restraint system warning lamp in the instrument cluster and the

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp light up simultaneously. The front-passenger front air bag is deactivated in this case and does not deploy during an accident. Have the Occupant

Classification System (OCS) checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for this purpose.

If the front-passenger seat, the seat cover or the seat cushion are damaged, have the necessary repair work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for this purpose.

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use seat accessories that have been approved by Mercedes-Benz.

If the driver's air bag deploys, this does not mean that the front-passenger front air bag will also deploy. The Occupant Classification System (OCS) categorizes the occupant in the frontpassenger seat. Depending on that result, the front-passenger front air bag is either enabled or deactivated.

System self-test

G

DANGER

If both the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and

PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps do not light up during the system self-test, the system is malfunctioning. The frontpassenger front air bag might be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident with high deceleration. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.

In this case the front-passenger seat may not be used. Do not install a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. Have the Occupant Classification System (OCS) checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

G

WARNING

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit after the system self-test, the front-passenger front air bag is disabled. It will not be deployed in the event of an accident. In this case, the front-passenger front air bag cannot perform its intended protective function, e.g. when a person is seated in the frontpassenger seat.

That person could, for example, come into contact with the vehicle's interior, especially if the person is sitting too close to the dashboard. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.

When the front-passenger seat is occupied, always ensure that:

R the classification of the person in the frontpassenger seat is correct and the frontpassenger front air bag is enabled or disabled in accordance with the person in the front-passenger seat

R the person is seated properly with a correctly fastened seatbelt

R the front-passenger seat has been moved as far back as possible

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit when it should not, the front-

Z

52

Occupant safety

passenger seat may not be used. Do not install a child restraint system on the frontpassenger seat. Have the Occupant Classification System (OCS) checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

G

WARNING

Objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system could affect OCS operation. This could result in the front-passenger air bag not functioning as intended during an accident. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.

Do not place any objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the seat cushion of the frontpassenger seat. The backrest of the forwardfacing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the backrest of the front-passenger seat. Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.

After the system self-test, the PASSENGER AIR

BAG OFF or PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp displays the status of the front-passenger front air bag (

Y page 49). If the front-passenger front air bag is enabled, the PASSENGER AIR

BAG ON indicator lamp lights up for 60 seconds and then goes out.


For more information about the OCS, see "Problems with the Occupant Classification System"

(

Y page 52).

Problems with the Occupant Classification System (OCS)

Be sure to observe the notes on "System self-test" (

Y page 51).

Occupant safety

53

Problem

The PASSENGER AIR

BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up and remains lit, even though the frontpassenger seat is occupied by an adult or a person of a stature corresponding to that of an adult.

The PASSENGER AIR

BAG OFF indicator lamp does not light up and/or does not stay on.

The front-passenger seat is:

R

R unoccupied occupied with the weight of a child up to twelve months old in a child restraint system

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The classification of the person on the front-passenger seat is incorrect.

X

X

X

Make sure the conditions for a correct classification of the person on the front-passenger seat are met (

Y page 49).

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit, the frontpassenger seat may not be used.

Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-

Benz Center.

OCS is malfunctioning.

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Make sure there is nothing between the seat cushion and the child seat.

Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system rests on the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must lie as flat as possible against the backrest of the front-passenger seat. If necessary, adjust the position of the front-passenger seat.

When installing the child restraint system, make sure that the seat belt is tight. Do not pull the seat belt tight using the front-passenger seat adjustment. This could result in the seat belt and the child restraint system being pulled too tightly.

Check for correct installation of the child restraint system.

Make sure that the head restraint does not apply a load to the child restraint system. If necessary, adjust the head restraint accordingly.

Make sure that no objects are applying additional weight onto the seat.

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains off and/or the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp lights up, do not install a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. It is recommended that you install the child restraint system on a suitable rear seat.

Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-

Benz Center.

Deployment of Emergency Tensioning

Devices and air bags


G

WARNING

The air bag parts are hot after an air bag has been deployed. There is a risk of injury.

Do not touch the air bag parts. Have a deployed air bag replaced at a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible.

G

WARNING

A deployed air bag no longer offers any protection and cannot provide the intended protection in an accident. There is an increased risk of injury.

Have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop in order to have a deployed air bag replaced.

It is important for your safety and that of your passenger to have deployed air bags replaced and to have any malfunctioning air bags

Z

54

Occupant safety

repaired. This will help to make sure the air bags continue to perform their protective function for the vehicle occupants in the event of a crash.

G

WARNING

Emergency Tensioning Devices that have deployed pyrotechnically are no longer operational and are unable to perform their intended protective function. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.

Have pyrotechnically triggered Emergency

Tensioning Devices replaced immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

An electric motor is used by PRE-SAFE ® to trigger the tightening of the seat belt in hazardous situations. This procedure is reversible.

If Emergency Tensioning Devices are triggered or air bags are deployed, you will hear a bang, and a small amount of powder may also be released. The 6 restraint system warning lamp lights up.

Only in rare cases will the bang affect your hearing. The powder that is released generally does not constitute a health hazard, but it may cause short-term breathing difficulties in people with asthma or other respiratory problems. Provided it is safe to do so, you should leave the vehicle immediately or open the window in order to prevent breathing difficulties.

Air bags and pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning

Devices (ETDs) contain perchlorate material, which may require special handling and regard for the environment. National guidelines must be observed during disposal. In California, see

www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/

Perchlorate/index.cfm.

Method of operation

During the first stage of a collision, the restraint system control unit evaluates important physical data relating to vehicle deceleration or acceleration, such as:

R

R duration direction

R intensity

Based on the evaluation of this data, the restraint system control unit triggers the Emergency Tensioning Devices during a frontal or rear collision.

An Emergency Tensioning Device can only be triggered, if:

R

R the ignition is switched on the components of the restraint system are operational. You can find further information under: "Restraint system warning lamp"

R

(

Y page 42) the belt tongue is engaged in the buckle on the respective front-passenger seat

The Emergency Tensioning Devices in the rear compartment are triggered independently of the lock status of the seat belts.

If the restraint system control unit detects a more severe accident, further components of the restraint system are activated independently of each other in certain frontal collision situations:

R

Front air bags and driver's knee bag

R

Window curtain air bag, if the system determines that deployment can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat belt

The front-passenger front air bag is activated or deactivated depending on the person on the front-passenger seat. The front-passenger front air bag can only deploy in an accident if the

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off.

Observe the information on the PASSENGER AIR

BAG indicator lamps (

Y page 42).

Your vehicle has two-stage front air bags. During the first deployment stage, the front air bag is filled with propellant gas to reduce the risk of injuries. The front air bag is fully deployed with the maximum amount of propellant gas if a second deployment threshold is reached within a few milliseconds.

The activation threshold of the Emergency Tensioning Devices and the air bag are determined by evaluating the rate of vehicle deceleration or acceleration which occurs at various points in the vehicle. This process is pre-emptive in nature. Deployment should take place in good time at the start of the collision.

The rate of vehicle deceleration or acceleration and the direction of the force are essentially determined by:

R

R

R the distribution of forces during the collision the collision angle the deformation characteristics of the vehicle the characteristics of the object with which

R the vehicle has collided

Factors which can only be seen and measured after a collision has occurred do not play a deci-

Occupant safety

55

sive role in the deployment of an air bag. Nor do they provide an indication of air bag deployment.

The vehicle can be deformed considerably, without an air bag being deployed. This is the case if only parts which are relatively easily deformed are affected and the rate of deceleration is not high. Conversely, air bags may be deployed even though the vehicle suffers only minor deformation. This is the case if, for example, very rigid vehicle parts such as longitudinal body members are hit, and sufficient deceleration occurs as a result.

If the restraint system control unit detects a side impact or if the vehicle rolls over, the applicable components of the restraint system are activated independently of each other depending on the apparent type of accident.

R

Side impact air bags on the side where the impact takes place, independently of the

-

Emergency Tensioning Device and the use of the seat belt on the driver's seat and outer seats in the second row

The side impact air bag on the frontpassenger side deploys under the following conditions: the OCS system detects that the frontpassenger seat is occupied or

R

R

R

the belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckle of the front-passenger seat

Window curtain air bag on the side of impact, independently of the use of the seat belt and independently of whether the frontpassenger seat is occupied

Emergency Tensioning Devices, if the system determines that deployment can offer additional protection in this situation

Window curtain air bags on the driver's and front-passenger side in certain situations when the vehicle rolls over, if the system determines that deployment can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat belt i

Not all air bags are deployed in an accident.

The different air bag systems work independently of each other.

How the air bag system works is determined by the severity of the accident detected, especially the vehicle deceleration or acceleration and the apparent type of accident:

R

Frontal collision

R

Side impact

R

Rollover

PRE-SAFE

®

(anticipatory occupant protection system)

Introduction

In certain hazardous situations, PRE-SAFE

® takes pre-emptive measures to protect the vehicle occupants.


!

Make sure that there are no objects in the footwell or behind the seats. There is a danger that the seats and/or objects could be damaged when PRE-SAFE

® is activated.

Although your vehicle is equipped with PRE-

SAFE

®

, the possibility of injury in the event of an accident cannot be ruled out. Always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front. Drive carefully.

Function

PRE-SAFE ® intervenes:

R

R

R in emergency braking situations, e.g. when

BAS is activated in critical driving situations, e.g. when physical limits are exceeded and the vehicle understeers or oversteers severely on vehicles with the Driving Assistance package: if BAS PLUS intervenes powerfully or the radar sensor system detects an imminent danger of collision in certain situations

PRE-SAFE ® takes the following measures depending on the hazardous situation detected:

R

R the front seat belts are pre-tensioned.

if the vehicle skids, the side windows and the sliding sunroof are closed.

Z

56

Occupant safety

R

R vehicles with the memory function: the frontpassenger seat is adjusted if it is in an unfavorable position.

vehicles with a multicontour seat: the air pressure in the side bolsters of the seat backrest is increased.

If the hazardous situation passes without resulting in an accident, PRE-SAFE ® slackens the belt pre-tensioning. On vehicles with multicontour seats, the air pressure in the side bolsters is reduced again. All settings made by PRE-SAFE can then be reversed.

If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced:

®

X

Move the seat backrest or seat back slightly when the vehicle is stationary.

The seat belt pre-tensioning is reduced and the locking mechanism is released.

The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part of the PRE-SAFE ® convenience function. Information about the convenience function can be found under "Belt adjustment" (

Y page 45).

Function

PRE-SAFE

®

PLUS intervenes in certain situations if the radar sensor system detects an imminent head-on or rear-end collision.

PRE-SAFE

®

PLUS takes the following measures depending on the hazardous situation detected:

R

R if the radar sensor system detects that a head-on collision is imminent, the seat belts are pre-tensioned.

if the radar sensor system detects that a rear-

end collision is imminent: the brake pressure is increased if the driver applies the brakes when the vehicle is stationary.

the seat belts are pre-tensioned.

The PRE-SAFE

®

PLUS braking application is canceled:

R

R if the accelerator pedal is depressed when a gear is engaged if the risk of a collision passes or is no longer detected

R if Distance Pilot DISTRONIC indicates an intention to pull away

If the hazardous situation passes without resulting in an accident, the original settings are restored.

PRE-SAFE

®

PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection system PLUS)

Introduction

PRE-SAFE

®

PLUS is only available in vehicles with the Driving Assistance package.

Using the radar sensor system, PRE-SAFE ®

PLUS is able to detect that a head-on or rear-end collision is imminent. In certain hazardous situations, PRE-SAFE

®

PLUS takes pre-emptive measures to protect the vehicle occupants.


The intervention of PRE-SAFE ® PLUS cannot prevent an imminent collision.

The driver is not warned about the intervention of PRE-SAFE

®

PRE-SAFE

®

PLUS.

PLUS does not intervene if the vehicle is backing up.

When driving, or when parking or exiting a parking space with assistance from Parking Pilot,

PRE-SAFE

®

PLUS will not apply the brakes.

Automatic measures after an accident

Immediately after an accident, the following measures are implemented, depending on the type and severity of the impact:

R

R

R

R

R

R

R the hazard warning lamps are activated the emergency lighting is activated the vehicle doors are unlocked the front side windows are lowered vehicles with a memory function: the electrically adjustable steering wheel is raised the engine is switched off and the fuel supply is cut off vehicles with mbrace: automatic emergency call

Children in the vehicle

57



Accident statistics show that children secured in the rear seats are safer than children secured in the front-passenger seat. For this reason,

Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you install a child restraint system on a rear seat. Children are generally better protected there.

If a child younger than twelve years old and under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in the vehicle:

R

R

R always secure the child in a child restraint system suitable for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.

The child restraint system must be appropriate to the age, weight and size of the child be sure to observe the instructions and safety notes in this section in addition to the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions be sure to observe the instructions and safety notes on the "Occupant classification system

(OCS)" (

Y page 48)

G

WARNING

If you leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, they could set it in motion by, for example:

R release the parking brake.

R shift the automatic transmission out of the parking position P.

R start the engine.

In addition, they may operate vehicle equipment and become trapped. There is a risk of an accident and injury.

When leaving the vehicle, always take the

SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

G

WARNING

If persons, particularly children are subjected to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

G

WARNING

If the child restraint system is subjected to direct sunlight, parts may get very hot. Children may burn themselves on these parts, particularly on the metal parts of the child restraint system. There is a risk of injury.

If you leave the vehicle, taking the child with you, always ensure that the child restraint system is not exposed to direct sunlight. Protect it with a blanket, for example. If the child restraint system has been exposed to direct sunlight, let it cool down before securing the child in it. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting properly. Particular attention must be paid to children.


(

Y page 43) and the notes on correct use of seat belts (

Y page 44).

A booster seat may be necessary to achieve proper seat belt positioning for children over

41 lbs (18 kg) until they reach a height where a three-point seat belt can be properly fastened without a booster seat.

Special seat belt retractor

G

WARNING

If the seat belt is released while driving, the child restraint system will no longer be secured properly. The special seat belt retractor is disabled and the inertia real draws in a portion of the seat belt. The seat belt cannot be immediately refastened. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.

Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Reactivate the special seat belt retractor and secure the child restraint system properly.

All seat belts except the driver's seat belt are equipped with a special seat belt retractor.

When activated, the special seat belt retractor ensures that the seat belt will not slacken once the child restraint system has been secured.

Z

58


Installing a child restraint system:

X

X

X

Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.

Pull the seat belt smoothly from the belt outlet.

Engage the seat belt tongue in the belt buckle.

Activating the special seat belt retractor:

X

X

Pull the seat belt out fully and let the inertia reel retract it again.

While the seat belt is retracting, you should hear a ratcheting sound. The special seat belt retractor is activated.

Push the child seat restraint system down so that the seat belt is tight and does not loosen.

Removing a child restraint system and deactivating the special seat belt retractor:

X

X

Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.

Press the release button of the belt buckle, hold the belt tongue firmly and guide it back towards the belt outlet.

The special seat belt retractor is deactivated.

Child restraint system

The use of seat belts and child restraint systems is required by law in:

R

R

R

R all 50 states the U.S. territories the District of Columbia all Canadian provinces

If you install a rearward-facing child restraint system on the center rear seat, the rear arm rest must be folded back as far as possible.

You can obtain further information about the correct child restraint system from any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

G

WARNING

If the child restraint system is installed incorrectly on a suitable seat, it cannot protect as intended. The child cannot then be restrained in the event of an accident, heavy braking or sudden changes of direction. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.

Make sure that you observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions and the notes on use. Please ensure, that the base of the child restraint system is always resting completely on the seat cushion. Never place objects, e.g. cushions, under or behind the child restraint system. Only use child restraint systems with the original cover designed for them. Only replace damaged covers with genuine covers.

G

WARNING

If the child restraint system is installed incorrectly or is not secured, it can come loose in the event of an accident, heavy braking or a sudden change in direction. The child restraint system could be thrown about, striking vehicle occupants. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.

Always install child restraint systems properly, even if they are not being used. Make sure that you observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.

You will find further information on stowing objects, luggage or loads under "Loading guidelines" (

Y page 294).

G

WARNING

Child restraint systems or their securing systems which have been damaged or subjected to a load in an accident can no longer protect as intended. The child cannot then be restrained in the event of an accident, heavy braking or sudden changes of direction. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.

Replace child restraint systems which have been damaged or subjected to a load in an accident as soon as possible. Have the securing systems on the child restraint system checked at a qualified specialist workshop, before you install a child restraint system again.

The securing systems of child restraint systems are:

R

R

R the seat belt system the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings the Top Tether anchorages


59

If it is absolutely necessary to carry a child on the front-passenger seat, be sure to observe the information on the "Occupant Classification

System (OCS)" (

Y page 48). There you will also find information on deactivating the frontpassenger front air bag.

All child restraint systems must meet the following standards:

R

R

U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards

213 and 225

Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards

213 and 210.2

Confirmation that the child restraint system corresponds to the standards can be found on an instruction label on the child restraint system.

This confirmation can also be found in the installation instructions that are included with the child restraint system.

Observe the warning labels in the vehicle interior and on the child restraint system.

outer seat in the second row must be in the upright position.

!

When installing the child restraint system, make sure that the seat belt for the middle seat does not get trapped. The seat belt could otherwise be damaged.

LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings for the outer seat in the second row of seats

LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat securing system

G

WARNING

LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systems do not offer sufficient protective effect for children whose weight is greater than 48 lbs

(22 kg) who are secured using the safety belt integrated in the child restraint system. In the event of an accident, a child might not be restrained correctly. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.

If the child weighs more than 48 lbs (22 kg), only use LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systems with which the child is also secured with the vehicle seat belt. Also secure the child restraint system with the Top Tether belt, if available.

Always comply with the manufacturer's installation and operating instructions for the child restraint system used.

Before every trip, make sure that the LATCHtype (ISOFIX) child restraint system is engaged correctly in both LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings

To ensure that the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system can perform its protective function as intended, the backrest of the respective

LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings for the third row of seats

Before installing a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system on the second row of seats:

X

X

Move the rear seat backrests in the second row to an upright position (

Y page 98).

Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system on both LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings :.

ISOFIX is a standardized securing system for specially designed child restraint systems on the rear seats.

Non-LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seats may also be used and can be installed using the vehicle's seat belt system. Install the child seat according to the manufacturer's instructions.

Z

60


Top Tether

Introduction

Top Tether provides an additional connection between the child restraint system secured with a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) system and the vehicle.

This helps reduce the risk of injury even further.

If the child restraint system is equipped with a

Top Tether belt, this should always be used.


G

WARNING

If the rear seats or the rear seat backrests are not locked, they could fold forwards in the event of an accident, heavy braking or sudden changes of direction. As a result, child restraint systems cannot perform their intended protective function. Rear seats and rear seat backrests that are not locked can also cause additional injuries, e.g. in the event of an accident. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.

Always lock the rear seats and rear seat backrests after installing a Top Tether belt.

Observe the lock verification indicator. Adjust the rear seat backrests so that they are in an upright position.

Make sure that the backrest in the rear compartment engages fully. To do so, pull firmly on the seat backrest.

Top Tether anchorages

cargo tie-down rings in the cargo compartment floor.

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Move head restraint = up (

Y page 97).

Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system with Top Tether. Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions when doing so.

Route Top Tether belt B under head restraint

= between the two head restraint bars.

Guide Top Tether belt B downwards between cargo compartment cover : and rear seat backrest ;.

Hook Top Tether hook A of Top Tether belt

B into Top Tether anchorage ?.

Make sure that:

R

Top Tether hook A is hooked into Top

R

Tether anchorage ? as shown.

Top Tether belt B is not twisted.

R

Top Tether belt B is routed between rear seat backrest ; and cargo compartment cover : if cargo compartment cover : is

R installed.

Top Tether belt B is routed between rear seat backrest ; and the cargo net if the cargo net is installed.

Tension Top Tether belt B. Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions when doing so.

Move head restraint = back down again slightly if necessary (

Y page 97). Make sure that you do not interfere with the correct routing of Top Tether belt B.

The Top Tether anchorages for the second row of seats are located on the rear of the rear seat backrests. For the third row of seats, use the


61

Child restraint system on the frontpassenger seat

General notes

Accident statistics show that children secured in the rear seats are safer than children secured in the front-passenger seat. For this reason,

Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you install the child restraint system on a rear seat.

If it is absolutely necessary to install a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat, always observe the instructions and safety notes on the "Occupant Classification System

(OCS)" (

Y page 48).

You can thus avoid the risks that could arise as a result of:

R

R

R an incorrectly categorized person in the frontpassenger seat the unintentional deactivation of the frontpassenger front air bag the unsuitable positioning of the child restraint system, e.g. too close to the dashboard

Rearward-facing child restraint system

If it is absolutely necessary to install a rearwardfacing child restraint system on the frontpassenger seat, always make sure that the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated.

Only if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is permanently lit (

Y page 42) is the frontpassenger front air bag deactivated.

Always observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation and operating instructions.

Forward-facing child restraint system

If it is absolutely necessary to install a forwardfacing child restraint system on the frontpassenger seat, always move the frontpassenger seat as far back as possible. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the seat cushion of the frontpassenger seat. The backrest of the child restraint system must lie as flat as possible against the backrest of the front-passenger seat. The child restraint system must not touch the roof or be subjected to a load by the head restraint. Adjust the angle of the seat backrest and the head restraint position accordingly.

Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the vehicle belt outlet to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards and downwards from the vehicle belt outlet. If necessary, adjust the vehicle belt outlet and the front-passenger seat accordingly.

Always observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation and operating instructions.

Child-proof locks


G

WARNING

If children are traveling in the vehicle, they could:

R open doors, thus endangering other people or road users

R exit the vehicle and be caught by oncoming traffic

R operate vehicle equipment and become trapped

There is a risk of an accident and injury.

Always activate the child-proof locks and override feature if children are traveling in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

Override feature for:

R

R the rear doors (

Y page 62) the rear side windows (

Y page 62)

G

WARNING




R start the engine.


Z

62

Pets in the vehicle



G

WARNING

If persons, particularly children are subjected to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

G

WARNING

If the child restraint system is subjected to direct sunlight, parts may get very hot. Children may burn themselves on these parts, particularly on the metal parts of the child restraint system. There is a risk of injury.

If you leave the vehicle, taking the child with you, always ensure that the child restraint system is not exposed to direct sunlight. Protect it with a blanket, for example. If the child restraint system has been exposed to direct sunlight, let it cool down before securing the child in it. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

Child-proof locks for the rear doors

X

X

X

To activate: press the child-proof lock lever up in the direction of arrow :.

Make sure that the child-proof locks are working properly.

To deactivate: press the child-proof lock lever down in the direction of arrow ;.

Override feature for the rear side windows

X

To activate/deactivate:press button :.

If indicator lamp ; is lit, operation of the rear side windows is disabled. Operation is only possible using the switches in the driver's door. If indicator lamp ; is off, operation is possible using the switches in the rear compartment.

You secure each door individually with the childproof locks on the rear doors. A door secured with a child-proof lock cannot be opened from inside the vehicle. When the vehicle is unlocked, the door can be opened from the outside.

Pets in the vehicle

G

WARNING

If you leave animals unattended or unsecured in the vehicle, they could press buttons or switches, for example.

As a result, they could:

R activate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example

R activate or deactivate systems, thereby endangering other road users

Unsecured animals could also be flung around the vehicle in the event of an accident or sudden steering or braking, thereby injuring vehicle occupants. There is a risk of an accident and injury.


63

Never leave animals unattended in the vehicle. Always secure animals properly during the journey, e.g. use a suitable animal transport box.


Overview of driving safety systems

In this section, you will find information about the following driving safety systems:

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

(

Y page 63)

BAS (Brake Assist System) (

Y page 64)

Active Brake Assist (

Y page 64)

ESP ® (Electronic Stability Program)

(

Y page 67)

EBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution)

(

Y page 69)

ADAPTIVE BRAKE (

Y page 69)

Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function

(

Y page 69)

STEER CONTROL (

Y page 72)


If you fail to adapt your driving style or if you are inattentive, the driving safety systems can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. Driving safety systems are merely aids designed to assist driving. You are responsible for maintaining the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time, and for staying in lane. Always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front. Drive carefully.

The driving safety systems described only work as effectively as possible when there is adequate contact between the tires and the road surface. Pay particular attention to the information regarding tires, recommended minimum tire tread depths etc. in the "Wheels and tires" section (

Y page 346).

In wintry driving conditions, always use winter tires (M+S tires) and if necessary, snow chains.

Only in this way will the driving safety systems described in this section work as effectively as possible.

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)


ABS regulates brake pressure in such a way that the wheels do not lock when you brake. This allows you to continue steering the vehicle when braking.

The ! ABS warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the ignition is switched on. It goes out when the engine is running.

ABS works from a speed of about 5 mph

(8 km/h), regardless of road-surface conditions.

ABS works on slippery surfaces, even when you only brake gently.


i

Observe the "Important safety notes" section (

Y page 63).

G

WARNING

If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock when braking. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely impaired. Additionally, further driving safety systems are deactivated. There is an increased danger of skidding and accidents.

Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

When ABS is malfunctioning, other systems, including driving safety systems, will also become inoperative. Observe the information on the ABS warning lamp (

Y page 277) and display messages which may be shown in the instrument cluster (

Y page 245).

Braking

X

X

If ABS intervenes: continue to depress the brake pedal vigorously until the braking situation is over.

To make a full brake application: depress the brake pedal with full force.

If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a pulsing in the brake pedal.

The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication of hazardous road conditions, and functions as a reminder to take extra care while driving.

Z

64


Off-road ABS

An ABS system specifically suited to off-road terrain is activated automatically once the offroad program is activated on:

R

R

Vehicles without the Offroad Engineering package (

Y page 217)

Vehicles with the Off-Road Engineering package (

Y page 218)

At speeds below 20 mph (30 km/h), the front wheels lock cyclically during braking. The digging-in effect achieved in the process reduces the stopping distance on off-road terrain. This limits steering capability.

BAS (Brake Assist System)


BAS operates in emergency braking situations.

If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS automatically boosts the braking force, thus shortening the stopping distance.


i


Y page 63).

G

WARNING

If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance in an emergency braking situation is increased. There is a risk of an accident.

In an emergency braking situation, depress the brake pedal with full force. ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

Braking

X

Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed until the emergency braking situation is over.

ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

The brakes will function as usual once you release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.

Active Brake Assist


i


Y page 63).

Active Brake Assist consists of a distance warning function with an autonomous braking function and Adaptive Brake Assist.

Active Brake Assist can help you to minimize the risk of a collision with the vehicle traveling in front or reduce the effects of such a collision.

If Active Brake Assist detects that there is a risk of collision, you will be warned visually and acoustically. If you do not react to the visual and audible collision warning, autonomous braking can be initiated in critical situations. If you apply the brake yourself in a critical situation, Adaptive Brake Assist of the Active Brake Assist system supports you.


In particular, the detection of obstacles can be impaired if:

R

R

R

R

R there is dirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors there is snow or heavy rain there is interference by other radar sources there are strong radar reflections, for example in parking garages a narrow vehicle is traveling in front, e.g. a motorbike

R

R a vehicle is traveling in front on a different line new vehicles or after servicing is carried out on the Active Brake Assist system

Observe the notes in the section on breakingin (

Y page 137).

Following damage to the front end of the vehicle, have the configuration and operation of the radar sensor checked at a qualified specialist workshop. This also applies to collisions at slow speeds where there is no visible damage to the front of the vehicle.

Activating/deactivating

Active Brake Assist is automatically active after switching on the ignition.

You can activate or deactivate Active Brake

Assist (

Y page 237) in the on-board computer.

When deactivated, the distance warning func-


65

tion and the autonomous braking function are also deactivated.

If Active Brake Assist is deactivated, the æ symbol appears in the assistance graphic display.

If DSR (

Y page 216) is activated, Active Brake

Assist is deactivated.

Distance warning function


The distance warning function can help you to minimize the risk of a front-end collision with a vehicle ahead or reduce the effects of such a collision. If the distance warning function detects that there is a risk of a collision, you will be warned visually and acoustically.


i

Observe the "Important safety notes" section for driving safety systems (

Y page 63).

G

WARNING

The distance warning function does not react:

R to people or animals

R to oncoming vehicles

R to crossing traffic

R when cornering

Thus, the distance warning function cannot provide a warning in all critical situations.

There is a risk of an accident.

Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake.

G

WARNING

The distance warning function cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic situations.

In such cases, the distance warning function may:

R give an unnecessary warning

R not give a warning


Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and do not rely solely on the distance warning function.

Function

Starting at a speed of around 4 mph (7 km/h), the distance warning function warns you if you rapidly approach a vehicle in front. An intermittent warning tone will then sound, and the · distance warning lamp will light up in the instrument cluster.

X

Brake immediately in order to increase the distance from the vehicle in front.

or

X

Take evasive action, provided it is safe to do so.

Due to the nature of the system, particularly complicated but non-critical driving conditions may also cause the system to display a warning.

With the help of the radar sensor system, the distance warning function can detect obstacles that are in the path of your vehicle for an extended period of time.

Up to a speed of around 44 mph (70 km/h), the distance warning function can also react to stationary obstacles, such as stopped or parked vehicles.

Autonomous braking function

If the driver does not react to the distance warning signal in a critical situation, Active Brake

Assist can assist the driver with the autonomous braking function.

The autonomous braking function is available in the following speed ranges:

R

R

4 - 65 mph (7 - 105 km/h) for moving objects

4 - 31 mph (7 - 50 km/h) for stationary objects

Due to the nature of the system, particularly complicated but non-critical driving conditions may also cause the Autonomous Braking Function to intervene.

If the autonomous braking function requires a particularly high braking force, preventative passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE are activated simultaneously (

Y page 55).

®

)

Adaptive Brake Assist


i


Y page 63).

With the help of adaptive Brake Assist, the distance warning signal can detect obstacles that

Z

66


are in the path of your vehicle for an extended period of time.

If adaptive Brake Assist detects a risk of collision with the vehicle in front, it calculates the braking force necessary to avoid a collision. If you apply the brakes forcefully, adaptive Brake

Assist will automatically increase the braking force to a level suitable for the traffic conditions.

Adaptive Brake Assist provides braking assistance in hazardous situations at speeds above

4 mph (7 km/h). It uses radar sensor technology to assess the traffic situation.

Up to a speed of approximately 155 mph

(250 km/h), Adaptive Brake Assist is capable of reacting to moving objects that have already been detected as such at least once over the period of observation.


(70 km/h), Adaptive Brake Assist reacts to stationary obstacles.

If adaptive Brake Assist demands particularly high braking force, preventative passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE simultaneously (

Y page 55).

®

) are activated

X

Keep the brake pedal depressed until the emergency braking situation is over.


The brakes will work normally again if:

R

R

R you release the brake pedal.

there is no longer any danger of a collision.

no obstacle is detected in front of your vehicle.

Adaptive Brake Assist is then deactivated.


i


Y page 63).

G

WARNING

Adaptive Brake Assist cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic situations.

In such cases, Adaptive Brake Assist can:

R intervene unnecessarily

R not intervene


Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. Terminate the intervention in a non-critical driving situation.

G

WARNING

Adaptive Brake Assist does not react:

R to people or animals


R to crossing traffic

R when cornering

As a result, the Adaptive Brake Assist may not intervene in all critical conditions. There is a risk of an accident.


Due to the nature of the system, particularly complicated but non-critical driving conditions may also cause Brake Assist to intervene.

If adaptive Brake Assist is not available due to a malfunction in the radar sensor system, the brake system remains available with full brake boosting effect and BAS.

ESP

®

(Electronic Stability Program)

General notes

i


Y page 63).

ESP

® monitors driving stability and traction, i.e.

power transmission between the tires and the road surface.

If ESP

® detects that the vehicle is deviating from the direction desired by the driver, one or more wheels are braked to stabilize the vehicle. The engine output is also modified to keep the vehicle on the desired course within physical limits.

ESP

® assists the driver when pulling away on wet or slippery roads. ESP the vehicle during braking.

® can also stabilize

ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System)

4ETS traction control is part of ESP ® .

Traction control brakes the drive wheels individually if they spin. This enables you to pull away and accelerate on slippery surfaces, for example if the road surface is slippery on one side. In addition, more drive torque is transferred to the wheel or wheels with traction.

Traction control remains active, even if you deactivate ESP

®

.


67

In appropriate driving situations, activate the offroad program:

X

X


Y page 217)


Y page 218)

Offroad 4ETS (Electronic Traction System)

An ETS system specifically suited to off-road terrain is activated automatically once an offroad program is activated:

R

R


Y page 217)


Y page 218)


G

WARNING

If ESP

® is malfunctioning, ESP

® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. Additionally, further driving safety systems are deactivated. This increases the risk of skidding and an accident.

Drive on carefully. Have ESP ® qualified specialist workshop.

checked at a

!

Only operate the vehicle for a maximum of ten seconds on a brake test dynamometer.

Switch off the ignition.

Application of the brakes by ESP ® erwise destroy the brake system.

may oth-

!

A function or performance test should only be carried out on a two-axle dynamometer.

Before you operate the vehicle on such a dynamometer, please consult a qualified workshop. You could otherwise damage the drive train or the brake system.

ESP

® is only deactivated if the å warning lamp is lit continuously.

If the ÷ warning lamp and the å warning lamp are lit continuously, ESP

® is not available due to a malfunction.

Observe the information on warning lamps

(

Y page 279) and display messages which may be shown in the instrument cluster

(

Y page 245).

i

Only use wheels with the recommended tire sizes. Only then will ESP ® function properly.

Characteristics of ESP

®


If the ÷ ESP warning lamp goes out before beginning the journey, ESP

® is automatically active.

If ESP

® intervenes, the ÷ ESP

® flashes in the instrument cluster.

warning lamp

If ESP

® intervenes:

X

X

X

Do not deactivate ESP

® under any circumstances.

Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary when pulling away.

Adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions.


The ECO start/stop function switches the engine off automatically when the vehicle stops moving. The engine starts automatically when the driver wants to pull away again. ESP ® remains in its previously selected status, e.g. if

ESP ® was deactivated before the engine was automatically switched off.

Deactivating/activating ESP

®


i


Y page 63).

You can select between the following states of

ESP

®

:

R

R

ESP

®

ESP ® is activated.

is deactivated.

G

WARNING

If you deactivate ESP

®

, ESP of skidding and an accident.

® no longer stabilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk

Only deactivate ESP ® bed in the following.

in the situations descri-

Z

68


It may be best to deactivate ESP ® ing situations: in the follow-

R

R when using snow chains in deep snow

R on sand or gravel

Spinning the wheels results in a cutting action which provides better grip.

i

Activate ESP ® as soon as the situations described above no longer apply. ESP

® will otherwise not be able to stabilize the vehicle if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts to spin.

!

Avoid spinning the driven wheels for an extended period with ESP ® deactivated. You could otherwise damage the drivetrain.

Deactivating/activating ESP

®

X

To deactivate: press button :.

The å ESP

®

OFF warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up.

X

To activate: press button :.

The å ESP

®

OFF warning lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.

Characteristics when ESP ® is deactivated

If ESP ® is deactivated and one or more wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP

ESP

® will not stabilize the vehicle.

If you deactivate ESP

®

:

® warning lamp in the instrument cluster flashes. In such situations,

R

R

R

R

ESP ® no longer improves driving stability.

Engine torque is no longer limited and the drive wheels are able to spin.

Traction control is still activated.

Active Brake Assist is no longer available; nor is it activated if you brake firmly with assistance from ESP

®

R

R

R

PRE-SAFE ® is no longer available, nor is it activated if you brake firmly and ESP

® intervenes.

Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function is no longer available; it is not activated even if you brake firmly with assistance from ESP ®

ESP

® firmly.

still provides support when you brake

Offroad ESP

®

(vehicles with Offroad

Engineering package)

An ESP ® system specifically suited to off-road terrain is activated automatically once the offroad program is activated on:

R

R


Y page 217)


Y page 218)

Offroad ESP traction.

® intervenes with a delay if there is oversteering or understeering, thus improving

ESP

®

trailer stabilization


ESP ® trailer stabilization is not available in

Mercedes-AMG vehicles.

If your vehicle/trailer combination begins to swerve, ESP ® assists you in this situation. ESP ® slows the vehicle down by braking and limiting the engine output until the vehicle/trailer combination has stabilized.


G

WARNING

If road and weather conditions are poor, trailer stabilization will not be able to prevent the vehicle/trailer combination from swerving. Trailers with a high center of gravity can tip over before ESP ® a risk of an accident.

can detect this. There is

Always adapt your driving style to the prevailing road and weather conditions.

If your vehicle with trailer (vehicle/trailer combination) begins to lurch, you can only stabilize the vehicle/trailer combination by depressing the brake firmly.


69

Trailer stabilization is active above speeds of about 37 mph (60 km/h).

ESP

® trailer stabilization does not work if ESP

® is deactivated or disabled because of a malfunction.

Crosswind Assist


Strong crosswind gusts can impair the ability of your vehicle to drive straight ahead. The crosswind driving assistance function integrated in

ESP

®

ESP ® noticeably reduces these impairments.

intervenes automatically according to the direction and intensity of the crosswinds affecting your vehicle.

ESP

® intervenes with stabilizing braking to assist you in keeping the vehicle in the lane.

Crosswind Assist is active at vehicle speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h) when driving straight ahead or cornering gently.


Crosswind Assist does not work if ESP function.

® is switched off or deactivated because of a mal-

EBD (electronic brake force distribution)


EBD monitors and controls the brake pressure on the rear wheels to improve driving stability while braking.


i


Y page 63).

G

WARNING

If EBD is malfunctioning, the rear wheels can lock, e.g. under full braking. This increases the risk of skidding and an accident.

You should therefore adapt your driving style to the different handling characteristics. Have the brake system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Observe information regarding indicator and warning lamps (

Y page 277) as well as display messages (

Y page 247).

ADAPTIVE BRAKE

ADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safety and offers increased braking comfort. In addition to the braking function, ADAPTIVE BRAKE also has the HOLD function (

Y page 185) and hill start assist (

Y page 141).

Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function


i

Pay attention to the important safety notes in the "Driving safety systems" section

(

Y page 63).

Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function can help you to minimize the risk of a collision with a vehicle in front or a pedestrian and reduce the effects of such a collision. If the Active Brake

Assist with cross-traffic function detects a risk of collision, you will be warned visually and acoustically and, if necessary, your brake application will be assisted according to the situation. If you do not react, the system can also react by braking automatically. In the event of a detected risk of collision due to crossing traffic, you will also be visually and acoustically warned as well as assisted by the brake boosting effect according to the situation.

Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function is only available in vehicles with the Driving Assistance Plus package.

For Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function to assist you when driving, the radar sensor system and the camera system must be operational.

If the radar sensor system or the camera system is malfunctioning, Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function is restricted or no longer available. The brake system is still available with complete brake boosting effect and BAS.

The radar sensor system and camera system help Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function to detect obstacles that are in the path of your vehicle for an extended period of time.

In addition, pedestrians in the path of your vehicle can be detected.

Z

70


Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function detects pedestrians using typical characteristics such as body contours and the posture of a person standing upright.

i

Observe the restrictions described in the

"Important safety notes" section

(

Y page 70).


G

WARNING

Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function will initially brake your vehicle by a partial application of the brakes if a danger of collision is detected. There may be a collision unless you brake yourself. Even after subsequent full application of the brakes a collision cannot always be avoided, particularly when approaching at too high a speed. There is a risk of an accident.

Always apply the brakes yourself and try to take evasive action, provided it is safe to do so.

In the event of a partial application of the brakes, the vehicle is braked with up to 50% of the full braking pressure.

G

WARNING

Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic situations.

In such cases, Active Brake Assist with crosstraffic function might:

R issue an unnecessary warning or engage

R neither give a warning nor intervene


Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation and be prepared to brake, especially if Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function alerts you. Terminate the intervention in a non-critical driving situation.

G

WARNING

Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function cannot always clearly identify people, particularly if they are moving. Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function cannot intervene in these cases. There is a risk of an accident.

Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation and be prepared to brake, especially if Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function alerts you.

In order to maintain the appropriate distance to the vehicle in front and thus prevent a collision, you must apply the brakes yourself.

G

WARNING

Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function does not react:

R to small people, e.g. children

R to animals


R when cornering

As a result, Active Brake Assist with crosstraffic function may not warn you or engage in all critical situations. There is a risk of an accident.


In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, the recognition can be impaired.

Recognition by the radar sensor system is also impaired if:

R

R

R

R there is dirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors there is interference by other radar sources there are strong radar reflections, for example in parking garages a narrow vehicle is traveling in front, e.g. a motorbike a vehicle is traveling in front on a different line

R

R relative to the center of your vehicle vehicles quickly move into the radar sensor system detection range

Recognition by the camera system is also impaired in the event of:

R

R dirt on the camera or if the camera is covered glare on the camera system, e.g. from the sun being low in the sky


71

R

R

-

-

darkness or if: pedestrians move quickly, e.g. into the path of the vehicle the camera system no longer recognizes a pedestrian as a person due to special clothing or other objects a pedestrian is concealed by other objects

the typical outline of a person is not distinguishable from the background

Following damage to the front end of the vehicle, have the configuration and operation of the radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. This also applies to collisions at slow speeds where there is no visible damage to the front of the vehicle.

Following damage to the windshield, have the configuration and operation of the camera system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Function

X

To activate or deactivate: activate or deactivate Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function using the on-board computer

(

Y page 237).

If the Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function is deactivated, the æ symbol appears in the multifunction display.

If you have activated DSR (

Y page 216), the

Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function is deactivated.

Starting at a speed of around 4 mph (7 km/h), this function warns you if you rapidly approach a vehicle in front. An intermittent warning tone will then sound and the · distance warning lamp will light up in the instrument cluster.

X or

Brake immediately to defuse the situation.

X

Take evasive action provided it is safe to do so.

Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function can also brake the vehicle automatically under the following conditions:

R

R the driver and front-passenger have their seat belts fastened and the vehicle speed is between approximately

4 mph (7 km/h) and 124 mph (200 km/h)


(70 km/h), Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function may react to:

R

R stationary objects in the path of your vehicle, e.g. stopped or parked vehicles pedestrians in the path of your vehicle i

If there is an increased risk of a collision, preventive passenger protection measures

(PRE-SAFE ® ) are triggered (

Y page 55).

If the risk of collision with the vehicle in front remains and you do not brake, take evasive action or accelerate significantly, the vehicle may perform automatic emergency braking, up to the point of full brake application. Automatic emergency braking is not performed until immediately prior to an imminent accident.

If you apply the brake yourself in a critical situation or during autonomous braking, braking assistance is provided according to the situation. If necessary, this increases the brake pressure up to full brake application.

To avoid a collision, Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function calculates the brake force necessary if:

R

R you approach an obstacle, and

Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function has detected a risk of a collision

When driving at a speed

under20 mph(30 km/h): if you depress the brake pedal, Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function is activated. The increase in brake pressure from Active Brake Assist with crosstraffic function is carried out at the last possible moment.

When driving at a speed

above20 mph(30 km/h): if you depress the brake pedal sharply, Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function automatically increases the brake pressure to a degree suited to the traffic situation.

Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function provides braking assistance in hazardous situations with vehicles in front within a speed range between 4 mph (7 km/h) and 155 mph

(250 km/h).

Z

72



(70 km/h) the Active Brake Assist with crosstraffic function assists you with braking in hazardous situations with:

R

R

R

X stationary obstacles in the path of the vehicle, e.g. stopped or parked vehicles stationary pedestrians in the path of the vehicle obstacles crossing your path that move in the detection range of the sensors and are detected

Keep the brake pedal depressed until the emergency braking situation is over.


You can prevent the intervention of Active Brake

Assist with cross-traffic function at any time by:

R

R depressing the accelerator pedal further activating kickdown

R releasing the brake pedal

The braking application of Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function is ended automatically if:

R

R

R you maneuver to avoid the obstacle there is no longer a risk of collision there is no longer an obstacle detected in front of your vehicle

No steering assistance is provided from STEER

CONTROL, if:

R

R

R

ESP

®

ESP

® is deactivated the steering is malfunctioning

If ESP ® is malfunctioning is malfunctioning, you will be assisted further by the electrical power steering.


Immobilizer

X

X

X

To activate with the SmartKey: remove the

SmartKey from the ignition lock.

To activate with KEYLESS-GO: switch the ignition off and open the driver's door.

To deactivate: switch on the ignition.

The immobilizer prevents your vehicle from being started without the correct SmartKey.


SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Anyone can start the engine if a valid SmartKey has been left inside the vehicle.

i

The immobilizer is always deactivated when you start the engine.

In the event that the engine cannot be started

(yet the vehicle's battery is charged), the system is not operational. Contact an authorized

Mercedes-Benz Center or call

1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or

1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).

STEER CONTROL


STEER CONTROL helps you by transmitting a noticeable steering force to the steering wheel in the direction required for vehicle stabilization.

This steering assistance is provided in particular if:

R

R both right wheels or both left wheels are on a wet or slippery road surface when you brake the vehicle starts to skid


i


Y page 63).

ATA (anti-theft alarm system)


73

X

X

To arm: lock the vehicle with the SmartKey or

KEYLESS-GO.

Indicator lamp : flashes. The alarm system is armed after approximately 15 seconds.

To deactivate using the SmartKey: unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey.

or

X

X or

X


To deactivate using KEYLESS-GO: unlock the vehicle with KEYLESS-GO.

Press the Start/Stop button on the dashboard. The SmartKey must be inside the vehicle.

A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the alarm system is armed and you open:

R

R

R

R

X a door the vehicle with the mechanical key the tailgate the hood

To switch the alarm off with the Smart-

Key: press the % or & button on the

SmartKey.

The alarm is switched off.

or

X



X or

X

To stop the alarm using KEYLESS-GO:

grasp the outside door handle. The SmartKey must be outside the vehicle.


Press the Start/Stop button on the dashboard. The SmartKey must be inside the vehicle.


The alarm is not switched off, even if you close the open door that triggered it, for example.

i

If the alarm continues for more than

30 seconds, the mbrace emergency call system automatically notifies the Customer

Assistance Center. This is done either by text message or data connection. The emergency call system sends the message or data provided that:

R you have subscribed to the mbrace service.

R the mbrace service has been activated

R properly.

the necessary mobile phone network is available.

Z

74

SmartKey

SmartKey


G

WARNING

If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could:

R open the doors, thus endangering other people or road users.

R get out and disrupt traffic.

R operate the vehicle's equipment.

Additionally, children could set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they:


R shifting the automatic transmission out of park position P

R

Start the engine.



SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of reach of children.

G

WARNING

If you attach heavy or large objects to the

SmartKey, the SmartKey could be unintentionally turned in the ignition lock. This could cause the engine to be switched off. There is a risk of an accident.

Do not attach any heavy or large objects to the

SmartKey. Remove any bulky key rings before inserting the SmartKey into the ignition lock.

!

Keep the SmartKey away from strong magnetic fields. Otherwise, the remote control function could be affected.

Strong magnetic fields can occur in the vicinity of powerful electrical installations.

Do not keep the SmartKey:

R

R

R with electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone or another SmartKey.

with metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil.

inside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case.

This can affect the functionality of the Smart-

Key.

Do not keep the KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-GO

Start function key in the temperature-controlled cup holder. Otherwise, the KEYLESS-GO or KEY-

LESS-GO Start function key will not be detected.

Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start function: do not keep the SmartKey in the cargo compartment. Otherwise, the SmartKey may not be detected, e.g. when starting the engine using the Start/Stop button.

SmartKey functions

:

;

=

X

& Locks the vehicle

F Opens/closes the tailgate

% Unlocks the vehicle

To unlock centrally: press the % button.

If you do not open the vehicle within approximately 40 seconds of unlocking:

R the vehicle is locked again.

R anti-theft protection is reactivated.

X

To lock centrally: press the & button.

The SmartKey centrally locks and unlocks the following components:

R

R the doors the tailgate

R the fuel filler flap

The turn signals flash once when unlocking and three times when locking.

You can also set an audible signal to confirm that the vehicle has been locked. The audible signal can be activated and deactivated using the on-board computer (

Y page 239).

You will receive visual and acoustic locking confirmation if all components were able to be locked.

SmartKey

75

If activated in the multimedia system, the locator lighting also lights up in the dark (see separate operating instructions).

X

To open the tailgate automatically from

outside the vehicle: press and hold the F button until the tailgate opens.

Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:

X

To close the tailgate automatically from

outside the vehicle: if the SmartKey is located in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle, press the F button on the SmartKey.

When the tailgate closes you can then release the button.

KEYLESS-GO

General notes

Bear in mind that the engine can be started by any of the vehicle occupants if there is a KEY-

LESS-GO key in the vehicle (

Y page 140).

Locking/unlocking centrally

You can start, lock or unlock the vehicle using

KEYLESS-GO. To do this, you only need carry the

SmartKey with you. You can combine the functions of KEYLESS-GO with those of a conventional SmartKey. Unlock the vehicle by using

KEYLESS-GO, for instance, and lock it using the

& button on the SmartKey.

The driver's door and the door at which the handle is used, must both be closed. The SmartKey must be outside the vehicle. When locking or unlocking with KEYLESS-GO, the distance between the SmartKey and the corresponding door handle must not be greater than 3 ft (1 m).

KEYLESS-GO checks whether a valid SmartKey is in the vehicle by periodically establishing a radio connection between the vehicle and the

SmartKey. This happens:

R

R

R

R when starting the engine while driving when the external door handles are touched during convenience closing

X

X

X

To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner surface of the door handle.

To lock the vehicle: touch sensor surface : or ;.

Make sure that you do not touch the inner surface of the door handle.

Convenience closing feature: touch recessed sensor surface ; for an extended period.

Further information on the convenience closing feature (

Y page 87).

If you pull on the handle of the tailgate, only the cargo compartment of the vehicle is unlocked.

Deactivating and activating

If you do not intend to use a SmartKey for an extended period of time, you can deactivate the

KEYLESS-GO function of the SmartKey. The

SmartKey will then use very little power, thereby conserving battery power. For the purposes of activation/deactivation, the vehicle must not be nearby.

X

X

To deactivate: press the & button on the

SmartKey twice in rapid succession.

The battery check lamp of the SmartKey flashes twice briefly and lights up once, KEY-

LESS-GO is deactivated (

Y page 77).

To activate: press any button on the Smart-

Key.

or

X


KEYLESS-GO and all of its associated features are available again.

Z

76

SmartKey

KEYLESS-GO start function

General notes

Bear in mind that the engine can be started by any of the vehicle occupants if there is a Smart-

Key in the vehicle (

Y page 140).

Changing the settings of the locking system

You can change the settings of the locking system. This means that only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap are unlocked when the vehicle is unlocked. This is useful if you frequently travel alone.

X

To change the setting: press and hold down the % and & buttons simultaneously for about six seconds until the battery indicator lamp flashes twice (

Y page 77).

If the setting of the locking system is changed within the signal range of the vehicle, pressing the & or % button:

R

R locks or unlocks the vehicle

The SmartKey now functions as follows:

X

X

X

To unlock: press the % button once.

To unlock centrally: press the % button twice.

To lock centrally: press the & button.

The KEYLESS-GO function is changed as follows:

X

X

X

To unlock the driver's door: touch the inner surface of the door handle on the driver's door.

To unlock centrally: touch the inner surface of the door handle on the front-passenger door or the rear door.

To lock centrally: touch the outer sensor surface on one of the door handles

(

Y page 75).

X

To restore the factory settings: press and hold down the % and & buttons simultaneously for approximately six seconds until the battery check lamp flashes twice

(

Y page 77).

Mechanical key

General notes

If the vehicle can no longer be locked or unlocked with the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-

GO, use the mechanical key.

If you use the mechanical key to unlock and open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm system will be triggered. Switch off the alarm

(

Y page 72).

If you unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key, the fuel filler flap will not be unlocked automatically.

X

To unlock the fuel filler flap: insert the

SmartKey into the ignition lock.

Removing the mechanical key

X

Push release catch : in the direction of the arrow and at the same time remove mechanical key ; from the SmartKey.

For further information about:

R

R

R unlocking the driver's door (

Y page 81) unlocking the cargo compartment

(

Y page 85) locking the vehicle (

Y page 81)

Inserting the mechanical key

X

Push mechanical key ; completely into the

SmartKey until it engages and release catch : is back in its basic position.

SmartKey

77

SmartKey battery


G

WARNING

Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substances. If batteries are swallowed, it can result in severe health problems. There is a risk of fatal injury.

Keep batteries out of the reach of children. If a battery is swallowed, seek medical attention immediately.

H


Batteries contain dangerous substances. It is against the law to dispose of them with the household rubbish. They must be collected separately and recycled to protect the environment.

Dispose of batteries in an environmentally friendly manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or a special collection point for used batteries.

The SmartKey batteries contain perchlorate material, which may require special handling and regard for the environment. National guidelines must be observed during disposal. In California, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/

HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the batteries replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.

Checking the battery

X

Press the & or % button.

The battery is working properly if battery check lamp : lights up briefly.

The battery is discharged if battery check

X lamp : does not light up briefly.

Change the battery (

Y page 77).

If the SmartKey battery is checked within the signal reception range of the vehicle, pressing the & or % button:

R

R locks or unlocks the vehicle i

You can get a battery at any qualified specialist workshop.

Replacing the battery

You require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery.

X

Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey

(

Y page 76).

X

X

Press mechanical key ; into the SmartKey opening in the direction of the arrow until battery compartment cover : opens. Do not hold battery compartment cover : closed while doing so.

Remove battery compartment cover :.

Z

78

SmartKey

X

X

X

Insert the front tabs of battery compartment cover : into the housing first and then press to close it.

Insert mechanical key ; into the SmartKey

(

Y page 76).

Check the function of all SmartKey buttons on the vehicle.

X

X

X

Repeatedly tap the SmartKey against your palm until battery = falls out.

Insert the new battery with the positive terminal facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth to do so.

Make sure that the surface of the battery is free of lint, grease and other contaminants.

Problems with the SmartKey

Problem

You can no longer lock or unlock the vehicle using the SmartKey.

You can no longer lock or unlock the vehicle using

KEYLESS-GO.


The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.

X

Check the SmartKey battery (

Y page 77) and replace it if necessary

(

Y page 77).

If this does not work:

X

Unlock (

Y page 81) or lock (

Y page 81) the vehicle using the mechanical key.

There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.

X

Unlock (



The SmartKey is faulty.

X

X

Unlock (



Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

KEYLESS-GO was deactivated.

X

Reactivate KEYLESS-GO (

Y page 75).


X



(

Y page 77).


X

Unlock (



SmartKey

79

Problem

The engine cannot be started using the Smart-

Key.

The engine cannot be started using the Start/

Stop button. The Smart-

Key is in the vehicle.

You have lost a Smart-

Key.

You have lost the mechanical key.



X

Unlock (



KEYLESS-GO is malfunctioning.

X

X

Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of the

SmartKey.

Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

If the vehicle can also not be locked/unlocked using the remote control function:

X

X

Unlock (



Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

The on-board voltage is too low.

X

Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interior lighting, and try to start the engine again.


X

Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary (

Y page 338).

or

X

Jump-start the vehicle (

Y page 338).

or

X

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The vehicle is locked.

X

Unlock the vehicle and try to start the vehicle again.


X



(

Y page 77).


X

Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.


X

Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

X

X

X

Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop.

Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.

If necessary, have the locks changed as well.

X

X

Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.

If necessary, have the locks changed as well.

Z

80

Doors

Doors


G

WARNING








R

Start the engine.




X

X

X

Front door: pull door handle ;.

If the door is locked, locking knob : pops up.

The door is unlocked and can be opened.

Rear door: pull door handle ;.

If the door is locked, locking knob : pops up and the door unlocks.

Pull door handle ; again.

The door can be opened.

Centrally locking and unlocking the vehicle from the inside

You can centrally lock or unlock the vehicle from the inside. The buttons are located on both front doors.

Unlocking and opening doors from the inside

You can open a door from inside the vehicle even if it has been locked. You can only open the rear doors from inside the vehicle if they are not secured by the child-proof locks (

Y page 62).

If the vehicle has previously been locked from the outside, opening a door from the inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm system. Switch off the alarm (

Y page 72).

X

X

To unlock: press button :.

To lock: press button ;.

If the front-passenger door is closed, the vehicle locks.

Meanwhile, the fuel filler flap will not be locked or unlocked.

You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally from the inside if the vehicle has been locked from the outside.

You can open a front door from inside the vehicle even if it has been locked.

If a locked door is opened from the inside, the previous unlock status of the vehicle will be taken into consideration if:

R the vehicle was locked using the locking button for the central locking, or

R if the vehicle was locked automatically

The vehicle will be fully unlocked if it had previously been fully unlocked. If only the driver's door had been previously unlocked, only the door which has been opened from the inside is unlocked.

Automatic locking feature

Cargo compartment

81

Unlocking/locking the driver's door using the mechanical key

i

If you want to centrally lock the vehicle using the mechanical key, begin by pressing the locking button for the interior locking mechanism while the driver's door is open. Then lock the driver's door using the mechanical key.

X

X

To deactivate: press and hold button : for about five seconds until a tone sounds.

To activate: press and hold button ; for about five seconds until a tone sounds.

If you press one of the two buttons and do not hear a tone, the relevant setting has already been selected.

The vehicle is locked automatically when the ignition is switched on and the wheels are turning.

You could therefore be locked out if:

R

R the vehicle is being pushed.

the vehicle is being towed.

R the vehicle is on a roller dynamometer.

You can also switch the automatic locking function on and off using the on-board computer

(

Y page 239).

X

X

X

Insert the mechanical key into the lock of the driver's door as far as it will go.

To unlock: turn the mechanical key counterclockwise to position 1.

To lock: turn the mechanical key clockwise as far as it will go to position 1.

If you use the mechanical key to unlock and open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm system will be triggered. Switch off the alarm

(

Y page 72).

If you lock the vehicle as described above, the fuel filler flap is not locked. The anti-theft alarm system is not armed.

Power closing

Power closing pulls the doors and tailgate into their locks automatically even if they are not completely closed.

X

X

To power close a door: push the door into the lock up to the first detent position.

Power closing will pull the door fully closed.

To power close the tailgate: lightly press the tailgate downwards.

Power closing will pull the tailgate fully closed.



G

WARNING

Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. If the tailgate is open when the engine is running, particularly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust fumes could enter the passenger compartment.

There is a risk of poisoning.

Turn off the engine before opening the tailgate. Never drive with the tailgate open.

Z

82


G

WARNING

If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction.

Always store objects so that they cannot be flung around. Secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping before the journey.

!

The tailgate swings upwards and to the rear when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above and behind the tailgate.

The opening dimensions of the tailgate can be found in the "Vehicle data" section

(

Y page 384).

You should preferably place luggage or loads in the cargo compartment. Observe the loading guidelines (

Y page 294).

Do not leave the SmartKey in the cargo compartment. You could otherwise lock yourself out.

You can:

R

R

R

R

R close the tailgate manually from outside open and close the tailgate automatically from outside open and close the tailgate automatically from inside limit the opening angle of the tailgate unlock the tailgate from inside with the emergency release

G

WARNING

The reversing feature does not respond:

R to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers

R over the last Ó in (8 mm) of the closing movement

The reversing feature cannot prevent someone from becoming trapped in these situations in particular. There is a risk of injury.

Make sure that no body parts are in close proximity during the closing procedure.

If somebody becomes trapped:

R press the F button on the SmartKey, or

R pull or press the remote operating switch on the driver's door or

R press the closing or locking button on the tailgate or

R pull the handle on the tailgate

Opening and closing manually from outside

Opening

Tailgate reversing feature

On vehicles with the tailgate remote closing feature, the tailgate is equipped with automatic obstacle recognition with a reversing feature. If a solid object blocks or restricts the tailgate when automatically opening or closing, this procedure is stopped. If the tailgate is stopped during the closing procedure, it will open again automatically. The automatic obstacle recognition with reversing feature is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attentiveness when opening and closing the tailgate.

X

X

Press the % button on the SmartKey.

Pull handle : and release it.

The tailgate opens automatically.


83

Closing

X

X

X

Pull the tailgate down using recess :.

Allow the tailgate to drop into the lock.

Lock the vehicle if necessary with the & button on the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO.

i

If a KEYLESS-GO key is detected in the cargo compartment, the tailgate will not lock.

Opening/closing automatically from outside


G

WARNING

Parts of the body could become trapped during automatic closing of the tailgate. Moreover, people, e.g. children, may be standing in the closing area or may enter the closing area during the closing process. There is a risk of injury.

Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the closing area during the closing process.

Use one of the following options to stop the closing process:

R press the F button on the SmartKey.

R pull or press the remote operating switch on the driver's door.

R press the closing or locking button on the tailgate.

R pull the handle on the tailgate

G

WARNING




!


Two warning tones sound while the tailgate is opening or closing.


(

Y page 384).

i

Notes on the automatic reversing feature for the tailgate (

Y page 82).

Opening the tailgate automatically

You can open the tailgate automatically with the

SmartKey or the handle in the tailgate.

X

Press and hold the F button on the Smart-

Key until the tailgate opens.

or

X

When the tailgate is unlocked, pull the tailgate handle and let it go again immediately.

or

X

With the tailgate stopped in an intermediate position, pull the tailgate upwards.

You can release the tailgate as soon as the tailgate starts to open.

Closing the tailgate automatically

Z

84


X

To close: press closing button : in the tailgate.

or

X or

X

Press and hold the F button on the Smart-

Key until the tailgate closes.

You can release the button as soon as the tailgate starts to close.

Pull the tailgate downwards slightly.

You can release the tailgate as soon as the tailgate starts to close.

Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: you can simultaneously close and lock the tailgate.

X

Press locking button ; in the tailgate.

If a KEYLESS-GO key is detected outside the vehicle, the tailgate closes and locks. All the doors must be shut and the SmartKey located in the vicinity of the tailgate.

i

The tailgate cannot be opened and closed with the SmartKey if there is a SmartKey in the ignition.

If the tailgate touches an object while closing, the closing procedure is interrupted and the tailgate reopens.

i

If a KEYLESS-GO key is detected in the cargo compartment, the tailgate will not lock.

G

WARNING




!


Two warning tones sound while the tailgate is opening or closing.


(

Y page 384).

i

Notes on the automatic reversing feature for the tailgate (

Y page 82).

Opening and closing

Opening/closing automatically from inside


G

WARNING

Parts of the body could become trapped during automatic closing of the tailgate. In addition, people may be standing in the closing area or may enter the closing area, e.g. children, during the closing procedure. There is a risk of injury.

Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the closing area during the closing process.

Release the remote operating switch immediately if somebody becomes trapped. To reopen the tailgate pull on the remote operating switch.

X

X

X

To open:pull remote operating switch : for the tailgate until the tailgate opens.

To close: turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock.

Press remote operating switch for tailgate : until the tailgate is completely closed.

You can open and close the tailgate from the driver's seat when the vehicle is stationary and unlocked.

Side windows

85

Limiting the opening angle of the tailgate

General notes

!

Make sure there is sufficient clearance to open the tailgate fully when setting the opening angle. The tailgate could otherwise be damaged. Ideally, set the opening angle outside.

Activating

You can limit the opening angle of the tailgate.

This is possible in the top half of its opening range, up to approximately 4 in (10 cm) before the stop.

X

X

X

To open the tailgate: pull the handle on the tailgate.

To stop the opening procedure at the

desired position: press the closing button in the tailgate or pull the handle on the outside of the tailgate again.

To save the position: press and hold the closing button in the tailgate until two short tones sound.

The opening angle limiter is activated. The tailgate will now stop in the stored position when opening.

Deactivating

X

Press and hold the closing button in the tailgate until you hear a short tone.

Tailgate emergency release

General notes

!



(

Y page 384).

If the tailgate can no longer be unlocked:

R

R using the SmartKey, or using the remote operating switch in the door control panel:

Use the emergency release.

Opening

X

X

X

X

Take mechanical key ; out of the SmartKey

(

Y page 76).

Insert mechanical key ; or a suitable tool, e.g. a thin screwdriver, into opening : in the paneling and push it in.

The tailgate is released.

Open the tailgate.

Insert mechanical key ; into the SmartKey

(

Y page 76).

Side windows


G

WARNING

While opening the side windows, body parts could become trapped between the side window and the door frame as the side window moves. There is a risk of injury.

Make sure that nobody touches the side window during the opening procedure. If somebody becomes trapped, release the switch or pull the switch to close the side window again.

G

WARNING

While closing the side windows, body parts in the closing area could become trapped. There is a risk of injury.

When closing make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. If somebody becomes trapped, release the switch or press the switch to open the side window again.

Z

86

Side windows

G

WARNING

If children operate the side windows they could become trapped, particularly if they are left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.

Activate the override feature for the rear side windows. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

Side window reversing feature

The side windows are equipped with an automatic reversing feature. If a solid object blocks or restricts a side window during the closing process, the side window opens again automatically. However, the automatic reversing feature is only an aid and does not relieve you of the responsibility of paying attention when closing a side window.

G

WARNING

The reversing feature does not react:

R to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fingers

R over the last 1/6 in(4 mm) of the closing movement

R during resetting

R when closing the side window again manually immediately after automatic reversing

This means that the reversing feature cannot prevent someone being trapped in these situations. There is a risk of injury.

Make sure that no body parts are in close proximity during the closing procedure. If someone becomes trapped, press the switch to open the side window again.

Opening and closing the side windows

The switches for all side windows are located on the driver's door. There is also a switch on each door for the corresponding side window.

The switches on the driver's door take precedence.

:

;

=

?

X

X

X

X

X

X

Front left

Front right

Rear right

Rear left

Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock.

To open manually: press and hold the corresponding switch.

To open fully: press the switch beyond the point of resistance and release it.

Automatic operation is started.

To close manually: pull the corresponding switch and hold it.

To close fully: pull the switch beyond the point of resistance and release it.

Automatic operation is started.

To interrupt automatic operation: press/ pull the corresponding switch again.

If you press the switch beyond the point of resistance and release, automatic operation is started in the corresponding direction. You can stop automatic operation by pressing/pulling the switch again.

You can continue to operate the side windows after you switch off the engine or remove the

SmartKey. This function is available for up to five minutes or until the driver's or front-passenger door is opened.

The side windows cannot be operated from the rear when the override feature for the side windows is activated (

Y page 62).

Opening and closing the hinged side windows

The hinged side windows are operated electrically from the from the driver's seat.

Side windows

87

X

X

X

X


To open fully: press switch : and release it.

To close fully: pull switch : and release it.

To stop the closing procedure: press switch : again.

If the hinged side windows become blocked during closing, the closing procedure is stopped.

The hinged side windows then open again fully.

Convenience opening

X

X

X

X

Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: point the tip of the SmartKey at the door handle on the driver's door.

Press and hold the % button until the side windows and the sliding sunroof or panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel are in the desired position.

If the roller sunblinds of the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel are closed, the roller sunblinds are opened first.

Press and hold the % button again until the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is in the desired position.

To interrupt convenience opening: release the % button.

Convenience opening

General notes

Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-GO

start function: you can ventilate the vehicle before you start driving.

To do this, the SmartKey is used to carry out the following functions simultaneously:

R

R

R

R

R unlock the vehicle open the side windows open the hinged side windows open the sliding sunroof or the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel and the roller sunblinds switch on the seat ventilation for the driver's seat

The convenience opening feature can only be operated using the SmartKey. The SmartKey must be close to the vehicle. For vehicles without KEYLESS-GO, the SmartKey must be near the driver's door handle.

The "convenience opening" feature is also available when the vehicle is unlocked.

Convenience closing feature


G

WARNING

When the convenience closing feature is operating, parts of the body could become trapped in the closing area of the side window and the sliding sunroof. There is a risk of injury.

Observe the complete closing procedure when the convenience closing feature is operating. Make sure that no body parts are in close proximity during the closing procedure.

When you lock the vehicle, you can simultaneously:

R

R

R close the side windows close the hinged side windows close the sliding sunroof or the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel

On vehicles with a panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel, you can then close the roller sunblinds.

Proceed as follows if someone is trapped:

R

R

Release the & button to interrupt the closing procedure.

Press and hold the % button to open.

Z

88

Side windows


R

R

Release the sensor surfaces on the exterior door handle to interrupt the closing procedure.

To open, pull the same door handle immediately and hold it firmly. The door windows and the sliding sunroof will open for as long as the door handle is held but the door is not opened.

Notes on the automatic reversing feature for:

R

R

R the side window (

Y page 86) the sliding sunroof (

Y page 90) the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel (

Y page 90)

Using the SmartKey

The SmartKey must be close to the vehicle. For vehicles without KEYLESS-GO, the SmartKey must be near the driver's door handle.

X

X

X

Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: point the tip of the SmartKey at the door handle on the driver's door.

Press and hold the & button until the side windows and the sliding sunroof or the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel are fully closed.

Make sure that all the side windows and the sliding sunroof or panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel are closed.

On vehicles with a panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel:

X

Press and hold the & button again until the roller sunblinds of the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel close.

X

To interrupt convenience closing: release the & button.

Using KEYLESS-GO

X

Touch recessed sensor surface : on the door handle until the side windows and the sliding sunroof or the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel are fully closed.

i

Make sure you only touch recessed sensor surface :.

X

X

X

Make sure that all the side windows and the sliding sunroof or panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel are closed.

Vehicles with a panorama roof with

power tilt/sliding panel: touch recessed sensor surface : on the door handle again until the roller sunblinds of the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel close.

To interrupt convenience closing:release recessed sensor surface : on the door handle.

Resetting the side windows

If a side window can no longer be closed fully, you must reset it.

X

X

X

X

Close all the doors.


Pull the corresponding switch on the door control panel until the side window is completely closed (

Y page 86).

Hold the switch for an additional second.

If the side window opens again slightly:

X

X

X

Immediately pull the corresponding switch on the door control panel until the side window is completely closed (

Y page 86).

Hold the switch for an additional second.

If the respective side window remains closed after the button is released, then it has been

Sliding sunroof

89

set correctly. If this is not the case, repeat the steps above.

Problems with the side windows

G

WARNING

If you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the side window closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts of the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.

Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. To stop the closing process, release the switch or push the switch again to reopen the side window.

Problem

A side window cannot be closed because it is blocked by objects, e.g.

leaves in the window guide.

A side window cannot be closed and you cannot see the cause.


X

X

Remove the objects.

Close the side window.

If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again slightly:

X

Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch again until the side window has closed.

The side window is closed with increased force.

If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopens again slightly:

X

Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch again until the side window has closed.

The sliding sunroof is closed without the automatic reversing feature.

Sliding sunroof


Your vehicle may be equipped with a sliding sunroof or a panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel. In the following section, the term

"sliding sunroof" refers to both sliding sunroof variants.

G

WARNING

While opening and closing the sliding sunroof, body parts in close proximity could become trapped. There is a risk of injury.

Make sure that no body parts are in close proximity during the opening and closing procedures.


R release the switch immediately, or

R during automatic operation, push the switch briefly in any direction

The opening or closing procedure will be stopped.

Z

90

Sliding sunroof

G

WARNING

If children operate the sliding sunroof they could become trapped, particularly if they are left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.



!

Only open the sliding sunroof if it is free of snow and ice. Otherwise, malfunctions may occur.

Do not allow anything to protrude from the sliding sunroof. Otherwise, the seals could be damaged.

!

The weather can change abruptly. It could start to rain or snow. Make sure that the sliding sunroof is closed when you leave the vehicle. The vehicle electronics can be damaged if water enters the vehicle interior.

Resonance noises can occur in addition to the usual airflow noises when the sliding sunroof is open. They are caused by minor pressure fluctuations in the vehicle interior. Change the position of the sliding sunroof or open a side window. The noise will be reduced or eliminated.

R during resetting

R when closing the sliding sunroof again manually immediately after automatic reversing

This means that the reversing feature cannot prevent someone being trapped in these situations. There is a risk of injury.

Make sure that no body parts are in close proximity during the closing procedure.



R press the switch in any direction during the automatic closing process

The closing process is stopped.

Operating the sliding sunroof


Sliding sunroof reversing feature

Your vehicle may be equipped with a sliding sunroof or a panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel. In the following section, the term

"sliding sunroof" refers to both sliding sunroof variants.

The sliding sunroof is equipped with an automatic reversing feature. If a solid object blocks or restricts the sliding sunroof during the closing process, the sliding sunroof opens again automatically. However, the automatic reversing feature is only an aid and does not relieve you of the responsibility of paying attention when closing the sliding sunroof.

G

WARNING

The reversing feature does not react:

R to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fingers

R over the last 1/6 in (4 mm) of the closing movement

:

;

=

X

X

To raise

To open

To close/lower


Press or pull the 2 switch in the corresponding direction.

If you press the 2 switch beyond the point of resistance, an automatic opening/closing process is started in the corresponding direction.

You can stop automatic operation by pressing/ pulling the switch again.

When opening and raising the roof, automatic operation is only available if the sliding sunroof is in the closed position.

The sun protection cover automatically opens along with the sliding sunroof. You can open or

Sliding sunroof

91

close the sun protection cover manually when the sliding sunroof is raised or closed.

You can continue to operate the sliding sunroof after switching off the engine or removing the

SmartKey from the ignition lock. This function is available for up to five minutes or until the driver's or front-passenger door is opened.

Resetting

!

If the sliding sunroof still cannot be opened or closed fully after resetting, contact a qualified specialist workshop.

Reset the sliding sunroof if it does not move smoothly.

X

X

X

X

X


Raise the sliding sunroof fully at the rear

(

Y page 90).

Keep the 2 switch pressed for another second.

Make sure that the sliding sunroof can be fully opened and closed again (

Y page 90).

If this is not the case, repeat the steps above.

Operating the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel


:

;

=

To raise

To open

To close/lower

The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel can only be opened when the roller sunblind is open.

X

X



If you press/pull the 2 switch beyond the point of resistance, automatic operation is started in the corresponding direction. You can stop automatic operation by pressing/pulling the switch again.

The automatic raising feature is available only when the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is closed.

Operating the roller sunblinds for the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel


G

WARNING

Parts of the body could become trapped between the roller sunblind and frame or sliding sunroof during automatic opening or closing. There is a risk of injury.

When opening or closing, make sure that no body parts are in the sweep of the roller sunblind.



R during automatic operation, push the switch briefly in any direction

The opening or closing procedure will be stopped.

The roller sunblinds shield the vehicle interior from sunlight. The roller sunblinds can only be opened and closed together when the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is closed.

Roller sunblind reversing feature

The roller sunblinds are equipped with an automatic reversing feature. If a solid object blocks or restricts a roller sunblind during the closing process, the roller sunblind opens again automatically. However, the automatic reversing feature is only an aid and does not relieve you of the responsibility of paying attention when closing the roller sunblinds.

Z

92

Sliding sunroof

G

WARNING

The reversing feature does not react in particular to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fingers. This means that the reversing feature cannot prevent someone being trapped in these situations. There is a risk of injury.

When closing the roller sunblind, make sure that no body parts are in the sweep area.





Opening and closing the roller sunblinds

:

;

=

X

X

To open

To open

To close



If you press the 2 switch beyond the point of resistance, an automatic opening/closing process is started in the corresponding direction.

You can stop automatic operation by pressing/ pulling the switch again.

Resetting the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel and the roller sunblinds

!

If the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel and the roller sunblinds cannot be fully opened or closed after resetting, contact a qualified specialist workshop.

Reset the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel and the roller sunblinds if the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel or the roller sunblinds do not move smoothly.

X

X


Pull the 2 switch repeatedly to the point of resistance in the direction of arrow = until

X

X

X

X

X the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is fully closed.

Keep the 2 switch pulled for an additional second.

Pull the 2 switch repeatedly to the point of resistance in the direction of arrow = until the roller sunblinds are fully closed.

Keep the 2 switch pulled for an additional second.

Make sure that the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel and the roller sunblinds can be fully opened again.

If this is not the case, repeat the steps above.

Problems with the sliding sunroof

Your vehicle may be equipped with a sliding sunroof or a panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel. In the following section, the term "sliding sunroof" refers to both sliding sunroof variants.

G

WARNING

If you close the sliding sunroof again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the sliding sunroof closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts of the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.

Sliding sunroof

93

Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area.





!

If the sliding sunroof still cannot be opened or closed as a result of a malfunction, contact a qualified specialist workshop.

Problem

The sliding sunroof cannot be closed and you cannot see the cause.


If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during closing and reopens again slightly:

X

Immediately after the sliding sunroof blocks, pull the 2 switch in the overhead control panel down to the point of resistance and hold it until the sliding sunroof is closed.

The sliding sunroof is closed with increased force.

If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again during closing and then reopens slightly:

X

Immediately after the sliding sunroof blocks, pull the 2 switch in the overhead control panel down to the point of resistance and hold it until the sliding sunroof is closed.

The sliding sunroof is closed without the automatic reversing feature.

Z

94

Seats

Correct driver's seat position

G

WARNING

You could lose control of your vehicle if you do the following while driving:

R adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel or mirrors

R fasten the seat belt


Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine.

R

R you should have a good overview of traffic conditions.

the seat belt is pulled snugly against the body and is routed across the center of your shoulder and across your hips in the pelvic area.

Further related subjects:

R

R

R

R

R

Electrical seat adjustment (

Y page 96)

Adjusting the steering wheel mechanically

(

Y page 105) or electrically (

Y page 106)

Fastening the seat belt correctly (

Y page 44).

Adjusting the rear-view mirror and exterior mirrors (

Y page 107).

Vehicles with memory function: storing the seat, steering wheel, exterior mirror and

Head-up Display settings with the memory function (

Y page 110)

Observe the following when adjusting steering wheel :, seat belt ; and driver's seat =:

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R you are as far away from the driver's air bag as possible.

you are sitting in a normal upright position.

your thighs are slightly supported by the seat cushion.

your legs are not entirely stretched and you can depress the pedals properly.

the back of your head is supported at eye level by the center of the head restraint.

you can hold the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent.

you can move your legs freely.

you can see all the displays in the instrument cluster clearly.

Seats


G

WARNING

Children could become trapped if they adjust the seats, particularly when unattended.

There is a risk of injury.



The seats can still be adjusted when there is no

SmartKey in the ignition lock.

G

WARNING

When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the seat guide rail. There is a risk of injury.

Make sure when adjusting a seat that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.

Observe the safety notes on "Air bags"

(

Y page 46) and "Children in the Vehicle"

(

Y page 57).

Seats

95

G

WARNING






G

WARNING

If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or other vehicle occupants could be trapped and thereby injured. Children in particular could accidentally press the electrical seat adjustment buttons and become trapped. There is a risk of injury.

While moving the seats, make sure that your hands or other body parts do not get under the lever assembly of the seat adjustment system.

G

WARNING

If the head restraints are not installed or not adjusted correctly, they cannot provide protection as intended. There is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking.

Always drive with the head restraints installed. Before driving off, make sure for every vehicle occupant that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level.

G

WARNING

The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the backrest to an almost vertical position. When braking or in the event of an accident, you could slide underneath the seat belt and sustain abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.

Adjust the seat properly before beginning your journey. Always ensure that the backrest is in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder section of your seat belt is routed across the center of your shoulder.

!

To avoid damage to the seats and the seat heating, observe the following information:

R keep liquids from spilling on the seats. If liquid is spilled on the seats, dry them as soon as possible.

R if the seat covers are damp or wet, do not switch on the seat heating. The seat heating should also not be used to dry the seats.

R clean the seat covers as recommended;

R see "Interior care".

do not transport heavy loads on the seats.

Do not place sharp objects on the seat cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools. The seats should only be occupied by passengers, if possible.

R when the seat heating is in operation, do not cover the seats with insulating materials, e.g. blankets, coats, bags, seat covers, child seats or booster seats.

!

Make sure that there are no objects in the footwell under or behind the seats when moving the seats back. There is a risk that the seats and/or the objects could be damaged.

i

It is not possible to remove the head restraints from the front seats. The rear-compartment head restraints, however, can be removed (

Y page 98).

For more information, contact a qualified specialist workshop.

i


R

Cargo compartment enlargement (folding down the rear bench seat) (

Y page 297)

Z

96

Seats

Adjusting the seats electrically

:

;

=

?

A

Head restraint height

Seat cushion angle

Seat height

Seat fore-and-aft adjustment

Backrest angle i

Vehicles with memory function: if PRE-

SAFE

® has been triggered, the frontpassenger seat will be moved to a better position if it was previously in an unfavorable position.

i

Vehicles with memory function: when the seat is moved forwards or backwards, the headrest is moved up or down automatically.

of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking.

Always drive with the head restraints installed. Before driving off, make sure for every vehicle occupant that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level.

Do not rotate the head restraints of the front and rear seats. Otherwise, you cannot adjust the height and angle of the head restraints to the correct position.

Using the fore-and-aft adjustment, adjust the head restraint so that it is as close as possible to your head.

Observe the important safety notes regarding the seats (

Y page 94).

Adjusting the head restraints manually

Adjusting the head restraint height

Adjusting the head restraints


G

WARNING






G

WARNING

If the head restraints are not installed or not adjusted correctly, they cannot provide protection as intended. There is an increased risk

X

X

To raise: pull the head restraint up to the desired position.

To lower: press release catch : in the direction of the arrow and push the head restraint down to the desired position.

Adjusting the fore/aft position of the head restraint

Seats

97

Adjusting the luxury head restraints

With this function you can adjust the distance between the head restraint and the back of the seat occupant's head.

X

X

X

To move forwards: pull the head restraint forwards in the direction of the arrow until it engages.

There are several notches.

To move backwards: press and hold release button : and push the head restraint backwards.

When the head restraint is in the desired position, release the button and make sure that the head restraint is engaged in position.

i

Adjust the head restraint so that the back of your head is as close to the head restraint as possible.

Adjusting the head restraints electrically

X

To adjust the head restraint height: slide the switch for the head restraint adjustment

(

Y page 96) up or down in the direction of the arrow.

X

X

To adjust the side bolsters of the head

restraint: push or pull right and/or left-hand side bolster : into the desired position.

To adjust the fore/aft position of the head

restraint: push or pull the head restraint in the direction of arrow ;.

i

Adjust the head restraint so that the back of your head is as close to the head restraint as possible.

Rear seat head restraints

Adjusting the rear seat head restraint height

X

X

X

Once the head restraint is fully lowered, press release catch :.

To raise: pull the head restraint up to the desired position.

To lower: press release catch : and push the head restraint down until it is in the desired position.

Z

98

Seats

Removing and installing the rear seat head restraints

X

X

X

X

To remove: pull the head restraint up to the stop.

Press release catch : and pull the head restraint out of the guides.

To re-install: insert the head restraint so that the notches on the bar are on the left when viewed in the direction of travel.

Push the head restraint down until you hear it engage in position.

Rear seats (second and third row of seats)


G

WARNING

If the seat and backrest are not engaged, they can fold forwards, e.g. in the event of sudden braking or an accident.

R

This will cause the vehicle occupants to be forced into the seat belt by a seat or backrest which is not engaged. The seat belt can no longer offer the intended level of protection and could even cause injuries.

R

A child restraint system would no longer be anchored or positioned correctly and would not be able to perform its required function.

R

The seat backrests cannot restrain objects or loads in the cargo compartment.

There is an increased risk of injury.

Always make sure that the seat and backrest are engaged as described:

R before traveling with a passenger on a seat with the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature

R after you have adjusted the seat

R after the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature has been used

R after the cargo compartment enlargement has been folded forwards

G

WARNING

The seat does not engage in the entry/exit position. The seat could fold back suddenly, e.g. when accelerating, braking, changing direction suddenly or in the event of an accident. Persons in the sweep of the seat could become trapped. There is a risk of injury.

Always fold back a seat which has been folded forwards before you pull away. Make sure that the seat and backrest engage fully.

G

WARNING

Children could become trapped if they adjust the seats, particularly when unattended.




G

WARNING



Adjusting the backrest angle (second row of seats)

You can adjust the angle of the backrests in the second row of seats. There are ten detent positions to choose from.

X

X

X

Pull the left or right release lever ; upwards in the direction of the arrow until relevant backrest : is fully released.

Pull backrest : forwards in the direction of the arrow and allow it to engage.

To ensure that the backrest has engaged, lean firmly against backrest :.

Seats

99

Folding the seats up/down (third row of seats)

General notes

!

Make sure that there is nothing on the folded-down seats in the cargo compartment.

The cargo compartment must be empty for the third row of seats to be folded up. The seats or the objects in the cargo compartment could otherwise be damaged.

Make sure that the seats in the third row are empty and not blocked before folding them down.

The 3rd row of seats consists of two electrically foldable individual seats, which can be lowered into the cargo compartment.

If the seat is not correctly locked in position, the display message: 3rd Seat Row, Right Not

Locked appears in the multifunction display.

If you fold the seat back until it engages, the display message disappears.

Pull the backrest firmly to ensure that it is fully engaged.

The switches for folding the left or right-hand seats up and down are marked: L for the lefthand seat when viewed in the direction of travel,

R for the right-hand seat when viewed in the direction of travel.

Folding forwards/back in the rear compartment

X

X

To fold down: briefly press switch :.

The seat folds down.

To stop the automatic folding: briefly press switch : again.

Folding down/up in the cargo compartment

Example: L switch

X

To fold down: fold the right-hand outer seat in the second row of seats forwards

X

X

(

Y page 100).

Briefly press switch :.

The seat folds up.

To stop the automatic folding: briefly press

X

X switch : again.

To fold down: briefly pull switch :.

The seat folds down.

To stop the automatic folding: briefly pull switch : again.

Detachable panel (third row of seats)

!

If there are objects underneath the seat, the seat can no longer be folded up or down fully.

The seat could be damaged.

Only drive with the panel completely installed.

Example: R switch

X

To fold down: fold the right-hand outer seat in the second row of seats forwards

X

X

(

Y page 100).

Briefly pull switch :.

The seat folds up.

To stop the automatic folding: briefly pull switch : again.

Z

100

Seats

If you drop objects underneath the seats in the third row, you can remove the panel in order to reach beneath the seat.

X

To open: fold the corresponding seat up or

X

X

X

X down (

Y page 99).

Once the seat is folded halfway up or down, briefly press the button again to stop the automatic movement.

Grasp the panel recess.

Pull the panel in the direction of the arrow and remove it.

To close: fold the corresponding seat up or

X

X

X

X down (

Y page 99).

Once the seat is folded halfway up or down, briefly press the button again to stop the automatic movement.

Attach the panel using the guide pins.

Push the panel downwards until it engages.

Fold the seat up and down fully to check that the panel is seated correctly.

Folding down the seats in the second row manually


G

WARNING


R


R


R








G

WARNING



General notes

Getting into or out of the third row of seats: you can fold forward the right outer seat in the second row of seats.

If the right outer rear seat in the second row of seats is in the entry/exit position: the display message: 2nd Seat Row, Right Not Locked appears in the multifunction display, for example.



i


R

Cargo compartment enlargement (folding the second row of seats forwards)

(

Y page 297)

R

Folding the seats in the third row forwards/ back (

Y page 99)

Entry position

Seats

101

X

X

Move the head restraint to the lowest position

(

Y page 97).

Pull release handle ; in the direction of the arrow to the pressure point and hold it in this position.

The backrest folds forwards.

You have two options for folding the seat down fully.

X

Pull release handle ; again in the direction of the arrow to the pressure point and hold it in this position.

or

X

X

Pull on release loop : in the direction of the arrow and hold in this position.

Lift up the seat until it folds forwards.

i

Vehicles with memory function: the front seats move forwards slightly.

If you wish to exit the third row of seats, fold down the outer seat on the right-hand side as follows.

The release loop for the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is located at the bottom on the back of the right outer seat in the second row of seats.

X

X

X

Pull on release loop : in the direction of the arrow and hold in this position.

The backrest folds forwards.

Pull on release loop : again in the direction of the arrow and hold in this position.

Lift up the seat until it folds forwards.

i

Vehicles with memory function: the front seats move forwards slightly.

Entry position

Exit position

G

WARNING



i


R

Important safety notes on air bags

R

(

Y page 46)

Securing children in the vehicle

(

Y page 57)

Exit position i

Vehicles with memory function: in order to return the front seats to the saved position, call up the saved seat setting using the memory buttons.

Z

102

Seats

Moving the outer seats back to the normal position (second row of seats)

G

WARNING


R


R


R








G

WARNING



X

X

To lock the seat: fold back the seat until it engages.

Fold back the backrest until it engages.

Folding down the seats in the second row electrically


G

WARNING


R


R


R








G

WARNING



General notes

To enter or exit the third row of seats: the outer left and right seats of the second row can be folded down electrically.

Seats

103

One of the outer seats of the second row is in the entry/exit position: the multifunction display shows, e.g. the 2nd Seat Row, Right Not

Locked display message.



i


R

Cargo compartment enlargement (folding the second row of seats forwards)

(

Y page 297)

R

Folding the seats in the third row forwards/ back (

Y page 99)

Folding down the seats

The seats can be folded down electrically if the vehicle is stationary and the respective rear door is open.

Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support

:

;

=

?

Raises the backrest contour

Softens the backrest contour

Lowers the backrest contour

Hardens the backrest contour

You can adjust the contour of the front seat backrests individually to provide optimum support for your back.

X

Press button :.

The head restraint retracts, the backrest folds forwards and the seat folds forwards.

The seat can be manually returned to its initial position (

Y page 100).

Seat heating and seat ventilation

Switching the seat heating on/off

G

WARNING

Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can cause the seat cushion and backrest pads to become very hot. The health of persons with limited temperature sensitivity or a limited ability to react to excessively high temperatures may be affected or they may even suffer burn-like injuries. There is a risk of injury.

Therefore, do not switch the seat heating on repeatedly.

Adjusting the multicontour seat

The multicontour seat can be adjusted via the multimedia system (see the separate operating instructions).

Z

104

Seats

i

If the battery voltage is too low, the seat heating may switch off.

Activating and deactivating seat ventilation

Driver's and front-passenger seat

Rear seats

The three red indicator lamps in the button indicate the heating level you have selected.

The system automatically switches down from level 3 to level 2 after approximately eight minutes.

The system automatically switches down from level 2 to level 1 after approximately ten minutes.

The system automatically switches off approximately 35 minutes after it is set to level 1.

X

X

X

Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (

Y page 138).

To switch on: press button : repeatedly until the desired heating level is set.

To switch off: press button : repeatedly until all the indicator lamps go out.

The three blue indicator lamps in the buttons indicate the ventilation level you have selected.

X


Y page 138).

X

X

To switch on: press button : repeatedly until the desired ventilation level is set.

To switch off: press button : repeatedly until all the indicator lamps go out.

i

If the battery voltage is too low, the seat ventilation may switch off.

i

You can open the side windows and the sliding sunroof using the "Convenience opening" feature (

Y page 87). The seat ventilation of the driver's seat automatically switches to the highest level.

Steering wheel

105

Problems with the seat heating or seat ventilation

Problem

The seat heating or seat ventilation has switched off prematurely or cannot be switched on.


The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical consumers are switched on.

X

Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as the rear window defroster or interior lighting.

Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat heating or seat ventilation will switch back on automatically.

Steering wheel


G

WARNING






G

WARNING

Children could injure themselves if they adjust the steering wheel. There is a risk of injury.



The electrically adjustable steering wheel can still be adjusted when there is no SmartKey in the ignition lock.

control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.

Before starting off, make sure the steering wheel is locked. Never unlock the steering wheel while the vehicle is in motion.

:

;

=

X

X

X

X

Release lever

Adjusts the steering wheel height

Adjusts the steering wheel position (foreand-aft adjustment)

Push release lever : down completely.

The steering column is unlocked.

Adjust the steering wheel to the desired position.

Push release lever : up completely.

The steering column is locked.

Check if the steering column is locked. When doing so, try to push the steering wheel up or down or try to move it in the fore-and-aft direction.

Adjusting the steering wheel manually

G

WARNING

If the steering wheel is unlocked while the vehicle is in motion, it could change position unexpectedly. This could cause you to lose

Z

106

Steering wheel

Adjusting the steering wheel electrically

Steering wheel heating

Switching on/off

:

;

Adjusts the steering wheel height

Adjusts the steering wheel position (foreand-aft adjustment)

The steering wheel can also be adjusted when the SmartKey is removed from the ignition lock.

i


R

EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature (

Y page 106)

R

Storing settings (

Y page 110)

X

X

Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (

Y page 138).

To switch on/off: turn the lever in the direction of arrow : or ;.

Indicator lamp = lights up or goes out.

Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: when you switch off the ignition and open the driver's door, the steering wheel heating is deactivated.

Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: when you remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock, the steering wheel heating is deactivated.

Problems with the steering wheel heating

Problem

The steering wheel heating has switched off prematurely or cannot be switched on.


The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical consumers are switched on.

X

Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as the rear window defroster or interior lighting.

EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature


G

WARNING

When the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjusts the steering wheel, you and other vehicle occupants – particularly children – could become trapped. There is a risk of injury.

While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is making adjustments, make sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the steering wheel.

Move the steering wheel adjustment lever if there is a risk of entrapment by the steering wheel. The adjustment process is stopped.

Press one of the memory function position buttons. This function is only available on vehicles with memory function.

G

WARNING

If children activate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature, they can become trapped, particularly when unattended. There is a risk of injury.

Mirrors

107



G

WARNING

If you drive off while the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is making adjustments, you could lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.

Always wait until the adjustment process is complete before driving off.

The EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature makes getting in and out of your vehicle easier.

You can activate and deactivate the EASY-

ENTRY/EXIT feature in the on-board computer

(

Y page 240).

Position of the steering wheel when the

EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is active

The steering wheel swings upwards when you:

R

R

R remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock open the driver's door with KEYLESS-GO in position 1 open the driver's door and the SmartKey is in position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock i

The steering wheel only moves upwards if it has not already reached the upper stop.

Position of the steering wheel for driving

The steering wheel is moved to the last selected position when:

R

R

R the driver's door is closed you insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock or you press the Start/Stop button once on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO

When you close the driver's door with the ignition switched on, the steering wheel is also automatically moved to the previously set position.

The last position of the steering column is stored when you:

R

R switch the ignition off save the setting with the memory function

(

Y page 110).

Crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature

If the crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is triggered in an accident, the steering column will move upwards when the driver's door is opened.

This occurs irrespective of the position of the

SmartKey in the ignition lock. This makes it easier to exit the vehicle and rescue the occupants.

The crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is only operational if the EASY-EXIT/ENTRY feature is activated in the on-board computer

(

Y page 240).

Mirrors

Rear-view mirror

X

Anti-glare mode: flick anti-glare lever : forwards or back.

Exterior mirrors

Adjusting the exterior mirrors

G

WARNING






Z

108

Mirrors

G

WARNING

The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side reduces the size of the image. Visible objects are actually closer than they appear.

This means that you could misjudge the distance from road users traveling behind, e.g.

when changing lane. There is a risk of an accident.

For this reason, always make sure of the actual distance from the road users traveling behind by glancing over your shoulder.

Folding the exterior mirrors in or out electrically

X

X

X


Y page 138).

Exterior mirror on the driver's side: press button :.

Exterior mirror on the front-passenger side: press button ;.

The indicator lamp in the corresponding button lights up in red.

The indicator lamp goes out again after some time. You can adjust the selected exterior mirror using button = as long as the indicator lamp is lit.

Press button = up, down, or to the right or left until you have adjusted the exterior mirror to the correct position. You should have a good overview of traffic conditions.

The convex exterior mirrors provide a larger field of vision.

The exterior mirrors are heated automatically if the rear window defroster is switched on and the outside temperature is low.

X

X


Y page 138).

Briefly press :.

Both exterior mirrors fold in or out.

i

Make sure that the exterior mirrors are always folded out fully while driving. They could otherwise vibrate.

i

If you are driving faster than 30 mph

(47 km/h), you can no longer fold in the exterior mirrors.

Resetting the exterior mirrors

If the battery has been disconnected or completely discharged, the exterior mirrors must be reset. Otherwise, the exterior mirrors will not fold in when you select the "Fold in mirrors when locking" function in the on-board computer

(

Y page 240).

X

X


Y page 138).

Briefly press :.

Folding the exterior mirrors in or out automatically

If the "Fold in mirrors when locking" function is activated in the on-board computer

(

Y page 240):

R the exterior mirrors fold in automatically as

R soon as you lock the vehicle from the outside.

the exterior mirrors fold out again automatically as soon as you unlock the vehicle and then open the driver's or front-passenger door.

Mirrors

109

Exterior mirror pushed out of position

If an exterior mirror has been pushed out of position, proceed as follows:

X

Vehicles without electrically folding exte-

rior mirrors: move the exterior mirror into

X the correct position manually.

Vehicles with electrically folding exterior

mirrors: press and hold mirror-folding button : until you hear a click and the mirror engages in position audibly.

The mirror housing is engaged again and you can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual

(

Y page 107).

The rear-view mirror and the exterior mirror on the driver's side automatically go into anti-glare mode if the following conditions are met simultaneously:

R

R the ignition is switched on and incident light from headlamps strikes the sensor in the rear-view mirror

The mirrors do not go into anti-glare mode if reverse gear is engaged or if the interior lighting is switched on.

Automatic anti-glare mirrors

G

WARNING

Electrolyte may escape if the glass in an automatic anti-glare mirror breaks. The electrolyte is harmful and causes irritation. It must not come into contact with your skin, eyes, respiratory organs or clothing or be swallowed.


If you come into contact with the electrolyte, observe the following:

R

Rinse off the electrolyte from your skin immediately with water.

R

Immediately rinse the electrolyte out of your eyes thoroughly with clean water.

R

If the electrolyte is swallowed, immediately rinse your mouth out thoroughly. Do not induce vomiting.

R

If electrolyte comes into contact with your skin or hair or is swallowed, seek medical attention immediately.

R

Immediately change out of clothing which has come into contact with electrolyte.

R

If an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical attention immediately.

Parking position for the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side

Setting and storing the parking position

You can position the front-passenger side exterior mirror in such a way that you can see the rear wheel on that side as soon as you engage reverse gear. You can store this position.

Using reverse gear

X

X

:

;

=

?

X

Button for the driver's side exterior mirror

Button for the front-passenger side exterior mirror

Adjustment button

Memory button M

Bring the vehicle to a standstill.


Y page 138).

Press button ;.

Z

110

Memory function

X

X

Engage reverse gear.

The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves to the default setting parking position.

Use button = to adjust the exterior mirror to a position that allows you to see the rear wheel and the curb.

The parking position is stored.

i

If you shift the transmission to another position, the exterior mirror on the frontpassenger side returns to the driving position.

Using the memory button

You can store the parking position of the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side using memory button M ?. The reverse gear must not be engaged during the process.

X

X

X

X

X


Y page 138).

Press button ;.

Use button = to adjust the exterior mirror to a position that allows you to see the rear wheel and the curb.

Press memory button M ? and one of the arrows on button = within three seconds.

The parking position is stored if the exterior mirror does not move.

If the mirror moves out of position, repeat the steps.

Calling up a stored parking position setting

X

X

X


Y page 138).

Adjust the exterior mirror on the frontpassenger side using button ;.


The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves to the stored parking position.

The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves back to its original position:

R

R as soon as you exceed a speed of 9 mph

(15 km/h) if you press button : for the exterior mirror on the driver's side

Memory function

Storing settings

G

WARNING

If you use the memory function on the driver's side while driving, you could lose control of the vehicle as a result of the adjustments being made. There is a risk of an accident.

Only use the memory function on the driver's side when the vehicle is stationary.

G

WARNING

When the memory function adjusts the seat or steering wheel, you and other vehicle occupants – particularly children – could become trapped. There is a risk of injury.

While the memory function is making adjustments, make sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat or steering wheel. If somebody becomes trapped, immediately release the memory function position button. The adjustment process is stopped.

G

WARNING

Children could become trapped if they activate the memory function, particularly when unattended. There is a risk of injury.



The memory function can be used at any time, e.g. even when the SmartKey isn't in the ignition lock.

With the memory function, you can store up to three different settings, e.g. for three different people.

The following settings are stored as a single memory preset:

R

R

R position of the seat, backrest and head restraint driver's side: steering wheel position driver's side: position of the exterior mirrors on the driver's and front-passenger sides

X

X

X

Adjust the seat (

Y page 96).

On the driver's side, adjust the steering wheel

(

Y page 106) and the exterior mirrors

(

Y page 107).

Press memory button M and then press memory position button 1, 2 or 3 within three seconds.

The settings are stored in the selected preset position. A tone sounds when the settings have been completed.

The memory function can still be used if the

SmartKey has been removed.

Calling up a stored setting

X

Press and hold the relevant storage position button 1, 2 or 3 until the seat, steering wheel and exterior mirrors are in the stored position.

The setting procedure is interrupted as soon as you release the storage position buttons.

Memory function

111

Z

112



General notes

For reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you drive with the lights switched on even during the daytime. In some countries, operation of the headlamps varies due to legal requirements and self-imposed obligations.

Setting the exterior lighting

Setting options

Exterior lighting can be set using:

R

R

R the light switch the combination switch (

Y page 113) the on-board computer (

Y page 239)

Light switch

Operation

1 W

2 X

3 T

4 c

5 L

B R

Left-hand standing lamps

Right-hand standing lamps

Parking lamps, license plate and instrument cluster lighting

Automatic headlamp mode, controlled by the light sensor

Low-beam/high-beam headlamps

Rear fog lamp

If you hear a warning tone when you leave the vehicle, the lights may still be switched on.

X

Turn the light switch to c.

The exterior lighting (except the parking/standing lamps) switches off automatically if you:

R

R remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock open the driver's door with the SmartKey in position 0 in the ignition lock

Automatic headlamp mode

c is the favored light switch position. The light setting is automatically selected according to the brightness of the ambient light (exception: poor visibility due to weather conditions such as fog, snow or spray):

R

R

X

SmartKey in position 1 in the ignition lock: the parking lamps are switched on/off automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light.

With the engine running (USA only): if you have switched on the Daytime Running

Lights function in the on-board computer, the daytime running lamps or the parking lamps and low-beam headlamps are switched on or off automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light.

To switch on automatic headlamp mode:

turn the light switch to c .

G

WARNING

When the light switch is set to Ã, the lowbeam headlamps may not be switched on automatically if there is fog, snow or other causes of poor visibility due to the weather conditions such as spray. There is a risk of an accident.

In such situations, turn the light switch to

L.

The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid.

The driver is responsible for the vehicle's lighting at all times.

Canada only:

The daytime running lamps improve the visibility of your vehicle during the day. The daytime running lamps function is required by law in Canada. It cannot therefore be deactivated.

When the engine is running and the vehicle is stationary: if you move the selector lever from a drive position to P, the daytime running lamps/ low-beam headlamps go out after three minutes.

When the engine is running, the vehicle is stationary and in bright ambient light: if you turn the light switch to the T position, the daytime running lamps and parking lamps switch on.

If the engine is running and you turn the light switch to L, the manual settings take precedence over the daytime running lamps.

USA only:


113

The daytime running lamps improve the visibility of your vehicle during the day. To do this, the daytime running lamps function must be switched on using the on-board computer

(

Y page 239).

If the engine is running and you turn the light switch to T or L, the manual settings take precedence over the daytime running lamps.


Even if the light sensor does not detect that it is dark, the parking lamps and low-beam headlamps switch on when the ignition is switched on and the light switch is set to the L position.

This is a particularly useful function in the event of rain and fog.

X

To switch on the low-beam headlamps:

turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to posi-

X tion 2 or start the engine.

Turn the light switch to L.

The green L indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up.

Rear fog lamp

The rear fog lamp improves visibility of your vehicle for the traffic behind in the event of thick fog. Please take note of the country-specific regulations for the use of rear fog lamps.

X

X

X

X

To switch on the rear fog lamp: turn the

SmartKey in the ignition lock to position 2 or start the engine.

Turn the light switch to L or c .

Press the R button.

The yellow R indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up.

To switch off the rear fog lamp: press the

R button.

The yellow R indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.

Parking lamps

!

If the battery charge is very low, the parking lamps or standing lamps are automatically switched off to enable the next engine start.

Always park your vehicle safely and in a well lit area, in accordance with the relevant legal stipulations. Avoid using the T parking lamps over a period of several hours. If possible, switch on the right-hand X or lefthand W standing lamps.

X

To switch on: turn the light switch to T.

The green T indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up.

Standing lamps

Switching on the standing lamps ensures the corresponding side of the vehicle is illuminated.

X

X

To switch on the standing lamps: the

SmartKey should not be in the ignition lock or it should be in position 0.

Turn the light switch to W (left-hand side of the vehicle) or X (right-hand side of the vehicle).

Vehicles towing a trailer: both the right-hand and left-hand standing lamps (tail lamps) are always illuminated on the trailer.

Combination switch

:

;

=

?

X

X

X

X

High-beam headlamps

Turn signal, right

High-beam flasher

Turn signal, left

To indicate briefly: press the combination switch briefly to the pressure point in the direction of arrow ; or ?.

The corresponding turn signal flashes three times.

To indicate: press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow ; or ?.

To switch on the high-beam headlamps:

turn the light switch to L or Ã.

Press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow :.

In the Ã position, the high-beam headlamps are only switched on when it is dark and the engine is running.

Z

114


X

The blue K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the high-beam headlamps are switched on.

To switch off the high-beam head-

lamps:move the combination switch back to its normal position.

The blue K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.

Vehicles with Adaptive Highbeam Assist: if

Adaptive Highbeam Assist is activated, it automatically controls activation and deactivation of the high-beam headlamps (

Y page 115).

Hazard warning lamps

X

X

To switch on the hazard warning

lamps:press button :.

All turn signals flash. If you now switch on a turn signal using the combination switch, only the turn signal lamp on the corresponding side of the vehicle will flash.

To switch off the hazard warning lamps:

press button :.

The hazard warning lamps automatically switch on if:

R

R an air bag is deployed or the vehicle decelerates rapidly from a speed of above 45 mph (70 km/h) and comes to a standstill

The hazard warning lamps switch off automatically if the vehicle reaches a speed of above

6 mph (10 km/h) again after a full brake application.

i

The hazard warning lamps still operate if the ignition is switched off.

Intelligent Light System

General notes

The Intelligent Light System is a system that adjusts the headlamps automatically to suit the prevailing driving and weather conditions. It offers advanced functions for improved illumination of the road surface, e.g. depending on the vehicle speed or weather conditions. The system includes the active light function, cornering light function, highway mode and extended range fog lamps. The system is only active when it is dark.

You can activate or deactivate the "Intelligent

Light System" using the on-board computer

(

Y page 239).

Active light function

The active light function is a system that moves the headlamps according to the steering movements of the front wheels. In this way, relevant areas remain illuminated while driving. This allows you to identify pedestrians, cyclists and animals.

Active: when the lights are switched on.


The cornering light function improves the illumination of the road over a wide angle in the direction you are turning, enabling better visibility in tight bends, for example. It can only be activated when the low-beam headlamps are switched on.

Active:

R

R if you are driving at speeds below 25 mph

(40 km/h) and switch on the turn signal or turn the steering wheel if you are driving at speeds between 25 mph

(40 km/h) and 45 mph (70 km/h) and turn the steering wheel

The cornering lamp may remain lit for a short time, but is automatically switched off after no more than three minutes.

Highway mode

Highway mode increases the range of the beam.

Active:if you are driving at a speed above

110 km/h and do not make any large steering movements for at least 1,000 m or if you are driving at a speed above 130 km/h.


115

Not active: if you are driving at speeds below

80 km/h following activation.

Extended range fog lamps

The extended range fog lamps reduce the glare experienced by the driver and improve the illumination of the edge of the road.

Active: if you are driving at speeds below

40 mph (70 km/h) and you switch on the rear fog lamp.

Not active: if, following activation, you are driving at speeds above 60 mph (100 km/h) or if you switch off the rear fog lamp

Off-road lights

The off-road lights facilitate the early recognition of objects/obstacles when driving off-road thanks to a symmetrical, wider and brighter distribution of light from the low-beam headlamps.

Active: when driving at speeds no faster than

30 mph (50 km/h) and the off-road program selector wheel is in position 1 or 2.

Not active: when driving at speeds above

30 mph (50 km/h).

When the off-road lights are switched on, the cornering light function is permanently activated, the active light function is deactivated and the headlamp range control is set to static mode.


The cornering light function improves the illumination of the road over a wide angle in the direction you are turning, enabling better visibility in tight bends, for example. It can only be activated when the low-beam headlamps are switched on.

Active:

R

R if you are driving at speeds below 25 mph

(40 km/h) and switch on the turn signal or turn the steering wheel if you are driving at speeds between 25 mph

(40 km/h) and 45 mph (70 km/h) and turn the steering wheel

The cornering lamp may remain lit for a short time, but is automatically switched off after no more than three minutes.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist

General notes

You can use this function to set the headlamps to change between low beam and high beam automatically. The system recognizes vehicles with their lights on, either approaching from the opposite direction or traveling in front of your vehicle, and consequently switches the headlamps from high beam to low beam.

The system automatically adapts the low-beam headlamp range depending on the distance to the other vehicle. Once the system no longer detects any other vehicles, it reactivates the high-beam headlamps.

The system's optical sensor is located behind the windshield near the overhead control panel.


G

WARNING

Adaptive Highbeam Assist does not recognize road users:

R who have no lights, e.g. pedestrians

R who have poor lighting, e.g. cyclists

R whose lighting is blocked, e.g. by a barrier

On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam

Assist may fail to recognize other road users that have lights, or may recognize them too late. In this, or in similar situations, the automatic high-beam headlamps will not be deactivated or will be activated regardless. There is a risk of an accident.

Always carefully observe the traffic conditions and switch off the high-beam headlamps in good time.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting to the prevailing light, visibility and traffic conditions.


R

R poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow dirt on the sensors or the sensors are obscured

Z

116


Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist on/off

X

X

X

To switch on: turn the light switch to Ã.

Press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow :.

The _ indicator lamp in the multifunction display lights up when it is dark and the light sensor activates the low-beam headlamps.

If you are driving at speeds above approximately 16 mph (25 km/h):

The headlamp range is set automatically depending on the distance between the vehicle and other road users.

If you are driving at speeds above approximately 19 mph (30 km/h) and no other road users have been detected:

The high-beam headlamps are switched on automatically. The K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster also lights up.

If you are driving at speeds below approximately 16 mph (25 km/h) or other road users have been detected or the roads are adequately lit:

The high-beam headlamps are switched off automatically. The K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. The _ indicator lamp in the multifunction display remains lit.

To switch off:move the combination switch back to its normal position or move the light switch to another position.

The _ indicator lamp in the multifunction display goes out.


Overview of interior lighting

Overhead control panel

: p Switches the left-hand front reading lamp on/off

;

=

?

A

B c Switches the front interior lighting on v Switches the rear interior lighting on/ off

| Switches the front interior lighting/ automatic interior lighting control off p Switches the right-hand front reading lamp on/off

Switches the automatic interior lighting control on

Headlamps fogged up on the inside

Certain climatic and physical conditions may cause moisture to form in the headlamp. This moisture does not affect the functionality of the headlamp.

Rear overhead control panel (second row of seats)

:

To switch the reading lamp on/off

Replacing bulbs (vehicles with halogen headlamps)

117

Crash-responsive emergency lighting

The interior lighting is activated automatically if the vehicle is involved in an accident.

X

To switch off the crash-responsive emer-

gency lighting:press the hazard warning lamp button.

or

X

Lock and then unlock the vehicle using the

SmartKey.

Rear overhead control panel (third row of seats)

:

Reading lamp

Interior lighting control

General notes

In order to prevent the vehicle's battery from discharging, the interior lighting functions are automatically deactivated after some time except when the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock.

The color and brightness for the ambient lighting may be set via the multimedia system (see the separate operating instructions).

Automatic interior lighting control

X

X

To switch on: set the switch to center position B.

To switch off: set the switch to the | position.

The interior lighting automatically switches on if you:

R

R unlock the vehicle open a door

R remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock

The interior light is activated for a short while when the SmartKey is removed from the ignition lock. This delayed switch-off can be adjusted via the multimedia system; see the separate operating instructions.

Replacing bulbs (vehicles with LED headlamps)

The front and rear light clusters of your vehicle are equipped with LED bulbs. Do not replace the vehicle's bulbs yourself. Contact a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required.

Lamps are an important aspect of vehicle safety.

You must therefore make sure that these function correctly at all times. Have the headlamp setting checked regularly.



G

WARNING

Bulbs, lamps and connectors can get very hot when operating. If you change a bulb, you could burn yourself on these components.


Allow these components to cool down before changing a bulb.

Do not use a bulb if it has been dropped or if its glass tube has been scratched.

The bulb may explode if:

R

R

R

R you touch it it is hot you drop it you scratch it

Use bulbs only in closed lamps that have been designed for this purpose. Only install spare

Z

118


bulbs of the same type and the specified voltage.

Marks on the glass tube reduce the service life of the bulbs. Do not touch the glass tube with your bare hands. If necessary, clean the glass tube when cold with alcohol or spirit and rub it off with a lint-free cloth.

Protect bulbs from moisture during operation.

Do not allow bulbs to come into contact with liquids.

Replace only the bulbs listed (

Y page 118).

Have the bulbs that you cannot replace yourself replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.

If you require assistance replacing bulbs, consult a qualified specialist workshop.

If the new bulb still does not light up, consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Headlamps and lights are an important aspect of vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure that these function correctly at all times. Have the headlamp setting checked regularly.

Overview of bulb replacement - bulb types

You can replace the following bulbs. The bulb type can be found in the legend.

Removing and installing the cover in the front wheel housing

You must remove the cover from the front wheel housing before you can change the front bulbs.

X

X

X

X

X

X

To remove: switch off the lights.

Turn the front wheel inwards.

Remove securing pin ; using a suitable tool.

Slide cover : up and remove it.

To install:insert cover : again and slide it down until it engages.

Insert securing pin ;.


Halogen headlamps

:

;

=

Low-beam headlamp: H7 55 W

High-beam headlamp: H7 55 W

Turn signal: W 5 W BV

X

X

X

X

X

X

Remove the cover in the front wheel housing

(

Y page 118).

Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise and remove it.

Turn bulb holder ; counter-clockwise and pull out.

Pull the bulb out of bulb holder ;.

Insert new bulb into bulb holder ;.

Insert bulb holder ; and turn it clockwise.


119

X

X

Press on housing cover : and turn it to the right.

Replace the cover in the front wheel housing

(

Y page 118).

High-beam headlamps

X

X

X

X

X

X


Turn bulb holder ; counter-clockwise and pull out.

Pull the bulb out of bulb holder ;.

Insert new bulb into bulb holder ;.

Insert bulb holder ; and turn it clockwise.

Press on housing cover : and turn it to the right.

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Switch off the lights.

Open the hood.


Pull lever = upwards and remove bulb holder ;.

Remove the bulb from bulb holder ;.

Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;.

Simultaneously press on bulb holder ; and pull lever = downwards.

Press on housing cover : and turn it clockwise.

Turn signals


Switching the windshield wipers on/off

!

Do not operate the windshield wipers when the windshield is dry, as this could damage the wiper blades. Moreover, dust that has collected on the windshield can scratch the glass if wiping takes place when the windshield is dry.

If it is necessary to switch on the windshield wipers in dry weather conditions, always use washer fluid when operating the windshield wipers.

!

If the windshield wipers leave smears on the windshield after the vehicle has been washed in an automatic car wash, wax or other residues may be the reason for this. Clean the windshield using washer fluid after washing the vehicle in an automatic car wash.

!

Intermittent wiping with rain sensor: due to optical influences and the windshield becoming dirty in dry weather conditions, the windshield wipers may be activated inadvertently.

This could then damage the windshield wiper blades or scratch the windshield.

For this reason, you should always switch off the windshield wipers in dry weather.

X

X

Switch off the lights.

Open the hood.

Z

120


Switching the rear window wiper on/ off

4

5

B

C

Combination switch

1

2

$ Windshield wiper off

Ä Intermittent wipe, low (rain sensor set

3 to low sensitivity)

Å Intermittent wipe, high (rain sensor set to high sensitivity)

° Continuous wipe, slow

¯ Continuous wipe, fast

í Single wipe

î To wipe with washer fluid

X

X

Switch on the ignition.

Turn the combination switch to the corresponding position.

In the Ä or Å position, the appropriate wiping frequency is set automatically according to the intensity of the rain. In the Å position, the rain sensor is more sensitive than in the Ä position, causing the windshield wiper to wipe more frequently.

Vehicles with MAGIC VISION CONTROL: the washer fluid is fed through the wiper blades and when wiping with washer fluid î the washer fluid is emitted directly from the blades.

If the wiper blades are worn, the windshield will no longer be wiped properly. This could prevent you from observing the traffic conditions.

Combination switch

:

2

3

4

5

è Rear window wiper switch b Wipes with washer fluid

I Switches on intermittent wiping

0 Switches off intermittent wiping b Wipes with washer fluid

X

X


Y page 138).

Turn switch : on the combination switch to the corresponding position.

When the rear window wiper is switched on, the icon appears in the instrument cluster.

Replacing the wiper blades


G

WARNING

If the windshield wipers begin to move while you are changing the wiper blades, you could be trapped by the wiper arm. There is a risk of injury.

Always switch off the windshield wipers and ignition before changing the wiper blades.

!

To avoid damaging the wiper blades, make sure that you touch only the wiper arm of the wiper.

!

Never open the hood/tailgate if a wiper arm has been folded away from the windshield/ rear window.

Never fold a windshield wiper arm without a wiper blade back onto the windshield/rear window.


121

Hold the windshield wiper arm firmly when you change the wiper blade. If you release the wiper arm without a wiper blade and it falls onto the windshield/rear window, the windshield/rear window may be damaged by the force of the impact.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the wiper blades changed at a qualified specialist workshop.

Changing the windshield wiper blades

Removing the wiper blades

X

X

Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.

Fold the wiper arm away from the windshield.

X

X

X

Position new wiper blade : in the retainer on the wiper arm and slide it into place in the direction of the arrow.

The wiper blade audibly engages.

Make sure that the wiper blade is seated correctly.

Fold the wiper arm back onto the windshield.

Replacing the rear window wiper blade

Removing a wiper blade

X

Firmly press release knob : and pull wiper blade ; upwards from the wiper arm in the direction of the arrow.

Installing the wiper blades

X

X

X

X

X


Fold wiper arm : away from the rear window until it engages.

Position wiper blade ; at a right angle to wiper arm :.

Hold wiper arm : and press wiper blade ; in the direction of the arrow until it releases.

Remove wiper blade ;.

Installing a wiper blade

X

X

X

X

X

Place new wiper blade ; onto wiper arm :.

Hold wiper arm : and press wiper blade ; in the opposite direction to the arrow until it engages.

Make sure that wiper blade ; is seated correctly.

Position wiper blade ; parallel to wiper arm :.

Fold wiper arm : back onto the rear window.

Z

122


Problems with the windshield wipers

Problem

The windshield wipers are jammed.

The windshield wipers fail completely.


Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windshield wiper movement. The wiper motor has been deactivated.

X

For safety reasons, you should remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.

or

X

X

X

Switch off the engine using the Start/Stop button and open the driver's door.

Remove the cause of the obstruction.

Switch the windshield wipers back on.

The windshield wiper drive is malfunctioning.

X

Select another wiper speed on the combination switch.

X

Have the windshield wipers checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Overview of climate control systems

123


General notes

Observe the settings recommended on the following pages. The windows could otherwise fog up.

To prevent the windows from fogging up:

R

R

R switch off climate control only briefly switch on air-recirculation mode only briefly switch on the cooling with air dehumidification function

R switch on the defrost windshield function briefly, if required

Climate control regulates the temperature and the humidity in the vehicle interior and filters undesirable substances out of the air.

The residual heat function can only be activated or deactivated with the ignition switched off

(

Y page 133).

i

Ventilate the vehicle for a brief period during warm weather, e.g. using the convenience opening feature (

Y page 87).

This will speed up the cooling process and the desired interior temperature will be reached more quickly.

If you start the engine using your smartphone, the last selected climate control setting is reactivated (

Y page 140).

i

The integrated filter filters out most particles of dust and soot and completely filters out pollen. It also reduces gaseous pollutants and odors. A clogged filter reduces the amount of air supplied to the vehicle interior.

For this reason, you should always observe the interval for replacing the filter, which is specified in the Maintenance Booklet. As it depends on environmental conditions, e.g.

heavy air pollution, the interval may be shorter than stated in the Maintenance Booklet.

i

Vehicles with AIR-BALANCE package: in addition to ionization, the vehicle has an air filter with anti-allergenic properties that contribute to improved air filtration.

i

It is possible that under certain circumstances the residual heat function may be activated automatically an hour after the SmartKey has been removed in order to dry the automatic climate control. The vehicle is then ventilated for 30 minutes.

Control panel for dual-zone automatic climate control

USA only

Front control panel

:

;

Sets the temperature, left (

Defrosts the windshield (

Y

Y page 131) page 132)

124


C

D

E

F

=

?

A

B

G

H

Switches the maximum cooling MAX COOL on or off (

Y page 132)

Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (

Y page 130)

Switches the rear window defroster on/off (

Y page 133)

Sets the temperature, right (

Y page 131)

Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (

Y page 133)

Sets the air distribution (

Y page 131)

Increases the airflow (

Y page 131)

Reduces the airflow (

Y page 131)

Activates/deactivates climate control (

Y page 129)

Sets climate control to automatic (

Y page 130)

E

F

G

H

A

B

C

D

Canada only


:

;

=

?


Y page 131)


Y page 132)

Switches the ZONE function on/off (

Y page 132)


Y page 130)

Switches the residual heat on or off (

Y page 133)


Y page 133)


Y page 131)


Y page 133)


Y page 131)


Y page 131)


Y page 131)


Y page 129)


Y page 130)


125

:

;

=

?

A

B

Rear control panel

Sets rear-compartment climate control to automatic

Switches the rear climate control on/off

Directs the air distribution through the rear air vents

Switches the seat heating on the right-hand side on/off

Directs the air distribution through the footwell vents

Switches the seat heating on the left-hand side on/off

Control panel for 3-zone automatic climate control

USA only


A

B

C

D

E

:

;

=

?


Y page 131)


Y page 132)


Y page 132)


Y page 130)






Y


Y


Y page 129)

126


F

G

H

I

J

K


Y page 131)


Y page 131)

Display

Adjusts the climate mode settings (

Y page 130)


Y page 133)


Y page 130)

P

Q

R

S

T

L

M

N

O



Y page 131)

Sets the temperature (

Y page 131)

Sets rear-compartment climate control to automatic (

Y page 130)

Directs the airflow through the rear air vents (

Y page 131)

Switches the seat heating on the right-hand side on/off (

Y page 103)

Directs the airflow through the footwell vents (

Y page 131)

Switches the rear climate control on/off (

Y page 129)


Y page 131)

Switches the seat heating on the left-hand side on/off (

Y page 103)

Canada only


A

B

C

D

:

;

=

?

E

F

G

H


Y page 131)


Y page 132)


Y page 133)


Y page 130)


Y page 133)


Y page 131)


Y page 132)


Y page 129)


Y page 131)


Y page 131)


Y page 131)

Display


127

I

J

K


Y page 130)


Y page 133)


Y page 130)

P

Q

R

S

T

L

M

N

O



Y page 131)


Y page 131)


Y page 130)


Y page 131)

Switches the seat heating on the right-hand side on/off (

Y page 103)


Y page 131)


Y page 129)


Y page 131)

Switches the seat heating on the left-hand side on/off (

Y page 103)

Control panel for 3-zone automatic climate control with additional rear-compartment climate control

A

B

C

D

E

F

USA only


:

;

=

?


Y page 131)


Y page 132)


Y page 132)


Y page 130)


Y page 133)


Y page 133)


Y page 131)


Y page 132)


Y page 129)


Y page 131)


Y page 131)

128


G

H

I

J

K


Y page 131)

Switches off climate control

Display


Y page 130)


Y page 133)


Y page 130)

P

Q

R

L

M

N

O



Y page 131)


Y page 131)


Y page 130)


Y page 131)


Y page 131)


Y page 129)


Y page 131)

E

F

G

H

A

B

C

D

I

J

Canada only


:

;

=

?


Y page 131)


Y page 132)


Y page 132)


Y page 130)


Y page 133)


Y page 133)


Y page 131)

Switches the rear climate control on/off


Y page 129)


Y page 131)


Y page 131)


Y page 131)

Display


Y page 130)


Y page 133)

Operating the climate control systems

129

K


Y page 130)

P

Q

R

L

M

N

O



Y page 131)


Y page 131)


Y page 130)


Y page 131)


Y page 131)


Y page 129)


Y page 131)

Optimum use of automatic climate control

Optimum use of the automatic climate control

The following contains notes and recommendations on optimum use of the dual-zone or 3-zone automatic climate control.

R

You can switch on climate control by using the

R

Ã and ¿ or Ã and Á buttons.

The indicator lamps in the Ã and

¿ buttons or the Ã and Á buttons light up.

Vehicles with 3-zone climate control:in automatic mode, you can also use the

ñ button to set a climate mode (FOCUS/

MEDIUM/DIFFUSE). The MEDIUM level is

R

R

R

R

R recommended.

Set the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †).

Only use the "Windshield defrosting" function briefly until the windshield is clear again.

Only use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g. if there are unpleasant outside odors or when in a tunnel. The windows could otherwise fog up, since no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle in air-recirculation mode.

Vehicles with 3-zone climate control:use the ZONE function to adopt the temperature settings on the driver's side for the frontpassenger side and the rear compartment as well. The indicator lamp above the á button goes out.

Vehicles with 3-zone climate control:use the "residual heat" function if you want to heat or ventilate the vehicle interior when the ignition is switched off. The residual heat function

R can only be activated or deactivated with the ignition switched off.

If you change the settings of the climate control system, the climate status display appears for approximately three seconds at the bottom of the screen in the multimedia system display. You will see the current settings of the various climate control functions.

During automatic engine switch-off, the climate control system only operates at a reduced capacity. If you require the full climate control output, you can switch off the ECO start/stop function by pressing the ECO button (

Y page 143).


Activating/deactivating climate control

General notes

When the climate control is switched off, the air supply and air circulation are also switched off.

The windows could fog up. Therefore, switch off climate control only briefly

Activate climate control primarily using the

Ã button (

Y page 130).

In the rear compartment, you can also switch climate control on and off using the Ã and

^ buttons.

130



X

X

X


Y page 138).

To switch on: press the Ã button.

The indicator lamp in the Ã button lights up. Airflow and air distribution are set to automatic mode.

To deactivate: press the ^ button.

The indicator lamp in the ^ button lights up.

Switching cooling with air dehumidification on/off


X

X

To activate: press the ¿ or Á button.

The indicator lamp in the ¿ or Á button lights up.

To deactivate: press the ¿ or Á button.

The indicator lamp in the ¿ or Á button goes out. The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function has a delayed switch-off feature.

Problems with the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function

Problem

The indicator lamp in the

¿ or Á button flashes three times or remains off. The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function cannot be switched on.


Cooling with air dehumidification has been deactivated due to a malfunction.

X

Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Setting climate control to automatic

General notes

In automatic mode, the set temperature is maintained automatically at a constant level. The system automatically regulates the temperature of the dispensed air, the airflow and the air distribution.

The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is activated automatically in automatic mode.

In the rear compartment, you can also switch climate control for the rear seats to automatic mode using the Ã button.

Automatic control

X

X

X


Y page 138).

Set the desired temperature.

To activate: press the Ã button.

The indicator lamp in the Ã button lights up. Automatic air distribution and airflow are activated.

X

To switch to manual mode:press the _ button.

3-zone automatic climate control: when automatic mode is activated, you can select a climate mode (

Y page 130).

Adjusting the climate mode settings

You can select the following climate mode settings in automatic mode:

FOCUS high airflow, slightly cooler setting

MEDIUM medium airflow, standard setting

DIFFUSE low airflow, slightly warmer and draftfree setting

X

X

X


Y page 138).

Press the Ã button.

Press the ñ button repeatedly until the desired climate mode appears in the display.


131

Setting the temperature

Dual-zone automatic climate control

Different temperatures can be set for the driver's and front-passenger sides.

X

X


Y page 138).

To increase or decrease: turn control : or

B counter-clockwise or clockwise

(

Y page 123).

Only change the temperature setting in small increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).

3-zone automatic climate control

You can select different temperature settings for the driver's and front-passenger sides as well as for the rear compartment.

X

X

X

X

X


Y page 138).

To increase or decrease temperature in

the front compartment: turn control : or

B counter-clockwise or clockwise

(

Y page 125).


To increase or reduce the temperature in the rear compartment using the front con-

trol panel:press the á button.

The indicator lamp in the á button goes out.

The temperature setting for the driver's side is adopted for the rear compartment and the front-passenger side.

Turn thumbwheel : to the left or right

(

Y page 125).


To increase or decrease the rear compartment temperature using the rear control

panel: turn control M counter-clockwise or clockwise on the rear control panel

(

Y page 125).


Setting the air distribution

Air distribution settings


P Directs the airflow through the center vents

O Directs air through the footwell air vents

S Directs the airflow through the center and footwell vents

¯ Directs air through the defroster vents b Directs the airflow through the defroster and center vents (Canada only) a Directs air through the defroster and footwell vents

_ Directs the airflow through the defroster, center and footwell air vents (Canada only)


M Directs the airflow through the rear center and B-pillar air vents

O Directs air through the footwell air vents i

Using the rear control panel, you can also activate both air distribution positions simultaneously. In order to do this, press both air distribution buttons. The air is then routed through all rear air vents.

i

Regardless of the air distribution setting, airflow is always directed through the side air vents. The side air vents can only be closed when the controls on the side air vents are turned downwards.

Adjusting

X

X


Y page 138).

Press the _ button repeatedly until the desired symbol appears in the display.

Setting the airflow

X

X

X


Y page 138).

To increase: press the K button.

To reduce: press the I button.

132


i

You can use 3-zone automatic climate control to set the airflow in the rear compartment separately.

Switching the ZONE function on/off

X

X

To activate: press the á button.

The indicator lamp above the á button lights up.

Dual-zone automatic climate control: the temperature setting for the driver's side is not adopted for the front-passenger side.

3-zone automatic climate control: the temperature setting for the driver's side is not adopted for the front-passenger side and the rear compartment.

To deactivate: press the á button.

The indicator lamp above the á button goes out.

Dual-zone automatic climate control: the temperature setting for the driver's side is adopted for the front-passenger side.

3-zone automatic climate control: the temperature setting for the driver's side is adopted for the front-passenger side and the rear compartment.

X

R air distribution to the windshield and front

R side windows air-recirculation mode off

To deactivate: press the ¬ button.

The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goes out. The previously selected settings are restored. Air-recirculation mode remains deactivated.

MAX COOL maximum cooling

The MAX COOL function is only available in vehicles for the USA.

MAX COOL is only operational when the engine is running.

X

X

To activate: press the Ù button.

The indicator lamp in the Ù button lights up.

To deactivate: press the Ù button.

The indicator lamp in the Ù button goes out. The previously selected settings are restored.

When you activate MAX COOL, climate control switches to the following functions:

R

R

R maximum cooling maximum airflow air-recirculation mode on

Defrosting the windshield

General notes

You can use this function to defrost the windshield or to clear a fogged up windshield or front side windows on the inside.

Switch off the "Windshield defrosting" function as soon as the windshield is clear again.


X

X


Y page 138).

To activate: press the ¬ button.

The indicator lamp in the ¬ button lights up.

The climate control system switches to the following settings:

R high airflow

R high temperature

Defrosting the windows

Windows fogged up on the inside

X

X

X

Activate the ¿ or Á cooling with air dehumidification function.

Activate automatic mode Ã.

If the windows continue to fog up, activate the

"windshield defrosting" function

(

Y page 132).

i

You should only select this setting until the windshield is clear again.

Windows fogged up on the outside

X

X

Activate the windshield wipers.

Press the _ button repeatedly until the

P or O symbol appears in the display.

i

You should only select this setting until the windshield is clear again.


133

i

If you clean the windows regularly, they do not fog up so quickly.

Rear window defroster

General notes

The rear window defroster has a high current draw. You should therefore switch it off as soon as the rear window is clear. Otherwise, the rear window defroster switches off automatically after several minutes.

If the battery voltage is too low, the rear window defroster may switch off.


X

X


Y page 138).

Press the ¤ button.

The indicator lamp in the ¤ button lights up or goes out.

Problems with the rear window defroster

Problem

The rear window defroster has deactivated prematurely or cannot be activated.


The battery has not been sufficiently charged.

X

Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. reading lamps, interior lighting or the seat heating.

When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear window defroster can be activated again.

Switching air-recirculation mode on/off

General notes

You can deactivate the flow of fresh air if unpleasant odors are entering the vehicle from outside. The air already inside the vehicle will then be recirculated.

If you switch on air-recirculation mode, the windows can fog up more quickly, in particular at low temperatures. Only use air-recirculation mode briefly to prevent the windows from fogging up.


X

X


Y page 138).

To activate: press the d button.

The indicator lamp in the d button lights up.

i

In the event of high pollution levels (3-zone automatic climate control only) or at high outside temperatures, air-recirculation mode is automatically activated. When air-recirculation mode is activated automatically, the indicator lamp in the d button is not lit.

Outside air is added after about 30 minutes.

X

To deactivate: press the d button.

The indicator lamp in the d button goes out.

i

Air-recirculation mode deactivates automatically:

R after approximately five minutes at outside temperatures below approximately 41 ‡

(5 †)

R after approximately five minutes if cooling

R with air dehumidification is deactivated after approximately 30 minutes at outside temperatures above approximately 41 ‡

(5 †) if the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is activated

Switching the residual heat on or off

General notes

The residual heat function is only available on vehicles for Canada.

It is possible to make use of the residual heat of the engine to continue heating the stationary vehicle for up to 30 minutesafter the engine has

134

Setting the air vents

been switched off. The heating time depends on the set interior temperature.


X

To activate: press the Ì or Á button.

The indicator lamp in the Ì or Á button lights up.

i

The blower will run at a low speed regardless of the airflow setting.

i

If you activate the residual heat function at high temperatures, only the ventilation will be activated. The blower runs at medium speed.

X

To deactivate: press the Ì or Á button.

The indicator lamp in the Ì or Á button goes out.

Residual heat is deactivated automatically:

R

R

R after approximately 30 minutes when the ignition is switched on if the battery voltage drops lets. If necessary, redirect the airflow to another area of the vehicle interior.

In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh air through the air vents into the vehicle interior, please observe the following notes:

R

R keep the air inlet grille on the hood and in the engine compartment on the front-passenger side free of blockages, such as ice, snow or leaves.

never cover the air vents or air intake grilles in the vehicle interior.

i

For virtually draft-free ventilation, adjust the sliders of the air vents to the center position.

Setting the center air vents

Ionization

Ionization is used to purify the air in the vehicle interior and attain an improved interior climate.

The ionization of the interior air is odorless and cannot be perceived directly in the vehicle interior.

You can switch ionization on and off via the multimedia system (see the separate operating instructions).

Ionization can only be operated when the automatic climate control is switched on. The side air vent on the driver's side must be open.

:

;

=

?

X

Center air vent, left

Center air vent, right

Center vent thumbwheel, right

Center vent thumbwheel, left

To open or close: turn thumbwheels = and ? to the left or right.



G

WARNING

Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air vents. This could result in burns or frostbite in the immediate vicinity of the air vents. There is a risk of injury.

Make sure that all vehicle occupants always maintain a sufficient distance to the air out-

Setting the side air vents


135

Setting the rear-compartment air vents

Setting the center vents in the rear compartment

Example

:

;

=

Side window defroster vent

Side air vent, left

Thumbwheel for side air vent

X

To open or close: turn thumbwheel = up or down.

Setting the glove box air vent

!

Close the air vent when heating the vehicle.

At high outside temperatures, open the air vent and activate the "cooling with air dehumidification" function. Otherwise, temperature-sensitive items stored in the glove box could be damaged.

Example: center vents with rear control panel

:

;

=

?

Rear-compartment air vent thumbwheel

Rear-compartment air vent, right

Rear control panel

Rear-compartment air vent, left

X

To open or close:turn thumbwheel : up or down.

Setting the B-pillar air vent

Second row of seats

:

;

Air vent control

Air vent

When the climate control system is activated, the glove box can be ventilated, for instance to cool its contents. The level of airflow depends on the airflow and air distribution settings.

X

To open or close: turn thumbwheel : to the right or left.

:

;

X

B-pillar air vent

Thumbwheel for B-pillar air vent

To open or close:turn thumbwheel ; to the left or right.

Z

136


B-pillar air vent in the headliner

:

;

B-pillar air vent


X

To open or close: turn thumbwheel ; up or down.

Third row of seats

B-pillar air vent in the headliner

:

;

B-pillar air vent


X

To open or close: turn thumbwheel ; up or down.

Driving

137

Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle


The sensor system of some driving and driving safety systems adjusts automatically while a certain distance is being driven after the vehicle has been delivered or after repairs. Full system effectiveness is not reached until the end of this teach-in procedure.

New and replaced brake pads and discs only reach their optimum braking effect after several hundred kilometers of driving. Compensate for this by applying greater force to the brake pedal.

The first 1000 miles (1500 km)

The more you look after the engine when it is new, the more satisfied you will be with its performance in the future.

R

R

R

You should therefore drive at varying vehicle and engine speeds for the first 1000 miles

(1500 km).

Avoid heavy loads, e.g. driving at full throttle, during this period.

Change gear in good time, before the tachometer needle is Ô of the way to the red area of the tachometer.

R

R

Do not manually shift to a lower gear to brake the vehicle.

Try to avoid depressing the accelerator pedal beyond the point of resistance (kickdown).

Additional breaking-in notes for Mercedes-AMG vehicles:

R

R

Do not drive faster than 85 mph (140 km/h) for the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km).

Only allow the engine to reach a maximum engine speed of 4,500 rpm briefly.

R

R

Change gear in good time.

Ideally, for the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km), drive in the Comfort drive program.

After 1000 miles (1500 km), you can increase the engine speed gradually and accelerate the vehicle to full speed.

You should also observe these notes on breaking in if the engine or parts of the drive train on your vehicle have been replaced.

Always observe the maximum permissible speed.

Driving


G

WARNING




G

WARNING

Unsuitable footwear can hinder correct usage of the pedals, e.g.:

R shoes with thick soles

R shoes with high heels

R slippers


Wear suitable footwear to ensure correct usage of the pedals.

G

WARNING

If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety-relevant functions are only available with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, for example, the power steering and the brake boosting effect. You will require considerably more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of an accident.

Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

G

WARNING

If the parking brake has not been fully released when driving, the parking brake can:

R overheat and cause a fire

R lose its hold function.

There is a risk of fire and an accident. Release the parking brake fully before driving off.

Z

138

Driving

!

Do not warm up the engine with the vehicle stationary. Drive off immediately. Avoid high engine speeds and driving at full throttle until the engine has reached its operating temperature.

Only shift the automatic transmission to the desired drive position when the vehicle is stationary.

Where possible, avoid spinning the drive wheels when pulling away on slippery roads.

You could otherwise damage the drive train.

!

Mercedes-AMG vehicles: at low engine oil temperatures below 68 ‡ (+20 †), the maximum engine speed is restricted in order to protect the engine. To protect the engine and maintain smooth engine operation, avoid driving at full throttle when the engine is cold.

SmartKey positions

SmartKey

g

1

2

3

To remove the SmartKey

Power supply for some consumers, such as the windshield wipers

Ignition (power supply for all consumers) and drive position

To start the engine i

The SmartKey can be turned in the ignition lock even if it is not the correct SmartKey for the vehicle. The ignition is not switched on.

The engine cannot be started.

KEYLESS-GO

General notes

Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO are equipped with a

SmartKey featuring an integrated KEYLESS-GO function and a detachable Start/Stop button.

A check which periodically establishes a radio connection between the vehicle and the Smart-

Key determines whether a valid SmartKey is in the vehicle. This occurs, for example, when starting the engine.

When you insert the Start/Stop button into the ignition lock, the system needs approximately two seconds recognition time. You can then use the Start/Stop button.

Pressing the Start/Stop button several times in succession corresponds to the different key positions in the ignition lock. This is only the case if you are not depressing the brake pedal.

If you depress the brake pedal and press the

Start/Stop button, the engine starts immediately.

To start the vehicle without actively using the

SmartKey:

R

R

R the Start/Stop button must be inserted in the ignition lock.

the SmartKey must be in the vehicle.

the vehicle must not be locked with the

SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO (

Y page 75).

Do not keep the SmartKey:

R

R

R with electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone or another SmartKey.

with metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil.

inside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case.

This can impair the functionality of the KEY-

LESS-GO key.

Do not keep the KEYLESS-GO key in the temperature-controlled cup holder (

Y page 303).

Otherwise, the KEYLESS-GO key will not be recognized.

If you lock the vehicle with the SmartKey's remote control or with KEYLESS-GO, after a short time:

R

R you will not be able to switch on the ignition with the Start/Stop button.

you will not be able to start the engine with the

Start/Stop button until the vehicle is unlocked again.

If you lock the vehicle centrally using the button on the front door (

Y page 80), you can continue to start the engine with the Start/Stop button.

The engine can be switched off while the vehicle is in motion by pressing and holding the Start/

Stop button for three seconds. This function operates independently of the ECO start/stop automatic engine switch-off function.

Key positions with KEYLESS-GO

Driving

139

You do not have to remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock when you leave the vehicle. You should, however, always take the

SmartKey with you when leaving the vehicle. As long as the SmartKey is in the vehicle:

R

R the vehicle can be started using the Start/

Stop button the electrically powered equipment can be operated

:

;

Start/Stop button

Ignition lock

As soon as the ignition is switched on, all the indicator lamps in the instrument cluster light up. Further information on situations where an indicator lamp either fails to go out after starting the engine or lights up while driving

(

Y page 276).

If Start/Stop button : has not yet been pressed, this corresponds to the key being removed from the ignition.

X

To switch on the power supply: press

Start/Stop button : once.

The power supply is switched on. You can now activate the windshield wipers, for example.

The power supply is switched off again if:

R

R

X the driver's door is opened and you press Start/Stop button : twice when in this position

To switch on the ignition: press Start/Stop button : twice.

The ignition is switched on.

If you press Start/Stop button : once when in this position, the ignition is switched off again.

Removing the Start/Stop button

You can remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock and start the vehicle as normal using the SmartKey.

It is only possible to switch between KEYLESS-

GO mode and SmartKey operation when the transmission is in position P.

X

Remove Start/Stop button : from ignition lock ;.

Starting the engine


G

WARNING








R

Start the engine.




G

WARNING

Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave the engine running in enclosed spaces without sufficient ventilation.

G

WARNING

Flammable materials introduced through environmental influence or by animals can

Z

140

Driving

ignite if in contact with the exhaust system or parts of the engine that heat up. There is a risk of fire.

Carry out regular checks to make sure that there are no flammable foreign materials in the engine compartment or in the exhaust system.

X

X

Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed.

Press the Start/Stop button once

(

Y page 138).

Vehicles with a gasoline engine: the engine starts.

Vehicles with a diesel engine: preglow is activated and the engine starts.

General notes

Vehicles with a gasoline engine: the catalytic converter is preheated for up to 30 seconds after a cold start. The sound of the engine may change during this time.


X

Shift the transmission to position P

(

Y page 146).

The transmission position display in the multifunction display shows P (

Y page 148).

i

You can start the engine in transmission position P and N.

Starting procedure with the SmartKey

X

X

To start a diesel engine: turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (

Y page 138).

The % preglow indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up.

Turn the SmartKey to position 3 in the ignition lock and release it as soon as the engine is running (

Y page 138).

i

Vehicles with a diesel engine: you can start the engine without preglow if the engine is warm.

Using KEYLESS-GO to start the engine

The Start/Stop button can be used to start the vehicle without inserting the SmartKey into the ignition lock. The Start/Stop button must be inserted in the ignition lock and the SmartKey must be in the vehicle. This mode for starting the engine operates independently of the ECO start/stop automatic engine start function.

Starting procedure via smartphone

Observe the important safety notes on starting the engine (

Y page 139).

You can also start your engine via your smartphone from outside the vehicle. In this case, the previously selected climate control setting is activated. In this way you can cool or heat the interior of the vehicle before starting the journey.

Only start the engine via your smartphone if it is safe to start and run the engine where your vehicle is parked.

Observe the legal stipulations in the area where your vehicle is parked. Engine start via smartphone may be limited to certain countries or regions.

You can execute a maximum of two consecutive starting attempts via your smartphone. If you insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock, you can carry out two more starting attempts.

Once you have started the engine, you can switch the engine off via your smartphone at any time.

You can only start the engine via your smartphone if:

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R the SmartKey is in the ignition lock park position P is selected the accelerator pedal is not depressed the anti-theft alarm system is not activated the panic alarm is not activated the hazard warning lamps are switched off the hood is closed.

the doors are closed and locked

R the windows and sliding sunroof are closed

Also make sure that:

R

R the fuel tank is sufficiently filled the starter battery is sufficiently charged

Driving

141

G

WARNING

Limbs could be crushed or trapped if the engine is started unintentionally during service or maintenance work. There is a risk of injury.

Always secure the engine against unintentional starting before carrying out maintenance or repair work.

Make sure that the engine cannot be started via your smartphone before carrying out maintenance or repairs. You can prevent an engine start via your smartphone, for example, if you:

R

R

R switch on the hazard warning lamps do not lock the doors open the hood

Information on the automatic release of the electric parking brake (

Y page 161).

Pulling away with a trailer

Pulling away

General notes

G

WARNING

If the engine speed is above the idling speed and you engage transmission position D or R, the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is a risk of an accident.

When engaging transmission position D or R, always firmly depress the brake pedal and do not simultaneously accelerate.

Depress the accelerator carefully when pulling away.

The vehicle locks centrally once you have pulled away. The locking knobs in the doors drop down.

You can open the doors from the inside at any time.

You can also deactivate the automatic locking feature (

Y page 239).

It is only possible to shift the transmission from position P to the desired position if you depress the brake pedal. Only then is the parking lock released. If you do not depress the brake pedal, the DIRECT SELECT lever can still be moved but the parking lock remains engaged.

i

Upshifts take place at higher engine speeds after a cold start. This helps the catalytic converter to reach its operating temperature more quickly.

To ensure that you do not roll backwards when pulling away on an uphill slope, engage the electric parking brake.

X

X

X

Press and hold handle :.

The electric parking brake continues to brake and prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards.

The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster remains on.

Depress the accelerator pedal.

As soon as the vehicle/trailer combination is held by the driving force of the engine, release lever :.

the electric parking brake is released.

The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.

Hill start assist

Hill start assist helps you when pulling away forwards or in reverse on an uphill gradient. It holds the vehicle for a short time after you have removed your foot from the brake pedal. This gives you enough time to move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and to depress it before the vehicle begins to roll.

G

WARNING

After a short time, hill start assist will no longer brake your vehicle and it could roll away.


Therefore, quickly move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Never

Z

142

Driving

leave the vehicle when it is held by hill start assist.

Hill start assist is not active if:

R

R

R

R you are pulling away on a level road or on a downhill gradient.

the transmission is in position N.

the electric parking brake is applied.

ESP

® is malfunctioning.


Introduction

The ECO start/stop function switches the engine off automatically if the vehicle is stopped under certain conditions.

The engine starts automatically when the driver wants to pull away again. The ECO start/stop function thereby helps you to reduce the fuel consumption and emissions of your vehicle.


G

WARNING

If the engine is switched off automatically and you exit the vehicle, the engine is restarted automatically. The vehicle may begin moving.

There is a risk of accident and injury.

If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off the ignition and secure the vehicle against rolling away.

General notes

:

ECO start/stop display

The ECO start/stop function is activated whenever you start the engine using the SmartKey or the Start/Stop button.

If the engine has been switched off automatically by the ECO start/stop function, the è

ECO symbol is shown in the multifunction display.

Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the ECO start/stop function is only available in drive programs

Comfort and Slippery.

Automatic engine switch-off

If the vehicle is braked to a standstill in D or N, the ECO start/stop function switches off the engine automatically.

The ECO start/stop function is operational when:

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R the indicator lamp in the ECO button is lit green.

the Sport Plus or Sport drive program is not selected (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) no off-road program has been selected the outside temperature is within the range that is suitable for the system the engine is at normal operating temperature the set temperature for the vehicle interior has been reached the battery is sufficiently charged the system detects that the windshield is not fogged up when the air-conditioning system is switched on the hood is closed the driver's door is closed and the driver's

R seat belt is fastened

All of the vehicle's systems remain active when the engine is stopped automatically.

The HOLD function can also be activated if the engine has been switched off automatically. It is then not necessary to continue applying the brakes during the automatic stop phase. When you depress the accelerator pedal, the engine starts automatically and the braking effect of the HOLD function is deactivated.

All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-

cles): automatic engine switch-off can take place a maximum of four times in a row (initial stop, then three subsequent stops).

Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the number of consecutive automatic engine switch-offs is unlimited.

Driving

143

Automatic engine start

The engine starts automatically if:

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R you switch off the ECO start/stop function by pressing the ECO button in transmission position D or N the brake pedal is released and the HOLD function is not active you depress the accelerator pedal you engage reverse gear R you move the transmission out of position P you switch to the Sport Plus or Sport drive program (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) you activate manual gearshifting (Mercedes-

AMG vehicles) you switch to the Offroad drive program

(vehicles without Off-Road Engineering package) you switch to the Offroad or Offroad Plus drive program (vehicles with Off-Road Engineering package) you unfasten your seat belt or open the driver's door the vehicle starts to roll the brake system requires this the temperature in the vehicle interior deviates from the set range

R

R the system detects moisture on the windshield when the air-conditioning system is switched on the battery's condition of charge is too low

Shifting the transmission to position P does not start the engine.

Deactivating or activating the ECO start/stop function

All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles)

X

X

To deactivate: press ECO button :.

Indicator lamp ; goes out.

To activate: press ECO button :.

Indicator lamp ; lights up.

If indicator lamp ; is off, the ECO start/stop function has been deactivated manually or as the result of a malfunction.

Mercedes-AMG vehicles

X

X or

X

To deactivate: in the Comfort drive program, press ECO button :.

or

Activate manual gearshifting (

Y page 150).

X

Switch to the Sport Plus or Sport drive program (

Y page 145).


To activate: press ECO button :.

Indicator lamp ; lights up. When the

Sport Plus or Sport drive program is activated, the automatic transmission switches to the Comfort drive program.

Z

144

Driving

If indicator lamp ; is off, the ECO start/stop function has been deactivated manually or as the result of a malfunction.

Problems with the engine

Problem

The engine does not start. The starter motor can be heard.

The engine does not start. You cannot hear the starter motor.


R

R

There is a malfunction in the engine electronics.

There is a malfunction in the fuel supply.

Before attempting to start the engine again:

X

Turn the SmartKey back to position 0 in the ignition lock.

or

X

X

Press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until all indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go out.

Try to start the engine again (

Y page 139). Avoid excessively long and frequent attempts to start the engine as these will drain the battery.

If the engine does not start after several attempts:

X


The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak or discharged.

X

Jump-start the vehicle (

Y page 338).

If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it:

X


The starter motor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high.

X

X

Allow the starter motor to cool down for approximately two minutes.

Try to start the engine again.

If the engine still does not start:

X



145

Problem

Vehicles with a gasoline engine:

The engine is not running smoothly and is misfiring.

The coolant temperature gage shows a value above 248 ‡ (120 †).


There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a mechanical component of the engine management system.

X

X

Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly.

Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic converter and damage it.

Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently.

X

X

Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant to cool down.

Check the coolant level (

Y page 322). Observe the warning notes as you do so and add coolant if necessary.


Use the DYNAMIC SELECT controller to change the drive program. Depending on the drive program selected the following vehicle characteristics will change:

R

R

R the drive (engine and transmission management) the transmission the suspension

R

R the steering the availability of the ECO start/stop function

Each time you start the engine with the Smart-

Key or the Start/Stop button, the Comfort drive program is activated. For further information about starting the engine, see (

Y page 139).

X


cles): turn DYNAMIC SELECT controller : as many times as necessary until the desired drive program is selected.

The selected drive program appears in the multifunction display. After five seconds the display goes out.

In addition, the current drive program settings are displayed in the multimedia system display.

Drive programs available (all vehicles except Mercedes-AMG vehicles):

Individual

Sport

Comfort

Slippery

Off-road

Offroad Plus

(vehicles with

Off-Road Engineering package)

Individual settings

Sporty driving characteristics

Comfortable and economical driving characteristics

Optimal driving characteristics on slippery or snowcovered roads

Optimal driving characteristics for easily negotiable offroad terrain

Optimal driving characteristics for rough terrain

Z

146


Further information on:

R

R

R the Individual, Sport, Comfort and Slippery drive programs (

Y page 149) the Offroad drive program (vehicles without


(

Y page 217) the Offroad and Offroad Plus drive programs (vehicles with Off-Road Engineering package) (

Y page 218)



G

WARNING

The automatic transmission switches to neutral position N when you switch off the engine.

The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an accident.

After switching off the engine, always switch to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehicle from rolling away by applying the parking brake.

DIRECT SELECT lever

Overview of transmission positions

X

Mercedes-AMG vehicles: turn DYNAMIC

SELECT controller : as many times as necessary until the desired drive program is selected.

The selected drive program appears in the multifunction display. After five seconds the display goes out.

In addition, the current drive program settings are displayed in the multimedia system display.

Drive programs available (Mercedes-AMG vehicles):

Individual

Comfort

Sport

Sport Plus

Slippery

Individual settings

Comfortable and economical driving characteristics

Sporty driving characteristics

Particularly sporty driving characteristics

Optimal driving characteristics on slippery or snowcovered roads

Additional information for drive programs

(

Y page 149).

j k i h

Park position with parking lock

Reverse gear

Neutral

Drive

The DIRECT SELECT lever is on the right of the steering column.

The DIRECT SELECT lever always returns to its original position. The current transmission position P, R, N or D appears in the transmission position display in the multifunction display

(

Y page 148).

Engaging park position P

!

If the engine speed is too high or the vehicle is moving, do not shift the automatic transmission directly from D to R, from R to D or directly to P. The automatic transmission could otherwise be damaged.


147

X

Push the DIRECT SELECT lever in the direction of arrow P.

Engaging park position P automatically

Park position P is automatically engaged if:

R

R

R you switch off the engine using the SmartKey and remove the SmartKey you switch off the engine using the SmartKey or using the Start/Stop button and open the driver's door or front-passenger door the driver's door is opened when the vehicle is stationary or driving at very low speed and the transmission is in position D or R

Under certain conditions, the automatic transmission shifts automatically to transmission position P if the HOLD function or Distance Pilot

DISTRONIC is activated. Observe the information on the HOLD function (

Y page 185) and on

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC (

Y page 177).

Engaging reverse gear R

!

Only shift the automatic transmission to R when the vehicle is stationary.

X

X

If the transmission is in position D or N: push the DIRECT SELECT lever up past the first point of resistance.

If the transmission is in position P: depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever up past the first point of resistance.

Shifting to neutral N

G

WARNING








R

Start the engine.




X

X

X

X

If the transmission is in position D or R: push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down to the first point of resistance.

If the transmission is in position P: depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down to the first point of resistance.

If you switch the engine off with the transmission in position R or D, the automatic transmission shifts to N automatically.

With the SmartKey: if you then open the driver's door or the front-passenger door or remove the SmartKey from the ignition, the automatic transmission shifts to P automatically.

With the Start/Stop button: if you then open the driver's door or the front-passenger door, the automatic transmission shifts to P automatically.

If you want the automatic transmission to remain in neutral N, e.g. when having the vehicle cleaned in an automatic car wash with a towing system:

Using the SmartKey:

X

X

X

X

X

X



Shift to neutral N.

Release the brake pedal.

Release the electric parking brake.

Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

With the Start/Stop button:

X

X

X

X

Remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock.




Shift to neutral N.


Z

148


X

X



Engaging drive position D

X

X

If the transmission is in position R or N: push the DIRECT SELECT lever down past the first point of resistance.

If the transmission is in position P: depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever down past the first point of resistance.

Transmission position and drive program display

The current transmission position and drive program appear in the multifunction display.

:

;

=

Transmission position

Gear

Drive program

The arrows in the transmission position display show how and into which transmission positions you can shift using the DIRECT SELECT lever.

If the transmission position display in the multifunction display is not working, you should pull away carefully to check whether the desired transmission position is engaged. Ideally, you should select transmission position D and, on

Mercedes-AMG vehicles, drive program C or S.

Transmission positions

B

Park position

Only shift the transmission into position P when the vehicle is stationary

(

Y page 159). The parking lock should not be used as a brake when parking. Always apply the electronic parking brake in addition to the parking lock in order to secure the vehicle.

If the vehicle electronics are malfunctioning, the transmission may be locked in position P. Have the vehicle electronics checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

Park position P is automatically engaged if:

R

R

R you switch off the engine using the

SmartKey and remove the Smart-

Key you switch off the engine using the

SmartKey or using the Start/Stop button and open the driver's door or front-passenger door the driver's door is opened when the vehicle is stationary or driving at very low speed and the transmission is in position D or R

C

Reverse gear

Only shift the transmission into position R when the vehicle is stationary.


149

A

Neutral

Do not shift the transmission to N while driving. Otherwise, the automatic transmission could be damaged.

No power is transmitted from the engine to the drive wheels.

Releasing the brakes will allow you to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to push it or tow it.

If ESP

® is deactivated or faulty: shift the transmission to position N if the vehicle is in danger of skidding, e.g.

on icy roads.


!

Rolling in neutral N can damage the drive train.

7

Drive

The automatic transmission changes gear automatically. All forward gears are available.

Kickdown

Use kickdown for maximum acceleration.

X

X

Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point.

The automatic transmission shifts to a lower gear depending on the engine speed.

Ease off the accelerator pedal once the desired speed is reached.

The automatic transmission shifts back up.

Rocking the vehicle free

Shifting the transmission repeatedly between gears D and R may help to free the vehicle if it has become stuck in slush or snow. The vehicle's engine management system limits the speed to a maximum of 5 mph (9 km/h) when shifting back and forth. To shift back and forth between transmission positions D and R, move the DIRECT SELECT lever up and down past the point of resistance.


X

X

Drive in the middle of the engine speed range on uphill gradients.

Depending on the uphill or downhill gradient, use the left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter (

Y page 150) to select a lower gear, even if cruise control or Distance Pilot

DISTRONIC are activated.

Driving tips

Changing gear

The automatic transmission shifts to the individual gears automatically when it is in transmission position D. This automatic gear shifting behavior is determined by:

R

R

R the selected drive program the position of the accelerator pedal the road speed

Accelerator pedal position

Your style of driving influences how the automatic transmission shifts gear:

R

R little throttle: early upshifts more throttle: late upshifts

Drive programs

Slippery drive program

The Slippery drive program has the following characteristics:

R

R

R reduced engine and transmission settings for optimum propulsion on slippery or snow-covered roads.

optimized ESP ® stability control on slippery or snow-covered roads.

the vehicle has improved driving stability on slippery or snow-covered roads, for example.

Z

150


Comfort drive program

The Comfort drive program has the following characteristics:

R

R

R

R comfort-oriented engine and transmission settings.

optimal fuel consumption resulting from the automatic transmission shifting up sooner.

the vehicle pulling away more gently in forward and reverse gears, unless the accelerator pedal is depressed fully.

the automatic transmission shifting up sooner. This results in the vehicle being driven at lower engine speeds and the wheels being less likely to spin.

Sport drive program

The Sport drive program has the following characteristics:

R

R

R sporty engine and transmission settings.

the automatic transmission shifting up later.

the fuel consumption possibly being higher as a result of the later automatic transmission shift points.

the suspension exhibits sporty damping (vehicles with AIRMATIC).

Drive program Sport Plus (Mercedes-

AMG vehicles)

The Sport Plus drive program has the following characteristics:

R

R

R

R

R the vehicle exhibits particularly sporty driving characteristics.

the vehicle pulling away in first gear.

the automatic transmission shifting up later.

the fuel consumption possibly being higher as a result of the later automatic transmission shift points.

the suspension exhibits particularly firm springing and damping settings (vehicles with

AIRMATIC).

the ECO start/stop function is deactivated, it can, however, be activated again using the

ECO button (

Y page 143).

Individual drive program

In the Individual drive program, the following properties of the drive program can be selected:

R

R

R

R

R the drive (engine and transmission management) the transmission the suspension all vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles): the steering all vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles): availability of the ECO start/stop function

To select the gears in the Individual drive program permanently using the steering wheel paddle shifters, select the permanent manual gearshift program.

Information about configuring the Individual drive program with the multimedia system can be found in the Digital Operator's Manual.

Manual gear shifting

General notes

You can change gear yourself using the steering wheel paddle shifters. The transmission must be in position D.

Depending on which steering wheel paddle shifter is pulled, the automatic transmission immediately shifts into the next gear down or up, if permitted.

To use manual shifting, you have two options:

R

R temporary setting permanent setting

If you activate manual gearshifting, the multifunction display will show the current gear instead of transmission position D.

If manual gearshifting is deactivated, the gears will be selected automatically.

Temporary setting


151

X or


X

Use the DYNAMIC SELECT controller to change the drive program.

Permanent setting (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)

X

X

To activate: shift the DIRECT SELECT lever to position D.

Pull steering wheel paddle shifter : or ;.

Temporary setting will be active for a certain amount of time. Under certain conditions the minimum amount of time is extended, e.g. in the case of lateral acceleration, during an overrun phase or when driving on steep terrain.

X

To deactivate: pull steering wheel paddle shifter ; and hold it in place.

or

X

Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to switch the transmission position.

or

X

Use the DYNAMIC SELECT controller to change the drive program.

Permanent setting (all vehicles except

Mercedes-AMG vehicles)

X

X


Press button :.


X or


X

Use the DYNAMIC SELECT controller to switch to the Individual drive program.


Shifting gears

!

Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the automatic transmission does not shift up automatically even when the engine limiting speed for the current gear is reached. When the engine limiting speed is reached, the fuel supply is cut to prevent the engine from overrevving. Always make sure that the engine speed does not reach the red area of the tachometer. There is otherwise a risk of engine damage.

X

X


Press button :.

Z

152


the multifunction display of the instrument cluster.

Shift recommendation

The gearshift recommendations assist you in adopting an economical driving style. The recommended gear is shown in the multifunction display.

X

Shift to recommended gear ; according to gearshift recommendation : when shown in

Upshifting (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)

!

The automatic transmission does not shift up automatically even when the engine limiting speed for the current gear is reached.

When the engine limiting speed is reached, the fuel supply is cut to prevent the engine from overrevving. Always make sure that the engine speed does not reach the red area of the tachometer. There is otherwise a risk of engine damage.

X

X

To shift up: pull steering wheel paddle shifter ;.

The automatic transmission shifts up to the next gear.


cles): if the maximum engine speed on the currently engaged gear is reached and you continue to accelerate, the automatic transmission automatically shifts up in order to prevent engine damage.

To shift down: pull steering wheel paddle shifter :.

The automatic transmission shifts down to the next gear.

Automatic down shifting occurs when coasting.

If the engine exceeds the maximum engine speed when shifting down, the automatic transmission protects against engine damage by not shifting down.

:

;

Gear indicator

Upshift indicator

Before the engine speed reaches the red area, an upshift indicator will be shown in the multifunction display.

X

When the UP message appears in the multifunction display, pull on the right-hand steering wheel paddle shifter.

Kickdown

Mercedes-AMG vehicles: kickdown is only possible in the temporary setting.

X

For maximum acceleration, depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point.

X

The automatic transmission shifts to a lower gear depending on the engine speed.

Shift back up once the desired speed is reached.

During kickdown, you cannot shift gears using the steering wheel paddle shifters.

If you apply full throttle, the automatic transmission shifts up to the next gear when the maximum engine speed is reached. This prevents the engine from overrevving.

Refueling

153

Problems with the transmission

Problem

The transmission has problems shifting gear.

7G-TRONIC:

The acceleration ability is deteriorating.

The transmission no longer changes gear.

9G-TRONIC:

The acceleration ability is deteriorating.

The transmission no longer changes gear.


The transmission is losing oil.

X

Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

The transmission is in emergency mode.

It is only possible to shift into second gear and reverse gear.

X

X

X

X

X

X

Stop the vehicle.

Shift the transmission to position P.

Switch off the engine.

Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine.

Shift the transmission to position D or R.

If D is selected, the transmission shifts into second gear; if R is selected, the transmission shifts into reverse gear.


The transmission is in emergency mode.

It is only partly possible to engage the gears or the transmission is in position N.

X

X

X

X

X

X

Stop the vehicle.



Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine.



Transfer case

This section is only valid for vehicles with 4wheel drive (4MATIC). Power is always transmitted to both axles.

!

Performance tests may only be carried out on a 2-axle dynamometer. The brake system or transfer case could otherwise be damaged.

Contact a qualified specialist workshop for a performance test.

!

Because ESP ® is an automatic system, the engine and ignition must be switched off

(SmartKey in position 0 or 1 or Start/Stop button in position 0 or 1) when the electric parking brake is being tested on a brake dynamometer (maximum 10 seconds).

Braking triggered automatically by ESP

® seriously damage the brake system.

may

!

Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed with either the front or the rear axle raised, as doing so will damage the transmission.

Refueling


G

WARNING

Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explosion.

You must avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before refueling.

Z

154

Refueling

G

WARNING

Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.


You must make sure that fuel does not come into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel vapors. Keep fuel away from children.

If you or others come into contact with fuel, observe the following:

R

Wash away fuel from skin immediately using soap and water.

R

If fuel comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water. Seek medical assistance without delay.

R

If fuel is swallowed, seek medical assistance without delay. Do not induce vomiting.

R

Immediately change out of clothing which has come into contact with fuel.

G

WARNING

Electrostatic buildup can create sparks and ignite fuel vapors. There is a risk of fire and explosion.

Always touch the vehicle body before opening the fuel filler flap or touching the fuel pump nozzle. Any existing electrostatic buildup is thereby discharged.

G

WARNING

Vehicles with a diesel engine:

If you mix diesel fuel with gasoline, the flash point is lower than that of pure diesel fuel.

When the engine is running, exhaust system components could overheat without being noticed. There is a risk of fire.

Never refuel with gasoline. Never mix gasoline with diesel fuel.

!

Do not use gasoline to refuel vehicles with a diesel engine. Do not switch on the ignition if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel.

Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system.

Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. The repair costs are high. Notify a qualified specialist workshop and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely.

!

Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a gasoline engine. Do not switch on the ignition if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel.


Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. Notify a qualified specialist workshop and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely.

!

Overfilling the fuel tank could damage the fuel system.

!

Take care not to spill any fuel on painted surfaces. You could otherwise damage the paintwork.

!

Use a filter when adding fuel from a fuel can.

The fuel lines and/or the fuel injection system could otherwise be blocked by particles from the fuel can.

Do not get into the vehicle again during the refueling process. Otherwise, electrostatic charge could build up again.

If you overfill the fuel tank, fuel could spray out when the fuel pump nozzle is removed.

For further information on fuel and fuel quality

(

Y page 379).

Refueling


Pay attention to the important safety notes

(

Y page 153).

The fuel filler flap is unlocked or locked automatically when you unlock or lock the vehicle with the SmartKey or using KEYLESS-GO.

The position of the fuel filler cap is displayed

8 in the instrument cluster. The arrow next to the filling pump indicates the side of the vehicle.

Refueling

155

Opening the fuel filler flap

:

;

=

?

Opening the fuel filler flap

To insert the fuel filler cap

Instruction label for fuel type to be refueled

Tire pressure table

X

X



or, on vehicles with KEYLESS‑GO:

X

Open the driver's door.

X

The vehicle electronics now have status 0.

This is the same as the SmartKey having been removed.

The driver’s door can be closed again.

Press the fuel filler flap in the direction of arrow :.

The fuel filler flap swings up.

X

X

X

X

Turn the fuel filler cap counterclockwise and remove it.

Insert the fuel filler cap into the holder bracket on the inside of filler flap ;.

Completely insert the filler neck of the fuel pump nozzle into the tank, hook in place and refuel.

Only fill the tank until the pump nozzle switches off.

Do not add any more fuel after the pump stops filling for the first time. Otherwise, fuel may leak out.

Vehicles with a diesel engine: the filler neck is designed for refueling at diesel filling pumps.

Closing the fuel filler flap

X

X

Replace the cap on the filler neck and turn clockwise until it engages audibly.

Close the fuel filler flap.

Close the fuel filler flap before locking the vehicle.

If you are driving with the fuel filler cap open, the

8 reserve fuel warning lamp flashes. A message appears in the multifunction display

(

Y page 259).

In addition, the ; Check Engine warning lamp may light up (

Y page 283).

Z

156

Refueling

Problems with fuel and the fuel tank

Problem

Fuel is leaking from the vehicle.

The engine does not start.

The fuel filler flap cannot be opened.


G

WARNING

The fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty.

Risk of explosion or fire.

X

X

Apply the electric parking brake.


X


or, on vehicles with KEYLESS‑GO:

X

X

X


The on-board electronics now have status 0. This is the same as the

SmartKey having been removed.

Do not restart the engine under any circumstances.


The fuel tank of a vehicle with a diesel engine has been run completely dry.

X

X

X

Refuel the vehicle with at least 5.3 US qt (5 liters) of diesel.

Turn the ignition on for approximately ten seconds (

Y page 138).

Start the engine continuously for up to ten seconds until it runs smoothly.

If the engine does not start:

X

Turn the ignition on again for approximately ten seconds

X

(

Y page 138).

Start the engine again continuously for up to ten seconds until it runs smoothly.

If the engine does not start after three attempts:

X


The fuel filler flap is not unlocked.

X

Unlock the vehicle (

Y page 74).


X

Unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (

Y page 76).

The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is jammed.

X


DEF (BlueTEC vehicles only)

General notes

To function properly, BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreatment must be operated with the reducing agent DEF. Adding DEF is one of the tasks performed during maintenance. Under normal operating conditions, a tank of DEF lasts until the next service due date.

When the supply of DEF is almost used up, the

Check Additive See Operator's Manual message is shown in the multifunction display.

If you drive the vehicle faster than 10 mph

(16 km/h), the Check Additive See Opera‐

Refueling

157

tor's Manual message goes out after approximately one minute.

When the DEF supply drops to a minimum, the

Remaining Starts: 16 message is shown in the multifunction display.

If the Remaining Starts: 16 message appears in the multifunction display, you can start the engine another 16 times. If DEF is not refilled, you will subsequently be unable to

start the engine.

X

X

X

Add at least 1 gal (3.8 l) of DEF.

Switch on the ignition for at least 60 seconds.

Start the engine.

i

Have the DEF tank refilled at a qualified specialist workshop.

Use the special DEF refill bottle when adding

DEF between maintenance intervals. You can obtain further information from an authorized

Mercedes-Benz Center or, if necessary, contact

Roadside Assistance (

Y page 27).

If the outside temperature is below 12 ‡ (Ò11 †) it may be difficult to top up. If DEF is frozen and there is an active warning indicator, it may not be possible to add DEF. Park the vehicle in a warmer place, e.g. in a garage, until DEF has become fluid again. It will then be possible to add DEF again. Alternatively, have the DEF tank refilled at a qualified specialist workshop.

Further information about BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreatment and DEF is available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.


DEF is a water-soluble fluid for the exhaust gas aftertreatment of diesel engines. It is:

R

R not poisonous colorless and odorless

R not flammable

When you open the DEF container, small amounts of ammonia vapor may be released.

Ammonia vapors have a pungent odor and are particularly irritating to the skin, to mucous membranes and to the eyes. You may experience a burning sensation in your eyes, nose and throat. Coughing and watering of the eyes are possible.

Do not inhale ammonia vapors. Fill the DEF tank only in well-ventilated areas.

DEF must not come into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing and must not be swallowed.

Keep DEF away from children.

If you or other persons come into contact with

DEF, observe the following:

R

R

R

R

Rinse DEF from your skin immediately with soap and water.

If DEF comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water. Seek medical assistance without delay.

If DEF has been swallowed, rinse your mouth out immediately. Drink plenty of water. Seek medical assistance without delay.

Change out of clothing contaminated with

DEF immediately.

!

Only use DEF in accordance with

ISO 22241. Do not mix any additives with

DEF, and do not dilute DEF with water. This may destroy the BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreatment system.

!

The vehicle must be parked on level ground to fill the DEF tank. The DEF tank can only be filled as intended with the vehicle parked on a level surface. This avoids false level readings.

Filling the tank is not permitted if the vehicle is not parked on a level surface. There is a danger of overfilling, which could result in damage to components of the BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreatment.

!

Rinse surfaces that have come into contact with DEF immediately with water or remove

DEF using a damp cloth and cold water. If the

DEF has already crystallized, use a sponge and cold water to clean it. DEF residues crystallize after time and contaminate the affected surfaces.

!

DEF is not a fuel additive and must not be added to the fuel tank. If DEF is added to the fuel tank, this can lead to engine damage.

For further information on DEF, see

(

Y page 381).

Z

158

Refueling

Opening/closing the DEF filler cap

The fuel filler flap is unlocked or locked automatically when you open or close the vehicle with the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO.

X

X

X

X

X

X

To open:switch the ignition off.

Press the fuel filler flap in the direction of arrow :.

The fuel filler flap swings up.

Turn blue DEF fuel filler cap ; counter-clockwise and remove it.

DEF filler cap ; is secured with a plastic strip.

To close: place DEF filler cap ; on the filler neck and turn it clockwise.

To close the fuel filler flap, press it in the direction of arrow :.

Drive faster than 10 mph (16 km/h).

The Check Additive See Operator's

Manual message goes out after approximately one minute.

i

If the Check Additive See Operator's

Manual message continues to be shown in the multifunction display, you must add more

DEF.

DEF refill canisters

!

Do not screw the disposable hose on too tight. The disposable hose could otherwise be damaged and DEF may leak out.

X

X

Unscrew the cap from the opening on top of

DEF refill canister ;.

Place disposable hose : on the opening of

DEF refill canister ; and screw it on clockwise until hand-tight.

Disposable hose : remains closed until you fasten disposable hose : to the DEF filler neck of the vehicle.

X

X

X

X

X

Place disposable hose : on the filler neck on the vehicle and screw it on clockwise until hand-tight. When you feel resistance, disposable hose : is sufficiently secured.

Lift up and tip DEF refill canister ;.

Filling stops when the DEF tank is completely filled. Do not fill the DEF tank any further. DEF refill canister ; can be removed when it has been only partially emptied.

Turn disposable hose : on the filler neck of the vehicle counter-clockwise and remove it.

Turn disposable hose : on the opening of

DEF refill canister ; counter-clockwise and remove it.

Reseal DEF refill canister ; with the cap.

DEF refill canisters are available at many gas stations or at a qualified specialist workshop.

DEF refill canisters are often sold with a filler hose. A filler hose that does not exactly fit the vehicle's DEF tank offers no protection against

Parking

159

overfilling. DEF may leak if overfilled. Mercedes-

Benz offers a special disposable hose with overfill protection. You can obtain this from any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. DEF is available in a variety of containers and receptacles.

Only use the disposable hose with the

Mercedes-Benz DEF refill canisters.

DEF refill bottle

!

Only screw on the DEF refill bottle handtight. Otherwise, the thread of the DEF refill bottle could be damaged and DEF could leak out.

X

X

X

Unscrew the protective cap from DEF refill bottle :.

Place DEF refill bottle : on the filler neck as shown and screw it on clockwise until handtight.

Press DEF refill bottle : towards the filler neck.

The DEF tank is filled. This may take up to one minute.

i

When DEF refill bottle : is no longer pressed, filling stops and the bottle may be taken off again after being only partially emptied.

X

X

X

Release DEF refill bottle :.

Turn DEF refill bottle : counter-clockwise and remove it.

Screw the protective cap onto DEF refill bottle : again.

DEF refill canisters are available at many gas stations or at a qualified specialist workshop.

Refill bottles without a threaded cap do not provide overfill protection. DEF may leak if overfilled. Mercedes Benz offers special refill bottles with a threaded seal. These are available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Parking


G

WARNING

Flammable material such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system or exhaust gas flow. There is a risk of fire.

Park the vehicle so that no flammable materials come into contact with parts of the vehicle which are hot. Take particular care not to park on dry grassland or harvested grain fields.

G

WARNING




R start the engine.




!

Always secure the vehicle correctly against rolling away. Otherwise, the vehicle or its drivetrain could be damaged.

To ensure that the vehicle is secured against rolling away unintentionally:

R

R

R

R

R the electric parking brake must be applied.

the transmission must be in position P and the

SmartKey must be removed from the ignition lock.

the front wheels must be turned towards the curb on steep uphill or downhill gradients.

the empty vehicle must be secured at the front axle with a wheel chock or similar, for example, on uphill or downhill gradients.

a laden vehicle must also be secured at the rear axle with a wheel chock or similar, for example, on uphill or downhill gradients.

Z

160

Parking

Switching off the engine

G

WARNING

The automatic transmission switches to neutral position N when you switch off the engine.

The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an accident.

After switching off the engine, always switch to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehicle from rolling away by applying the parking brake.

X

X

X

X



With the SmartKey: turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it.

The immobilizer is activated.

With KEYLESS-GO:

Press the Start/Stop button (

Y page 138)

The engine stops and all the indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go out.


If you then open the driver's or front-passenger door, the automatic transmission shifts to P automatically.

If you want the automatic transmission to remain in neutral N, e.g. when having the vehicle cleaned in an automatic car wash with a towing system:

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Vehicles with a SmartKey: switch on the ignition.

Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove the

Start/Stop button from the ignition lock.



All vehicles: depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed.

Shift to neutral N.




i

The engine can be switched off in an emergency while the vehicle is in motion by pressing and holding the Start/Stop button for three seconds.

Electric parking brake

General notes

G

WARNING




R start the engine.




The function of the electric parking brake is dependent on the on-board voltage. If the onboard voltage is low or there is a malfunction in the system, it may not be possible to apply the released parking brake.

X

X

If this is the case, only park the vehicle on level ground and secure it to prevent it rolling away.

Shift the automatic transmission to position

P.

It may not be possible to release an applied parking brake if the on-board voltage is low or there is a malfunction in the system. Contact a qualified specialist workshop.

i

The electric parking brake performs a function test at regular intervals while the engine is switched off. The sounds that can be heard while this is occurring are normal.

Parking

161

Applying or releasing manually

X

To engage: push handle :.

When the electric parking brake is engaged, the F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) red indicator lamp lights up in the instrument cluster.

i

The electric parking brake can also be

X applied when the SmartKey is removed.

To release: pull handle :.

The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.

i

The electric parking brake can only be released:

R if the SmartKey is in position 1 in the igni-

R tion lock (

Y page 138) or if the ignition was switched on using the

Start/Stop button

To ensure that you do not roll backwards when pulling away on an uphill slope, engage the electric parking brake (

Y page 141).

Applying automatically

The electric parking brake is automatically applied when the transmission is in position P and:

R

R the engine is switched off or the driver is not wearing a seat belt and the driver's door is opened

To prevent the electric parking brake from being automatically applied, pull handle :.

The electric parking brake is also engaged automatically if:

R

R

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC brings the vehicle to a standstill or the HOLD function is keeping the vehicle stationary

R

Parking Pilot is keeping the vehicle stationary

In addition, at least one of the following conditions must be fulfilled:

R

R

R the engine is switched off the driver is not wearing a seat belt and the driver's door is opened there is a system malfunction

R

R the power supply is insufficient the vehicle is stationary for a lengthy period

The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up.

The electric parking brake is not automatically engaged if the engine is switched off by the ECO start/stop function.

Releasing automatically

The electric parking brake is released automatically when all of the following conditions are fulfilled:

R

R

R

R the engine is running.

the transmission is in position D or R.

the seat belt has been fastened.

you depress the accelerator pedal.

If the transmission is in position R, the trunk lid must be closed.

If your seat belt is not fastened, the following conditions must be fulfilled to automatically release the electric parking brake:

R

R the driver's door is closed.

you have shifted out of transmission position

P or you have previously driven faster than

2 mph (3 km/h).

i

Ensure that you do not depress the accelerator pedal unintentionally. Otherwise the parking brake will be released and the vehicle will start to move.

Z

162

Driving tips

Emergency braking

The vehicle can also be braked during an emergency by using the electric parking brake.

X

While driving, push handle : of the electric parking brake.

The vehicle is braked for as long as the handle of the electric parking brake is pressed. The longer the electric parking brake handle is depressed, the greater the braking force.

During braking:

R

R

R a warning tone sounds the Release Park. Brake message appears the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster flashes

When the vehicle has been braked to a standstill, the electric parking brake is engaged.

Parking the vehicle for a long period

If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than four weeks, the battery may be damaged by exhaustive discharging.

If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than six weeks, the vehicle may suffer damage as a result of lack of use.

X

Visit a qualified specialist workshop and seek advice.

i

You can obtain information about trickle chargers from a qualified specialist workshop.

Driving tips

General notes


G

WARNING

If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety-relevant functions are only available with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, for example, the power steering and the brake boosting effect. You will require considerably more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of an accident.

Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

G

WARNING

If you operate mobile communication equipment while driving, you will be distracted from traffic conditions. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.

Only operate this equipment when the vehicle is stationary.

Observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are driving. Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a mobile phone while driving a vehicle.

If you make a call while driving, always use hands-free mode. Only operate the telephone when the traffic situation permits. If you are unsure, pull over to a safe location and stop before operating the telephone.

Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph

(approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle covers a distance of 44 ft (approximately 14 m) per second.

Drive sensibly – save fuel

X

X

Observe the following tips to save fuel:

X

X

X

X

The tires should always be inflated to the recommended tire pressure.

Remove unnecessary loads.

Remove roof carriers when they are not needed.

Warm up the engine at low engine speeds.

Avoid frequent acceleration or braking.

Have all maintenance work carried out as indicated by the service intervals in the Main-

Driving tips

163

tenance Booklet or by the service interval display.

Fuel consumption also increases when driving in cold weather, in stop-start traffic and in hilly terrain.

Drinking and driving

G

WARNING

Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs and driving are very dangerous combinations.

Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can affect your reflexes, perceptions and judgment.

The possibility of a serious or even fatal accident is greatly increased when you drink or take drugs and drive.

Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow anyone to drive who has been drinking or taking drugs.

Emission control

G

WARNING


Certain engine systems are designed to keep the level of poisonous components in exhaust fumes within legal limits.

These systems only work at peak efficiency if they are serviced exactly in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications. Always have work on the engine carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use an authorized Mercedes-

Benz Center for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine settings must not be changed under any circumstances. Furthermore, all specific service work must be carried out at regular intervals and in accordance with the Mercedes-

Benz service requirements. Details can be found in the Maintenance Booklet.

ECO display

The ECO display shows you how economical your driving style is. The ECO display assists you in achieving the most economical driving style for the selected settings and prevailing conditions. Your driving style can significantly influence the vehicle's consumption.

:

;

=

?

Acceleration

Coasting

Constant

Additional range achieved

Range ? is shown under Bonus fr. Start and represents the additional range achieved since the beginning of the journey as a result of an adapted driving style.

If the fuel level has dropped into the reserve range, the Reserve Fuel message is shown in the multifunction display instead of range ?.

The 8 warning lamp in the instrument cluster also lights up (

Y page 283).

Z

164

Driving tips

The ECO display consists of three sections, with an inner and outer area. The sections correspond to the following three categories:

:

;

=

Acceleration (evaluation of all acceleration processes):

R the outer area fills up and the inner area lights up green: moderate acceleration, especially at higher

R speeds the outer area empties and the inner area is gray: sporty acceleration

Coasting (evaluation of all deceleration processes):

R the outer area fills up and the inner area lights up green: anticipatory driving, keeping your distance and early release of the accelerator.

The vehicle can coast without use

R of the brakes.

the outer area empties and the inner area is gray: frequent heavy braking

Constant(continuous evaluation over the entire journey):

R the outer area fills up and the inner area lights up green: constant speed and avoidance of unneces-

R sary acceleration and deceleration the outer area empties and the inner area is gray: fluctuations in speed

In addition to driving style, the actual consumption is affected by other factors, such as:

R

R

R

R load tire pressure cold start choice of route

R electrical consumers switched on

These factors are not included in the ECO display.

An economical driving style specially requires driving at moderate engine speeds.

Achieving a higher value in the categories

"Acceleration" and "Constant":

R

R observe the gearshift recommendations.

drive the vehicle in the Comfort drive program.

On long journeys at a constant speed, e.g. on the highway, only the outer area for "constant" will change.

The ECO display summarizes the driving style from the start of the journey to its completion.

Therefore, there are more marked changes in the outer areas at the start of a journey. On longer journeys, there are fewer changes. For more marked changes, perform a manual rest

(

Y page 233).

For further information on the ECO display, see

(

Y page 232).

The three inner areas display the current driving style and light up green as a result of a particularly economical driving style. Depending on the driving situation, up to two areas may light up simultaneously.

At the beginning of the journey, the three outer areas are empty and fill up as a result of economical driving. A higher level indicates a more economical driving style. If the three outer areas are completely filled at the same time, the driver has adopted the most economical driving style for the selected settings and prevailing conditions. The ECO display border lights up.

The ECO display does not indicate the actual fuel consumption. The additionally achieved range displayed under Bonus fr. Start does not indicate a fixed consumption reduction.

Braking


G

WARNING

If you shift down on a slippery road surface in an attempt to increase the engine's braking effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.

There is an increased danger of skidding and accidents.

Do not shift down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface.

Downhill gradients

!

On long and steep gradients, you must reduce the load on the brakes by shifting to a lower gear in good time. This allows you to take advantage of the engine's braking effect.

Driving tips

165

This helps you to avoid overheating the brakes and wearing them out excessively.

When you take advantage of engine braking, a drive wheel may not turn for some time, e.g.

on a slippery road surface. This could cause damage to the drive train. This type of damage is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty.

Do not depress the brake pedal continuously while the vehicle is in motion, e.g. causing the brakes to rub by constantly applying light pressure to the pedal. This results in excessive and premature wear to the brake pads.

Use the left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter to shift into a lower gear in good time on long and steep downhill gradients. This is especially important if the vehicle is laden.

This also applies if you have activated cruise control, the speed limiter or Distance Pilot

DISTRONIC.

This will use the braking effect of the engine, so that less braking will be required to maintain the speed. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly.

Heavy and light loads

G

WARNING

If you rest your foot on the brake pedal while driving, the braking system can overheat. This increases the stopping distance and can even cause the braking system to fail. There is a risk of an accident.

Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Never depress the brake pedal and the accelerator pedal at the same time.

!

Depressing the brake pedal constantly results in excessive and premature wear to the brake pads.

If the brakes have been subjected to a heavy load, do not stop the vehicle immediately. Drive on for a short while. This allows the airflow to cool the brakes more quickly.

Wet roads

If you have driven for a long time in heavy rain without braking, there may be a delayed reaction from the brakes when braking for the first time. This may also occur after the vehicle has been washed or driven through deep water.

You then have to depress the brake pedal more firmly. Maintain a greater distance from the vehicle in front.

After driving on a wet road or having the vehicle washed, brake firmly while paying attention to the traffic conditions. This will warm up the brake discs, thereby drying them more quickly and protecting them against corrosion.

Limited braking performance on salttreated roads

If you drive on salted roads, a layer of salt residue may form on the brake discs and brake pads. This can result in a significantly longer braking distance.

R

R

Brake occasionally to remove any possible salt residue. Make sure that you do not endanger other road users when doing so.

Carefully depress the brake pedal and the

R beginning and end of a journey.

Maintain a greater distance to the vehicle ahead.

Servicing the brakes

!

The brake fluid level may be too low, if:

R if the red brake warning lamp lights up in

R the instrument cluster and you hear a warning tone while the engine is running

Observe additional warning messages in the multifunction display.

The brake fluid level may be too low due to brake pad wear or leaking brake lines.

Have the brake system checked immediately.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop to arrange this.

!

A function or performance test should only be carried out on a 2-axle dynamometer. If you wish to operate the vehicle on such a dynamometer, please consult a qualified specialist workshop in advance. You could otherwise damage the drive train or the brake system.

!

Because ESP ® is an automatic system, the engine and ignition must be switched off

(SmartKey in position 0 or 1 or Start/Stop button in position 0 or 1) when the electric

Z

166

Driving tips

parking brake is being tested on a brake dynamometer (maximum 10 seconds).

Braking triggered automatically by ESP

® seriously damage the brake system.

may

All checks and maintenance work on the brake system must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Have brake pads installed and brake fluid replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.

If the brake system has only been subject to moderate loads, you should test the functionality of your brakes at regular intervals. To do so, depress the brake pedal firmly when driving at a high speed. This improves the grip of the brake pads.

You can find a description of Brake Assist (BAS) on (

Y page 64) or of BAS PLUS on (

Y page 69).

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only have brake pads/linings installed on your vehicle which have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which correspond to an equivalent quality standard. Brake pads/linings which have not been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which are not of an equivalent quality could affect your vehicle's operating safety.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use brake fluid that has been specially approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or which corresponds to an equivalent quality standard. Brake fluid which has not been approved for

Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which is not of an equivalent quality could affect your vehicle's operating safety.

High-performance brake system

(Mercedes-AMG vehicles)

The high-performance brake system is designed for heavy loads. This may lead to noise when braking. This will depend on:

R

R

R

Speed

Braking force

Environmental conditions, such as temperature and humidity

The wear of individual components of the brake system, such as the brake pads/linings or brake discs, depends on the individual driving style and operating conditions.

For this reason, it is impossible to state a mileage that will be valid under all circumstances. An aggressive driving style will lead to high wear.

You can obtain further information about this from your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

New and replaced brake pads and discs only reach their optimum braking effect after several hundred kilometers of driving. Compensate for this by applying greater force to the brake pedal.

Keep this in mind, and adapt your driving and braking accordingly during this break-in period.

Excessive heavy braking results in correspondingly high brake wear. Observe the # brake wear warning lamp in the instrument cluster and note any brake status messages in the multifunction display. Especially for high performance driving, it is important to maintain and have the brake system checked regularly.

Driving on wet roads

Hydroplaning

If water has accumulated to a certain depth on the road surface, there is a danger of hydroplaning occurring, even if:

R

R you drive at low speeds.

the tires have adequate tread depth.

For this reason, in the event of heavy rain or in conditions in which hydroplaning may occur, you must drive in the following manner:

R

R

R

R lower your speed.

avoid ruts.

avoid sudden steering movements.

brake carefully.

Driving on flooded roads

!

Do not drive through flooded areas. Check the depth of any water before driving through it. Drive slowly through standing water. Otherwise, water may enter the vehicle interior or the engine compartment. This can damage the electronic components in the engine or the automatic transmission. Water can also be drawn in by the engine's air suction nozzles and this can cause engine damage.

i

Vehicles with the AIRMATIC package:

select the raised vehicle level before driving through a body of water.

Driving tips

167

Off-road fording

!

Under no circumstances should you accelerate before entering the water. The bow wave could cause water to enter and damage the engine and other assemblies.

!

Do not open any of the vehicle's doors while fording. Otherwise, water could get into the vehicle interior and damage the vehicle's electronics and interior equipment.

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

Establish how deep the water is and the characteristics of the body of water before fording.

Select the highest possible vehicle level.

Shift to a lower gear using the left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter.

Avoid high engine speeds.

Enter and exit the water at a flat place and at a steady walking pace.

Drive slowly and at an even speed through the water.

Ensure that a bow wave does not form as you drive.

Do not stop and do not switch off the engine.

Water offers a high degree of resistance, and the ground is slippery and in some cases

R unstable. Therefore, it is difficult and dangerous to pull away in the water.

Clean any mud from the tire tread after fording.

R

Apply the brakes to dry them after fording.

Always observe the fording depth values

(

Y page 385).

Winter driving

G

WARNING

If you shift down on a slippery road surface in an attempt to increase the engine's braking effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.

There is an increased danger of skidding and accidents.

Do not shift down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface.

G

DANGER

If the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequate ventilation is not possible, poisonous gases such as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter the vehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehicle becomes trapped in snow. There is a risk of fatal injury.

If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heating running, make sure the exhaust pipe and area around the vehicle are clear of snow. To ensure an adequate supply of fresh air, open a window on the side of the vehicle that is not facing into the wind.

Have your vehicle winter-proofed at a qualified specialist workshop at the onset of winter.

Drive particularly carefully on slippery road surfaces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steering and braking maneuvers. Do not use cruise control or

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC.

If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot be stopped when moving at low speed:

X

Shift the transmission to position N.

When driving in snow with or without snow chains, select driving program Slippery

(

Y page 145).

i

Vehicles with a diesel engine:do not cover the radiator, e.g. with a protective cover. The measuring function of the onboard diagnosis system may otherwise provide inaccurate values. Some of these values are required by law and must therefore always be accurate.

The outside temperature indicator is not designed to serve as an ice-warning device and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.

Changes in the outside temperature are displayed after a short delay.

Indicated temperatures just above the freezing point do not guarantee that the road surface is free of ice. The road may still be icy, especially in wooded areas or on bridges. You should pay special attention to road conditions when temperatures are around the freezing point.

For more information on driving with snow chains, see (

Y page 348).

For more information on driving with summer tires, see (

Y page 348).

Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel" section (

Y page 366).

Z

168

Driving tips

Off-road driving


G

WARNING

If you drive on a steep incline at an angle or turn when driving on an incline, the vehicle could slip sideways, tip and rollover. There is a risk of an accident.

Always drive on a steep incline in the line of fall (straight up or down) and do not turn the vehicle.

G

WARNING

Flammable material such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk of fire.

When driving off road or on unpaved roads, check the vehicle's underside regularly. In particular, remove parts of plants or other flammable materials which have become trapped. In the case of damage, contact a qualified specialist workshop.

G

WARNING

If the vehicle level is high, the vehicle center of gravity is raised. This could cause the vehicle to tip over more easily on uphill or downhill gradients. There is a risk of an accident.

Select the lowest possible vehicle level.

!

There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if:

R the vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a high

R curb or an unpaved road you drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g. a

R curb, speed bumps or a pothole in the road a heavy object strikes the underbody or parts of the chassis

In situations like this, the body, the underbody, chassis parts, wheels or tires could be damaged without the damage being visible.

Components damaged in this way can unexpectedly fail or, in the case of an accident, no longer withstand the strain they are designed to.

If the underbody paneling is damaged, combustible materials such as leaves, grass or twigs can gather between the underbody and the underbody paneling. If these materials come in contact with hot parts of the exhaust system, they can catch fire.

In such situations, have the vehicle checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. If on continuing your journey you notice that driving safety is impaired, pull over and stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. In such cases, consult a qualified specialist workshop.

When driving off-road, substances such as sand, mud and water or water mixed with oil may get into the brakes. This could result in a reduced braking effect or in total brake failure and also in increased wear and tear. The braking characteristics change depending on the material ingressing the brakes. Clean the brakes after driving off-road. If you detect a reduced braking effect or grinding noises, have the brake system checked in a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible. Adapt your driving style to the different braking characteristics.

Driving off-road increases the likelihood of damage to the vehicle, which, in turn, can lead to failure of the mechanical assembly or systems.

Adapt your driving style to suit the terrain conditions. Drive carefully. Have damage to the vehicle rectified immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

Do not switch to transmission position N when driving off-road. If you try to brake the vehicle using the service brake, you could lose control of the vehicle. If the gradient is too steep for your vehicle, drive back down in reverse gear.

General notes

Read this section carefully before driving your vehicle off-road. Practice by driving over more gentle off-road terrain first.

Familiarize yourself with the characteristics of your vehicle and the gear shift operation before driving through difficult terrain.

The following driving systems are specially adapted to off-road driving:

R

R the Offroad drive program (vehicles without


(

Y page 217)

Offroad and Offroad Plus drive programs

(vehicles with Off-Road Engineering package)

(

Y page 218)

Driving tips

169

R

R

R

R

LOW RANGE offroad gear (vehicles with the

Offroad Engineering package) (

Y page 219)

Differential lock (vehicles with the Off-Road

Engineering package) (

Y page 218)

Off-road ABS (

Y page 64)

Off-road 4ETS (

Y page 67)

Off-road ESP

®

R

R

R

(

Y page 68)

AIRMATIC package (vehicle level)

(

Y page 186)

DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation)

(

Y page 216)

Observe the following notes:

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

Stop the vehicle before starting to drive along an off-road route. If necessary, select the offroad program (

Y page 218) or shift to the

LOW RANGE off-road gear (

Y page 219).

Select a vehicle level that is suitable for the terrain. To avoid damaging the vehicle, make sure there is always sufficient ground clearance.

Check that items of luggage and loads are stowed safely and are well secured

(

Y page 299).

Always keep the engine running and in gear when driving on a downhill gradient. Activate

DSR (

Y page 216).

Always keep the engine running and in gear when driving on a slope.

Adapt your speed to the terrain. The rougher, steeper or more ruts on the terrain, the slower your speed should be.

Do not jump with the vehicle as this will interrupt the vehicle's propulsion.

Drive with extreme care on unfamiliar off-road routes where visibility is poor. For safety reasons, get out of the vehicle first and survey the off-road route.

Look out for obstacles, such as rocks, holes, tree stumps and furrows.

Always keep the doors, the tailgate, the side windows and the sliding sunroof closed while the vehicle is in motion.

Do not shift the automatic transmission to transmission position N.

Observe the notes on off-road fording

(

Y page 167).

i

Do not use the HOLD function when driving off-road, on steep uphill or downhill gradients or on slippery or loose surfaces. The HOLD function cannot hold the vehicle on such surfaces.

Checklist before driving off-road

!

If the engine oil warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion, stop the vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible. Check the engine oil level. The engine oil warning lamp warning must not be ignored. Continuing the journey while the symbol is displayed could lead to engine damage.

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Engine oil level: check the engine oil level and add oil if necessary.

When driving on steep gradients, the engine oil level must be sufficiently high to ensure a correct oil supply in the vehicle.

DEF tank (BlueTEC vehicles): check the level and add if necessary (

Y page 156).

Tire-changing tool kit: check that the jack is working and make sure you have the lug wrench, a robust tow cable and a folding spade in the vehicle.

Wheels and tires: check the tire tread depth and tire pressure.

Check for damage and remove any foreign objects, e.g. small stones, from the wheels/ tires.

Replace any missing valve caps.

Replace dented or damaged wheels.

Rims: dented or bent rims can result in a loss of tire pressure and damage the tire bead.

Before driving off-road, check the wheels and replace them if necessary.

Checklist after driving off-road

!

If you detect damage to the vehicle after driving off-road, have the vehicle checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

Driving over rough terrain places greater demands on your vehicle than driving on normal roads. After driving off-road, check the vehicle.

This allows you to detect damage promptly and reduce the risk of an accident to yourself and other road users.

X

If the Offroad or Offroad Plus drive program is selected: select the Individual, Sport,

Z

170

Driving tips

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Comfort or Slippery drive program

(

Y page 145).

Deactivate the LOW RANGE off-road gear

(

Y page 219).

Deactivate DSR (

Y page 216).

Lower the vehicle level again to a level suitable to the road conditions, e.g. to the normal level.

Clean the headlamps and rear lights and check for damage.

Clean the front and rear license plates.

Clean the wheels and tires with a water jet and remove any foreign objects.

Clean the wheels, wheel housings and the vehicle underside with a water jet; check for any foreign objects and damage.

Check whether twigs or other parts of plants have become trapped. These increase the risk of fire and can damage fuel pipes, brake hoses or the rubber bellows of the axle joints and propeller shafts.

After the trip, examine without fail the entire undercarriage, wheels, tires, brakes, bodywork structure, steering, chassis and exhaust system for damage.

After driving for extended periods across sand, mud, gravel, water or in similarly dirty conditions, have the brake discs, wheels, brake pads/linings and axle joints checked and cleaned.

If you detect strong vibrations after off-road travel, check for foreign objects in the wheels and drive train and remove them if necessary.

Foreign objects can disturb the balance and cause vibrations.

Driving on sand

Observe the following rules when driving on sand:

R

R

R

R

R

Select the Offroad drive program (vehicles without Off-Road Engineering package)

(

Y page 217).

Select the Offroad drive program (vehicles with Off-Road Engineering package)

(

Y page 218).

Select a higher vehicle level.


Use the left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter to shift to a lower gear appropriate to the terrain.

R

R

-

-

Drive quickly to overcome the rolling resistance. Otherwise the vehicle's wheels could become stuck in loose ground.

Drive in the tracks of other vehicles if possi-

ble. Make sure that: the tire ruts are not too deep.

the sand is sufficiently firm.

the ground clearance of the vehicle is sufficient.

Tire ruts and gravel roads

!

Check that the ruts are not too deep and that your vehicle has sufficient clearance.

Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged or bottom out and get stuck.

Observe the following rules when driving along ruts in off-road terrain or on roads with loose gravel:

R

R

R

R

R

R

R


(

Y page 217).


(

Y page 218).

Select a higher vehicle level.



Drive slowly.

Where ruts are too deep, drive with the wheels of one side on the center grassy area, if possible.

Driving over obstacles

!

Obstacles could damage the floor of the vehicle or components of the chassis. Ask passengers for guidance when driving over large obstacles. The passenger should always keep a safe distance from the vehicle when doing so in order to avoid injury as a result of unexpected vehicle movements. After driving off-road or over obstacles, check the vehicle for possible damage, especially to the underbody and the components of the chassis.

Driving tips

171

Observe the following rules when driving over tree stumps, large stones and other obstacles:

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R


(

Y page 217).


(

Y page 218).

Select LOW RANGE offroad gear (vehicles with Off-Road Engineering package)

(

Y page 219)

Raise the vehicle level.



Drive very slowly.

Drive straight over the center of obstacles.

Traveling uphill

Approach/departure angle

G

WARNING

If you drive on a steep incline at an angle or turn when driving on an incline, the vehicle could slip sideways, tip and rollover. There is a risk of an accident.

Always drive on a steep incline in the line of fall (straight up or down) and do not turn the vehicle.

R

R

Observe the rules on off-road driving.

Do not drive at an angle on slopes, inclines or gradients, but instead follow the direct line of fall.

R

R

R

R

R

R

When driving down an incline, make use of the engine's braking effect. Observe the engine speed; do not overrev the engine.


(

Y page 217).


(

Y page 218).

Before driving on extreme uphill and downhill gradients, select the LOW RANGE offroad gear (vehicles with Off-Road Engineering package) (

Y page 219).

Drive slowly.

Avoid high engine speeds. Drive at appropriate engine speeds (maximum 3,000 rpm).

R

R

Use the left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter to shift into a lower gear in good time on long and steep downhill gradients.

Check the brakes after prolonged off-road driving.

Hill start assist will aid you when pulling away on a hill. For further information about hill start assist, see (

Y page 141).

Do not switch to transmission position N when driving off-road. If you try to brake the vehicle using the service brake, you could lose control of the vehicle. If the gradient is too steep for your vehicle, drive back down in reverse gear.

Always observe the approach/departure angle values (

Y page 386).

Maximum gradient-climbing capability

Always observe the maximum gradient climbing ability values (

Y page 386).

Hilltops

When driving up an uphill gradient, slightly reduce pressure on the accelerator immediately before reaching the brow of the hill. Make use of the vehicle's own impetus to travel over the brow.

This style of driving prevents:

R

R the vehicle from lifting off the ground on the brow of a hill the vehicle from traveling too quickly down the other side

Z

172

Driving systems

Driving downhill

R

R

R

R

R

Drive slowly.

Do not drive at an angle down steep inclines.

Steer into the line of fall and drive with the front wheels aligned straight. Otherwise, the vehicle could slip sideways, tip and rollover.

Shift to a lower gear using the left-hand paddle shifter before tackling steep downhill gradients.

Activate DSR. If this is not sufficient, brake gently. When doing so, make sure that the vehicle is facing in the direction of the line of fall.

Check that the brakes are working normally after a long downhill stretch.

i

The special off-road ABS setting enables a precise, brief and repeated locking of the front wheels. This causes them to dig into loose earth. Be aware that the front wheels easily skid across the ground surface if completely braked and therefore lose their ability to steer.

Driving systems

Intelligent Drive

Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive stands for innovative driver assistance and safety systems which enhance comfort and support the driver in critical situations. With these intelligent co-ordinated systems Mercedes-Benz has set a milestone on the path towards autonomous driving.

Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive embraces all elements of active and passive safety in one well thought out system – for the safety of the vehicle occupants and that of other road users.

Further information on driving safety systems

(

Y page 63).

load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly.

Use cruise control only if road and traffic conditions make it appropriate to maintain a steady speed for a prolonged period. You can store any road speed above 20 mph (30 km/h).

i

Cruise control should not be activated when driving off-road.


If you fail to adapt your driving style, cruise control can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. Cruise control cannot take into account the road, traffic and weather conditions. Cruise control is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in your lane.

Do not use cruise control:

R

R

R in road and traffic conditions which do not allow you to maintain a constant speed, e.g. in heavy traffic or on winding roads on slippery road surfaces. Braking or accelerating could cause the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid when there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow

If there is a change of drivers, advise the new driver of the speed stored.

Cruise control lever

Cruise control

General notes

Cruise control maintains a constant road speed for you. It brakes automatically in order to avoid exceeding the set speed. You must select a lower gear in good time on long and steep downhill gradients, especially if the vehicle is laden or towing a trailer. By doing so, you will make use of the braking effect of the engine. This relieves the

:

;

=

?

Activates or increases speed

Activates or reduces speed

Deactivates cruise control

Activates at the current speed/last stored speed

Driving systems

173

When you activate cruise control, the stored speed is shown in the multifunction display for five seconds.

Activation conditions

To activate cruise control, all of the following activation conditions must be fulfilled:

R

R

R

R

R

R the electric parking brake must be released.

you are driving faster than 20 mph (30 km/h).

ESP ® must be active, but not intervening.

the transmission must be in position D.

DSR must be deactivated.

the Offroad Plus drive program must be deactivated (vehicles with the Off-Road Engineering package).

Storing, maintaining and calling up a speed

Storing and maintaining a speed

X

X

X

Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed.

Briefly press the cruise control lever up : or down ?.

Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.

Cruise control is activated. The vehicle automatically maintains the stored speed.

i

Cruise control may be unable to maintain the stored speed on uphill gradients. The stored speed is resumed when the gradient evens out. Cruise control maintains the stored speed on downhill gradients by automatically applying the brakes.

Storing or calling up a speed

G

WARNING

If you call up the stored speed and it differs from the current speed, the vehicle accelerates or decelerates. If you do not know the stored speed, the vehicle could accelerate or brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident.

Pay attention to the road and traffic conditions before calling up the stored speed. If you do not know the stored speed, store the desired speed again.

X

X

Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you =.


Cruise control is operational and when first activated stores the current speed or regulates the speed of the vehicle to the stored speed.

Setting a speed

Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment until the vehicle has accelerated or braked to the speed set.

X

X

X

Press the cruise control lever up : for a higher speed or down ; for a lower speed.

To adjust the set speed in1 mphincre-

ments (1 km/hincrements): briefly press the cruise control lever up : or down ; to the pressure point.

Every time the cruise control lever is pressed up : or down ; the last speed stored is increased or reduced.




i

Cruise control is not deactivated if you depress the accelerator pedal. For example, if you accelerate briefly to overtake, cruise control adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last speed stored after you have finished overtaking.

Deactivating cruise control

There are several ways to deactivate cruise control:

X

Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards :.

or

X

Brake.

Cruise control is automatically deactivated if:

R

R

R

R you engage the electric parking brake you are driving at less than 20 mph (30 km/h)

ESP

® intervenes or you deactivate ESP you activate DSR

®

Z

174

Driving systems

R

R you activate the Offroad Plus program (vehicles with the Off-Road Engineering package) you shift the transmission to position N while driving

If cruise control is deactivated, you will hear a warning tone. You will see the Cruise Con‐ trol Off message in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds.

i

When you switch off the engine, the last speed stored is cleared.

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC

General notes

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC regulates the speed and automatically helps you maintain the distance to the vehicle detected in front. Vehicles are detected with the aid of the radar sensor system. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC brakes automatically so that the set speed is not exceeded.

You must select a lower gear in good time on long and steep downhill gradients, especially if the vehicle is laden or towing a trailer. By doing so, you will make use of the braking effect of the engine. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly.

If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC detects that there is a risk of a collision, you will be warned visually and acoustically. Without your intervention, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC cannot prevent a collision. An intermittent warning tone will then sound and the distance warning lamp will light up in the instrument cluster. Brake immediately in order to increase the distance to the vehicle in front or take evasive action provided it is safe to do so.

For Distance Pilot DISTRONIC to assist you when driving, the radar sensor system must be operational.

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC operates in the range between 0 mph (0 km/h) and 120 mph

(200 km/h).

Do not use Distance Pilot DISTRONIC while driving on roads with steep gradients.

Since Distance Pilot DISTRONIC transmits radar waves, it can resemble the radar detectors of the responsible authorities. You can refer to the relevant chapter in the Operator's Manual if questions are asked about this.

i

USA only:

This device has been approved by the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar sensor is intended for use in an automotive radar system only. Removing, tampering with, or altering the device will void any warranties, and is not permitted by the FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved way.

Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

i

Canada only: This device complies with

RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and

2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Removal, tampering, or altering of the device will void any warranties, and is not permitted.

Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any nonapproved way.

Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.


G

WARNING

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC does not react to:

R people or animals

R stationary objects on the road, e.g. stopped or parked vehicles

R oncoming vehicles and crossing traffic

As a result, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC may neither give warnings nor intervene in such situations. There is a risk of an accident.


G

WARNING

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC cannot always clearly identify other road users and complex traffic situations.

Driving systems

175

In such cases, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC may:

R give an unnecessary warning and then brake the vehicle

R neither give a warning nor intervene

R accelerate or brake unexpectedly


Continue to drive carefully and be ready to brake, especially if Distance Pilot DISTRONIC warns you.

G

WARNING

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC brakes your vehicle with up to 50% of the maximum possible deceleration. If this deceleration is not sufficient, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC alerts you with a visual and acoustic warning. There is a risk of an accident.

Apply the brakes yourself in these situations and try to take evasive action.

!

When Distance Pilot DISTRONIC or the

HOLD function is activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations.

To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate

DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in the following or similar situations:

R when towing the vehicle

R in the car wash

If you fail to adapt your driving style, Distance

Pilot DISTRONIC can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics.

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in your lane.

Do not use Distance Pilot DISTRONIC:

R

R

R in road and traffic conditions which do not allow you to maintain a constant speed, e.g. in heavy traffic or on winding roads on slippery road surfaces. Braking or accelerating could cause the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid when there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC may not detect narrow vehicles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, or vehicles driving on a different line.


R

R

R there is dirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors there is snow or heavy rain there is interference by other radar sources

R there are strong radar reflections, for example, in parking garages

If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC no longer detects a vehicle in front, it may unexpectedly accelerate to the speed stored.

This speed may:

R

R

R be too high if you are driving in a filter lane or an exit lane be so high when driving in the right-hand lane that you overtake vehicles in the left-hand lane be so high when driving in the left-hand lane that you overtake vehicles in the right-hand lane

If there is a change of drivers, advise the new driver of the speed stored.

Cruise control lever

:

;

=

?

A

Activates or increases speed

Activates or reduces speed

Deactivates Distance Pilot DISTRONIC

Activates at the current speed/last stored speed

Sets a specified minimum distance

Z

176

Driving systems

Activating Distance Pilot DISTRONIC


To activate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC, the following conditions must be fulfilled:

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R the engine must be started. It may take up to two minutes of driving before Distance Pilot

DISTRONIC is ready for use.

the electric parking brake must be released.

ESP

® must be active, but not intervening.

the transmission must be in position D.

the driver's door must be closed when you shift from P to D or your seat belt must be fastened.

the front-passenger door and rear doors must be closed.

the Offroad Plus drive program must be deactivated (vehicles with the Off-Road Engineering package).

DSR must be deactivated.

the vehicle must not skid.

Activating

X

X

Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you =, up : or down ?.

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated.


Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front, but only up to the desired stored speed.

i

If you do not fully release the accelerator pedal, the Distance Pilot Passive message appears in the multifunction display. The set distance to a slower-moving vehicle in front will then not be maintained. You will be driving at the speed you determine by the position of the accelerator pedal.

You can also activate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC when stationary. The lowest speed that can be set is 20 mph (30 km/h).

X

Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you =, up : or down ?.

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated.

Activates at the current speed/last stored speed

G

WARNING

If you call up the stored speed and it differs from the current speed, the vehicle accelerates or decelerates. If you do not know the stored speed, the vehicle could accelerate or brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident.

Pay attention to the road and traffic conditions before calling up the stored speed. If you do not know the stored speed, store the desired speed again.

X

X

Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you =.


The first time Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated, it stores the current speed or regulates the speed of the vehicle to the stored speed.

Driving with Distance Pilot DISTRONIC

Pulling away and driving

X

X

If you want to pull away with Distance

Pilot DISTRONIC: remove your foot from the brake pedal.

Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ?.

or

X

Accelerate briefly.

Your vehicle pulls away and adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front. If no vehicle is detected in front, your vehicle accelerates to the set speed.

The vehicle can also pull away when it is facing an unidentified obstacle or is driving on a different line from another vehicle. The vehicle then brakes automatically.

If there is no vehicle in front, Distance Pilot

DISTRONIC operates in the same way as cruise control.

If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC detects a slowermoving vehicle in front, it brakes your vehicle. In this way, the distance you have selected is maintained.

If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC detects a fastermoving vehicle in front, it increases the driving speed. However, the vehicle is only accelerated up to the speed you have stored.

Driving systems

177

Selecting the drive program

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC supports a sporty driving style if you have selected the Sport or

Sport Plus drive program (

Y page 149). Acceleration behind the vehicle in front or to the set speed is then noticeably more dynamic. If you have selected the Comfort drive program, the vehicle accelerates more gently. This setting is recommended in stop-and-start traffic.

Changing lanes

If you change to the overtaking lane, Distance

Pilot DISTRONIC supports you if:

R

R

R you are driving faster than 45 mph (70 km/h) you switch on the appropriate turn signal

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC does not currently detect a danger of collision

If these conditions are fulfilled, your vehicle is accelerated. Acceleration will be interrupted if changing lanes takes too long or if the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front becomes too small.

i

When you change lanes, Distance Pilot

DISTRONIC monitors the right lane (in leftside traffic) or the left lane (in right-side traffic).

Stopping

G

WARNING

When leaving the vehicle, even if it is braked only by DISTRONIC PLUS, it could roll away if:

R there is a malfunction in the system or in the voltage supply.

R

DISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated with the cruise control lever, e.g. by a vehicle occupant or from outside the vehicle.

R the electrical system in the engine compartment, the battery or the fuses have been tampered with.

R the battery is disconnected.

R the accelerator pedal has been depressed, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.


If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off

DISTRONIC PLUS and secure the vehicle against rolling away.

If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC detects that the vehicle in front is stopping, it brakes your vehicle to a stop.

Once your vehicle is stationary, it remains stationary and you do not need to depress the brake.

After a time, the electric parking brake secures the vehicle and relieves the service brake.

Depending on the specified minimum distance, your vehicle will come to a standstill at a sufficient distance behind the vehicle in front. The specified minimum distance is set using the control on the cruise control lever.

The transmission is shifted automatically to position P if, with Distance Pilot DISTRONIC activated and the vehicle stationary:

R

R the driver's door is open and the driver's seat belt is unfastened.

the engine is switched off, unless it is automatically switched off by the ECO start/stop function.

The electric parking brake secures the vehicle automatically if, with Distance Pilot DISTRONIC activated and the vehicle stationary:

R

R a system malfunction occurs.

the power supply is not sufficient.

On steep uphill or downhill inclines or if there is a malfunction, the transmission may also be automatically shifted into position P.

Setting a speed

Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment until the vehicle has accelerated or braked to the speed set.

X

Press the cruise control lever up : for a

X higher speed or down A for a lower speed




X



Every time the cruise control lever is pressed up : or down ;, the last speed stored is increased or reduced.

Z

178

Driving systems

i

If you accelerate to overtake, Distance Pilot

DISTRONIC adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last speed stored after you have finished overtaking.

Setting a specified minimum distance

Deactivates Distance Pilot DISTRONIC

You can set the specified minimum distance for

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC by varying the time span between one and two seconds. With this function you can set the minimum distance that

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC maintains to the vehicle in front, dependent on vehicle speed. You can see this distance in the multifunction display (

Y page 179).

X

X

To increase: turn control ; in direction =.

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC then maintains a greater distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front.

To decrease: turn control ; in direction :.

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC then maintains a shorter distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front.

i

Make sure that you maintain a sufficiently safe distance from the vehicle in front. Adjust the distance to the vehicle in front if necessary.

There are several ways to deactivate Distance

Pilot DISTRONIC:

X

Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards :.

or

X

Brake, unless the vehicle is stationary

When you deactivate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC, the Distance Pilot off message appears in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds.

i

The last speed stored remains stored until you switch off the engine.

i

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is not deactivated if you depress the accelerator pedal. If you accelerate to overtake, Distance Pilot

DISTRONIC adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last speed stored after you have finished overtaking.

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is automatically deactivated if:

R

R

R you engage the electric parking brake or if the vehicle is automatically secured with the electric parking brake

ESP

® intervenes or you deactivate ESP

® the transmission is in the P, R or N position you pull the cruise control lever towards you

R

R

R in order to pull away and the front-passenger door or one of the rear doors is open you activate Parking Pilot the vehicle has skidded

A warning tone sounds. The Distance Pilot

Off message will appear in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds.

Driving systems

179

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is automatically deactivated if:

R

R you activate DSR you activate the Off-Road Program+ (vehicles with the Off-Road Engineering package)

The Ã DSR symbol appears in the multifunction display.

Displays in the instrument cluster

Displays in the speedometer

Display in the assistance graphic when

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is deactivated

Example: Distance Pilot DISTRONIC displays in the speedometer

When Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated, one or two segments ; in the stored speed range light up.

If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC detects a vehicle in front, segments ; between speed of the vehicle in front = and stored speed : light up.

i

For design reasons, the speed displayed in the speedometer may differ slightly from the speed stored for Distance Pilot DISTRONIC.

:

;

=

?

X

Vehicle in front, if detected

Distance indicator, current distance to the vehicle in front

Specified minimum distance to the vehicle in front; adjustable

Own vehicle

Select the Assistance Graphic function using the on-board computer (

Y page 237).

Display in the assistance graphic when

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated

:

;

=

?

X

Vehicle in front, if detected

Specified minimum distance to the vehicle in front; adjustable

Own vehicle

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC activated

Select the Assistance Graphic function using the on-board computer (

Y page 237).

You will see the stored speed for approximately five seconds when you activate Distance Pilot

DISTRONIC.

Z

180

Driving systems

Tips for driving with Distance Pilot

DISTRONIC

General notes

Pay particular attention in the following traffic situations:

R

R

R

R

R

Cornering, entering and exiting a bend: the ability of Distance Pilot DISTRONIC to detect vehicles during cornering is limited. Your vehicle may brake unexpectedly or late.

Driving on a different line: Distance Pilot

DISTRONIC may not detect vehicles which are not driving in the middle of their lane. The distance to the vehicle in front will be too short.

Other vehicles changing lanes: Distance Pilot

DISTRONIC has not detected the vehicle cutting in yet. The distance to this vehicle will be too short.

Narrow vehicles: Distance Pilot DISTRONIC has not yet detected the vehicle in front on the edge of the road because of its narrow width. The distance to the vehicle in front will be too short.

Obstacles and stationary vehicles: Distance

Pilot DISTRONIC does not brake for obstacles or stationary vehicles. If, for example, the detected vehicle turns a corner and an obstacle or stationary vehicle is then revealed, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC will not brake for them.

R

Crossing traffic: Distance Pilot DISTRONIC may mistakenly detect vehicles that are crossing your lane. Activating Distance Pilot

DISTRONIC at, for example, a traffic light with crossing traffic, could cause your vehicle to pull away at the wrong time.

In such situations, brake if necessary. Distance

Pilot DISTRONIC will then be deactivated.

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC with Steering

Pilot

General notes

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC with Steering Pilot aids you in keeping the vehicle in the center of the driving lane by means of moderate steering interventions in a speed range from 0 - 125 mph

(0 - 200 km/h).

It monitors the area in front of your vehicle by means of camera system : at the top of the windshield.

In a speed range from 0 - 37 mph (0 - 60 km/h), the advanced automatic pulling away function focuses on the vehicle in front, taking into account lane markings, e.g. when following vehicles in a traffic jam.

At speeds of more than 37 mph (60 km/h),

Steering Pilot focuses on clear lane markings

(left and right), only focusing on the vehicle in front if clear lane markings are not present.

If these conditions are not present, Steering

Pilot cannot provide assistance.

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC must be active in order for the function to be available.


If you fail to adapt your driving style, Distance

Pilot DISTRONIC and Steering Pilot can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. It cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. Distance

Pilot DISTRONIC with Steering Pilot is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in your lane.

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC with Steering Pilot does not detect road and traffic conditions and does not detect all road users. If you are following a vehicle which is driving towards the edge of the road, your vehicle could come into contact

Driving systems

181

with the curb or other road boundaries. Be particularly aware of other road users, e.g. cyclists, that are directly next to your vehicle.

Obstacles such as traffic pylons on the lane or projecting out into the lane are not detected.

An inappropriate steering intervention, e.g. after intentionally driving over a lane marking, can be corrected at any time if you steer slightly in the opposite direction.

DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Pilot cannot continuously keep your vehicle in lane. In some cases, the steering intervention is not sufficient to bring the vehicle back to the lane. In such cases, you must steer the vehicle yourself to ensure that it does not leave the lane.

The support provided by the system can be impaired if:

R

R

R

R

R

R there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, or due to snow, rain, fog or spray there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the sun or reflections (e.g. when the road surface is wet) the windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity of the camera there are no, several or unclear lane markings for a lane, e.g. in areas with road construction work the lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow the distance to the vehicle in front is too small and the lane markings thus cannot be detec-

R

R ted the lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes branch off, cross one another or merge the road is narrow and winding

R there are strong shadows cast on the road

The system is switched to passive and no longer assists you by performing steering interventions if:

R

R

R you actively change lane you switch on the turn signal take your hands off the steering wheel or do not steer for a prolonged period of time i

After you have finished changing lanes,

Steering Pilot is automatically active once more.

Steering Pilot cannot provide assistance:

R

R

R on very sharp corners when towing a trailer when a loss of tire pressure or a defective tire has been detected and displayed

Observe the important safety notes on Distance

Pilot DISTRONIC (

Y page 174).

The steering interventions are carried out with a limited steering moment. The system requires the driver to keep his hands on the steering wheel and to steer himself.

If you do not steer yourself or if you take your hands off the steering wheel for a prolonged period of time, the system will first alert you with a visual warning. A steering wheel symbol appears in the multifunction display. If you have still not started to steer and have not taken hold of the steering wheel after five seconds at the latest, a warning tone also sounds to remind you to take control of the vehicle. Steering Pilot is then switched to passive. Distance Pilot

DISTRONIC remains active.

Activating Steering Pilot

X

Activate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC with

Steering Pilot using the on-board computer

(

Y page 237).

The Steering Pilot On message appears in the multifunction display. Steering Pilot is activated.

Information in the multifunction display

If Steering Pilot is activated but not ready for a steering intervention, steering wheel symbol : appears in gray. If the system provides you with support by means of steering interventions, symbol : is shown in green.

Deactivating Steering Pilot

X

Deactivate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC with

Steering Pilot using the on-board computer

(

Y page 237).

The Steering Pilot Off message appears in the multifunction display. Steering pilot is deactivated.

Z

182

Driving systems

When Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is deactivated or not available, Steering Pilot is deactivated automatically.

Level control (vehicles with the Offroad Engineering package)


Level control adapts the vehicle level automatically to the current operating and driving situation. This results in reduced fuel consumption and improved handling.

Make changes to the vehicle level while the vehicle is in motion. This enables the vehicle to adjust to the new level as quickly as possible.

The vehicle level may change visibly if you park the vehicle and the outside temperature changes. If the temperature drops, the vehicle level is lower; with an increase in temperature, the vehicle level rises.

If you unlock the vehicle or open a door, the vehicle begins to compensate for load discrepancies while still parked. However, for significant level changes, such as after the vehicle has been stationary for a long period, the engine must be on. For safety reasons, the vehicle is only lowered when the doors are closed. Lowering is interrupted if a door is opened, and it continues once the door has been closed.

Further information about "Driving off-road"

(

Y page 168).

G

WARNING

When the vehicle is being lowered, people could become trapped if their limbs are between the vehicle body and the wheels or underneath the vehicle. There is a risk of injury.

Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle or in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arches when the vehicle is being lowered.

G

WARNING

When you drive with the vehicle raised, the driving characteristics could be impaired by the vehicle's raised center of gravity. The vehicle could rollover more easily, for example on a bend. There is a risk of an accident.

Always select as low a vehicle level as possible and adjust your driving style.

G

WARNING

When you drive with the chassis lowered or raised, the vehicle's braking and driving characteristics can be significantly impaired. You could also exceed the permissible vehicle height if the chassis is raised. There is a risk of an accident.

Adjust the vehicle level before pulling away.

G

WARNING



!

When driving on extremely rough terrain, select a high vehicle level in good time. Make sure there is always sufficient ground clearance. You will otherwise damage the vehicle.

R

R





Basic settings

The extent to which the vehicle is raised or lowered depends on the basic setting selected.

Select:

R

R

R the Comfort or Sport drive program for driving on normal roads the Offroad drive program for driving on easily negotiable off-road terrain the Offroad Plus drive program for off-road driving

Driving systems

183

R

R offroad level 1 for driving on easily negotiable off-road terrain offroad level 2 for driving on normal off-road terrain

R offroad level 3 for freeing the vehicle in particularly rough terrain at low speeds only

The individual vehicle levels differ from the normal level as follows:

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

–0.6 in (–15 mm) in the Sport drive program

+/–0 in (+/–0 mm) in the Comfort drive program

+ 1.2 in (+ 30 mm) in the Offroad drive program

+ 2.4 in (+ 60 mm) in the Offroad Plus drive program

+ 1.2 in (+ 30 mm) in offroad level 1



Setting the vehicle level

!

Make sure that there is enough ground clearance when the vehicle is being lowered.

It could otherwise hit the ground, damaging the underbody.

If you press the % or a button on the multifunction steering wheel, the message will disappear. Once normal level has been reached, all indicator lamps = go out.

The vehicle automatically selects normal level if you:

R

R drive at speeds above 70 mph (112 km/h) or drive at speeds between 65 mph (105 km/h) and 70 mph (112 km/h) for approximately

20 seconds

The vehicle is lowered to low level if you are traveling at higher speeds.

Normal level

Set the vehicle level using the selector wheel.

X

X

X

X

Start the engine.

Press selector wheel :.

Selector wheel : extends.

To raise the vehicle: turn selector wheel : clockwise ;.

The vehicle is raised.

To lower the vehicle: turn selector wheel : counter-clockwise ?.

The vehicle is lowered.

During the adjustment, the Lowering or Vehi‐ cle Rising message appears in the multifunction display.

Setting the vehicle to normal level:

X

X

X

Start the engine.

Press selector wheel :.

Selector wheel : extends.

To lower the vehicle: turn selector wheel : counter-clockwise ?.

The vehicle is lowered.

If one or more indicator lamps = are on:

X

Turn selector wheel : counter-clockwise ?

until all indicator lamps = that are lit start to flash.

The vehicle is lowered to normal level. As soon as the next lowest level is reached, the indicator lamp stops flashing and goes out.

Offroad levels

General notes

Only select an offroad level when this is appropriate for road conditions. Otherwise, fuel consumption increases and handling may be affected.

Z

184

Driving systems

You can select from the following:

R

R

Offroad level 1 at speeds up to 60 mph

(96 km/h)


(64 km/h)

R


(20 km/h)

If you select an offroad level when driving at too high a speed, the Drive More Slowly message appears in the multifunction display.

Offroad level 3 is only suitable for driving on extremely difficult off-road terrain under particularly rough conditions.

R

R

Adjust your driving style to the altered handling characteristics.

Do not drive at speeds above 12 mph

(20 km/h).

Indicator lamps = for the desired offroad level flash:

R

R the lower indicator lamp flashes, offroad level 1 is selected the lower and center indicator lamps flash, offroad level 2 is selected

R all three indicator lamps flash, offroad level 3 is selected

The vehicle adjusts to the offroad level selected.

As soon as an offroad level is reached, the corresponding indicator lamp stops flashing and lights up constantly.

Raising the vehicle

Set the vehicle level using the selector wheel.

X

To raise the vehicle: turn selector wheel : clockwise ;.

The vehicle is raised to offroad level 1 by 1.2 in

(30 mm) compared to the normal level.

During the adjustment, the Vehicle rising message, for example, appears in the multifunction display.

If you press the % or a button on the multifunction steering wheel, the message will disappear.

i

Up to offroad level 2, you can hide the messages using the % or a button on the multifunction steering wheel.

While the adjustment from offroad level 2 to offroad level 3 is taking place, you will see a message such as the following in the multifunction display: Vehicle rising Max. speed

12 mph (20 km/h) .

The Max. speed 12 mph (20 km/h) message draws your attention to the maximum speed permitted for offroad level 3.

If you drive above 12 mph (20 km/h) at offroad level 3, you will see the following message shown in red in the multifunction display: Low‐ ering Max. speed 12 mph (20 km/h) .

i

You cannot clear these messages.

You also hear a warning. The vehicle is lowered and offroad level 3 is canceled.

If you continue to increase your speed, the red message continues to be shown in the multifunction display. The newly set level is not displayed until the vehicle has been set to a level suitable for the current speed.

Lowering the vehicle

If you drive faster than 12 mph (20 km/h) while the vehicle level is being lowered, you will see the following message shown in white in the multifunction display: Lowering Max. speed

20 km/h .

The vehicle is lowered to offroad level 2.

You will see a message in the multifunction display, for example: Lowering .

Offroad level 2 is canceled and the vehicle is lowered to offroad level 1 if you:

R

R drive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h) or drive at speeds between 40 mph (64 km/h) and 50 mph (80 km/h) for longer than

20 seconds

Offroad level 1 is canceled. Depending on the vehicle's speed and the selected drive program, the vehicle is automatically lowered to normal level or low level if you:

R

R drive at speeds above 70 mph (112 km/h) or drive at speeds between 65 mph (105 km/h) and 70 mph (112 km/h) for longer than

20 seconds

Driving systems

185

HOLD function

General notes

The HOLD function can assist the driver in the following situations:

R

R when pulling away, especially on steep slopes when maneuvering on steep slopes

R when waiting in traffic

The vehicle is kept stationary without the driver having to depress the brake pedal.

The braking effect is canceled and the HOLD function deactivated when you depress the accelerator pedal to pull away.

i

Do not use the HOLD function when driving off-road, on steep uphill or downhill gradients or on slippery or loose surfaces. The HOLD function cannot hold the vehicle on such surfaces.


G

WARNING

When leaving the vehicle, it can still roll away despite being braked by the HOLD function if:


R the HOLD function has been deactivated by pressing the accelerator pedal or the brake pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.


R the battery is disconnected


If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off the HOLD function and secure the vehicle against rolling away.

!

When DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function is activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations.




R in the car wash

Deactivating the HOLD function (

Y page 185).


You can activate the HOLD function if:

R

R

R

R

R

R the vehicle is stationary the engine is running or if it has been automatically switched off by the ECO start/stop function the driver's door is closed or your seat belt is fastened the electric parking brake is released the transmission is in position D, R or N

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is deactivated

Activating the HOLD function

X

X

X

Make sure that the activation conditions are met.

Depress the brake pedal.

Quickly depress the brake pedal further until : appears in the multifunction display.

The HOLD function is activated. You can release the brake pedal.

i

If depressing the brake pedal the first time does not activate the HOLD function, wait briefly and then try again.

Deactivating the HOLD function

The HOLD function is deactivated automatically if:

R

R

R

R

R you accelerate and the transmission is in position D or R.

you shift the transmission to position P.

you depress the brake pedal again with a certain amount of pressure until : disappears from the multifunction display.

you secure the vehicle using the electric parking brake.

you activate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC.

i

After a time, the electric parking brake secures the vehicle and relieves the service brake.

Z

186

Driving systems

When the HOLD function is activated, the transmission is shifted automatically to position P if:

R

R the driver's door is open and the driver's seat belt is unfastened.

the engine is switched off, unless it is automatically switched off by the ECO start/stop function.

The electric parking brake secures the vehicle automatically if the HOLD function is activated when the vehicle is stationary and:

R

R a system malfunction occurs.

the power supply is not sufficient.

On steep uphill or downhill inclines or if there is a malfunction, the transmission may also be automatically shifted into position P.


General notes

AIRMATIC is an air suspension system with variable damping for improved driving comfort.

Level control ensures the best possible suspension and constant ground clearance, even with a laden vehicle. When you drive fast, the vehicle is lowered automatically to improve driving safety and to reduce fuel consumption. There is also the option to manually adjust the vehicle level.

AIRMATIC consists of:

R

R

R level settings level control and

ADS or ADS PLUS (Adaptive Damping System)


cles): your vehicle may also be equipped with the ACTIVE CURVE SYSTEM (

Y page 187).

Mercedes-AMG vehicles: your vehicle is equipped with the ACTIVE CURVE SYSTEM

(

Y page 187).

Observe the notes on driving with a trailer

(

Y page 222).

The vehicle level can be set using the DYNAMIC

SELECT controller (

Y page 145) or the level button (

Y page 188). The setting always corresponds to the last selected function.


G

WARNING




ADS and ADS PLUS (Adaptive Damping

System)

General notes

The Adaptive Damping System automatically controls the calibration of the dampers. The damping characteristics adapt to the current operating and driving situation.

The damping is tuned individually to each wheel and depends on:

R

R

R

R your driving style, e.g. sporty the road surface conditions the drive program selected the vehicle level setting

Selecting Comfort mode

Driving systems

187

In the Comfort drive program, the driving characteristics of your vehicle are more comfortable. Therefore, select this mode if you favor a more comfortable driving style. Also select the

Comfort drive program when driving fast on straight roads, e.g. on straight stretches of highway.

X

Select the Comfort drive program using

DYNAMIC SELECT controller :.

The vehicle is adjusted to normal level.


cles): in the Comfort drive program, the vehicle is:

R

R lowered by 0.6 in (15 mm) if you drive at speeds above 78 mph (125 km/h) raised again if you drive at speeds below

50 mph (80 km/h)

Mercedes-AMG vehicles: in the Comfort drive program, the vehicle is:

R

R lowered by 0.4 in (10 mm) if you drive at speeds above 112 mph (180 km/h) raised again if you drive at speeds below

87 mph (140 km/h)

Selecting Sport mode

Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the vehicle remains at the normal level.

Selecting Sport Plus tuning (Mercedes-

AMG vehicles)

The very firm setting of the suspension setting in the Sport Plus drive program ensures the best possible contact with the road. Select this drive program when employing a sporty driving style, e.g. on winding country roads or primarily when driving on race circuits.

DSR is not available in the Sport Plus drive program. For further information on DSR, see

(

Y page 216).

X

Select the Sport Plus drive program using


The vehicle is lowered by 0.4 in (10 mm) compared to the normal level.

The firmer setting of the suspension tuning in the Sport drive program ensures even better contact with the road. Select this drive program when employing a sporty driving style, e.g. on winding country roads.

DSR is not available in the Sport drive program.

For further information on DSR, see

(

Y page 216).

X

Select the Sport drive program using



cles): the vehicle is lowered by 0.6 in (15 mm) compared to the normal level.

ACTIVE CURVE SYSTEM

The ACTIVE CURVE SYSTEM uses active stabilizers to optimize both driving comfort and vehicle dynamics. Depending on the drive program selected (

Y page 149), the ACTIVE CURVE SYS-

TEM also changes the setting.

If you have selected the Comfort drive program:

R

R

R rolling movement is reduced in the event of changing surface undulations the roll angle when cornering is reduced the driving is dynamic

If you have selected the Sport drive program:

R

R the roll angle is reduced significantly the driving is even more dynamic

Z

188

Driving systems

Mercedes-AMG vehicles: if you have selected the Sport Plus drive program:

R

R the roll angle is reduced even more significantly the driving is designed for maximum dynamism

Vehicle level


G

WARNING



G

WARNING

When you drive with the vehicle raised, the driving characteristics could be impaired by the vehicle's raised center of gravity. The vehicle could rollover more easily, for example on a bend. There is a risk of an accident.

Always select as low a vehicle level as possible and adjust your driving style.

G

WARNING

When you drive with the chassis lowered or raised, the vehicle's braking and driving characteristics can be significantly impaired. You could also exceed the permissible vehicle height if the chassis is raised. There is a risk of an accident.

Adjust the vehicle level before pulling away.

G

WARNING



!

When driving on extremely rough terrain, select a high vehicle level in good time. Make sure there is always sufficient ground clearance. You will otherwise damage the vehicle.

R

R





General notes

Only select raised level if this is appropriate for the road conditions. Otherwise, fuel consumption may increase and handling may be affected.

Make changes to the vehicle level while the vehicle is in motion. This enables the vehicle to adjust to the new level as quickly as possible.

The vehicle level may change visibly if you park the vehicle and the outside temperature changes. If the temperature drops, the vehicle level is lower; with an increase in temperature, the vehicle level rises.


Vehicles with no trailer coupled: below a speed of 37 mph (60 km/h), you can choose between the normal and raised vehicle level.

Select the normal vehicle level for normal road surfaces and the raised vehicle level for driving with snow chains or on particularly poor road surfaces. Your selection remains stored even if you remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.

If you try to select raised level at a speed above

37 mph (60 km/h), the Drive More Slowly message appears in the multifunction display.

Driving systems

189

Vehicles with a trailer coupled: below a speed of 19 mph (30 km/h), you can choose between the normal and raised vehicle level.

Setting the raised vehicle level

X

Start the engine.

If indicator lamp ; is not lit:

X

Press button :.

Indicator lamp ; flashes while the vehicle is being raised, and lights up continuously as soon as the vehicle reaches the desired level.


cles): the vehicle is raised by 2.4 in (60 mm) compared to the normal level.

Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the vehicle is raised by 2 in (50 mm) compared to the normal level.

The Vehicle Rising message appears in the multifunction display.

The message remains until the raised level is reached.


The raised level setting is canceled if you:

R

R

R drive at speeds above 37 mph (60 km/h) (all vehicles except Mercedes-AMG vehicles) drive at speeds above 43 mph (70 km/h)

(Mercedes-AMG vehicles) drive at speeds between 40 mph (64 km/h) and 43 mph (70 km/h) for approximately 20 seconds (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) drive at speeds above 19 mph (30 km/h) with

R a trailer

The raised vehicle level remains saved when you are not driving within these speed ranges.

Setting the normal vehicle level

!

Make sure that there is enough ground clearance when the vehicle is being lowered.

It could otherwise hit the ground, damaging the underbody.

X

Start the engine.

If indicator lamp ; is lit:

X

Press button :.

Indicator lamp ; flashes while the vehicle is being lowered, and goes out as soon as the desired vehicle level is reached.

Vehicles with no trailer coupled: the vehicle is adjusted to the height of the selected drive program (

Y page 145).

Vehicles with a trailer coupled: the vehicle is adjusted to normal level regardless of the drive program selected (

Y page 145). The vehicle remains at the normal level, even if the drive program is changed.

During the adjustment, the Lowering message appears in the multifunction display.


AMG adaptive sport suspension system

General notes

The electronically controlled damping system works continuously. This improves driving safety and ride comfort.

The damping is tuned individually to each wheel and depends on:

R

R

R your driving style, e.g. sporty the road surface condition, e.g. bumps your individual selection of Sport, Sport + or

Comfort

The suspension setting can be adjusted using the corresponding button in the center console or the DYNAMIC SELECT controller

(

Y page 145).

Each time you start the engine with the Smart-

Key or the Start/Stop button, Comfort mode is activated. For further information about starting the engine, see (

Y page 139).

Z

190

Driving systems

Sport mode

The firmer setting of the suspension tuning in

Sport mode ensures even better contact with the road. Select this mode when employing a sporty driving style, e.g. on winding country roads.

X

Press button : repeatedly until indicator lamp = lights up.

You have selected Sport mode.

The AMG Suspension System SPORT message appears in the multifunction display.

Sport + mode

The very firm setting of the suspension setting in

Sport + mode ensures the best possible contact with the road. Select this mode only when driving on race circuits.

If indicator lamps ; and = are off:

X

Press button : repeatedly until indicator lamp ; lights up.

You have selected Sport + mode.

The AMG Suspension System SPORT + message appears in the multifunction display.

In "Sport +" mode, the vehicle is lowered by

10 mm compared to the normal level.

Comfort mode

In Comfort mode, the driving characteristics of your vehicle are more comfortable. Select this mode if you favor a more comfortable driving style, but also when driving fast on straight roads, e.g. highways.

X

Press button : repeatedly until indicator lamps ; and = go out.

You have selected Comfort mode.

The AMG Suspension System COMFORT message appears in the multifunction display.

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC


Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid with ultrasound. It monitors the area around your vehicle using six sensors in the front bumper and six sensors in the rear bumper. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC visually and audibly indicates the distance between your vehicle and an object.

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a replacement for your attention to your immediate surroundings. You are always responsible for safe maneuvering, parking and exiting a parking space. When maneuvering, parking or pulling out of a parking space, make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the area in which you are maneuvering.

!

When parking, pay particular attention to objects above or below the sensors, such as flower pots or trailer drawbars. PARKTRONIC does not detect such objects when they are in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle. You could damage the vehicle or the objects.

The sensors may not detect snow and other objects that absorb ultrasonic waves.

Ultrasonic sources such as an automatic car wash, the compressed-air brakes on a truck or a pneumatic drill could cause PARKTRONIC to malfunction.

PARKTRONIC may not function correctly on uneven terrain.

!

Fold in the ball coupling if the trailer tow hitch is not required. PARKTRONIC measures the minimum detection range to an obstacle from the bumper, not the ball coupling.

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated for the rear area when you establish an electrical connection between your vehicle and a trailer.

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is activated automatically when you:

R

R switch on the ignition shift the transmission to position D, R or N

R release the electric parking brake

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above 11 mph (18 km/h). It is reactivated at lower speeds.

Range of the sensors

General notes

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC does not take into account obstacles located:

R

R below the detection range, e.g. people, animals or objects.

above the detection range, e.g. overhanging loads, truck overhangs or loading ramps.

Range

Driving systems

191

: Sensors in the front bumper, left-hand side

(example)

The sensors must be free from dirt, ice or slush.

They can otherwise not function correctly. Clean the sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch or damage them (

Y page 328).

Front sensors

Center

Corners

Approx. 40 in (approx.

100 cm)


60 cm)

Rear sensors

Center

Corners


120 cm)


80 cm)

Minimum distance

Center

Corners

Approx. 8 in (approx. 20 cm)

Approx. 6 in (approx. 15 cm)

If there is an obstacle within this range, the relevant warning displays light up and a warning tone sounds. If the distance falls below the minimum, the distance may no longer be shown.

Z

192

Driving systems

Warning displays

One or more segments light up as the vehicle approaches an obstacle, depending on the vehicle's distance from the obstacle.

From the:

R

R sixth segment onwards, you will hear an intermittent warning tone for approximately two seconds.

seventh segment onwards, you will hear a warning tone for approximately two seconds.

This indicates that you have now reached the minimum distance.

Deactivating or activating Parking

Assist PARKTRONIC

:

;

=

Segments on the left-hand side of the vehicle

Segments on the right-hand side of the vehicle

Segments showing operational readiness

The warning displays show the distance between the sensors and the obstacle. The warning display for the front area is located on the dashboard above the center air vents. The warning display for the rear area is located on the headliner in the rear compartment.

The warning display for each side of the vehicle is divided into five yellow and two red segments.

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is operational if yellow segments showing operational readiness = light up.

The selected transmission position and the direction in which the vehicle is rolling determine which warning display is active when the engine is running.

Transmission position

Warning display

D

R, N or the vehicle is rolling backwards

P

Front area activated

Rear and front areas activated

No areas activated

:

;

Indicator lamp

Deactivating or activating Parking Assist

PARKTRONIC

If indicator lamp : lights up, Parking Assist

PARKTRONIC is deactivated. Parking Pilot is then also deactivated.

i

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is automatically activated when you turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock.

Driving systems

193

Problems with Parking Assist PARKTRONIC

Problem

Only the red segments in the Parking Assist

PARKTRONIC warning displays are lit. You also hear a warning tone for approximately two seconds.

Parking Assist

PARKTRONIC is deactivated after approximately five seconds, and the indicator lamp in the Parking Assist

PARKTRONIC button lights up.

Only the red segments in the Parking Assist

PARKTRONIC warning displays are lit. Parking

Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated after approximately five seconds.


Parking Assist PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has been deactivated.

X

If problems persist, have Parking Assist PARKTRONIC checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

The Parking Assist PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is interference.

X

X

Clean the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC sensors (

Y page 328).

Switch the ignition back on.

The problem may be caused by an external source of radio or ultrasound waves.

X

Check to see if Parking Assist PARKTRONIC works at a different location.

Parking Pilot

General notes

Parking Pilot is an electronic parking aid with ultrasound. It measures the road on both sides of the vehicle. A parking symbol indicates a suitable parking space. Active steering intervention and brake application can assist you during parking. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is also available (

Y page 190).


Parking Pilot is only an aid. It is not a replacement for your attention to your immediate surroundings. You are always responsible for safe maneuvering, parking and exiting a parking space. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects are in the maneuvering range.

When Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated, Parking Pilot is also unavailable.

G

WARNING

While parking or pulling out of a parking space, the vehicle swings out and can drive onto areas of the oncoming lane. This could result in a collision with another road user.


Pay attention to other road users. Stop the vehicle if necessary or cancel the Active Parking Assist parking procedure.

!

If unavoidable, you should drive over obstacles such as curbs slowly and not at a sharp angle. Otherwise, you may damage the wheels or tires.

Parking Pilot may show parking spaces which are not suitable for parking, e.g.:

R

R

R where parking or stopping is prohibited in front of driveways or entrances and exits on unsuitable surfaces

Z

194

Driving systems

Parking tips:

R

R

R

R

R

R

On narrow roads, drive as close to the parking space as possible.

Parking spaces that are littered or overgrown might be identified or measured incorrectly.

Parking spaces that are partially occupied by trailer drawbars might not be identified as such or be measured incorrectly.

Snowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parking space being measured inaccurately.

Pay attention to the warning messages of

Parking Pilot PARKTRONIC during the parking procedure (

Y page 190)

You can intervene in the steering procedure to correct it at any time. Parking Pilot will then be canceled.

When transporting a load that protrudes from

R

R

R your vehicle, you must not use Parking Pilot

Never use Parking Pilot when snow chains are installed.

Make sure that the tire pressures are always correct. This has a direct influence on the parking characteristics of the vehicle.

Use Parking Pilot for parking spaces that are:

R

R

R parallel or at right angles to the direction of travel that are on straight roads, not bends that are on the same level as the road, e.g. not on the pavement

Detecting parking spaces

Objects located above the detection range of

Parking Pilot will not be detected when the parking space is measured. These are not taken into account when the parking procedure is calculated, e.g. overhanging loads, tail sections or loading ramps of trucks. Parking Pilot may therefore guide you into the parking space too early.

G

WARNING

If there are objects above the detection range:

R

Active Park Assist may steer too early

R the vehicle may not stop in front of these objects

You may cause a collision as a result. There is a risk of an accident.

If objects are located above the detection range, stop and deactivate Active Parking

Assist.

For further information on the detection range

(

Y page 191).

Parking Pilot does not assist you parking in spaces at a right angle to the direction of travel if:

R

R two parking spaces are located directly next to one another the parking space is directly next to a low obstacle such as a low curb

R you park forwards

Parking Pilot does not assist you parking in spaces parallel with or at a right angle to the direction of travel if:

R

R

R

R the parking space is on a curb the system reads the parking space as being blocked, for example by foliage or grass paving blocks the area is too small for the vehicle to maneuver into the parking space is bordered by an obstacle, e.g. a tree, a post or a trailer

:

;

=

Detected parking space on the left

Parking symbol

Detected parking space on the right

Parking Pilot is activated automatically when driving forwards. The system is operational at speeds of up to approximately 22 mph

(35 km/h). While in operation, the system independently locates and measures parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle.

Parking Pilot will detect only parking spaces:

R

R parallel or at right angles to the direction of travel that are parallel to the direction of travel and at least 59 in (1.5 m) wide

Driving systems

195

R

R that are parallel to the direction of travel and at least 39.5 in (1.0 m) longer than your vehicle that are at right angles to the direction of travel and at least 39.5 in (1.0 m) wider than your vehicle i

Note that Parking Pilot PARKTRONIC cannot measure the depth of parking spaces if they are at right angles to the direction of travel.

You need to judge whether your vehicle will fit into the parking space.

When driving at speeds below 19 mph

(30 km/h), you will see parking symbol ; as a status indicator in the instrument cluster. When a parking space has been detected, an arrow towards the right or the left also appears. Parking Pilot displays only parking spaces on the front-passenger side as standard. Parking spaces on the driver's side are displayed as soon as the turn signal on the driver's side is activated. When parking on the driver's side, this must remain activated until you confirm the use of Parking Pilot by pressing the a button on the multifunction steering wheel. The system automatically determines whether the parking space is parallel or at right angles to the direction of travel.

A parking space is displayed while you are driving past it, and until you are approximately 50 ft

(15 m) away from it.

Parking

G

WARNING

If you leave the vehicle when it is only being braked by Active Parking Assist it could roll away if:



R the battery is disconnected.

R the accelerator pedal has been depressed, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.


Before leaving the vehicle, always secure it against rolling away.

i

If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC detects obstacles, Parking Pilot brakes automatically whilst the vehicle is being parked. You are responsible for braking in good time.

X

X

X or

X

X

X

Stop the vehicle when the parking space symbol shows the desired parking space in the instrument cluster.

Shift the transmission to position R.

The Start Parking Pilot? Yes: OK No:

% message appears in the multifunction display.

To cancel the procedure:press the % button on the multifunction steering wheel or pull away.

To park using Parking Pilot: press the a button on the multifunction steering wheel.

The Parking Pilot Active Accelerate and Brake Observe Surroundings message appears in the multifunction display.

Let go of the multifunction steering wheel.

Back up the vehicle, being ready to brake at all times. When backing up, drive at a speed below approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). Otherwise, Parking Pilot will be canceled.

Parking Pilot brakes the vehicle to a standstill when the vehicle approaches the rear border of the parking space.

Maneuvering may be required in tight parking spaces.

The Parking Pilot Active Select D

Observe Surroundings message appears in the multifunction display.

X

Shift the transmission to position D while the vehicle is stationary.

Parking Pilot immediately steers in the other direction.


i

You will achieve the best results by waiting for the steering procedure to complete before pulling away.

X

Drive forwards and be ready to brake at all times.

Parking Pilot brakes the vehicle to a standstill.

The Parking Pilot Active Select R

Observe Surroundings message appears in the multifunction display.

As soon as the parking procedure is complete, the Parking Pilot Finished message

Z

196

Driving systems

appears and a warning tone sounds. The vehicle is now parked. The vehicle is kept stationary without the driver having to depress the brake pedal. The braking effect is canceled when you depress the accelerator pedal.

Parking Pilot no longer supports you with steering interventions and brake applications. When

Parking Pilot is finished, you must steer and brake again yourself. Parking Assist

PARKTRONIC is still available.

Parking tips:

R

R

The way your vehicle is positioned in the parking space after parking is dependent on various factors. These include the position and shape of the vehicles parked in front and behind it and the conditions of the location. It may be the case that Parking Pilot guides you too far into a parking space, or not far enough into it. In some cases, it may also lead you across or onto the curb. If necessary, you should cancel the parking procedure with

Parking Pilot.

You can also select preselect transmission position D. The vehicle redirects and does not drive as far into the parking space. Should the transmission change take place too early, the parking procedure will be canceled. A sensible parking position can no longer be achieved from this position.

Exiting a parking space

In order for Parking Pilot to assist you:

R

R the border of the parking space must be high enough at the front and the rear. A curb is too small, for example.

the border of the parking space must not be too wide, as the position of the vehicle must not exceed an angle of 45° to the starting position as it is maneuvering into the parking space.

R a maneuvering distance of at least 3.3 ft

(1.0 m) must be available.

Parking Pilot can assist you with exiting a parking space only if you have parked the vehicle parallel to the direction of travel.

X

X i

If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC detects obstacles, Parking Pilot brakes automatically whilst the vehicle is exiting the parking space.

You are responsible for braking in good time.

Start the engine.


X

X

X

Switch on the turn signal in the direction you will drive out of the parking space.


The Start Parking Pilot? Yes: OK No:

% message appears in the multifunction display.

To cancel the procedure:press the % button on the multifunction steering wheel or pull away.

or

X

X

X

X

To exit a parking space using Parking

Pilot: press the a button on the multifunction steering wheel.


Let go of the multifunction steering wheel.

Pull away, being ready to brake at all times. Do not exceed a maximum speed of approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) when exiting a parking space. Otherwise, Parking Pilot will be canceled.

Shift the transmission to position D or R as required or according to the message while the vehicle is stationary.

Parking Pilot immediately steers in the other direction. The Parking Pilot Active

Accelerate and Brake Observe Sur‐ roundings message appears in the multifunction display.

i

You will achieve the best results by waiting for the steering procedure to complete before pulling away.

If you back up after activation, the steering wheel is moved to the straight-ahead position.

X

Drive forwards and back up as prompted by the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning displays, several times if necessary.

Once you have exited the parking space completely, the steering wheel is moved to the straight-ahead position. You hear a tone and the

Parking Pilot Finished message appears in the multifunction display. You will then have to steer and merge into traffic on your own. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is still available. You can take over the steering before the vehicle has exited the parking space completely. This is useful, for example when you recognize that it is already possible to pull out of the parking space.

Driving systems

197

Canceling Parking Pilot

X

Stop the movement of the multifunction steering wheel or steer yourself.

Parking Pilot is immediately canceled. The

Parking Pilot Canceled message appears in the multifunction display.

or

X

Press the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC button

(

Y page 192).

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is switched off and Parking Pilot is immediately canceled.

The Parking Pilot Canceled message appears in the multifunction display.

Parking Pilot is canceled automatically if:

R

R

R

R

R the electric parking brake is engaged transmission position P is selected parking using Parking Pilot is no longer possible you are driving faster than 6 mph (10 km/h) a wheel spins, ESP

® intervenes or fails. The

÷ warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster

A warning tone sounds. The parking symbol disappears and the multifunction display shows the

Parking Pilot Canceled message.

When Parking Pilot is canceled, you must steer and brake again yourself.

If a system malfunction occurs, the vehicle is braked to a standstill. To drive on, depress the accelerator again.

Rear view camera

General notes

vehicle with guide lines in the multimedia system.

The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a mirror image, as in the rear view mirror.

i

The text shown in the multimedia system display depends on the language setting. The following are examples of rear view camera displays in the multimedia system.


The rear view camera is only an aid. It is not a replacement for your attention to your immediate surroundings. You are always responsible for safe maneuvering and parking. When maneuvering or parking, make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the area in which you are maneuvering.

Under the following circumstances, the rear view camera will not function, or will function in a limited manner:

R

R

R

R

R

R

R if the trunk lid is open in heavy rain, snow or fog at night or in very dark places if the camera is exposed to very bright light if the area is lit by fluorescent bulbs or LED lighting (the display may flicker) if there is a sudden change in temperature, e.g. when driving into a heated garage in winter if the camera lens is dirty or obstructed

Observe the notes on cleaning

(

Y page 328)

R if the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In this event, have the camera position and setting checked at a qualified specialist workshop

The field of vision and other functions of the rear view camera may be restricted due to additional accessories on the rear of the vehicle (e.g.

license plate holder, bicycle rack).

For technical reasons, leaving the standard height can result in inaccuracies in the guide lines on vehicles with a height-adjustable chassis.

i

The rear view camera is protected from raindrops and dust by means of a flap. When the rear view camera is activated, this flap opens.

Rear view camera : is an optical parking and maneuvering aid. It shows the area behind your

Z

198

Driving systems

The flap closes again when:

R you have finished the maneuvering process

R you switch off the engine

R you open the cargo compartment

Observe the notes on cleaning (

Y page 328).

For technical reasons, the flap may remain open briefly after the rear view camera has been deactivated.

Activating/deactivating the rear view camera

X

X

X

To activate: make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock.

Make sure that the Activation by R gear function is selected in the multimedia system; see the Digital Operator's Manual.


The rear view camera flap opens. The multimedia system shows the area behind the vehicle with guide lines.

The image from the rear view camera is available throughout the maneuvering process.

To deactivate: the rear view camera deactivates if you shift the transmission to P or after driving forwards a short distance.

Displays in the multimedia system

The rear view camera may show a distorted view of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not at all.

The rear view camera does not show objects in the following positions:

R

R

R very close to the rear bumper under the rear bumper in the area immediately above the tailgate handle

!

Objects not at ground level may appear to be further away than they actually are, e.g.:

R the bumper of a parked vehicle

R the drawbar of a trailer

R the ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch

R the rear section of an HGV

R a slanted post

Use the guidelines only for orientation.

Approach objects no further than the bottommost guideline.

:

;

=

?

Yellow guide line at a distance of approximately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rear of the vehicle

White guide line without turning the steering wheel, vehicle width including the exterior mirrors (static)

Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic)

Yellow lane marking of the tires at current steering wheel angle (dynamic)

B

C

D

A


Vehicle center axle (marker assistance)

Bumper

Red guide line at a distance of approximately

12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle

The guide lines are shown when the transmission is in position R.

The distance specifications only apply to objects that are at ground level.

Driving systems

199

:

;

=

Front warning display

Additional measurement operational readiness indicator for Parking Assist

PARKTRONIC

Rear warning display

Vehicles with Parking Assist PARKTRONIC:

when Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is operational (

Y page 191), additional measurement operational readiness indicator ; appears in the multimedia system. If the Parking Assist

PARKTRONIC warning displays are active or light up, warning displays : and = are also active or light up correspondingly in the multimedia system.

"Reverse parking" function

Backing up straight into a parking space without turning the steering wheel

=

?

X

X

X




Make sure that the rear view camera is switched on (

Y page 198).

The lane and the guide lines are shown.

With the help of white guide line :, check whether the vehicle will fit into the parking space.

Using white guide line : as a guide, carefully back up until you reach the end position.

Red guide line ? is then at the end of the parking space. The vehicle is almost parallel in the parking space.

Reverse perpendicular parking with the steering wheel at an angle

:

;

White guide line without turning the steering wheel, vehicle width including the exterior mirrors (static)


:

;

X

X

X

X

Parking space marking


Drive past the parking space and bring the vehicle to a standstill.

Make sure that the rear view camera is switched on (

Y page 198).

The lane and the guide lines are shown.

While the vehicle is at a standstill, turn the steering wheel in the direction of the parking space until yellow guide line ; reaches parking space marking :.

Keep the steering wheel in that position and back up carefully.

Z

200

Driving systems

:

X


Stop the vehicle when it is almost exactly in front of the parking space.

The white lane should be as close to parallel with the parking space marking as possible.

:

;

=

X



White guide line without turning the steering wheel

End of parking space

Back up carefully until you have reached the final position.

Red guide line : is then at end of parking space =. The vehicle is almost parallel in the parking space.

180° view

:

;

X

White guide line at current steering wheel angle

Parking space marking

Turn the steering wheel to the center position while the vehicle is stationary.

:

;

=

Symbol for the 180° view function

Own vehicle

Warning displays for Parking Assist

PARKTRONIC

You can also use the rear view camera to select a 180° view.

When Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is operational (

Y page 191), a symbol for your own vehicle appears in the multimedia system. If the

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning displays are active, warning displays = light up in the multimedia system in yellow or red accordingly.

Driving systems

201

360° camera

General notes

The 360° camera is a system consisting of four cameras.

The system processes images from the following cameras:

R

R

Rear view camera

Front camera

R

Two cameras in the exterior rear view mirrors

The cameras capture the immediate surroundings of the vehicle. The system supports you, e.g. when parking or if vision is restricted at an exit.

You can show pictures from the 360° camera in full-screen mode or in seven different splitscreen views on the multimedia system display.

A split-screen view also includes a top view of the vehicle. This view is calculated from the data supplied by the installed cameras (virtual camera).

The six split-screen views are:

R

Top view and picture from the rear view cam-

R era (130° viewing angle)

Top view and image from the front camera

(130° viewing angle without displaying the maximum steering wheel angle)

R

R

R

Top view and enlarged rear view

Top view and enlarged front view

Top view and rear-view images from the exterior mirror cameras (rear wheel view)

R

Top view and forward-view images from the exterior mirror cameras (front wheel view)

When the function is active and you shift the transmission from D or R to N, the dynamic guidelines are hidden.

When you change between transmission positions D and R, you see the previously selected front or rear view.

Distances measured by Parking Assist

PARKTRONIC will also be optically displayed:

R

R in split screen view as red or yellow brackets around the vehicle icon in the top view, or at the bottom right as red or yellow brackets around the vehicle symbol in full-screen mode

The line thickness and color of the brackets show how far the vehicle is away from an object:

R

R

R yellow brackets with thin lines: Parking Assist

PARKTRONIC is active yellow brackets with normal lines: an object is present in close range of the vehicle red line: an object is present in the immediate close range of the vehicle i

The camera in the rear area is protected from raindrops and dust by means of a flap.

When the camera is activated, this flap opens.

The flap closes again when:

R you have finished the maneuvering process

R you switch off the engine

R you open the cargo compartment

Observe the notes on cleaning (

Y page 328).

For technical reasons, the flap may remain open briefly after the camera has been deactivated.


The 360°camera is only an aid and may show a distorted view of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not at all. The 360°camera is not a substitute for attentive driving.

You are always responsible for safe maneuvering and parking. When maneuvering or parking, make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the area in which you are maneuvering.

You are always responsible for safety, and must always pay attention to your surroundings when parking and maneuvering. This applies to the areas behind, in front of and beside the vehicle.

You could otherwise endanger yourself and others.

The 360° camera will not function or will function in a limited manner:

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R if the doors are open if the exterior mirrors are folded in if the tailgate is open in heavy rain, snow or fog at night or in very dark places if the cameras are exposed to very bright light if the area is lit by fluorescent bulbs or LED lighting (the display may flicker) if there is a sudden change in temperature, e.g. when driving into a heated garage in winter

Z

202

Driving systems

R

R if the camera lenses are dirty or covered if the vehicle components in which the cameras are installed are damaged. In this event, have the camera position and setting checked at a qualified specialist workshop

Do not use the 360° camera in this case. You can otherwise injure others or cause damage to objects or the vehicle.

Guide lines are always shown at road level. In trailer mode, the guide lines are shown at the level of the trailer coupling.

The field of vision and other functions of the camera system may be restricted due to additional accessories on the rear of the vehicle (e.g.

license plate holder, bicycle rack).

On vehicles with height-adjustable chassis, depending on technical conditions, leaving the standard height can result in:

R

R inaccuracies in the guide lines inaccuracies in the display of generated images (top view)


The 360° camera image can be displayed if:

R

R

R your vehicle is equipped with a 360° camera the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock the multimedia system is switched on

Switching on the 360° camera

X or

X

X

Press the Ø button in the center console for longer than two seconds.

Depending on whether position D or R is engaged, the following is shown:

R a split screen with top view and the image

R from the front camera or a split screen with top view and the image from the rear view camera

Press the Ø button in the center console.

The vehicle menu is displayed.

Select 360° Camera and press 7 to confirm.

Depending on whether position D or R is engaged, the following is shown:

R a split screen with top view and the image

R from the front camera or a split screen with top view and the image from the rear view camera

Activating the 360° camera using reverse gear

The 360° camera images can be automatically displayed by engaging reverse gear.

X

X

X

Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock.

Make sure that the Activation by R gear function is selected in the multimedia system; see the separate operating instructions.

To show the 360° camera image: engage reverse gear.

The multimedia system shows the area behind the vehicle in split-screen mode. You see the top view of the vehicle and the image from the rear view camera.

Selecting the split-screens or 180° view

Selecting split-screen view

X

X

To switch to the line with the vehicle icons: slide 5 the controller.

To select one of the vehicle icons: turn 3 the controller.

X

To switch to

180° View : turn 3 the controller to select 180° View and press 7 to confirm.

i

The 180° View option is only available in the following views:

R

Top view with picture from the rear view

R camera

Top view with picture from the front camera

Displays in the multimedia system


The camera system may show a distorted view of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not at all.

Obstacles are not shown by the system in the following locations:

R

R

R

R

R under the front and rear bumpers very close to the front and rear bumpers in the area immediately above the tailgate handle very close to the exterior mirrors in the transitional areas between the various cameras in the virtual top view

Driving systems

203

!

Objects not at ground level may appear to be further away than they actually are, e.g.:

R the bumper of a parked vehicle

R the drawbar of a trailer

R the ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch

R the rear section of an HGV

R a slanted post

Use the guidelines only for orientation.

Approach objects no further than the bottommost guideline.

Top view with picture from the rear view camera

B

C

D

E

Vehicle center axle (marker assistance)


Bumper



The guide lines are shown when the transmission is in position R.

The distance specifications only apply to objects that are at ground level.

Top view with picture from the front camera

:

;

=

?

A


Symbol for the split screen setting with top view and rear view camera image

Guide line for the maximum steering angle



:

;

=

?

Symbol for the split screen setting with top view and front camera image

Yellow guide line at a distance of approximately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the front of the vehicle



Z

204

Driving systems

A

B


12 in (0.30 m) from the front of the vehicle

Yellow guide line at a distance of approximately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the front of the vehicle

Top view and enlarged rear view

i

You can also select the camera setting in the exterior mirrors for the rear-facing view.

Top view with trailer view

:

;

Symbol for the split screen setting with top view and rear view camera image enlarged



This view assists you in estimating the distance to the vehicle behind you.

i

This setting can also be selected as an enlarged front view.

Top view with image from the camera in the exterior mirrors

:

;

=

?

Symbol for the trailer view setting

Trailer drawbar marker assistant

Ball coupling


0.30 m from the ball coupling

The lines are shown at the level of the trailer coupling.

i

For technical reasons, the ball coupling of the trailer tow hitch is only partially visible in the multimedia system display.

180° view

:

;

=

Symbol for setting the top view with image from the forward camera in the exterior mirrors

Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors (right side of vehicle)

Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors (left side of vehicle)

:

;

=

Symbol for the full screen setting with rear view camera image

Own vehicle

Warning displays for Parking Assist

PARKTRONIC i

180° view can also be selected as front view.

Select this view when you are driving out of an exit and the view of crossing traffic is restricted, for example.

Driving systems

205

Exiting 360° camera display mode

The 360° camera display is stopped:

R

R when you select transmission position P, or when you are driving at moderate speeds

The previous display appears in the multimedia system. You can also switch the display by selecting the & symbol in the display and pressing the controller to confirm.

The attention level evaluation is deleted and restarts when the journey is continued, if:

R

R you switch off the engine you take off your seat belt and open the driver's door, e.g. for a change of drivers or to take a break

Displaying the attention level

ATTENTION ASSIST

General notes

ATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long, monotonous journeys, such as on highways. It is active in the 37 mph (60 km/h) to 125 mph

(200 km/h) range. If ATTENTION ASSIST detects typical indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration on the part of the driver, it suggests taking a break.


ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid to the driver. It might not always recognize fatigue or increasing inattentiveness in time or fail to recognize them at all. The system is not a substitute for a wellrested and attentive driver.

The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST is restricted and warnings may be delayed or not occur at all:

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R if the length of the journey is less than approximately 30 minutes if the road condition is poor, e.g. if the surface is uneven or if there are potholes if there is a strong side wind if you have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds or high rates of acceleration if you are predominantly driving slower than

37 mph (60 km/h) or faster than 125 mph

(200 km/h) if you are driving with the Steering Pilot of

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC activated if the time has been set incorrectly in active driving situations, such as when you change lanes or change your speed

You can have current status information displayed in the assistance menu (

Y page 236) of the on-board computer.

X

Select the Assistance display for ATTENTION

ASSIST using the on-board computer

(

Y page 237).

The following information is displayed:

R

R

R

Length of the journey since the last break.

the attention level determined by ATTENTION

ASSIST, displayed in a bar display in five levels from high to low.

If ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculate the attention level and cannot output a warning, the System suspended message appears. The bar display then changes the display, e.g. if you are driving at a speed below

37 mph (60 km/h) or above 125 mph

(200 km/h).

Activating ATTENTION ASSIST

X

Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the onboard computer (

Y page 237).

The system determines the attention level of the driver depending on the setting selected:

Standard selected: the sensitivity with which the system determines the attention level is set to normal.

Sensitive selected: the sensitivity is set higher.

The attention level detected by Attention Assist

Z

206

Driving systems

is adapted accordingly and the driver is warned earlier.

When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the

À symbol and OFF appear in the multifunction display in the assistance display when the engine is running.

When ATTENTION ASSIST has been deactivated, it is automatically reactivated after the engine has been stopped. The sensitivity selected corresponds to the last selection activated (standard/sensitive).

Warning in the multifunction display

If fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration are detected, a warning appears in the multifunction display: Attention Assist: Take a

Break!

In addition to the message shown in the multifunction display, you will then hear a warning tone.

X

If necessary, take a break.

X

Confirm the message by pressing the a button on the steering wheel.

On long journeys, take regular breaks in good time to allow yourself to rest. If you do not take a break, you will be warned again after

15 minutes at the earliest. This will only happen if ATTENTION ASSIST still detects typical indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration.

Vehicles with COMAND: if a warning is issued in the multifunction display, a service station search is performed in COMAND. You can select a service station and navigation to this service station will then begin. This function can be activated and deactivated in COMAND.

Traffic Sign Assist

General notes

Traffic Sign Assist displays the maximum speed permitted to the driver in the instrument cluster.

The data stored in the navigation system and general traffic regulations are used to determine the current speed limit.

As Traffic Sign Assist is a map-based system, traffic signs put up temporarily (e.g. near roadworks) are not detected.

If a traffic sign that is relevant to your vehicle is passed, the display of the speed limits is updated.

Traffic signs with a restriction indicated by an additional sign (e.g. in wet conditions) are also shown.

The traffic signs are only displayed with the restrictions if:

R

R the regulation must be observed with the restriction, or

Traffic Sign Assist is unable to determine whether the restriction applies

If Traffic Sign Assist is unable to determine a maximum permitted speed from any of the available sources, no speed limit is displayed in the instrument cluster either.

Traffic Sign Assist is not available in all countries. In this case, symbol : is shown in the assistance graphic display (

Y page 237).


Traffic Sign Assist is only an aid and is not always able to correctly display speed limits. Traffic signs always have priority over the Traffic Sign

Assist display.

The system may be either functionally impaired or temporarily unavailable if the information in the digital street map of the navigation system is incorrect or out of date.

Instrument cluster display

Displaying the assistance graphic

X

X

Call up the assistance graphics display function using the on-board computer

(

Y page 237).

Select the Traffic Sign Assist display.

Detected traffic signs are displayed in the instrument cluster.

Driving systems

207

Speed limit with unknown restriction

:

;

=

Maximum permitted speed

Maximum permitted speed for vehicles for which the restriction in the additional sign is relevant

Additional sign for unknown restriction

A maximum permitted speed of 80 mph

(80 km/h) and a speed limit of 60 mph

(60 km/h) with an unknown restriction apply.

Lane Tracking package

General notes

The Lane Tracking package consists of Blind

Spot Assist (

Y page 207) and Lane Keeping

Assist (

Y page 209).

Blind Spot Assist

General notes

Blind Spot Assist monitors the areas on either side of the vehicle that are not visible to the driver with two lateral, rear-facing radar sensors. A warning display in the exterior mirrors draws your attention to vehicles detected in the monitored area. If you then switch on the corresponding turn signal to change lane, you will also receive an optical and audible warning.

Blind Spot Assist supports you from a speed of approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).


G

WARNING

Blind Spot Assist does not react to:

R vehicles overtaken too closely on the side, placing them in the blind spot area

R vehicles which approach with a large speed differential and overtake your vehicle

As a result, Blind Spot Assist may not give warnings in such situations. There is a risk of an accident.

Always observe the traffic conditions carefully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.

Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It may fail to detect some vehicles and is no substitute for attentive driving. Always ensure that there is sufficient distance to the side for other road users and obstacles.

i

USA only:

This device has been approved by the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar sensor is intended for use in an automotive radar system only. Removing, tampering with, or altering the device will void any warranties, and is not permitted by the FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved way.

Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

Radar sensors

The radar sensors for Blind Spot Assist are integrated into the rear bumper. Make sure that the bumpers are free from dirt, ice or slush. The sensors must not be covered, for example by cycle racks or overhanging loads. Following a severe impact or in the event of damage to the bumpers, have the function of the radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Blind Spot Assist may no longer work properly.

Monitoring range of the sensors


R

R

R there is dirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow narrow vehicles, e.g. motorcycles or bicycles

Z

208

Driving systems

Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not indicated.

Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up to 10 ft

(3 m) behind your vehicle and directly next to your vehicle, as shown in the diagram.

If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may be indicated, especially if the vehicles are not driving in the middle of their lane. This may be the case if there are vehicles driving at the inner edge of their lanes.

On very wide lanes, vehicles in the adjacent lane may not be shown if they are too far away.

Due to the nature of the system:

R

R warnings may be issued in error when driving close to crash barriers or similar solid lane borders.

the warning is canceled when driving for an extended period next to long vehicles, such as trucks.

Warning display

Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds below approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not indicated.

:

Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lamp

When Blind Spot Assist is activated, indicator lamp : in the exterior mirrors lights up yellow at speeds of up to 20 mph (30 km/h). At speeds above 20 mph (30 km/h), the indicator lamp goes out and Blind Spot Assist is operational.

If a vehicle is detected within the blind spot monitoring range at speeds above 20 mph

(30 km/h), warning lamp : on the corresponding side lights up red. This warning is always emitted when a vehicle enters the blind spot monitoring range from behind or from the side.

When you overtake a vehicle, the warning only occurs if the difference in speed is less than

7 mph (12 km/h).

The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reverse gear is engaged. In this event, Blind Spot Assist is no longer active.

The brightness of the indicator/warning lamps is adjusted automatically according to the ambient light.

Collision warning

If a vehicle is detected in the monitoring range of

Blind Spot Assist and you switch on the corresponding turn signal, a double warning tone sounds. Red warning lamp : flashes. If the turn signal remains on, vehicles detected are indicated by the flashing of red warning lamp :.

There are no further warning tones.

Switching on Blind Spot Assist

X

X

Make sure that Blind Spot Assist is activated in the on-board computer (

Y page 238).

Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock.

Warning lamps : in the exterior mirrors light up red for approximately 1.5 seconds and then turn yellow.

Driving systems

209


When you attach a trailer, make sure you have correctly established the electrical connection.

This can be accomplished by checking the trailer lighting. In this event, Blind Spot Assist is deactivated. The indicator lamp lights up yellow in the exterior mirrors and the Blind Spot

Assist Not Available When Towing a

Trailer See Operator's Manual message appears in the multifunction display.

i

You can deactivate the indicator lamps in the exterior mirrors.

To do so, switch off Blind Spot Assist when:

R the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition

R lock the engine is not running

Lane Keeping Assist

General notes

:

Lane Keeping Assist camera

Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of your vehicle with camera :, which is mounted at the top of the windshield. Active Lane Keeping

Assist detects lane markings on the road and can warn you before you leave your lane unintentionally.

This function is available in the range between

40 mph and 120 mph (60 km/h and 200 km/h).

A warning may be given if a front wheel passes over a lane marking. It will warn you by means of intermittent vibration in the steering wheel for up to 1.5 seconds.


G

WARNING

Lane Keeping Assist may not always clearly recognize lane markings.

In this case, Lane Keeping Assist may:

R give an unnecessary warning

R not give a warning


Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation and stay in lane, in particular if warned by Lane Keeping Assist.

G

WARNING

The Lane Keeping Assist warning does not return the vehicle to the original lane. There is a risk of an accident.

You should always steer, brake or accelerate yourself, in particular if warned by Lane Keeping Assist.

If you fail to adapt your driving style, Lane Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. Lane

Keeping Assist cannot take into account the road, traffic and weather conditions. Lane Keeping Assist is merely an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in your lane.

The Lane Keeping Assist does not keep the vehicle in the lane.

The system may be impaired or may not function if:

R

R

R

R

R

R

R there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, or due to snow, rain, fog or spray there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the sun or reflection from other vehicles (e.g. if the road surface is wet) the windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity of the camera there are no, several or unclear lane markings for a lane, e.g. in areas with road construction work the lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow the distance to the vehicle in front is too small and the lane markings thus cannot be detected the lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes branch off, cross one another or merge

Z

210

Driving systems

R

R the road is narrow and winding there are strong shadows cast on the road

Switching on Lane Keeping Assist

X

Switch on Active Lane Keeping Assist using the on-board computer; to do so, select

Standard or Adaptive (

Y page 238).

If you drive at speeds above 40 mph

(60 km/h) and lane markings are detected, the lines in the assistance graphics display

(

Y page 237) are shown in green. Lane Keeping Assist is ready for use.

Standard

If Standard is selected, no warning vibration occurs if:

R you switch on the turn signals. In this event, the warnings are suppressed for a certain

R period of time.

a driving safety system intervenes, such as

ABS, BAS or ESP

®

.

Adaptive

When Adaptive is selected, no warning vibration occurs if:

R you switch on the turn signals. In this event, the warnings are suppressed for a certain

R

R

R period of time.

a driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ABS,

BAS or ESP

®

.

you accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown.

you brake hard.

you steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an

R

R obstacle or change lanes quickly.

you cut the corner on a sharp bend.

In order that you are warned only when necessary and in good time if you cross the lane marking, the system recognizes certain conditions and warns you accordingly.

The warning vibration occurs earlier if:

R

R

R you approach the outer lane marking on a bend.

the road has very wide lanes, e.g. a highway.

the system recognizes solid lane markings.

The warning vibration occurs later if:

R

R the road has narrow lanes.

you cut the corner on a bend.

Driving Assistance PLUS package

General notes

The Driving Assistance Plus package consists of


Y page 174), Active

Blind Spot Assist (

Y page 210) and Active Lane

Keeping Assist (

Y page 213).

Active Blind Spot Assist

General notes

Active Blind Spot Assist monitors the areas on either side of the vehicle that are not directly visible to the driver with two lateral, rear-facing radar sensors. A warning lamp lights up in the exterior mirrors and draws your attention to vehicles detected in the monitored area. If you then switch on the corresponding turn signal to change lanes, you will also receive a visual and audible collision warning. If a risk of lateral collision is detected, corrective braking may help you avoid a collision. Before a course-correcting brake application, Active Blind Spot Assist evaluates the space in the direction of travel and at the sides of the vehicle. For this, Active Blind

Spot Assist uses the forward-facing radar sensors.

Active Blind Spot Assist supports you from a speed of approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).


Active Blind Spot Assist is only an aid and is not a substitute for attentive driving.

G

WARNING

Active Blind Spot Assist does not react to:

R vehicles overtaken too closely on the side, placing them in the blind spot area

R vehicles which approach with a large speed differential and overtake your vehicle

As a result, Active Blind Spot Assist may neither give warnings nor intervene in such situations. There is a risk of an accident.

Always observe the traffic conditions carefully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.

i

USA only: This device has been approved by the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar sensor is intended for use in an automotive radar system only. Removal, tampering, or altering of the device will void any war-

Driving systems

211

ranties, and is not permitted by the FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any nonapproved way.


i

Canada only: This device complies with

RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and

2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Removal, tampering, or altering of the device will void any warranties, and is not permitted.

Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any nonapproved way.


Radar sensors

The Active Blind Spot Assist radar sensors are integrated into the front and rear bumpers and behind a cover in the radiator trim. Make sure that the bumpers and the cover in the radiator grill are free of dirt, ice or slush. The sensors must not be covered, for example by cycle racks or overhanging loads. Following an accident or in the event of damage to the bumpers, have the function of the radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Active Blind Spot

Assist may otherwise no longer work properly.

Monitoring area

G

WARNING

Active Blind Spot Assist does not detect all traffic situations and road users. There is a risk of an accident.

Always make sure that there is sufficient distance on the side for other traffic or obstacles.

Active Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up to

10 ft (3.0 m) behind your vehicle and directly next to your vehicle, as shown in the diagram.


R there is dirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors

R poor visibility, e.g. due to rain, snow or spray

Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not reliably indicated.

Active Blind Spot Assist may not detect narrow vehicles, such as motorcycles or bicycles, or may only detect them too late.

If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may be indicated, especially if the vehicles are not driving in the middle of their lane. This may be the case if there are vehicles at the edge of their lane.

On very wide lanes, vehicles in the adjacent lane may not be shown if they are too far away.

Due to the nature of the system:

R

R warnings may be issued in error when driving close to crash barriers or similar solid lane borders.

warnings may be interrupted when driving alongside particularly long vehicles, e.g.

trucks, for a prolonged time.

Z

212

Driving systems

Indicator and warning display Course-correcting brake application

If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a lateral collision in the monitoring range, a coursecorrecting brake application is carried out. This is meant to assist you in avoiding a collision.

G

WARNING

A course-correcting brake application cannot always prevent a collision. There is a risk of an accident.

Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself, especially if Active Blind Spot Assist warns you or makes a course-correcting brake application. Always maintain a safe distance at the sides.

: Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lamp

Active Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds below approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not indicated.

When Active Blind Spot Assist is activated, indicator lamp : in the exterior mirrors lights up yellow at speeds of up to 20 mph (30 km/h). At speeds above 20 mph (30 km/h), the indicator lamp goes out and Active Blind Spot Assist is operational.

If a vehicle is detected within the monitoring range at speeds above approximately 20 mph

(30 km/h), warning lamp : on the corresponding side lights up red. This warning lamp always lights up when a vehicle enters the blind spot monitoring range from behind or from the side.

When you overtake a vehicle with a difference in speed of less than 7 mph (12 km/h), a delayed warning occurs.

The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reverse gear is engaged. Active Blind Spot Assist is not operational.

The brightness of the indicator/warning lamps is adjusted automatically according to the brightness of the surroundings.

Visual and acoustic collision warning

If you switch on the turn signals to change lanes and a vehicle is detected in the side monitoring range, you receive a visual and acoustic collision warning. You then hear a double warning tone and red warning lamp : flashes. If the turn signal remains on, detected vehicles are indicated by the flashing of red warning lamp :. There are no further warning tones.

If a course-correcting brake application occurs, red warning lamp : flashes in the exterior mirror and a dual warning tone sounds. In addition, display underlining the danger of a side collision appears in the multifunction display.

In very rare cases, the system may make an inappropriate brake application. A course-correcting brake application may be interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in the opposite direction or accelerate.

The course-correcting brake application is available in the speed range between 20 mph

(30 km/h) and 120 mph (200 km/h).

Either no braking application, or a course-correcting brake application adapted to the driving situation occurs if:

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R there are vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash barriers, close to both sides of your vehicle.

a vehicle approaches you too closely at the side.

you have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds.

you brake or accelerate significantly.

a driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP

® or PRE-SAFE ®

ESP

®

Brake.

is switched off.

the offroad program is activated (vehicles without the Offroad Engineering package).

the Offroad or Offroad Plus drive program is activated (vehicles with the Off-Road Engineering package).

Driving systems

213

R

R the LOW RANGE offroad gear is activated

(vehicles with the Offroad Engineering package).

a loss of tire pressure or a defective tire is detected.

Switching on Active Blind Spot Assist

X

X

Make sure that Active Blind Spot Assist is activated in the on-board computer

(

Y page 238).


Warning lamps : in the exterior mirrors light up red for approximately 1.5 seconds and then turn yellow.



This can be accomplished by checking the trailer lighting. Active Blind Spot Assist is then deactivated. The indicator lamp lights up yellow in the exterior mirrors and the Active Blind Spot

Asst. Not Available When Towing a

Trailer See Operator's Manual message appears in the multifunction display.

Active Lane Keeping Assist

General notes

Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of your vehicle by means of multifunction camera : at the top of the windshield. Various different areas to the front, rear and side of your vehicle are also monitored with the aid of the radar sensor system. Active Lane Keeping

Assist detects lane markings on the road and can warn you before you leave your lane unintentionally. If you do not react to the warning, a lane-correcting application of the brakes can bring the vehicle back into the original lane.

This function is available in a speed range between 40 mph and 120 mph (60 km/h and

200 km/h).

For Active Lane Keeping Assist to assist you when driving, the radar sensor system must be operational.


If you fail to adapt your driving style, Active Lane

Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk of accident nor override the laws of physics. Active

Lane Keeping Assist cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. Active Lane

Keeping Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in your lane.

Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot continuously keep your vehicle in its lane.

G

WARNING

Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot always clearly detect lane markings.

In such cases, Active Lane Keeping Assist can:

R give an unnecessary warning and then make a course-correcting brake application to the vehicle

R not give a warning or intervene


Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation and keep within the lane, especially if Active Lane Keeping Assist alerts you. Terminate the intervention in a non-critical driving situation.

The system may be impaired or may not function if:

R

R

R there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, or due to snow, rain, fog or spray there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the sun or reflection from other vehicles (e.g. if the road surface is wet) the windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity of the camera

Z

214

Driving systems

R

R

R

R

R

R

R there are no, several or unclear lane markings for a lane, e.g. in areas with road construction work the lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow the distance to the vehicle in front is too small and the lane markings thus cannot be detected the lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes branch off, cross one another or merge the road is narrow and winding there are highly variable shade conditions on the roadway no vehicle is detected in the adjacent lane and there are broken lane markings

Warning vibration in the steering wheel

A warning may be given if a front wheel passes over a lane marking. It will warn you by means of intermittent vibration in the steering wheel for up to 1.5 seconds.

In order that you are warned only when necessary and in good time if you cross the lane marking, the system detects certain conditions and warns you accordingly.

The warning vibration occurs earlier if:

R

R

R you approach the outer lane marking on a bend the road has very wide lanes, e.g. a highway the system detects solid lane markings

The warning vibration occurs later if:

R

R the road has narrow lanes you cut the corner on a bend

Lane-correcting brake application

G

WARNING

A lane-correcting brake application cannot always bring the vehicle back into the original lane. There is a risk of an accident.

Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself, especially if Active Lane Keeping Assist warns you or makes a lane-correcting brake application.

G

WARNING

Active Lane Keeping Assist does not detect traffic conditions or road users. In very rare cases, the system may make an inappropriate brake application, e.g. after intentionally driving over a solid lane marking. There is a risk of an accident.

An inappropriate brake application may be interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in the opposite direction. Always make sure that there is sufficient distance on the side for other traffic or obstacles.

If you leave your lane, under certain circumstances the vehicle will brake briefly on one side.

This is meant to assist you in bringing the vehicle back to the original lane.

If a lane-correcting brake application occurs, display : appears in the multifunction display.

A lane-correcting brake application can be made after driving over a lane marking recognized as being solid or broken. Before this, a warning must be given by means of intermittent vibration in the steering wheel. In addition, a lane with lane markings on both sides must be recognized.

In the case of a broken lane marking being detected, a lane-correcting brake application can only be made if a vehicle has been detected in the adjacent lane. The following vehicles can have an influence on brake application: oncoming traffic, vehicles that are overtaking and vehicles that are driving parallel to your vehicle.

i

A further lane-correcting brake application can only occur after your vehicle has returned to the original lane.

No lane-correcting brake application occurs if:

R

R

R you clearly and actively steer, brake or accelerate.


you have switched on the turn signal.

Driving systems

215

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R a driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP

PRE-SAFE

®

®

Brake or Active Blind Spot Assist.

you have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds or high rates of accel-

, eration.

ESP ® is switched off.

the transmission is not in position D.

on vehicles with a trailer tow hitch, the electrical connection to the trailer has been correctly established.

the offroad program is activated (vehicles without the Offroad Engineering package).

the Offroad or Offroad Plus drive program is activated (vehicles with the Off-Road Engineering package).

the LOW RANGE offroad gear is activated

(vehicles with the Offroad Engineering pack-

R

R age).

an obstacle has been detected in the lane in which you are driving.

when a loss of tire pressure or a defective tire has been detected and displayed.

There is a possibility that the Active Lane Keeping Assist could misjudge the given traffic situation. An inappropriate brake application may be interrupted at any time if you:

R

R steer slightly in the opposite direction.

switch on the turn signal.

R clearly brake or accelerate.

A lane-correcting brake application is interrupted automatically if:

R

R a driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP

®

PRE-SAFE

®

Brake or Active Blind Spot Assist.

lane markings are no longer detected.

,

Switching on Active Lane Keeping Assist

X

Switch on Active Lane Keeping Assist using the on-board computer; to do so, select

Standard or Adaptive (

Y page 238).

If you drive at speeds above 40 mph

(60 km/h) and lane markings are detected, the lines in the assistance graphics display

(

Y page 237) are shown in green. Active Lane

Keeping Assist is ready for use.

If Standard is selected, no warning vibration occurs if:

R you switch on the turn signals. In this event, the warnings are suppressed for a certain period of time.

R a driving safety system intervenes, such as

ABS, BAS or ESP ® .

When Adaptive is selected, no warning vibration occurs if:

R you switch on the turn signals. In this event, the warnings are suppressed for a certain period of time.

R a driving safety system intervenes, e.g.

R

ABS, BAS or ESP

®

.

you accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown.

R you brake hard.

R you steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an

R obstacle or change lanes quickly.




This can be accomplished by checking the trailer lighting. Lane-correcting brake application does not take place when towing a trailer. Active Lane

Keeping Assist is not activated and the lines in the assistance graphic are gray.

Off-road driving systems

4MATIC (permanent four-wheel drive)

4MATIC ensures that all four wheels are permanently driven. Together with ESP

® and 4ETS, it improves the traction of your vehicle whenever a drive wheel spins due to insufficient grip.

If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATIC can neither reduce the risk of accident nor override the laws of physics. 4MATIC cannot take account of road, weather and traffic conditions.

4MATIC is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in your lane.

!

Never tow the vehicle with one axle raised.

This may damage the transfer case. Damage of this sort is not covered by the Mercedes-

Benz Limited Warranty. All wheels must remain either on the ground or be fully raised.

Observe the instructions for towing the vehicle with all wheels in full contact with the ground.

Z

216

Driving systems

!

A function or performance test should only be carried out on a two-axle dynamometer.

Before you operate the vehicle on such a dynamometer, please consult a qualified workshop. You could otherwise damage the drive train or the brake system.

i

In wintry driving conditions, the maximum effect of 4MATIC can only be achieved if you use winter tires (M+S tires), with snow chains if necessary.


(

Y page 168).

DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation)

General notes

DSR is an aid to assist you when driving downhill. It keeps the speed of travel at the speed selected on the on-board computer. The steeper the downhill gradient, the greater the DSR braking effect on the vehicle. When driving on flat stretches of road or on an uphill gradient, the

DSR braking effect is minimal or nonexistent.

DSR controls the vehicle’s speed when it is activated and the transmission is in position D, R or

N. You can drive at a higher or a lower speed than that set on the on-board computer at any time by accelerating or braking.


G

WARNING

If the speed driven and the set speed deviate and you activate DSR on a slippery road surface, the wheels may lose traction. There is an increased danger of skidding and accidents.

Before switching DSR on, please take into consideration the road surface and the difference between driving speed and the set speed.

If you fail to adapt your driving style, DSR can neither reduce the risk of accident nor override the laws of physics. DSR cannot take account of road, weather and traffic conditions. DSR is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in your lane.

You are always responsible for keeping control of the vehicle and for assessing whether the downhill gradient can be managed. DSR may not always be able to keep to the set speed, depending on road surface and tire conditions. Select a set speed suitable for the prevailing conditions and when necessary, apply the brakes manually.

Activating DSR

X

Press button :.


The Ã DSR symbol appears in the multifunction display.

You can only activate DSR when driving at speeds below 25 mph (40 km/h).

If the current vehicle speed is too high, the Ã

DSR symbol appears in the multifunction display with the Max. speed 25 mph message (Canada: 40 km/h ).

If you have activated DSR and you change the drive program, DSR is deactivated. If you switch between the offroad and offroad plus drive programs, DSR remains activated.

Deactivating DSR

X

Press button :.


The Ã DSR symbol appears in the multifunction display with the Off message.

On vehicles with the Offroad Engineering package, if you select a different drive program, DSR is also deactivated. If you switch between the

Offroad programs, DSR remains activated.

DSR switches off automatically if you drive faster than 28 mph (Canada: 45 km/h). The

Ã DSR symbol appears in the multifunction display with the Off message. The status indicator in the multifunction display goes out. You also hear a warning. On vehicles with the Offroad Engineering package, if you select a different onroad/offroad program, DSR is also deactivated.

Changing the set speed

Driving systems

217

appears in the multifunction display. The last active drive program is selected again.

Do not use the Offroad program on roads that are snow-covered or icy or if you have installed your vehicle with snow chains.

Selecting the Offroad program

X

To increase or reduce the set speed in1 mphincrements (Canada:

1 km/hincrements): briefly press the cruise control lever up : for a higher set speed or down ; for a lower set speed.

The set speed appears in the multifunction display with the Ã DSR symbol.

When DSR is activated, you can change the set speed to a value between 1 mph and 11 mph

(Canada: between 2 km/h and 18 km/h).

i

The DSR set speed is always changed in

1 mph increments (Canada: 1 km/h increments). This is regardless of whether you press the cruise control lever to or beyond the pressure point.

Offroad program (vehicles without the

Offroad Engineering package)

General notes

Select the Offroad program for easily negotiable off-road terrain, e.g. dirt tracks, gravel or sandy surfaces. The engine's torque is restricted to a limited degree and the drive wheels can spin. The spinning wheels produce a cutting effect for better traction. ABS, ESP

® and 4ETS programs especially adapted to off-road driving are activated. A gentle accelerator pedal curve is also selected, i.e. the accelerator pedal must be depressed much further in order to accelerate.

You can select the Offroad drive program at speeds below 60 mph (96 km/h). The Drive program "Offroad" Max. Speed 60 mph message appears in the multifunction display. If you drive at speeds of more than 60 mph

(96 km/h) and select the Offroad drive program, the Drive More Slowly message

Selecting the Offroad program

X

To select drive program: turn DYNAMIC

SELECT controller : until indicator lamp ; lights up.

The Drive Program "Offroad1" Max.

Speed 60 mph message appears in the multifunction display.

The vehicle is raised by +2.4 in (60 mm).

The vehicle is lowered to normal level again if you:

R

R drive at speeds above 37 mph (60 km/h) (all vehicles except Mercedes-AMG vehicles) drive at speeds above 43 mph (70 km/h)

(Mercedes-AMG vehicles)

R drive at speeds between 40 mph (64 km/h) and 43 mph (70 km/h) for approximately

20 seconds (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)

The vehicle changes from the Offroad drive program to the Comfort drive program if you drive faster than 70 mph (112 km/h).

The Drive More Slowly message appears in the multifunction display.


(

Y page 168).

Z

218

Driving systems

Offroad programs (vehicles with Offroad Engineering package)

General notes

The Offroad and Offroad Plus drive programs assist you when driving off-road. The engine's performance characteristics and the gearshifting characteristics of the automatic transmission are adapted for this purpose. ABS, ESP

® and 4ETS programs especially adapted to offroad driving are activated. An accelerator pedal curve suitable for the terrain is selected, i.e. the accelerator pedal must be depressed further to accelerate.

Do not use the Offroad or Offroad Plus drive programs on roads that are snow-covered or icy, or if you have installed your vehicle with snow chains.

Offroad drive program

multifunction display. The last active drive program is selected again.

Selecting the Offroad program

X

To select a drive program: turn DYNAMIC


The Drive program "Offroad" Max.

speed 60 mph message appears in the multifunction display.

The vehicle is raised by +1.2 in (30 mm).

The vehicle changes from the Offroad drive program to the Comfort drive program if you drive faster than 70 mph (112 km/h).

The Drive more slowly message appears in the multifunction display.

Offroad Plus drive program

:

;

DYNAMIC SELECT controller

Offroad program indicator lamp

Select the Offroad program for easily negotiable off-road terrain, e.g. dirt tracks, gravel or sandy surfaces. The engine's torque is restricted to a limited degree and the drive wheels can spin. The spinning wheels produce a cutting effect for better traction. ABS, ESP

® and 4ETS programs especially adapted to off-road driving are activated. A gentle accelerator pedal curve is also selected, i.e. the accelerator pedal must be depressed much further in order to accelerate.

You can select the Offroad drive program at speeds below 60 mph (96 km/h). The Drive

Program "Offroad" Max. Speed 60 mph message appears in the multifunction display. If you drive at speeds above 60 mph (96 km/h) and select the Offroad drive program, the

Drive More Slowly message appears in the

:

;

DYNAMIC SELECT controller

Offroad Plus drive program indicator lamp

Select the Offroad Plus drive program for rough terrain, e.g. for steep and/or uneven terrain or for driving on rocky terrain.

Your vehicle has an automatically activated differential lock for the transfer case. It controls the balance between the front and rear axles.

The differential lock improves the vehicle's traction. 4ETS (

Y page 67) controls the balance between both wheels on an axle.

Selecting the Offroad Plus drive program

X

To select drive program: turn DYNAMIC


The Drive program "Offroad Plus"

Max. speed 25 mph message appears in the multifunction display.

Driving systems

219

R

The Offroad Plus program is selected and the vehicle is raised by +1.2 in (30 mm) compared with the Offroad drive program.

R

DSR is switched on.

R

The differential lock is closed.

You can select the Offroad Plus drive program at speeds below 25 mph (40 km/h).

The Offroad Plus drive program automatically switches to the Offroad drive program if you drive faster than 30 mph (45 km/h). The Drive more slowly message appears in the multifunction display.


(

Y page 168).

LOW RANGE offroad gear (vehicles with the Offroad Engineering package)


G

WARNING

If you select the LOW RANGE off-road gear on a slippery road surface, the wheels could lose traction:

R if you remove your foot from the accelerator pedal when driving

R if off road ABS intervenes when braking

If the wheels lose traction. the vehicle can no longer be steered. There is an increased danger of skidding and accidents.

Never select the LOW RANGE off-road gear when driving on slippery road surfaces.

G

WARNING

If you do not wait for the transfer case gear change process to complete, the transfer case could remain in the neutral position. The power transmission to the driven wheels is then interrupted. There is a danger of the vehicle rolling away unintentionally. There is a risk of an accident.

Wait until the transfer case shift process is completed.

Do not turn off the engine while changing gear and do not shift the automatic transmission to another position.

General notes

:

;

LOW RANGE offroad gear button

LOW RANGE offroad gear indicator lamp

HIGH RANGE Position for all normal onroad driving conditions

LOW RANGE

Offroad position for driving off-road and fording

The transmission ratio between the engine and wheels is only approximately one third of that in the HIGH RANGE road position. Drive torque is thus proportionately higher.

Do not use LOW RANGE:

R on slippery road surfaces,

R e.g. in the case of slush on snow or ice-covered

R roads if you have mounted snow chains to your vehicle

The LOW RANGE offroad gear assists you in driving off-road and when fording. When LOW

RANGE is engaged, the engine’s performance characteristics and the gearshifting characteristics of the automatic transmission are adapted for this purpose.


(

Y page 168). You will find information about driving safety systems in conjunction with

LOW RANGE in the "Safety" section (

Y page 63).

Z

220

Driving systems

From HIGH RANGE to LOW RANGE

!

Only change from LOW RANGE to HIGH

RANGE if:

X


R the transmission is in position N

R you are driving at a speed below 40 km/h

Press LOW RANGE button :.

Indicator lamp ; flashes.

When the gear change is complete, indicator lamp ; lights up. LOW RANGE indicator appears in the multifunction display and in the status indicator.

While indicator lamp ; is flashing, you can cancel the gear change by pressing LOW

RANGE button : again.

i

You cannot activate LOW RANGE if the

SPORT drive program is activated. The LOW

RANGE Not in Drive Program "Sport" message then appears in the multifunction display.

X

Press LOW RANGE button :.

Indicator lamp ; flashes.

When the gear change is complete, indicator lamp ; goes out. In the multifunction display, the LOW RANGE Off message appears and the status indicator goes out.

While indicator lamp ; is flashing, you can cancel the gear change by pressing LOW

RANGE button : again.

From LOW RANGE to HIGH RANGE

!

Only change from LOW RANGE to HIGH

RANGE if:


R the transmission is in position N

R you are driving at a speed below 70 km/h

Messages in the multifunction display

If a gear change process has not been successful, the following messages may be displayed in the multifunction display:



LOW RANGE Max.

Speed 24 mph

You have been driving faster than 24 mph (40 km/h). Additionally, the indicator lamp on the button in the center console is flashing.

X

Drive more slowly to carry out the gear change process.

LOW RANGE Shift to

Position N Briefly

The transmission is in position D and you are driving at below

40 km/h.

X

Shift the transmission to N to complete the gear change process.


221


LOW RANGE Shifting

Canceled Please

Reactivate

LOW RANGE Stop

Apply Parking Brake


The gear change process was not carried out.

X

Ensure that all gear change conditions are fulfilled and carry out the gear change process again.

A warning tone also sounds. The gear change process has not been completed. LOW RANGE is in the neutral position. There is no connection between the engine and the drive wheels.

!

Do not drive any further. You could otherwise damage the vehicle's drive train.

X

X

X

Stop the vehicle. Take into account the road and traffic conditions when doing this.

Depress the electric parking brake (

Y page 160).

Carry out the gear change process again.

If the gear change process has been carried out, the LOW RANGE

Stop Apply Parking Brake message disappears.

Driving dynamics display in the

COMAND display (vehicles with the Offroad Engineering-package)

General notes

The driving dynamics display allows you to see the selected drive program and additional information about the vehicle's operating status in the COMAND display.

Activating the driving dynamics display

X

X

Switch on COMAND. You can find further information in the separate COMAND operating instructions.

Press button :.

The driving dynamics display appears in the

COMAND display.

:

;

C

D

E

F

=

?

A

B

Drive program selected

Status of the differential lock for the transfer case

Accelerator pedal position shown in %

Brake pedal position shown in %

Condition of the LOW RANGE offroad gear

Angle of inclination

Steering angle

Uphill or downhill gradient in percentage

Level control

Compass with angle scale



G

WARNING

Installing an unsuitable ball coupling may result in overloading of the trailer tow hitch and the rear axle. This applies especially if the ball coupling in question is longer or angled differently. This could seriously impair the

Z

222


driving characteristics and the trailer can come loose. There is a risk of an accident.

You should only ever install a ball coupling that has the permissible dimensions and that is designed to meet your trailer-towing requirements. Do not modify the ball coupling or the trailer tow hitch.

You will find the values approved by the manufacturer on the vehicle identification plates and those for the towing vehicle under "Technical data" (

Y page 387).

G

WARNING

If the ball coupling is not installed correctly or not secured with the bolt provided and the corresponding spring cotter, the trailer may come loose. There is a risk of an accident.

Always install and secure the ball coupling as described. Before every journey, ensure that the ball coupling is secured with the bolt and the corresponding spring cotter.

G

WARNING

When the vehicle/trailer combination begins to lurch, you could lose control of it. The vehicle/trailer combination could even rollover.


On no account should you attempt to straighten up the vehicle/trailer combination by increasing the speed. Reduce vehicle speed and do not countersteer. Apply the brake as necessary.

Please observe the manufacturer's operating instructions for the trailer coupling if a detachable trailer coupling is used.

Couple and uncouple the trailer carefully. If you do not couple the trailer to the towing vehicle correctly, the trailer could become detached.

Make sure that the following values are not exceeded:

R

R

R

R the permissible trailer drawbar noseweight the permissible trailer load the permissible rear axle load of the towing vehicle the maximum permissible gross vehicle weight of both the towing vehicle and the trailer

The applicable permissible values, which must not be exceeded, can be found:

R

R

R in the vehicle documents on the identification plates for the trailer tow hitch and the trailer on the vehicle identification plate

If the values differ, the lowest value applies.

When towing a trailer, your vehicle's handling characteristics will be different in comparison with when driving without a trailer.

The vehicle/trailer combination:

R

R

R

R

R is heavier is restricted in its acceleration and gradientclimbing capability has an increased braking distance is affected more by strong crosswinds demands more sensitive steering

R has a larger turning circle

This could impair the handling characteristics.

When towing a trailer, always adjust your speed to the current road and weather conditions. Do not exceed the maximum permissible speed for your vehicle/trailer combination.

Notes on towing a trailer

General notes

!

If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted, changes to the cooling system and drive train may be necessary, depending on the vehicle type.

If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted, observe the anchorage points on the chassis frame.

R

R

R

Do not exceed the legally prescribed maximum speed for vehicle/trailer combinations in the relevant country.

This lowers the risk of an accident.

Only install an approved trailer coupling on your vehicle.

Further information on availability and on installation is available from any authorized


The bumpers of your vehicle are not suitable for installing detachable trailer couplings.


223

R

R

Do not install hired trailer couplings or other detachable trailer couplings on the bumpers of your vehicle.

If you no longer need the ball coupling, remove it from the ball coupling recess. This will reduce the risk of damage to the ball coupling.

When towing a trailer, set the tire pressure on the rear axle of the towing vehicle for the maximum load. You will find the values in the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap of the vehicle

(

Y page 364).

Please note that when towing a trailer, the following driving systems have limited availability or are not available at all:

R

R

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (

Y page 190)

Blind Spot Assist (

Y page 207)

R

Active Lane Keeping Assist (

Y page 213)

On vehicles without level control, the height of the ball coupling will alter according to the load placed on the vehicle. If necessary, use a trailer with a height-adjustable drawbar.

You will find installing dimensions and loads under "Technical data" (

Y page 387).

Driving tips

Observe the information on ESP

® trailer stabilization (

Y page 68) and on pulling away with a trailer (

Y page 141).

The maximum permissible speed for vehicle/ trailer combinations depends on the type of trailer. Before beginning the journey, check the trailer's documents to see what the maximum permissible speed is. Observe the legally prescribed maximum speed in the relevant country.

For certain Mercedes-Benz vehicles, the maximum permissible rear axle load is increased when towing a trailer. See "Technical data" to find out whether this applies to your vehicle

(

Y page 387). If you utilize any of the added maximum rear axle load when towing a trailer, the vehicle/trailer combination may not exceed a maximum speed of 60 mph (100 km/h) for reasons concerning the operating permit. This also applies in countries in which the permissible maximum speed for vehicle/trailer combinations is above 60 mph (100 km/h).

When towing a trailer, your vehicle's handling characteristics will be different in comparison with when driving without a trailer.

Use the left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter to shift into a lower gear in good time on long and steep downhill gradients.

This also applies if you have activated cruise control or Distance Pilot DISTRONIC.

This will use the braking effect of the engine, so that less braking will be required to maintain the speed. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. If you need additional braking, depress the brake pedal repeatedly rather than continuously.

Driving tips

If the trailer swings from side to side:

X

X

X

Do not accelerate.

Do not counter-steer.

Brake if necessary.

R

R

R

Maintain a greater distance from the vehicle in front than when driving without a trailer.

Avoid braking abruptly. If possible, brake gently at first to allow the trailer to run on. Then, increase the braking force rapidly.

The values given for gradient-climbing capabilities from a standstill refer to sea level.

When driving in mountainous areas, note that the power output of the engine and, consequently, the vehicle's gradient-climbing capability, decreases with increasing altitude.

Installing the ball coupling

G

WARNING

If the ball coupling is not correctly installed and secured, it can come loose during the journey and endanger other road users. There is a risk of an accident and injury.


G

WARNING

If the ball coupling is not installed correctly or not secured with the bolt provided and the corresponding spring cotter, the trailer may come loose. There is a risk of an accident.

Z

224



G

WARNING

If the ball coupling is not installed and secured correctly the trailer may come loose. There is a risk of an accident.

Install and secure the ball coupling as described in the ball coupling installation instructions. Make sure that the ball coupling is installed and secured correctly before every journey.

X

X

Pull protective cap : in the direction of the arrow, out of the ball coupling recess.

Stow protective cap : so that it cannot be thrown around.

Observe the loading guidelines (

Y page 294) and the safety notes regarding stowage spaces (

Y page 294).

X

Insert the ball coupling horizontally into ball coupling recess ; in the direction of the arrow until the holes in ball coupling = are in line with the holes in ball coupling recess ?.

X

Slide bolt A into the hole in the ball coupling recess and the ball coupling to the stop.


225

X

Secure the bolt using spring cotter B.

X

Check the ball coupling, bolt and spring cotter for correct installation.

If the ball coupling cannot be correctly mounted, remove the ball coupling. Under these circumstances, the ball coupling must not be used for trailer towing.

Have the entire trailer tow hitch checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Coupling up a trailer

!

Do not connect the trailer's brake system (if featured) to the hydraulic brake system of the towing vehicle, as the latter is equipped with an anti-lock brake system. Doing so will result in a loss of function of the brake systems of both the vehicle and the trailer.

X

X

X

X

X

X

X


Apply the vehicle's electric parking brake.

Start the engine.

Vehicles with AIRMATIC package: select normal level and the Comfort drive program.


Close the doors and tailgate.

Couple up the trailer.

X

X

Establish the electrical connection between the vehicle and the trailer.

Check that the trailer lighting system is working.

X

Push the combination switch upwards/downwards and check whether the corresponding turn signal on the trailer flashes.

A trailer that is connected is recognized only when the electrical connection is established correctly and when the lighting system is working properly. The function of other systems also depends on this, for example:

R

R

R

R

R

ESP ®

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC

Parking Pilot

Active Blind Spot Assist

Active Lane Keeping Assist i

Vehicles with the AIRMATIC package: if you couple up a trailer, the vehicle always remains at normal level. When coupling up a trailer, please observe the following:

R

If the normal level has not been set manually, the vehicle is automatically lowered to normal level. This is the case if a speed of

R

5 mph (8 km/h) is reached.

The Sport drive program is not available.

These restrictions apply to all accessories powered through a connection to the trailer power socket of your vehicle, e.g. a bicycle carrier.

Observe the maximum permissible trailer dimensions (width and length).

Most U.S. states and all Canadian provinces require by law:

R

R

R

Safety chains between the towing vehicle and the trailer. The chains should be cross-wound under the trailer drawbar. They must be fastened to the vehicle's trailer coupling, not to the bumper or the axle.

Leave enough play in the chains to make tight cornering possible.

A separate brake system for certain types of trailer.

Safety switch for braked trailers. Check the specific legal requirements applicable to your state.

If the trailer becomes detached from the towing vehicle, the safety switch applies the trailer brakes.

Z

226



There are numerous legal requirements concerning the towing of a trailer, e.g. speed restrictions. Make sure that your car/trailer combination complies with the local regulations:

R

R in your place of residence in the location to which you are driving

The police and local authorities can provide reliable information.

Observe the following when towing a trailer:

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

-

-

-

-

-

-

To gain driving experience and to become accustomed to the new handling characteristics, you should practice the following in a traffic-free location:

cornering stopping backing up

Before driving, check:

-

trailer tow hitch safety switch for braked trailers safety chains electrical connections lights wheels

Adjust the exterior mirrors to provide an unobstructed view of the rear section of the trailer.

If the trailer has electronically controlled brakes, pull away carefully. Brake manually using the brake controller and check whether the brakes function correctly.

Secure any objects on the trailer to prevent the cargo from slipping when the vehicle is in motion.

When you couple up a trailer, check at regular intervals that the load is firmly secured. If the trailer is equipped with trailer lights and brakes, check the trailer to ensure that these are working.

Bear in mind that the handling will be less stable when towing a trailer than when driving without one. Avoid sudden steering movements.

The vehicle/trailer combination is heavier, accelerates more slowly, has a decreased gradient climbing capability and a longer braking distance.

It is more susceptible to side winds and requires more careful steering.

R

R

R

R

R

If possible, do not brake suddenly, but instead depress the brake pedal moderately at first so that the trailer can activate its brakes. Then increase the pressure on the brake pedal.

If the automatic transmission repeatedly shifts between gears on uphill or downhill gradients, shift to a lower gear using the left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter.

A lower gear and lower speed reduce the risk of engine failure.

When driving downhill, shift to a lower gear to utilize the engine's braking effect.

Avoid continuous brake application as this may overheat the vehicle brakes and, if installed, the trailer brakes.

If the coolant temperature increases dramatically while the air-conditioning system is switched on, switch off the air-conditioning system.

Coolant heat can also be dissipated by opening the windows and switching the ventilation blower and the interior temperature to the highest level.

When overtaking, pay particular attention to the extended length of your vehicle/trailer combination.

Due to the length of the vehicle/trailer combination, you require additional road space in relation to the vehicle you are overtaking before you can change back to the original lane.

Decoupling a trailer

G

WARNING

If you uncouple a trailer with the overrun brake engaged, you could trap your hand between the vehicle and the trailer drawbar.


Do not uncouple a trailer if the overrun brake is engaged.

G

WARNING

Vehicles with level control:

The vehicle is lowered as soon as you disconnect the trailer cable. This could result in your limbs or those of other people that are between the vehicle body and tires or under-


227

neath the vehicle being trapped. There is a risk of injury.

Make sure that nobody is in the immediate vicinity of the wheel housings or under the vehicle when you disconnect the trailer cable.

X

X

X

!

Do not disconnect a trailer with an engaged overrun brake. Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged by the rebounding of the overrun brake.

X

X


Apply the vehicle's electric parking brake.

Start the engine.

Close the doors and tailgate.

Apply the trailer's parking brake.

X

X

Detach the trailer cable and decouple the trailer.


R the vehicle and trailer may carry, pay attention to the respective lowest values.

The trailer drawbar load on the ball coupling must be added to the rear axle load to avoid exceeding the permissible gross axle weight.

The permissible gross vehicle weight is indicated on the identification plate located on the B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle.

i

Mercedes-Benz recommends a trailer load where the trailer drawbar noseweight accounts for 8 % to 15 % of the trailer's permissible gross weight.

i

The weight of additional accessories, passengers, and cargo reduces the permissible trailer load and drawbar load for your vehicle.

Checking the vehicle and trailer weight

R

R

To check that the weights of the towing vehicle and the trailer comply with the maximum permissible values, have the vehicle/trailer combination (including the driver, passengers, and cargo with a fully laden trailer) weighed on a calibrated weighbridge.

Check the gross axle weight rating of the front and rear axles, the gross weight of the trailer and the trailer drawbar noseweight.

Permissible trailer loads and drawbar loads

Weight specifications

Maximum allowable gross mass

The gross vehicle weight of the trailer is calculated by adding the weight of the trailer to the weight of the load and equipment on the trailer.


Y page 387).

Permissible noseweight


Y page 387).

Loading a trailer

R

When loading the trailer, make sure that neither the permissible gross weight of the trailer nor the gross vehicle weight are exceeded.

The permissible gross vehicle weight is indicated on the identification plate located on the B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle.

You can find the maximum permissible values on the type plates of your vehicle and the trailer. When calculating how much weight

Removing the ball coupling

X

X

X

X

X

Remove the spring cotter.

Remove the bolt from the ball coupling recess.

Remove the ball coupling from the ball coupling recess.

Clean the ball coupling if it is dirty.

Stow the ball coupling so that it cannot be thrown around.


Y page 294) and the safety notes regarding stowage spaces

(

Y page 294).

Information on cleaning and care of the trailer tow hitch (

Y page 329).

Trailer power supply

!

Accessories with a maximum power consumption of 180 W can be connected to the permanent power supply.

Z

228


You must not charge a trailer battery using the power supply.

The trailer socket of your vehicle is equipped at the factory with a permanent power supply.

The permanent power supply is supplied via trailer socket pin 4.

The trailer's permanent power supply is switched off in the event of low vehicle supply voltage and after six hours at the latest.

A qualified specialist workshop can provide more information about installing the trailer electrics.

Displays and operation

229


G

WARNING

If you operate information systems and communication equipment integrated in the vehicle while driving, you will be distracted from traffic conditions. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.

Only operate the equipment when the traffic situation permits. If you are not sure that this is possible, park the vehicle paying attention to traffic conditions and operate the equipment when the vehicle is stationary.

You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the on-board computer.

G

WARNING

If the instrument cluster has failed or malfunctioned, you may not recognize function restrictions in systems relevant to safety. The operating safety of your vehicle may be impaired. There is a risk of an accident.

Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

If the operating safety of your vehicle is impaired, pull over as soon as it is safe to do so.

Contact a qualified specialist workshop.

The on-board computer only shows messages or warnings from certain systems in the multifunction display. You should therefore make sure your vehicle is operating safely at all times.

For an overview, see the instrument panel illustration (

Y page 34).

X

Turn the brightness control knob clockwise or counter-clockwise.

If you turn the light switch to Ã, T or

L, the brightness is dependent upon the brightness of the ambient light.

i

The light sensor in the instrument cluster automatically controls the brightness of the multifunction display.

In daylight, the displays in the instrument cluster are not illuminated.

Speedometer with segments

The segments in the speedometer indicate which speed range is available.

R

R

R

Cruise control activated (

Y page 172):

The segments light up from the stored speed to the maximum speed.

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated

(

Y page 174):

One or two segments in the set speed range light up.

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC detects a vehicle in front moving more slowly than the stored speed:

The segments between the speed of the vehicle in front and the stored speed light up.

Tachometer

!

Do not drive in the overrevving range, as this could damage the engine.

The red band in the tachometer indicates the engine's overrevving range.

The fuel supply is interrupted to protect the engine when the red band is reached.


Instrument cluster lighting

The lighting in the instrument cluster, in the displays and the controls in the vehicle interior can be adjusted using the brightness control knob.

The brightness control knob is located on the bottom left of the instrument cluster

(

Y page 34).

Outside temperature display

You should pay special attention to road conditions when temperatures are around freezing point.

Bear in mind that the outside temperature display indicates the temperature measured and does not record the road temperature.

The outside temperature display is in the multifunction display (

Y page 231).

Z

230


There is a short delay before a change in outside temperature appears in the multifunction display.

Operating the on-board computer

Overview

Coolant temperature gauge

G

WARNING

Opening the hood when the engine is overheated or when there is a fire in the engine compartment could expose you to hot gases or other service products. There is a risk of injury.

Let an overheated engine cool down before opening the hood. If there is a fire in the engine compartment, keep the hood closed and contact the fire department.

!

A display message is shown if the coolant temperature is too high.

If the coolant temperature is over 248 ‡

(120 †), do not continue driving. The engine will otherwise be damaged.

The coolant temperature gage is in the instrument cluster on the right-hand side (

Y page 34).

Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolant level, the coolant temperature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †).

:

;

=

X

Multifunction display

Right control panel

Left control panel

To activate the on-board computer: turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock.

You can control the multifunction display and the settings in the on-board computer using the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel.

Vehicles with the COMAND multimedia system: you can find further information on the Voice

Control System in the separate operating instructions.

Vehicles with the Audio 20 multimedia system: you can find further information on voice-operated navigation in the manufacturer's operating instructions.


231

Left control panel

=

;

9

:

9

:

R

Calls up the menu and menu bar

Press briefly:

R

R

R

R

Scrolls in lists

Selects a submenu or function

In the Audio menu: selects the previous or next station, when the preset list or station list is active, or an audio track or video scene

In the Tel (telephone) menu: switches to the phone book and selects a name or telephone number

Press and hold:

R

R

In the Audio menu: selects a preset list or a station list in the desired frequency range, or an audio track or video scene using rapid scrolling

In the Tel (Telephone) menu: starts rapid scrolling if the phone book is open a

R

Confirms the selection or display message

R

In the Tel (Telephone) menu: switches to the phone book and starts dialing the selected number

%

Press briefly:

R

R

R

R

Back

Switches off voice-operated navigation or the Voice Control System

Hides display messages or calls up the last Trip menu function used

Exits the telephone book/redial memory

%

Press and hold:

R

Calls up the standard display in the

Trip menu

Right control panel

~

R

Rejects or ends a call

R

Exits the telephone book/redial memory

6

R

Makes or accepts a call

R

Switches to the redial memory

W

X

R

Adjusts the volume

8

R

Mute

?

R

Switches on voice-operated navigation or the Voice Control System

Multifunction display

:

;

=

?

A

B

X

Permanent display: outside temperature or speed (

Y page 238)

Time

Text field

Menu bar

Drive program (

Y page 148)

Transmission position (

Y page 148)

To display menu bar?: press the = or ; button on the steering wheel.

If you do not press any other button, menu bar ? fades out after a few seconds.

Text field = shows the selected menu or submenu as well as display messages.

i

Set the time using the multimedia system; see the Digital Operator's Manual.

Z

232

Menus and submenus

Possible displays in the multifunction display:

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

Z Gearshift recommendation, when shifting manually (

Y page 150) j Parking Pilot (

Y page 193)

CRUISE Cruise control (

Y page 172)

_ Adaptive Highbeam Assist

(

Y page 116)

è ECO start/stop function (

Y page 142)

ë HOLD function (

Y page 185) a Distance Pilot DISTRONIC Steering Pilot

(

Y page 237)

DSR Downhill Speed Regulation

(

Y page 216)


Menu overview

Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to call up the menu bar and select a menu.

Operating the on-board computer (

Y page 230).

Depending on the equipment installed in the vehicle, you can call up the following menus:

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

Trip menu (

Y page 232)

Navi menu (navigation instructions)

(

Y page 233)

Audio menu (

Y page 234)

Tel menu (telephone) (

Y page 235)

DriveAssist menu (assistance)

(

Y page 236)

Serv.

menu (

Y page 236)

Sett.

menu (settings) (

Y page 238)

ON&OFFROAD menu (

Y page 241)

AMG menu (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)

(

Y page 241)

Trip menu

Standard display

X

Press and hold the % button on the steering wheel until the Trip menu with trip odometer : and odometer ; appears.

Trip computer "From Start" or "From

Reset"

:

;

=

?

Distance

Driving time

Average speed

Average fuel consumption

X

X

Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu.

Press the 9 or : button to select

From start or From reset .

The values in the From Start submenu are calculated from the start of a journey, while the values in the From Reset submenu are calculated from the last time the submenu was reset

(

Y page 233).

The From Start trip computer is automatically reset if:

R the ignition has been switched off for more

R than four hours.

999 hours have been exceeded.

R

9,999 miles have been exceeded.

The From reset trip computer is automatically reset if the value exceeds 9,999 hours or

99,999 miles.

ECO display

The ECO display is not available for Mercedes-

AMG vehicles.

X

X


Press the 9 or : button to select ECO

DISPLAY .

If the ignition remains switched off for longer than four hours, the ECO display will be automatically reset.

For more information on the ECO display, see

(

Y page 163).


233

Displaying the range and current fuel consumption

trip computer, the values in the ECO display are also reset.

Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the menu only displays approximate range :.

X


Navigation system menu

Displaying navigation instructions

In the Navi menu, the multifunction display shows navigation instructions.

Observe the additional information on navigation in the separate multimedia system operating instructions.

X

Switch on the multimedia system (see sepa-

X rate operating instructions).

Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Navi menu.

Route guidance not active

Digital speedometer

X

X


Press the 9 or : button to select the digital speedometer.

A gear shift recommendation Z can also appear.

Observe the information on gearshift recommendation Z when shifting manually

(

Y page 150).

Mercedes-AMG vehicles: a gearshift recommendation is shown in the status bar of the multifunction display and not in the digital speedometer display.

Resetting values

X

X

X

X


Press the 9 or : button to select the function that you wish to reset.

Press a to confirm your selection.

Press : to select Yes and press a to confirm.

You can reset the values of the following functions:

R

R

R

R

Trip odometer

"From Start" trip computer

"From Reset" trip computer

ECO display

If you reset the values in the ECO display, the values in the "From Start" trip computer are also reset. If you reset the values in the "From Start"

:

;

Direction of travel

Current road

Route guidance active

No change of direction announced

:

;

=

?

Distance to destination

Distance to the next change of direction

Current road

"Follow the road's course" symbol

Z

234


Change of direction announced without a lane recommendation

Other status indicators of the navigation system

:

;

=

Road into which the change of direction leads

Distance to change of direction and visual distance display

Change-of-direction symbol

When a change of direction is to be made, you will see symbol = for the change of direction and distance graphic ;. The distance indicator shortens towards the top of the display as you approach the point of the announced change of direction. The change of direction starts once the distance display reaches zero.

Change of direction announced with a lane recommendation

The navigation system displays additional information and the vehicle status.

Possible displays:

R

R

R

R

New Route...

or Calculating Route...

A new route is calculated.

Road Not Mapped

The vehicle position is inside the area of the digital map but the road is not recognized, e.g.

newly built streets, car parks or private land.

No Route

No route could be calculated to the selected destination.

O

You have reached the destination or an intermediate destination.

Audio menu

Selecting a radio station

:

;

=

?

A

Road into which the change of direction leads

Distance to change of direction and visual distance display

Lanes not recommended

Recommended lane and new lane during a change of direction

Change-of-direction symbol

On multilane roads, lane recommendations can be displayed for the next change of direction if the digital map supports this data. During the change of direction, new lanes may be added.

Lane not recommended =: you will not be able to complete the next change of direction if you stay in this lane.

Recommended lane and new lane during a change of direction ?: in this lane you will be able to complete the next two changes of direction without changing lane.

:

;

Active station list

Station frequency with memory position

The multifunction display shows station ; with station frequency or station name. The preset position is only displayed along with station ; if this has been stored. You can store TV channels ; in the multimedia system.

X

Switch on the multimedia system and select

X radio; see the separate operating instructions.

Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Audio menu.


235

X

X

To select a preset list or station list: press and briefly hold the 9 or : button until the preset list or station list in the desired frequency range is shown in the multifunction display.

To select a station: briefly press 9 or :.

i

SIRIUS XM satellite radio functions like a normal radio.

For more information on radio operation, see

"Satellite radio" in the separate operating instructions.

Operating an audio player or audio media

Video DVD operation

X

X

X

X

Switch on the multimedia system and select video DVD; see the separate operating instructions.


To select the next or previous scene:

briefly press the 9 or : button.

To select a scene from the scene list

(rapid scrolling): press and hold the 9 or : button until desired scene : has been reached.

Audio data from various audio devices or media can be played, depending on the equipment installed in the vehicle.

X

X

X

X

Switch on the multimedia system and select audio CD or MP3 mode; see the separate operating instructions.


To select the next/previous track: briefly press the 9 or : button.

To select a track from the track list (rapid

scrolling): press and hold the 9 or : button until desired track : has been reached.

If you press and hold 9 or :, the rapid scrolling speed is increased. Not all audio drives or data carriers support this function.

If track information is stored on the audio device or medium, the multifunction display will show the number and title of the track. The current track does not appear in audio AUX mode

(Auxiliary audio mode: external audio source connected).

Telephone menu

Introduction

G

WARNING



When telephoning, you must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving.

X

X

X

X

Switch on the mobile phone (see the manufacturer’s operating instructions).

Switch on the multimedia system (see separate operating instructions).

Establish a Bluetooth ® connection to the multimedia system; see the separate operating instructions.

Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Tel menu.

Z

236


You will see one of the following display messages in the multifunction display:

R

R

Phone READY or the name of the network provider: the mobile phone has found a network and is ready to receive.

Phone No Service : there is no network available or the mobile phone is searching for a network.

Accepting a call

If someone calls you when you are in the Tel menu, a display message appears in the multifunction display.

You can accept a call at any time regardless of the menu selected.

X

Press the 6 button on the steering wheel to accept an incoming call.

X

X or

X

Press the 9 or : button to select the number you want to dial.

Press the 6 or a button to start dialing.

To exit the telephone book: press the ~ or % button.

Redialing

The on-board computer saves the last names or numbers dialed in the redial memory.

X


X

X

X

Press the 6 button to switch to the redial memory.

Press the 9 or : button to select the desired name or number.

Press the 6 or a button to start dialing.

or

X

To exit the redial memory: press the ~ or % button.

Rejecting or ending a call

You can end or reject a call even if you are not in the Tel menu.

X

Press the ~ button on the steering wheel to reject or end a call.

Selecting an entry from the telephone book

X

X

X

X


Press the 9, : or a button to switch to the phone book.

Authorize access to the phone book on the phone.

Press the 9 or : button to select the desired name.

or

X

X or

X

To start rapid scrolling: press and hold the

9 or : button for longer than one second.

Rapid scrolling stops when you release the button or reach the end of the list.

If only one telephone number is stored for

a name: press the 6 or a button to start dialing.

If there is more than one number for a

particular name:press the 6 or a button to display the numbers.

Assistance menu

Introduction

Depending on the equipment installed in the vehicle, you have the following options in the

DriveAssist menu:

R

Displaying the assistance graphic

R

R

R

R

R

R

(

Y page 237)

Activating or deactivating Steering Pilot

(

Y page 237)

Activating or deactivating Active Brake Assist

(

Y page 237)

Activating or deactivating Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function (

Y page 237)

Activating/deactivating ATTENTION ASSIST

(

Y page 237)

Activating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist or

Active Blind Spot Assist (

Y page 238)

Activating/deactivating Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist (

Y page 238)


237

Displaying the assistance graphic

X

X

X

X

Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the DriveAssist menu.

Press 9 or : to select Assistance

Graphic .

Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel.

The multifunction display shows the Distance

Pilot DISTRONIC distance display in the assistance graphic display.

The assistance graphic displays the status of and information from the following driving systems or driving safety systems:

R

Traffic Sign Assist (

Y page 206)

R


Y page 174)

R

Active Brake Assist (

Y page 64)

R

Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic func-

R tion (

Y page 70)

ATTENTION ASSIST (

Y page 205)

R

Lane Keeping Assist (

Y page 209) or Active

R

Lane Keeping Assist (

Y page 213)

DSR (

Y page 216)

R

Off-road program (vehicles with Off-Road

R

Engineering package) (

Y page 218)

Rear window wiper (

Y page 120)

Press : to display the ATTENTION ASSIST assessment.

Activating/deactivating Steering Pilot

X

X

X

X


Press 9 or : to select Steering

Pilot .


The current selection appears.

To activate/deactivate: press the a button again.

When the Steering Pilot is activated, the multifunction display displays a Steering Pilot

On message.

Further information about Distance Pilot

DISTRONIC with Steering Pilot (

Y page 180).

Activating or deactivating Active Brake

Assist

You can use these functions to activate/deactivate Active Brake Assist or, on vehicles with the Driving Assistance package, to activate or deactivate Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function.

X

X

X

X



Brake Assist .

Press a to confirm.



When Active Brake Assist or Active Brake

Assist with cross-traffic function is deactivated, the æ symbol appears in the multifunction display in the assistance graphic display.

Further information on Active Brake Assist

(

Y page 64) and Active Brake Assist with crosstraffic function (

Y page 69).

Activating/deactivating ATTENTION

ASSIST

X

X

X

X

X

X



Attention Assist .

Press the a button.


Press a to confirm.

Press the : or 9 button to set Off ,

Standard or Sensitive .

Press the a button to save the setting.

When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the

é symbol appears in the multifunction display in the assistance graphics display.

For further information about ATTENTION

ASSIST, see (

Y page 205).

Z

238


Activating/deactivating Blind Spot

Assist

X

X

X

X



Blind Spot Assist .




For further information about Blind Spot Assist, see (

Y page 207).

For further information about Active Blind Spot

Assist, see (

Y page 210).

Activating/deactivating Lane Keeping

Assist

X

X

X

X

X

X



Lane Keeping Assist .

Press a to confirm.


Press a to confirm.

Press the : or 9 button to set Off ,

Standard or Adaptive .

When Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane

Keeping Assist is activated, the multifunction display shows the lane markings as bright lines in the assistance graphic.


For further information about Lane Keeping

Assist, see (

Y page 209).

For further information about Active Lane Keeping Assist, see (

Y page 213).

Service menu

Depending on the equipment installed in the vehicle, you have the following options in the

Serv.

menu:

R

Calling up display messages in message

R

R memory (

Y page 244)

Restarting the tire pressure loss warning system (

Y page 353) or checking the tire pressure electronically (

Y page 355)

Calling up the service due date

(

Y page 323)

Settings menu

Introduction

Depending on the equipment installed in the vehicle, In the Sett.

menu you have the following options:

R

Changing the instrument cluster settings

R

R

R

R

(

Y page 238)

Changing the light settings (

Y page 239)

Changing the vehicle settings (

Y page 239)

Changing the convenience settings

(

Y page 240)

Restoring the factory settings (

Y page 240)

Instrument cluster submenu

Selecting the distance unit

The Display Unit Speedometer / Odome‐ ter: function allows you to choose whether certain displays appear in kilometers or miles in the multifunction display.

X

X

Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Sett.

menu.

Press the : or 9 button to select the

Instrument Cluster submenu.

X

X

X

Press a to confirm.


Display Unit Speedometer / Odometer function.

You will see the selected setting: km or miles .


The selected unit of measurement for distance applies to:

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

Digital speedometer in the Trip menu

Odometer and the trip odometer

Trip computer

Current consumption and the range

Navigation instructions in the Navi menu

Cruise control

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC

ASSYST PLUS service interval display

Selecting permanent display

The Permanent Display: function allows you to choose whether the multifunction display always shows the outside temperature or the speed.


239

The speed display is inverse to the speedometer.

X

X

X

X

X


menu.


Instrument Cluster submenu.



Permanent Display: function.

The current setting, Outside Temperature ,

Speedometer [km/h] or Speedometer

[mph] appears.

To change the setting: press a again.

Light submenu

Setting the daytime running lamps

This function is not available in Canada.

X

Press the = or ; button on the steering

X

X wheel to select the Sett.

menu.


Light submenu.

Press a to confirm.

X

X

Press : or 9 to select the Daytime

Running Lights function.

If the Daytime Running Lights function has been switched on, the cone of light and the

W symbol in the multifunction display are shown in orange.


Further information on daytime running lamps

(

Y page 112).

Switching the Intelligent Light System on/off

X

X

X

X

X


menu.


Light submenu.

Press a to confirm.


Intell. Light System function.

If the Intell. Light System function has been switched on, the cone of light and the

L symbol in the multifunction display are shown in orange.


When you activate Intell. Light System , you activate the following functions:

R

R

R

R

Highway mode

Active light function

Cornering light function

Extended range fog lamps

R

Off-road lights

Further information on the Intelligent Light System (

Y page 114).

Vehicle submenu

Activating/deactivating the automatic door locking mechanism

If you activate the Automatic Door Lock function, the vehicle is centrally locked above a speed of approximately 9 mph (15 km/h).

X

X

X

X

X


menu.


Vehicle submenu.

Press a to confirm.


Automatic Door Lock function.

When the Automatic Door Lock function is activated, the vehicle doors are displayed in orange in the multifunction display.


For further information on the automatic locking feature, see (

Y page 81).

Activating/deactivating the acoustic locking verification signal

If you switch on the Acoustic Lock function, an acoustic signal sounds when you lock the vehicle.

X


X

X

X

X wheel to select the Settings menu.


Vehicle submenu.

Press a to confirm.


Acoustic Lock function.

If the Acoustic Lock function is activated, the & symbol in the multifunction display lights up orange.


Z

240


Convenience submenu

Activating/deactivating the EASY-

ENTRY/EXIT feature

G

WARNING

When the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjusts the steering wheel, you and other vehicle occupants – particularly children – could become trapped. There is a risk of injury.

While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is making adjustments, make sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the steering wheel.


R press one of the memory function position buttons, or

R move the switch for steering wheel adjustment in the opposite direction to that in which the steering wheel is moving.

The adjustment process is stopped.

X

X

X

X

X


menu.


Convenience submenu.

Press a to confirm.

Using : or 9, select the Easy Entry/

Exit function.

If the Easy Entry/Exit function is activated, the vehicle steering wheel is displayed in orange in the multifunction display.


Further information on the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature (

Y page 106).

Switching the seat belt adjustment on/off

X

X

X

X

X

Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu.



Press a to confirm.


Belt Adjustment function.

If the Belt Adjustment function is activated, the vehicle seat belt is shown in orange in the multifunction display.


For further information on belt adjustment, see

(

Y page 45).

Switching the fold-in mirrors when locking feature on/off

This function is only available when the vehicle is equipped with the electrical fold-in function.

When you activate the Auto. Mirror Folding function, the exterior mirrors are folded in when the vehicle is locked. The exterior mirrors fold out automatically again as soon as you unlock the vehicle.

X


X

X wheel to select the Sett.

menu.



Press a to confirm.

X

X


Auto. Mirror Folding function.

If the Auto. Mirror Folding function is switched on, the multifunction display shows the exterior mirror in orange.


If you have switched the Auto. Mirror Fold‐ ing on and you fold the exterior mirrors in using button :, they will not fold out automatically

(

Y page 108).

You can then only fold out the exterior mirrors using button :.

Restoring the factory settings

X

X

X


menu.


Factory Setting submenu.

Press a to confirm.

The Reset All Settings?

message appears.


241

X

X

Press the : or 9 button to select No or

Yes .

Press a to confirm the selection.

If you select Yes , the multifunction display shows a confirmation message.

If you want to reset the Daytime Running

Lights function in the Light submenu, you must turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock.

If the multifunction display shows oil temperature ? or B in blue, the engine or the transmission are not yet at normal operating temperature. Avoid driving at full engine output during this time.

SETUP

ON&OFFROAD menu

X

Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the ON&OFFROAD menu.

You can view the current off-road program settings in the ON&OFFROAD menu:

R


Y page 218)

R


Y page 217)

AMG menu (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)

Warm-up

:

;

=

?

Engine mode ( Comfort / Sport / Sport + )

Suspension setting Comfort / Sport /

Sport +

Transmission position D / M

ESP

® mode ( ON / OFF )

SETUP displays the following information/functions:

R

R

R

R

R

R

X

X the digital speedometer the gear indicator the engine mode the suspension mode the transmission position the ESP ® (Electronic Stability Program) mode

Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu.

Press the 9 button repeatedly until SETUP is displayed.

:

;

=

?

A

B

X

Digital speedometer

Gear indicator

Upshift indicator

Engine oil temperature

Coolant temperature

Transmission oil temperature


Upshift indicator: upshift indicator Up = indicates that the engine has reached the overrevving range when in the manual drive program.

Engine/transmission oil temperature:

when the engine and transmission are at normal operating temperature, oil temperature ? and B are displayed in white in the multifunction display.

RACETIMER

Displaying and starting RACETIMER

The RACETIMER is only intended for use on a closed race circuit. Do not use the function on public roads.

:

;

Lap

RACETIMER

Z

242


You can start the RACETIMER when the engine is running or if the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock.

X

X

X


Press the 9 button repeatedly until the

RACETIMER is shown.

To start: press the a button to start the

RACETIMER.

Displaying the intermediate time

X

X

Press the % button on the steering wheel.

Confirm Yes with a.

The RACETIMER interrupts timing if you stop the vehicle and turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock. If you turn the SmartKey to position 3 and then press a to confirm

Start , timing is continued.

Resetting the current lap

X

X

X

Stop the RACETIMER.

Press the = or ; button to select

Reset Lap .

Press a to reset the lap time to "0".

Deleting all laps

X

X

Press the = or ; button to select

Interm. Time .

Press a to confirm.

The intermediate time is displayed for five seconds.

Starting a new lap

:

;

=

X

RACETIMER

Fastest lap time (best lap)

Lap

Press a to confirm New Lap .

i

It is possible to store a maximum of sixteen laps. The 16th lap can only be completed with

Finish Lap .

Stopping the RACETIMER

If you switch off the engine, the RACETIMER is reset to "0" after 30 seconds. All laps are deleted.

You cannot delete individual stored laps. If you have stopped 16 laps, the current lap does not have to be reset.

X

X

X

Reset the current lap.

Press a to confirm Reset .

Reset Race Timer?

appears in the multifunction display.

Press the : button to select Yes and press the a button to confirm.

All laps are deleted.

Overall statistics

:

;

=

?

A

RACETIMER overall evaluation

Total time driven

Average speed

Distance covered

Maximum speed


243

This function is shown if you have stored at least one lap and stopped the RACETIMER.

X

X


Press the 9 button repeatedly until the overall evaluation is shown.

Lap statistics

=

?

A

Average lap speed

Lap length

Top speed during lap

This function is only available if you have stored at least two laps and have stopped the RACE-

TIMER.

X

X

X


Press the 9 button repeatedly until the lap evaluation is shown.

Each lap is shown in a separate submenu. The fastest lap is indicated by flashing symbol :.

Press the 9 or : button to select a different lap evaluation.

:

;

Lap

Lap time


Introduction

General notes

Display messages appear in the multifunction display.

Display messages with graphic displays may be shown in simplified form in the Operator's Manual and may therefore differ from the multifunction display.

Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in this

Operator's Manual.

Certain display messages are accompanied by an audible warning tone or a continuous tone.

When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on:

R

R

HOLD function (

Y page 185)

Parking (

Y page 159)

Hiding display messages

X

Press the a or % button on the steering wheel.

The multifunction display hides the display message.

High-priority display messages are shown in red in the multifunction display. Some high-priority display messages cannot be hidden.

The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for the messages have been remedied.

Z

244


Message memory

The on-board computer saves certain display messages in the message memory. You can call up the display messages:

X

X

X

X

Press = or ; on the steering wheel to select the Serv.

menu.

If there are display messages, the multifunction display shows 2 Messages , for example.

Press the 9 or : button to select the entry, e.g.

2 messages .

Press a to confirm.

Press the 9 or : button to scroll through the display messages.

When the ignition is switched off, all display messages are deleted, apart from some high-priority display messages. Once the causes of the high-priority display messages have been rectified, the corresponding display messages are also deleted.


245

Safety systems


!÷

Currently Unavaila‐ ble See Operator's

Manual

!÷

Inoperative See

Operator's Manual


ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) and ESP

®

(Electronic Stability Program) are temporarily not available.

Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunction.

In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster.

Possible causes are:

R

R

Self-diagnosis is not yet complete.

The on-board voltage may be insufficient.

G

WARNING

The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example.

The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected.

The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.

If ESP

® is not operational, ESP

® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.

There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.

X

Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering movements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).

If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above are available again.

X

X

If the multifunction display still shows the display message:

Drive on carefully.

Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

ABS and ESP ® are malfunctioning.


The $ (USA only) or J (Canada only), ÷, å and !

warning lamps in the instrument cluster also light up.

G

WARNING




If ESP




X

X

Drive on carefully.


Z

246



÷


Manual

÷

Inoperative See

Operator's Manual


ESP

® is temporarily unavailable.


In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster.

The self-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example.

ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G

WARNING


The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase.

If ESP ® is not operational, ESP ® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.


X


If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above are available again.


X

X

Drive on carefully.


ESP

® is malfunctioning.


In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster.

G

WARNING



If ESP




X

X

Drive on carefully.



247


T!

÷

Inoperative See

Operator's Manual


EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS and ESP

® are malfunctioning.


In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.

G

WARNING






X

X

Drive on carefully.


F

(USA only) only)

!

(Canada

Turn On the Igni‐ tion to Release the

Parking Brake

F

(USA only) only)

!

(Canada

Please Release Park‐ ing Brake

F only) only)

(USA

!

(Canada

Parking Brake See

Operator's Manual

The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp lights up.

You attempted to release the electric parking brake while the ignition was switched off.

X

X

SmartKey: turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock.

KEYLESS-GO: switch on the ignition.

The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes and a warning tone sounds. A condition for automatic release of the electric parking brake is not fulfilled (

Y page 160).

You are driving with the electric parking brake applied.

X

Release the electric parking brake manually.

The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes and a warning tone sounds.

You are using the electric parking brake for emergency braking

(

Y page 160).

X

X

X

The yellow ! warning lamp lights up.

The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.

To apply:

X

Switch the ignition off.

Press the electric parking brake handle for at least ten seconds.



Z

248




The yellow ! warning lamp and the red F (USA only) or !

(Canada only) indicator lamp light up.


To release:

X

X or

X

Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.


Release the electric parking brake automatically (

Y page 160).

If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:

X

X

Do not drive on.


X

X

The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes and the yellow ! warning lamp lights up.


To release:

X

X



To apply:


Apply the electric parking brake manually.

If the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp continues to flash:

X

X

X

X

X

Do not drive on.

Secure the vehicle against rolling away (

Y page 367).


Turn the front wheels towards the curb.



249


F

(USA only) only)

!

(Canada

Parking Brake Inop‐ erative


The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about ten seconds after the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then goes out or remains lit.


X

X



If it is not possible to engage the electric parking brake:

X

X



If it is not possible to release the electric parking brake:

X

Release the electric parking brake automatically (

Y page 160).


X


The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. If you manually apply or release the electric parking brake, the red F (USA only) or !

(Canada only) indicator lamp flashes.

The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. It is not possible to apply the electric parking brake manually.

X

X



The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about ten seconds after the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then goes out or remains lit.

The electric parking brake is malfunctioning, e.g. because of overvoltage or undervoltage.

X

X

Remove the cause for the overvoltage or undervoltage, e.g. by charging the battery or restarting the engine.

Engage or release the electric parking brake.

X

X

If it remains impossible to apply or release the electric parking brake:


Engage or release the electric parking brake.


X


If the electric parking brake still cannot be applied:

X


Z

250



$ only) only)

(USA

J

(Canada

Check Brake Fluid

Level


The yellow ! warning lamp lights up and the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes.

It is not possible to apply the electric parking brake manually.

X


X


There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. In addition, the $ (USA only) or J (Canada only) warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.

G

WARNING

The braking effect may be impaired.


X

X

X

X

Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.


Y page 159).


Do not add brake fluid. This does not correct the malfunction.

#

Check Brake Pad Wear

G

Inoperative

Active Brake Assist

Functions Currently

Limited See Opera‐ tor's Manual

The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.

USA only: the $ red brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.

X


One or more main features of the mbrace system are malfunctioning.

X


Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function is temporarily inoperative.


R

R the radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation the system is outside the operating temperature range

R the on-board voltage is too low.

When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears.

Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function or PRE‑SAFE functional again.

®

PLUS is

If the display message does not disappear:

X

X

X

Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.


Y page 159).

Restart the engine.


251


Active Brake Assist

Functions Limited

See Operator's Man‐ ual

PRE-SAFE Inopera‐ tive See Operator's

Manual

Active Brake Assist

Functions Currently

Limited See Opera‐ tor's Manual

Active Brake Assist

Functions Limited



Active Brake Assist is unavailable due to a malfunction. Adaptive

Brake Assist may also have failed.

X


Important functions of PRE-SAFE safety systems, e.g. air bags, remain available.

X

® have failed. All other occupant


X

X

Active Brake Assist or PRE‑SAFE

®


PLUS is temporarily inoperative.

R

R

R

R function is impaired due to heavy rain or snow the radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation

Mercedes-AMG vehicles: ESP

® is deactivated the system is outside the operating temperature range

R the on-board voltage is too low.


Active Brake Assist or PRE‑SAFE ® PLUS is operative again.


X

X



Y page 159).

Restart the engine.

Mercedes-AMG vehicles: switch ESP

® on again (

Y page 67).

Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function or PRE‑SAFE not available due to a malfunction.

X


® PLUS is

Z

252



Radar Sensors Dirty


6

SRS Malfunction Ser‐ vice Required

6

Front Left Malfunc‐ tion Service

Required or Front

Right Malfunction

Service Required


The radar sensor system is malfunctioning.


R

R

R

Dirt on sensors

Heavy rain or snow

When driving on inter-urban roads without traffic or infrastructure, e.g. in desert-like areas

At least one driving system or driving safety system is malfunctioning or is temporarily unavailable:

R

R

R

R

PRE-SAFE

®

PLUS

Active Brake Assist

Active Lane Keeping Assist

Active Blind Spot Assist

R

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC

If the radar sensor system in front is dirty, Active Blind Spot Assist will not perform a course-correcting brake application.

A warning tone also sounds.

Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the driving and drive safety systems will be available again. The display message disappears.


X

X

X

X

X



Y page 159).


Clean all sensors (

Y page 328).

Restart the engine.

The display message disappears.

The restraint system is malfunctioning.

The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.

G

WARNING

The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.


X


For further information about the restraint system, see (

Y page 41).

The restraint system has malfunctioned at the front on the left or right.


G

WARNING



X



253


6

Rear Left Malfunc‐ tion Service

Required or Rear

Right Malfunction

Service Required

6

Rear Center Malfunc‐ tion Service

Required

6

Left Side Curtain

Airbag Malfunction

Service

Required or Right

Side Curtain Airbag

Malfunction Service

Required


The restraint system has malfunctioned at the rear on the left or right.


G

WARNING



X


The restraint system has malfunctioned at the rear center. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.

G

WARNING



X


The left-hand or right-hand window curtain air bag is malfunctioning.


G

WARNING

The left or right window curtain air bag may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.


X


Z

254



Front Passenger Air‐ bag Disabled See

Operator's Manual


The front-passenger front air bag is deactivated during the journey, even though:

R an adult or

R a person of the corresponding stature is on the front-passenger seat

If additional forces are applied to the seat, the system may interpret the occupant's weight as lower than it actually is.

G

WARNING

The front-passenger air bag does not deploy during an accident.


X


X

X

X

X

X


Y page 159).


Have the occupant get out of the vehicle.

Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and switch on the ignition.

Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps in the center console and the multifunction display and check the following:

Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:

X

X

R

R a self-diagnosis is carried out. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and

PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simultaneously for approximately six seconds the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must then light up and remain lit after the self-diagnosis. If the indicator lamp is on,

OCS (Occupant Classification System) has disabled the frontpassenger front air bag (

Y page 49) the Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's

R

Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Opera‐ tor's Manual display messages must not be shown in the multifunction display

Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary system checks have been completed.

Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the multifunction display.

If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be occupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF or ON indicator lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the occupant.

If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating correctly.

X


For further information about the Occupant Classification System, see

(

Y page 49).


255


Front Passenger Air‐ bag Enabled See

Operator's Manual


The front-passenger front air bag is enabled during the journey, even though:

R

R a child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the system's weight threshold is located on the front-passenger seat or the front-passenger seat is unoccupied

The system may detect objects or forces applying additional weight on the seat.

G

WARNING

The front-passenger front air bag may deploy unintentionally.


X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X



Y page 159).


Open the front-passenger door.

Remove the child and the child restraint system from the frontpassenger seat.

Make sure that there are no objects on the seat adding to the weight.

The system may otherwise detect the additional weight and interpret the seat occupant's weight as greater than it actually is.

Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and switch on the ignition.

Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps in the center console and the multifunction display and check the following:

Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:

X

X

R

R

R a self-diagnosis is carried out. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and

PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simultaneously for approximately six seconds the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must then light up and remain lit after the self-diagnosis. If the indicator lamp is on,

OCS has disabled the front-passenger front air bag (

Y page 49) the Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's

Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Opera‐ tor's Manual display messages must not be shown in the multifunction display

Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary system checks have been completed.

Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the multifunction display.

If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be occupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF or ON indicator lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the occupant.

If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating correctly.

Z

256




X


For further information about the Occupant Classification System, see

(

Y page 49).

Lights

i

Vehicles with LED bulbs in the light clusters:

The display message for the corresponding lamp only appears when all of the LEDs in the lamp have failed.


b

Check Left Low

Beam (Example)


The bulb in question is malfunctioning.

X


or

X

Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself

(

Y page 117).

b

Active Headlamps

Inoperative b

Malfunction See

Operator's Manual

The active light function is faulty.

X


The exterior lighting is malfunctioning.

X


Vehicles with trailer tow hitch: a fuse may have blown.

X

Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying

X

X

X attention to road and traffic conditions.


Y page 159).

Check the fuses (

Y page 343).

If necessary, replace the blown fuse. Observe the warning notes.


X


The exterior lighting is malfunctioning.

X


b

Malfunction See

Operator's Manual b

Auto Lamp Function

Inoperative b

Switch Off Lights

The light sensor is defective.

X


You leave the vehicle and the lights are switched on. A warning tone also sounds.

X

Turn the light switch to the Ã position.


257


b

Switch On Headlamps

Adaptive Highbeam

Assist Currently

Unavailable See

Operator's Manual

Adaptive Highbeam

Assist Inoperative


You are driving with low-beam headlamps switched off.

X

Turn the light switch to the L or Ã position.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative.


R

R

X the windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty visibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog

Clean the windshield.

If the system detects that the camera is fully operational again, the

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Now Available message is displayed.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist is operational again.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist is faulty.

X


Engine


+

Check Coolant Level


?


The coolant level is too low.

!

Avoid making long journeys with too little coolant in the engine cooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged.

X

Add coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so

(

Y page 322).

If you have to add coolant frequently:

X

Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the engine cooling system checked.

The fan motor is malfunctioning.

X

At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to the nearest

X qualified specialist workshop.

Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain and stop-and-go traffic.

Z

258



?

Coolant Too Hot

Stop Vehicle Turn

Engine Off

#



The coolant is too hot.


G

WARNING

Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire.

Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns which can occur just by opening the hood.


X

X

X

X

X

X

Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.


Y page 159).

Wait until the engine has cooled down.

Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.

Do not start the engine again until the display message goes out and the coolant temperature is below 248 ‡ (120 †). Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.

Pay attention to the coolant temperature gauge.

If the temperature increases again:

X


Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolant level, the coolant temperature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †).

The battery is not being charged.



R

R

R a defective alternator a torn poly-V-belt a malfunction in the electronics

!

Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat.

X

X

X



Y page 159).



259


#

Stop Vehicle See

Operator's Manual

4

Check Engine Oil At

Next Refueling

4

Check Engine Oil

Level (Add 1 quart)

4

Engine Oil Level

Low Stop Vehicle

Turn Engine Off

8

Fuel Level Low


The battery is no longer being charged and the battery charge level is too low.


X

Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, pay-

X

X

X ing attention to road and traffic conditions.


Y page 159).

Observe the instructions in the # See Operator's Manual display message.


The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.


!

Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine will otherwise be damaged.

X

X

Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest (

Y page 321).

If necessary, add engine oil (

Y page 321).

If the engine oil needs topping up more often:

X

Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the engine checked.

Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedesbenz.com.

Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the engine oil level is too low.

!

Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine will otherwise be damaged.

X

X

Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest (

Y page 321).


Y page 321).

If the engine oil needs topping up more often:

X

Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the engine checked.

Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedesbenz.com.

Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the engine oil level is too low.

There is a risk of engine damage.

X

X

X

X



Y page 159).

Check the engine oil level (

Y page 321).


Y page 321).

The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.

X

Refuel at the nearest gas station.

Z

260



C

8

Gas Cap Loose

8

Ultra Low-sulfur

Diesel Fuel Only

¸

Replace Air Filter


There is only a very small amount of fuel in the fuel tank.

X

Refuel at the nearest gas station without fail.

The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking.

X

Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.

If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed:

X

Close the fuel filler cap.

If the fuel filler cap is correctly closed:

X


Vehicles with a diesel engine: the fuel level has fallen below the reserve range.

X

X


Only use commercially available vehicular ULTRA-LOW SULFUR

HIGHWAY DIESEL FUEL (ULSD, 15 ppm sulfur MAXIMUM).

Vehicles with a diesel engine: the engine air filter is dirty and must be replaced.

X


!

Check Fuel Filter

Vehicles with a diesel engine: there is water in the fuel filter. The water must be drained off.

X


Ø

Check Additive See

Operator's Manual

Ø

Remaining Starts: 16

The DEF tank is almost empty.

X

Have the DEF tank filled immediately at a qualified specialist workshop (

Y page 156).

The DEF level has fallen to a minimum. You can start the engine a further 16 times.

X

Have the DEF tank filled immediately at a qualified specialist workshop (

Y page 156).

i

You can start the engine a further 16 times. If DEF is not added, it will then not be possible to restart the engine. Refill the DEF tank with approximately 1 gal (3.8 l) DEF (

Y page 156).


261

Driving systems


À

Attention Assist:

Take a Break!


Based on certain criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue or a lack of concentration on the part of the driver. A warning tone also sounds.

X

If necessary, take a break.

During long journeys, take regular breaks in good time so you get enough rest.

ATTENTION ASSIST is inoperative.

X


À

Attention Assist

Inoperative

Á

Drive More Slowly

Á

Compressor Is Cool‐ ing

Á

Malfunction

You cannot change the vehicle level.


R

R you are driving too fast for the selected vehicle level you are driving too fast with a trailer or the trailer-coupling socket is being used, e.g. for a bicycle rack

X

X

Drive more slowly and then select the desired vehicle level again.

R


Y page 182)

R

Vehicles with the AIRMATIC package (

Y page 188)

Observe the notes on towing a trailer (

Y page 222).

You have selected a higher vehicle level. The compressor first needs to cool down because of frequent level changes.

X

X

Drive in a manner appropriate for the current vehicle level.

Make sure that there is sufficient ground clearance.

X

Allow the compressor to cool down.

When the compressor has cooled down, the display message disappears. The vehicle then continues rising to the selected level.

AIRMATIC is malfunctioning.

X

X

X

Drive as appropriate for the current vehicle level, but do not exceed

50 mph (80 km/h).

Make sure that there is sufficient ground clearance.


Z

262



Á

Max. Speed 12 mph

Á

Raising Max. Speed

12 mph g

Lowering Max. Speed

12 mph

ACTIVE CURVE SYSTEM

Malfunction

ACTIVE CURVE SYSTEM

Malfunction See

Operator's Manual


You are exceeding the speed permissible for the selected off-road level.

In addition, the vehicle level display appears above the display message, and a warning tone sounds.

G

WARNING

The vehicle could tip and rollover.


X

X

X


Only make slight steering movements and avoid fast steering movements.

Do not exceed 12 mph (20 km/h) until the vehicle has reached offroad level 2.

The vehicle is being adjusted to off-road level 3.

In addition, the vehicle level display appears above the display message.

The display message refers to the maximum speed permissible

(depending on the model type) for off-road level 3.

X

Do not drive at speeds above 12 mph (20 km/h).

The vehicle is being lowered from off-road level 3 to off-road level 2.

In addition, the vehicle level display appears above the display message.

The display message refers to the maximum speed permissible

(depending on the model type) for off-road level 3.

X

Do not exceed 12 mph (20 km/h) until the vehicle has reached offroad level 2.

The ACTIVE CURVE SYSTEM is malfunctioning. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be affected.

X

X



The ACTIVE CURVE SYSTEM is malfunctioning. The vehicle's handling characteristics are severely impaired. A warning tone also sounds.

G

WARNING


X

Drive on carefully.

X

X

X

X


Avoid sudden acceleration around tight corners and fast steering movements.




263


8

Different. Lock

Sys. Malfunction

8

Different. Locking

Sys. Cooling Down

Please Wait

LOW RANGE Stop

Apply Parking Brake

LOW RANGE Malfunc‐ tion To Park, Apply

Brake

LOW RANGE Max.

Speed 25 mph

LOW RANGE Max.

Speed 40 mph

LOW RANGE Shift To

Position N Briefly

LOW RANGE Shifting

Canceled Please

Reactivate

Ã

Inoperative


The differential lock is malfunctioning.

X

X



The differential lock is too hot and has been disengaged.

X

X

Drive on carefully.

Allow the differential lock to cool down.

The differential lock re-engages as soon as it has cooled down.

A gearshift process has been canceled. LOW RANGE is in the neutral position. There is no connection between the engine and the drive wheels.

X

X

X


Apply the electric parking brake. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

Repeat the gearshift process.

LOW RANGE is malfunctioning.

X


X

X

When parking, secure the vehicle against rolling away (

Y page 159).


You have exceeded the maximum speed for the gearshift process.

X

Drive more slowly.

The gear change is made.

You have exceeded the maximum speed for the gearshift process.

X

Drive more slowly.

The gear change is made.

You have reduced the vehicle speed, but the automatic transmission is not in position N.

X

Briefly shift the automatic transmission to position N.

The gearshift process has been canceled.

X

Repeat the gearshift process.

DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation) is deactivated due to a malfunction.

X

Have DSR checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Z

264



Traffic Sign Assist


Manual

Traffic Sign Assist

Inoperative

ë

Off

Lane Keeping Assist


Manual or Active Lane

Keeping Assist Cur‐ rently Unavailable


Lane Keeping Assist

Inoperative or Active

Lane Keeping Assist

Inoperative


Traffic Sign Assist is temporarily inoperative.


R

R

X the windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty visibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog


If the system detects that the camera is fully operational, the display message disappears.

Traffic Sign Assist is operational again.

Traffic Sign Assist is malfunctioning.

X


The HOLD function is deactivated. the vehicle is skidding.


X

Reactivate the HOLD function later (

Y page 185).

Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative.


R

R

R

R the windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty visibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog there have been no lane markings for an extended period the lane markings are worn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snow


Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is operational again.


X

X

X



Y page 159).


Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is malfunctioning.

X



265


Blind Spot Assist


Manual or Active

Blind Spot Assist


Manual

Blind Spot Assist

Not Available When

Towing a Trailer

See Operator's Man‐ ual or Act. Blind

Spot Asst. Not

Available When Tow‐ ing a Trailer See

Operator's Manual

Blind Spot Assist inoperative or Active

Blind Spot Assist inoperative

Parking Pilot Can‐ celed


Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily inoperative.


R

R the radar sensor system is outside the operating temperature range the radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation

The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mirrors.


Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is operational again.


X

X

X



Y page 159).

Restart the engine.

Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is deactivated while towing a trailer.

You have established the electrical connection between the trailer and your vehicle.

X

Press a on the steering wheel to confirm the display message.

Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is malfunctioning.

The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mirrors.

X


Parking Pilot Inop‐ erative

The driver's door is open.

X

Repeat the parking gap measurement and parking process with the driver's door closed.

You have inadvertently touched the multifunction steering wheel while steering intervention was active.

X

While steering intervention is active, make sure that the multifunction steering wheel is not touched unintentionally.

The vehicle has started to skid and ESP

X

® has intervened.

Use Parking Pilot again later (

Y page 193).

PARKTRONIC Parking Assist is malfunctioning or faulty.

X

Follow the instructions and helpful hints in the "Problems with

PARKTRONIC Parking Assist" section (

Y page 193).


X


Z

266



Parking Pilot Fin‐ ished

The vehicle is parked. A warning tone also sounds.

The display message disappears automatically.

Distance Pilot off

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is deactivated.

If a warning tone also sounds, Distance Pilot has deactivated automatically (

Y page 174).

Distance Pilot available again

Distance Pilot Cur‐ rently Unavailable


Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is operational again after having been temporarily unavailable. You can now reactivate Distance Pilot

DISTRONIC (

Y page 174).

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is temporarily inoperative.

Steering Pilot is also temporarily inoperative.


R

R the radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation the system is outside the operating temperature range

R the on-board voltage is too low



Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is operational again.


X

X

X



Y page 159).

Restart the engine.

Distance Pilot inop‐ erative

Distance Pilot Sus‐ pended


Parking Pilot is unavailable or malfunctioning.

X

Switch off the ignition and restart the engine.

If the Parking Pilot continues to be unavailable (the j symbol does not appear in the multifunction display):

X


Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is malfunctioning.

The following may have also failed:

R

R

Active Brake Assist

Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function


X


You have depressed the accelerator pedal. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is no longer controlling the speed of the vehicle.

X



267


Distance Pilot

- - - mph

Steering Pilot Cur‐ rently Unavailable



A condition for activating Distance Pilot DISTRONIC has not been met.

X

Check the activation conditions for Distance Pilot DISTRONIC

(

Y page 174).

Steering Pilot is temporarily inoperative.


R

R

R

R the windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty visibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog there have been no lane markings for an extended period the lane markings are worn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snow


Steering Pilot is operational again.


X

X

X



Y page 159).


Steering Pilot inop‐ erative

Cruise control inop‐ erative

Steering Pilot is malfunctioning.

However, the Distance Pilot DISTRONIC functions are still available.


X


Cruise control is malfunctioning.

X


Cruise control

--- mph

R

R

X

A condition for activating cruise control has not been met.

You have tried to store a speed below 20 mph (30 km/h), for example.

ESP

® is deactivated. The yellow ESP

®

OFF warning lamp is lit.

If conditions permit, drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) and store the speed.

or

X or

Check the activation conditions for cruise control (

Y page 172).

X

Reactivate ESP ® (

Y page 67).

Cruise Control Off Cruise control has been deactivated.

If a warning tone also sounds, cruise control has deactivated automatically (

Y page 172).

Z

268


Tires


Check Tire Pressure

Soon

Check Tire Pressure

Then Restart Run

Flat Indicator

Run Flat Indicator

Inoperative

Please Correct Tire

Pressure


The tire pressure loss warning system has detected a significant loss in pressure.


Possible causes:

R

R you have changed the positions of the wheels and tires or installed new wheels and tires.

the tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly

G

WARNING

Tire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards:

R

R

R they may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase.

they may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire traction.

the driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired.


X

X

X

X

X

Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.


Y page 159).

Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire (

Y page 331).

Check the tire pressures and, if necessary, correct the tire pressure.

Restart the tire pressure loss warning system when the tire pressure is correct (

Y page 353).

The tire pressure loss warning system generated a display message and has not been restarted since.

X

X

Set the correct tire pressure in all four tires.

Restart the tire pressure loss warning system (

Y page 353).

The tire pressure loss warning system is faulty.

X


The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the tire pressure difference between the wheels is too great.

X

X

X

Check the tire pressures at the next opportunity (

Y page 353).

If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

Restart the tire pressure monitor (

Y page 355).


269


Check Tires

Warning Tire Mal‐ function

Tire Press. Monitor

Currently Unavaila‐ ble

Tire Press. Sen‐ sor(s) Missing


The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly. The wheel position is displayed in the multifunction display.


G

WARNING


R

R

R they may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase.




X

X

X

X

X



Y page 159).


Y page 331).

Check the tire pressure (

Y page 353).


The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. The wheel position is shown in the multifunction display.

G

WARNING

Driving with a flat tire poses a risk of the following hazards:

R

R

R a flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.

you could lose control of the vehicle.

continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.


X

X

X



Y page 159).


Y page 331).

Because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves, no signals from the tire pressure sensors are detected. The tire pressure monitor is temporarily malfunctioning.

X

Drive on.

The tire pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as the problem has been resolved.

There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or several wheels. The pressure of the affected tire is not displayed in the multifunction display.

X

Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.

Z

270



Tire Pressure Moni‐ tor Inoperative No

Wheel Sensors

Tire Press. Monitor

Inoperative


The wheels mounted do not have a suitable tire pressure sensor. The tire pressure monitor is deactivated.

X

Mount wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors.

The tire pressure monitor is activated automatically after driving for a few minutes.

The tire pressure monitor is faulty.

X


Vehicle


Shift to 'P' or 'N' to Start Engine


You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission in position R or D.

X

Shift the transmission to position P or N.

Apply Brake to

Shift from 'P'

To Deselect P or N,

Depress Brake and

Start Engine

Transmission Not in

P Risk of Vehicle

Rolling Away

Only Shift to 'P' when Vehicle is Sta‐ tionary

You have attempted to shift the transmission to position D, R or N without depressing the brake pedal.

X


With the engine switched off, you have attempted to shift the transmission out of position P or N into another transmission position.

X

X


Start the engine.

The driver's door is open/not completely closed and the transmission is in position R, N or D.


G

WARNING

The vehicle may roll away.


X

X

X



Y page 159).

Close the driver's door completely.

The vehicle is moving.

X

X

Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.



271


Service Required Do

Not Shift Gears

Visit Dealer

Reversing Not Possi‐ ble Service Required

Transmission Mal‐ function Stop

Auxiliary Battery

Malfunction

A


You cannot change the transmission position due to a malfunction.


If transmission position D is selected:

X

Drive to a qualified specialist workshop without shifting the transmission from position D.

X

X

If transmission position R, N or P is selected:


Y page 159).

Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.

You cannot shift into the transmission position R due to a malfunction.

The transmission positions P, N or D continue to be available.


X


A malfunction has occurred in the mechanical transmission components.

A warning tone also sounds. The gearbox automatically shifts to position N.

X

X

X

X




Y page 159).

Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.

The auxiliary battery for the automatic transmission is no longer being charged.

X

X

X


Until then, set the automatic transmission to position P before you switch off the engine.

Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake.

The tailgate is open.

G

WARNING

When the engine is running, exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the tailgate is open.


X

Close the tailgate.

Z

272



?

C

Phone No Service


The hood is open.

G

WARNING

The open hood may block your view when the vehicle is in motion.


X

X

X



Y page 159).

Close the hood.

At least one door is open.


X

Close all the doors.

The second row of seats is not engaged on the left-hand or right-hand side.

X

Fold back the second row of seats until it engages.

_

2nd Seat Row, Left

Not Locked or 2nd

Seat Row, Right Not

Locked

_

3rd Seat Row, Left

Not Locked or 3rd

Seat Row, Right Not

Locked

Ð

Power Steering Mal‐ function See Opera‐ tor's Manual

The third row of seats is not engaged on the left-hand or right-hand side.

X

Fold back the third row of seats until it engages.

The power steering is malfunctioning.


G

WARNING

You will need to use more force to steer.


X

Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required.

X

X

If you are able to steer safely:

Drive on carefully.


If you are unable to steer safely:

X

X

Do not drive on.


Your vehicle is outside the network provider's transmitter/receiver range.

X

Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbol appears in the multifunction display.


273


¥

Check Washer Fluid

Wiper Malfunction‐ ing

Hazard Warning

Flashers Malfunc‐ tioning


The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped below the minimum.

X

Add washer fluid (

Y page 322).

The windshield wipers are malfunctioning.

X


The hazard warning lamps are faulty.

X


SmartKey


Â

Key Does Not Belong to Vehicle

Â

Take Your Key from

Ignition

Â

Obtain a New Key

Â

Replace Key Battery

Â

Don't Forget Your

Key

Â

Key Not Detected

(white display message)


You have put the wrong SmartKey in the ignition lock.

X

Use the correct SmartKey.

The SmartKey is in the ignition lock.


X

Remove the SmartKey.

The SmartKey needs to be replaced.

X


The SmartKey battery is discharged.

X

Change the battery (

Y page 77).

The SmartKey is not in the ignition lock. You have opened the driver's door with the engine switched off.


This display message is displayed for a maximum of 60 seconds and is simply a reminder.

X

Take the SmartKey with you when you leave the vehicle.

The SmartKey is currently undetected.

X

Change the location of the SmartKey in the vehicle.

If the SmartKey still cannot be detected:

X

Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

Z

274

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster


Â

Key Not Detected

(red display message)

Â

Remove 'Start' But‐ ton and Insert Key


The SmartKey is not in the vehicle.


If the engine is switched off, you can no longer lock the vehicle centrally or start the engine.

X

X

X



Y page 159).

Locate the SmartKey.

Because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves, the

SmartKey is not detected whilst the engine is running.


X

X

X



Y page 159).

Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and drive in SmartKey mode.

R

The SmartKey detection function has a temporary malfunction or is faulty.

R

The SmartKey is continually undetected.


X

X

Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to the desired position.



General notes

Some systems carry out a self-diagnosis when the ignition is switched on. Therefore, some indicator and warning lamps may light up or flash temporarily. This behavior is non-critical. These indicator and warning lamps only indicate a malfunction if they light up or flash after starting the engine or whilst driving.


275

Safety

Seat belts

Warning/ indicator lamp

ü

ü

ü

ü

N Signal type


N After starting the engine, the red seat belt warning lamp lights up for 6 seconds.

The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their seat belts.

X

Fasten your seat belt (

Y page 44).

N After starting the engine, the red seat belt warning lamp lights up. In addition, a warning tone sounds for up to 6 seconds.

The driver's seat belt is not fastened.

X


Y page 44).

The warning tone ceases.

N The red seat belt warning lamp lights up after the engine starts, as soon as the driver's or the front-passenger door is closed.

The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt.

X


Y page 44).

The warning lamp goes out.

There are objects on the front-passenger seat.

X

Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secure place.

The warning lamp goes out.

N The red seat belt warning lamp flashes and an intermittent audible warning sounds.

The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. The vehicle is being driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven faster than 15 mph

(25 km/h).

X


Y page 44).

The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases.

There are objects on the front-passenger seat. The vehicle is being driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h).

X

Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secure place.

The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases.

Z

276


Safety systems


N Signal type


J$ N $ (USA only), J (Canada only): the red brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.


G

WARNING

The brake boosting effect is malfunctioning and the braking characteristics may be affected.


X

X

X

X



Y page 159).


Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.

J$ N $ (USA only), J (Canada only): the red brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.


G

WARNING

There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.


X

X

X

X

X



Y page 159).

Do not add brake fluid. Adding more will not correct the malfunction.



$ N USA only: the red brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.

The multifunction display also shows a display message with the # symbol.

The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.

X



277


!

N Signal type


N The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) is deactivated due to a malfunction.


In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps may light up in the instrument cluster.


G

WARNING


The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.

is not operational, ESP ® If ESP ® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.


X

X

X


Drive on carefully.


If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that other systems, such as the navigation system or the automatic transmission, will not be available.

Z

278



!

N Signal type



ABS is temporarily unavailable.





R

R


The on-board voltage may be insufficient.

G

WARNING

The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example.


If ESP ®

X is not operational, ESP ® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.



The functions mentioned above are available again when the warning lamp goes out.

If the warning lamp is still on:

X

X

X


Drive on carefully.



279


!

$J

÷å

!

N Signal type



EBD is not available due to a malfunction.




G

WARNING



If ESP




X

X

X


Drive on carefully.


N $ (USA only), J (Canada only): the red brake warning lamp and the yellow

ESP

® , ESP ®

ABS and ESP

OFF and ABS warning lamps are lit while the engine is running.

® are malfunctioning.



G

WARNING



If ESP




X

X

X


Drive on carefully.


Z

280



÷

å

N Signal type


N The yellow ESP ®

ESP

® warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion.

or traction control has intervened because there is a risk of skidding or at least one wheel has started to spin.

Cruise control or Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is deactivated.

X

X

X

X

When pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary.

Ease off the accelerator pedal while the vehicle is in motion.

Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.

Do not deactivate ESP ® .

In rare cases (

Y page 67), it may be best to deactivate ESP

®

Observe the important safety notes on ESP

®

(

Y page 67).

.

N The yellow ESP

®

ESP ® is deactivated.

OFF warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.

G

WARNING

If ESP ® is switched off, ESP ® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.

Further driving systems or driving safety systems are thus restricted, e.g. Active

Blind Spot Assist. The system does not perform course-correcting brake applications.


X

X

Reactivate ESP ® .

In rare cases (

Y page 67), it may be best to deactivate ESP

®

.

Observe the important safety notes on ESP

®

(

Y page 67).

Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.

If ESP

X

® cannot be activated:

Drive on carefully.

X

Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have ESP

® checked.


281


N Signal type


÷å

N The yellow ESP ® and ESP ® OFF warning lamps are lit while the engine is running.

ESP

ESP

®

®

, BAS, Active Brake Assist, Active Brake Assist with Cross-Traffic Assist, trailer stabilization, PRE‑SAFE

®

, PRE‑SAFE

®

PLUS, the HOLD function, hill start assist, Crosswind Assist, STEER CONTROL, Active Lane Keeping Assist and

Active Blind Spot Assist are not available due to a malfunction.


G

WARNING

The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above.




X

X

X


Drive on carefully.


÷å

N The yellow ESP

®

ESP

®

ESP ® and ESP

®

OFF warning lamps are lit while the engine is running.

, BAS, Active Brake Assist, Active Brake Assist with Cross-Traffic Assist, trailer stabilization, PRE‑SAFE ® , PRE‑SAFE ® PLUS, the HOLD function, hill start assist, Crosswind Assist, STEER CONTROL, Active Lane Keeping Assist and

Active Blind Spot Assist are not available due to a malfunction.



G

WARNING

The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above.




X


The functions mentioned above are available again when the warning lamp goes out.

If the warning lamp is still on:

X

X

X


Drive on carefully.


Z

282



N Signal type


F!

N F (USA only), ! (Canada only): the red indicator lamp for the electric parking brake flashes or is lit and/or the yellow warning lamp for the electric parking brake is lit.

X


6 N The red restraint system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.

The restraint system is malfunctioning.

G

WARNING



X


X

X

Drive on carefully.

Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the restraint system checked.

For further information about the restraint system, see (

Y page 41).


283

Engine


;

8

8

?

N Signal type


N The yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up while the engine is running.

There may be a malfunction, for example:

R

R

R

R in the engine management in the fuel injection system in the exhaust system in the ignition system (for vehicles with gasoline engines)

R in the fuel system

The emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may be in emergency mode.

X


Vehicles with a diesel engine: the fuel tank has been run dry (

Y page 156).

X

Start the engine three to four times after refueling.

If the yellow Check Engine warning lamp goes out, emergency running mode is canceled. The vehicle need not be checked.

In some states, you must immediately visit a qualified specialist workshop as soon as the yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up. This is due to the legal requirements in effect in these states. If in doubt, check whether such legal regulations apply in the state in which you are currently driving.

N The yellow reserve fuel warning lamp lights up while the engine is running.

The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.

X


N The yellow reserve fuel warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion.

In addition, the ; Check Engine warning lamp may light up.

The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking.

X

X

X

Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.

If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: close the fuel filler cap.

If the fuel filler cap is closed: visit a qualified specialist workshop.

N The red coolant warning lamp lights up while the engine is running and the coolant temperature gauge is at the start of the scale.

The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gauge is malfunctioning.

The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. There is a risk of engine damage if the coolant temperature is too high.

X

X

X

Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.


Y page 159).


Z

284



?

?

N Signal type


N The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running.

The coolant level is too low.

If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or the electric engine radiator fan may be defective.

The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently.

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X




Y page 159).

Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has cooled down.

Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning notes

(

Y page 322).

If you have to add coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system checked.


Do not start the engine again until the coolant temperature is below 248 ‡

(120 †). Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.

Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.


N The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running.

The coolant temperature has exceeded 248 ‡ (120 †). The airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or the coolant level may be too low.

G

WARNING

The engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged.

Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire.

Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns which can occur just by opening the hood.


X

X

X

X

X

X

X




Y page 159).

Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has cooled down.

Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning notes

(

Y page 322).

If you have to add coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system checked.



285


N Signal type


X

X

At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.


Driving systems


·

N Signal type


N The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion. A warning tone also sounds.

You are approaching a vehicle, a pedestrian or a stationary obstacle in your line of travel at too high a speed.

X

X

Be prepared to brake immediately.

Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to brake or take evasive action.

Further information on Distance Pilot DISTRONIC (

Y page 174).

Further information on the distance warning function of Active Brake Assist

(

Y page 64).

Z

286


Tires


h h

N Signal type


N The yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) is lit.

The tire pressure monitor has detected a loss of pressure in at least one of the tires.

G

WARNING


R

R

R

X

X

X

X

X

X they may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase.






Y page 159).


Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire

(

Y page 331).

Check the tire pressure (

Y page 353).


N The yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) flashes for approximately one minute and then remains lit.

The tire pressure monitor is faulty.

G

WARNING

The system is possibly unable to recognize or register low tire pressure.


X

X



Function restrictions

287

General notes

The multimedia system section in this Operator's Manual describes the basic principles for operation. More information can be found in the

Digital Operator's Manual.


G

WARNING



You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system.

The multimedia system calculates the route to the destination without taking the following into account, for example:

R

R

R

R traffic lights stop and yield signs parking or stopping restrictions road narrowing

R other road and traffic rules and regulations

The multimedia system may give incorrect navigation recommendations if the actual street/ traffic situation does not correspond with the digital map's data.

For example:

R

R a diverted route the road layout or the direction of a one-way street has been changed

For this reason, you must always observe road and traffic rules and regulations during your journey. Road and traffic rules and regulations always have priority over multimedia system driving recommendations.

Navigation announcements are intended to direct you while driving without diverting your attention from the road and driving.

Please always use this feature instead of consulting the map display for directions. Looking at the icons or map display can distract you from traffic conditions and driving, and increase the risk of an accident.

This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for uncontrolled equipment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF)

Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65.

This equipment has very low levels of RF energy that is deemed to comply without maximum permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). However, it is recommended to install it at a distance of at least 8 inches (approx. 20 cm) between the radiation source and a person's body (not including limbs such as hands, wrists, feet and legs).

G

WARNING

Modifications to electronic components, their software as well as wiring can impair their function and/or the function of other networked components. In particular, systems relevant to safety could also be affected. As a result, these may no longer function as intended and/or jeopardize the operating safety of the vehicle. There is an increased risk of an accident and injury.

Never tamper with the wiring as well as electronic components or their software. You should have all work to electrical and electronic equipment carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

If you make any changes to the vehicle electronics, the general operating permit is rendered invalid.

Function restrictions

For safety reasons, some functions are restricted or unavailable while the vehicle is in motion.

You will notice this, for example, because either you will not be able to select certain menu items or a message will appear to this effect.

Z

288



Overview

General notes

!

Do not use the space in front of the display for storage. Objects placed here could damage the display or impair its function. Avoid any direct contact with the display surface.

Pressure on the display surface may result in impairments to the display, which could be irreversible.

Wearing polarized sunglasses may impair your ability to read the display.

The display has an automatic temperature-controlled switch-off feature. The brightness is automatically reduced if the temperature is too high. The display may temporarily switch off completely.

Cleaning instructions

!

Do not touch the display. The display has a very sensitive high-gloss surface; there is a risk of scratching. If you have to clean the screen, however, use a mild cleaning agent and a soft, lint-free cloth.

The display must be switched off and have cooled down before you start cleaning. Do not apply pressure to the display surface when cleaning it, as this could cause irreversible damage to the display.

Switching the multimedia system on/off

X

Press the q control knob.

Adjusting the volume

X

Turn the q control knob.

The volume is adjusted:

R

R

R for the currently selected media source during traffic or navigation announcements in hands-free mode during a phone call

Switching the sound on or off

X

Press the 8 button on the control panel.

If the audio output is switched off, the status line will show the 8 symbol. If you switch the media source or set the volume, the sound is automatically switched on.

i

Navigation announcements will be heard even if the sound is muted.

Functions

The multimedia system has the following functions:

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

Radio mode

Media mode with media search

Sound systems

Navigation system

COMAND: navigation via the hard drive

Audio 20: navigation via SD card

Communication functions

SIRIUS Weather (COMAND)

Vehicle functions with system settings

Favorites functions

Controller

The controller in the center console lets you:

R

R

R

R select menu items on the display enter characters select a destination on the map save entries

The controller can be:

R

R

R

R

R turned 3 slid left or right 1 slid forwards or back 4 slid diagonally 2 pressed briefly or pressed and held 7

Back button

You can use the % button to exit a menu or to call up the basic display of the current operating mode.

X

X

To exit the menu: briefly press the % button.

The multimedia system changes to the next higher menu level in the current operating mode.

To call up the basic display: press the % button for longer than two seconds.

The multimedia system changes to the basic display of the current operating mode.


289

Favorites

Calling up and exiting favorites

X

X

X

To call up: press the g button on the controller.

Select a favorite, e.g.

Vehicle .

The favorites are displayed.

To exit: press the g button again.

Adding favorites

Adding a predefined favorite

:

;

=

?

X

X

X

X

X

X

Adds a new favorite

Renames a selected favorite

Moves a selected favorite

Deletes a selected favorite

Press the g button.

Slide 6 the controller.

The menu bar is shown.

Select Reassign .

The categories are displayed.

Select a category.

The favorites are displayed.

Select a favorite.

Add a favorite at the desired position.

If a favorite has already been added at this position, it will be overwritten.

Adding your own favorite

X

X

X

Select Vehicle Q Climate Control .

Press and hold the g button until the favorites are displayed.

Add a favorite at the desired position.

If a favorite has already been added at this position, it will be overwritten.

Navigation mode


G

WARNING



You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the navigation system.

General notes

Among other things, correct functioning of the navigation system depends on GPS reception. In certain situations, GPS reception may be impaired, there may be interference or there may be no reception at all, e.g. in tunnels or parking garages.

Audio 20 is equipped with Garmin

®

MAP PILOT

(see the manufacturer's operating instructions).

The Garmin

®

MAP PILOT operating instructions are stored on the SD card as a PDF file. The SD card box contains a quick guide.

The following descriptions apply to navigation with COMAND. Further information can be found in the Digital Operator's Manual.

Selecting a route type and route options

Multimedia system:

X

X

X

Select Navi Q Navigation .

The map shows the vehicle's current position.


Select Options Q Route Settings .

Notes for route types:

R

R

Eco Route

Dynamic Traffic Route

Traffic reports on the route for the route guidance are taken into account (not available in all countries).

Z

290


R

R

X

Dynamic TRF. Route After Request

You can decide whether or not current traffic reports should be included in the route calculation (not available in all countries).

Calculate Alternative Routes

Different routes are being calculated. In order to do so, instead of Start , select the menu item Continue .

To avoid/use route options: select Avoid

Options .

X

Select a route option.

Notes for route options:

R

R

Use Toll Roads

The route calculation includes roads which require you to pay a usage fee (toll).

Number of Occupants in the Vehicle:

(only available in the USA)

Prerequisite: your vehicle meets the access conditions for carpool lanes.

Carpool lanes will be included if the carpool lanes option is activated.

Entering an address

Multimedia system:

X

X

X

Select Navi Q Navigation .

The map shows the vehicle's current position.


Select Destination Q Address Entry .

Enter an address, e.g. as follows:

R

R

R

R

X

X

X

X city or ZIP code, street, house number state/province, city or ZIP code city or ZIP code, center street, city or ZIP code, intersection

Select City .

The city in which the vehicle is currently located (current vehicle position) is at the top.

Below this, you will see locations for which route guidance has already been carried out.

Enter the city.

The G symbol: the location is contained on the digital map multiple times.

To switch to the list: slide the 5 controller.

Select the location.

If available, the ZIP code is shown. If there are different ZIP codes available for the location,

X the corresponding digits are displayed with an

X .

Enter the street and house number.

The address is in the menu.

Further options for destination entry:

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R search for a keyword

The keyword search finds destinations using fragments of words.

select the last destination select a contact select a POI

You can search for a POI by location, name or telephone number.

select destination on the map enter intermediate destination

You can map the route to the destination yourself with up to four intermediate destinations.

select destinations from Mercedes-Benz

Apps select geo-coordinates

Calculating the route

Prerequisite: the address has been entered and is in the menu.

X

X

Select Start or Continue .

The route is calculated with the selected route type and the selected route options.

If route guidance has already been activated, a prompt will appear asking whether you wish to end the current route guidance.

Select Cancel Active Route Guidance or

Set as Intermediate Destination .

Cancel Active Route Guidance cancels the current route guidance and starts route calculation to the new destination.

Set as Intermediate Destination adds the new destination in addition to the existing destination and opens the intermediate destinations list.

Connecting a mobile phone

Prerequisites

For telephony via the Bluetooth require a Bluetooth

®

® interface, you

-capable mobile phone. The mobile phone must support Hands-Free Profile

1.0 or above.


291

Multimedia system:

X

X

Select Vehicle Q System Set‐ tings Q Activate Bluetooth .

Activate Bluetooth ® O.

Mobile phone:

X

Activate Bluetooth

® tooth ® and, if necessary, Bluevisibility for other devices (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).

The Bluetooth ® device names for all of one manufacturer's products might be identical. To make it possible to clearly identify your mobile phone, change the device name (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).

If the mobile phone supports the PBAP (Phone

Book Access Profile) and MAP (Message

Access Profile) Bluetooth connect:

® profiles, the following information will be transmitted after you

R

R

R

Phone book

Call lists

Text messages and e-mail i

Further information on suitable mobile phones can be found at: http://

www.mercedes-benz.com/connect

i

In the USA, you can get in touch with the

Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center on 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372).

In Canada, you can get in touch with the Customer Relations Center on 1-800-387-0100.

Searching for and authorizing (connecting) a mobile phone

Before using your mobile phone with the multimedia system for the first time, you will need to search for the phone and then authorize (connect) it. Depending on the mobile phone, authorization either takes place by means of Secure

Simple Pairing or by entering a passkey. The multimedia system automatically makes the procedure that is relevant for your mobile phone available. The mobile phone is always connected automatically after authorization. Further information on using a mobile phone with the multimedia system (see the Digital Operator's

Manual).

If the multimedia system does not detect your mobile phone, this may be due to particular security settings on your mobile phone (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).

Only one mobile phone can be connected to the multimedia system at any one time.

Searching for a mobile phone

Multimedia system:

X

Select Tel/ ®Q Connect

Device Q Search for Phones Q Start

Search .

The available mobile phones are displayed.

Symbols in the device list

Symbol

Ï

Explanation

Ñ

#

New mobile phone found, not yet authorized.

Mobile phone is authorized, but is not connected

Mobile phone is authorized and connected

Connecting a mobile phone

Authorization using Secure Simple Pairing:

X

X

X

X

Select mobile phone.

A code is displayed in the multimedia system and on the mobile phone.

If codes match: select Yes on the multimedia system.

Confirm code on the mobile phone. Depending on the mobile phone used, confirm the connection to the multimedia system and for the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth

® profiles. The prompt to confirm may take up to two minutes to be displayed (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).

If the codes are different: select No on the multimedia system.

The process is canceled.

Repeat authorization.

X

X

Authorization by entering a passkey (passcode):

X

X

X

Select the Bluetooth

® name of the mobile phone.

The input menu for the passkey is displayed.

Choose a one to sixteen-digit number combination as a passkey.

Enter the passkey on the multimedia system.

Press ¬ to confirm.

Enter and confirm the passkey on the mobile phone. Depending on the mobile phone used, confirm the connection to the multimedia sys-

Z

292


tem and for the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth ® profiles. The prompt to confirm may take up to two minutes to be displayed (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).

Switching between mobile phones

If you have authorized more than one mobile phone, you can switch between the individual phones.

Multimedia system:

X

X

Select Connect Device .

Select a mobile phone from the device list.

Media mode

General notes

If you wish to play external media sources, the default display must already be turned on. Further information on media mode (see the Digital

Operator's Manual).

The following external media sources can be used:

R

R

R

R

R

R

Apple

® devices (e.g. iPhone

®

)

USB devices (e.g. USB stick, MP3 player)

(

Y page 292)

CD

DVD (COMAND)

SD cards via devices connected by Bluetooth ® i

Information on single CD/DVD drive or DVD changer (see the Digital Operator's Manual).

Using the device list

Multimedia system:

X

X

Select Media Q Devices .

The available media sources will be shown.

The # dot indicates the current setting.

Select the media source.

Playable files are played.

Inserting/removing an SD card


G

WARNING

SD cards are small parts. They can be swallowed and cause choking. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.

Keep the SD card out of the reach of children.

If a SD card is swallowed, seek medical attention immediately.

!

If you are no longer using the SD card, you should remove it and store it outside the vehicle. High temperatures can damage the card.

Inserting an SD card

The SD card slot is on the control panel.

X

Insert the SD card into the SD card slot until the SD card engages. The side with the contacts must face downwards.

Removing an SD card

X

X

Press the SD card.

The SD card is ejected.

Remove the SD card.

Connecting USB devices

There are two USB ports in the stowage space under the armrest.

X

X

Connect the USB device to the USB port.

Select the media source (

Y page 292).

CD/DVD drive and AUX jacks (Rear Seat

Entertainment System)


293

:

;

=

?

A

Disc slot

AUX, right-hand (R) jack for audio signal

(red)

AUX, left-hand (L) jack for audio signal

(white)

AUX, video (V) jack (yellow)

Disc eject button

The AUX jacks shown are for the AUX drive.

Identical jacks can be found on the right-hand side of the rear-compartment screens (AUX display).

Z

294

Stowage areas

Stowage areas

Loading guidelines

G

WARNING

If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction.

Always store objects so that they cannot be flung around. Secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping before the journey.

G

WARNING




G

WARNING

The exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim can become very hot. If you come into contact with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn yourself. There is a risk of injury.

Always be particularly careful around the exhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allow these components to cool down before touching them.

The gross vehicle weight (GVW) is the vehicle weight including fuel, vehicle tool kit, spare wheel, installed accessories, vehicle occupants and luggage/cargo.

Do not exceed the load limit or permitted gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) for your vehicle.

The gross load limit and the GVWR are specified on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar of the driver's door (

Y page 356).

The load must also be distributed so that the weight on each axle never exceeds the gross axle weight rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axles. The specifications for GVWR and GAWR are on the vehicle identification plate on the Bpillar of the driver's door (

Y page 356).

Observe the notes on loading the vehicle

(

Y page 356).

The handling characteristics of a laden vehicle are dependent on the distribution of the load within the vehicle. For this reason, you should observe the following notes when transporting a load:

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

Never exceed the maximum permissible gross vehicle mass or the gross axle weight rating for the vehicle (including occupants).

The cargo compartment is the preferred place to carry objects.

Position heavy loads as far forwards as possible and as low down in the cargo compartment as possible.

The load must not protrude above the upper edge of the seat backrests.

Always place the load against the rear or front seat backrests. Make sure that the seat backrests are securely locked into place.

Always place the load behind unoccupied seats if possible.

Use the cargo tie-down rings and the parcel nets to transport loads and luggage.

Use cargo tie-down rings and fastening materials appropriate for the weight and size of the load.

Secure the load with sufficiently strong and wear-resistant tie-downs. Pad sharp edges for protection.

Stowage spaces


G

WARNING

If you transport objects in the vehicle interior and these are not adequately secured, they could slip or be flung around and thereby strike vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone brackets may not always be able to hold the objects placed in them in the event of an accident. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sharp braking or sudden changes of direction.

Stowage areas

295

R

Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be tossed about in these or similar situations.

R

Always make sure that objects do not protrude out of the stowage spaces, luggage nets or stowage nets.

R

Ensure that closable stowage spaces are shut before beginning your journey.

R

Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or large objects in the cargo compartment.


Y page 294).

Glove box

Partition : for stowing flat objects is located in the upper section of the glove box. It can be removed to increase the stowage space in the glove box.

X

X

To remove: pull out partition :

To install: insert partition : and push it back until it engages.

Stowage compartment under the armrest

X

X

To open: pull handle : and open glove box flap ;.

To close: fold glove box flap ; upwards until it engages.

i

The glove box can be cooled and ventilated

(

Y page 135).

Vehicles without touchpad

X

To open: pull handle : up.

The armrest folds out.

1

2

Glove box unlocked

Glove box locked

The glove box can be locked and unlocked using the mechanical key.

Z

296

Stowage areas

Vehicles with touchpad and COMAND

X

To open: press button : at the front.

Armrest ; folds out.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, a multimedia connector unit with 2 USB ports (Media

Interface), e.g. for use with an iPod ment.

® , iPhone ® or

MP3 player is installed in the stowage comparti

There is a removable stowage tray in the storage compartment, in which objects such as an iPod

® can be stored.

Eyeglasses compartment

X

X

To open: slide cover : forwards.

Stowage compartment ; appears.

To close: pull cover : back as far as it will go.

Stowage compartment in the rear center console

X

To open: briefly press the stowage compartment marking.

The stowage compartment opens.

i

Depending on the vehicle's equipment, there may be open stowage spaces above and below the stowage compartment.

X

X

To open: press marking :.

The eyeglasses compartment opens down.

To close: press marking : again and the eyeglasses compartment moves up and engages.

Make sure that the eyeglasses compartment is always closed while the vehicle is in motion.

Stowage compartment in the front center console

Stowage net

G

WARNING

Vehicles with the Occupant Classification

System (OCS):

If the gross weight of the objects in the stowage net on the back of the front-passenger seat is greater than 4.4 lb (2 kg), OCS cannot correctly assess the occupant's weight category. The front-passenger front air bag could deploy without cause, or may fail to deploy in the event of an accident. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.

Always observe the permissible gross weight of 4.4 lb (2 kg). Stow and secure heavy objects in the cargo compartment.

Stowage areas

297

: stowage net in front-passenger footwell

The through-loading facility is opened from the cargo compartment.

X

X

X

X

If necessary, fold the third row of seats forward (

Y page 99).

Fold down the rear seat armrest.

Pull the center head restraint on the rear bench seat into the uppermost position

(

Y page 96).

Slide release catch : to the left and swing flap ; to the left until it is lying on the rear side of the rear bench seat.

:

Stowage net on the back of the front seats

:

Stowage net in cargo compartment



(

Y page 294).

Through-loading facility in the rear

If objects or loads are not secured when being transported in the through-loading facility, they could slip or be thrown around and thereby hit vehicle occupants.



(

Y page 294).

X

Push cover = forward until it is lying on the rear seat armrest.

Cargo compartment enlargement


G

WARNING

If the rear bench seat/rear seat and seat backrest are not engaged they could fold forwards, e.g. when braking suddenly or in the event of an accident.

R

The vehicle occupant would thereby be pushed into the seat belt by the rear bench

Z

298

Stowage areas

R seat/rear seat or by the seat backrest. The seat belt can no longer offer the intended level of protection and could even cause injuries.

Objects or loads in the trunk/cargo compartment cannot be restrained by the seat backrest.


Before every trip, make sure that the seat backrests and the rear bench seat/rear seat are engaged.

Make sure that the seat backrest and the seat cushion are correctly engaged in position. To do so, pull firmly on the seat backrest.

!

Release and fold the seat cushion upwards before folding the rear bench seat forward.

Otherwise, the backrests may be damaged.

When the backrest is folded forwards, the front seats cannot be moved to their rearmost position. Otherwise, the front seats and the rear bench seat could be damaged.

!

The backrest is heavy. Therefore, take care when folding it down. Make sure that the head restraints are pushed all the way in so that the backrests and seat cushions are not damaged.


Y page 294).

The left-hand and right-hand backrests in the second row of seats can be folded forwards separately to increase the cargo compartment capacity.

On vehicles with a third row of seats, you must fold down the third row of seats beforehand

(

Y page 99) to obtain maximum cargo compartment enlargement.

Folding the rear bench seat forwards

If the driver's or front-passenger seat is set for a larger person, it may not be possible to fold the rear bench seat forward. In this case, move the front seats as far forward as possible.

X

X

X

Move the head restraints to the lowest position (

Y page 97).

Pull release loop : of seat cushion ;.

Fold seat cushion ; up.

X

X

Pull release handle = in the direction of the arrow.

The backrest is released.

Fold the backrest forward until it reaches the cargo compartment position.

Stowage areas

299

X

Guide seat belts ; under respective clips :.

Folding the rear bench seat back

R

R

Do not route tie-downs across sharp edges or corners.

Pad sharp edges for protection.

X

X

X

Fold seat backrest ; back until it engages.

Make sure not to trap the seat belt while doing so.

Swing seat cushion : back.

Pull up and adjust the head restraints if necessary (

Y page 97).

Securing loads

Cargo tie-down rings

G

WARNING

The Top Tether anchorages cannot secure a load. If you secure a load with the Top Tether anchorages, the Top Tether anchorages could be pulled out during braking, abrupt changes in direction or in the event of an accident. The load could slip, tip over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury.

Only use the cargo tie down rings when securing a load.

Observe the following notes on securing loads:

R

R

R

Secure the load using the cargo tie-down rings.

Distribute the load on the cargo tie-down rings evenly.

Do not use elastic straps or nets to secure a load, as these are only intended as an anti-slip protection for light loads.

There are four cargo tie-down rings : in the cargo compartment.

Bag hook

G

WARNING

The bag hooks cannot restrain heavy objects or items of luggage. Objects or items of luggage could be flung around and thereby hit vehicle occupants when braking or abruptly changing directions. There is a risk of injury.

Only hang light objects on the bag hooks.

Never hang hard, sharp-edged or fragile objects on the bag hooks.

!

The bag hook can bear a maximum load of

6.6lbs (3kg) and should not be used to secure a load.

There is a bag hook in the cargo compartment on the right-hand side.

X

X

Press bag hook marking :.

Turn bag hook : until it engages.

Z

300

Stowage areas

Cargo compartment cover


G

WARNING

On its own, the cargo compartment cover cannot secure or restrain heavy objects, items of luggage and heavy loads. You could be hit by an unsecured load during sudden changes in direction, braking or in the event of an accident. There is an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.

Always store objects so that they cannot be flung around. Secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping over, e.g. by using tie downs, even if you are using the cargo compartment cover.

!

When loading the vehicle, make sure that you do not stack the load in the cargo compartment higher than the lower edge of the side windows. Do not place heavy objects on top of the cargo compartment cover.

The cargo compartment cover may be installed behind the 2nd or 3rd row of seats.

Extending/retracting the cargo compartment cover

Installing/removing the cargo compartment cover

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

To remove: make sure that cargo compartment cover : is rolled up.

Push end cap = of cargo compartment cover : in the direction of the arrow on the right or left-hand side.

Push cargo compartment cover : into opposite anchorage ;.

Remove cargo compartment cover :.

To install: if installed, remove the protective caps from the side panels of the seat row in which the cargo compartment cover is to be installed. Use a suitable object here, e.g. a coin.

Install the protective caps to the side panels of the other seat row.

Place cargo compartment cover : into anchorage ; on the right or left-hand side.

Push in opposite end cap = of cargo compartment cover : in the direction of the arrow and insert cargo compartment cover : into opposite anchorage ;.

Coat hooks on the tailgate

X

X

X

To extend: pull the cargo compartment cover back by grab handle : and clip it into retainers ; on the left and right.

To retract: unhook the cargo compartment cover from left-hand and right-hand retainers ;.

Guide cargo compartment cover forwards by grab handle : until it is completely rolled up.

:

Coat hook

Stowage areas

301

Stowage well under the cargo compartment floor


G

WARNING

If you drive when the cargo compartment floor is open, objects could be flung around, thus striking vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction.

Always close the cargo compartment floor before a journey.

The TIREFIT kit, tire-change tool kit, etc. are located in the stowage compartment.

Opening/closing the cargo compartment floor

X

Fold out hook = on the underside of the cargo compartment floor in the direction of the arrow.

X

X

X

X

X

Attach hook = to the cargo compartment's upper seal ?.

To close: detach hook = from the cargo compartment's upper seal ?.

Fasten hook = to the bracket on the underside of the cargo compartment floor.

Fold the cargo compartment floor down.

Press the cargo compartment floor down ; until it engages.

Locking/unlocking the cargo compartment floor

X

X

To open: holding the ribbing, press handle : down ;.

Handle : folds up.

Swing the cargo compartment floor upwards using handle : until it rests against the cargo compartment cover.

1

2

Cargo compartment floor unlocked

Cargo compartment floor locked

The cargo compartment floor can be locked and unlocked using the mechanical key.

Z

302

Features

Roof carrier


G

WARNING

When you load the roof, the center of gravity of the vehicle rises and the driving characteristics change. If you exceed the maximum roof load, the driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, will be greatly impaired.


Never exceed the maximum roof load and adjust your driving style.

!

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use roof carriers that have been tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. This helps to prevent damage to the vehicle.

Position the load on the roof carrier in such a way that the vehicle will not sustain damage even when it is in motion.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, ensure that when the roof carrier is installed you can:

R raise the sliding sunroof fully

R open the panorama roof with power tilt/

R sliding panel fully open the tailgate fully

You will find information on the maximum roof load in the "Technical data" section

(

Y page 384).

An incorrectly secured roof carrier or roof load may become detached from the vehicle. You must therefore ensure that you observe the roof carrier manufacturer's installation instructions.

Attaching the roof carrier

X

Secure the roof carrier to roof rails :. In doing so, observe the manufacturer's installation instructions.

Features

Cup holder


G

WARNING

If you transport objects in the vehicle interior and these are not adequately secured, they could slip or be flung around and thereby strike vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone brackets may not always be able to hold the objects placed in them in the event of an accident. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sharp braking or sudden changes of direction.

R

Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be tossed about in these or similar situations.

R

Always make sure that objects do not protrude out of the stowage spaces, luggage nets or stowage nets.

R

Ensure that closable stowage spaces are shut before beginning your journey.

R

Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or large objects in the cargo compartment.


Y page 294).

!

Only use the cup holders for containers of the right size and which have lids. The drinks could otherwise spill.

!

Do not expose drinks bottles in the cup holder in the center console to continuous, strong and direct sunlight. The passenger compartment in the area of the center console can otherwise be damaged by the concentrated and reflected sunlight.

Do not keep the KEYLESS-GO key in the temperature-controlled cup holder (

Y page 303).

Otherwise, the KEYLESS-GO key will not be recognized.

Features

303

The stowage compartments in the doors provide space for bottles with a capacity of up to

34 fl. oz. (1.0 l).

The bottles are not secured or prevented from tipping over. Therefore, do not place any open drink containers in the stowage compartments.

Cup holder in the front-compartment center console

:

;

X

X

Cup holder

Cover

To open: slide cover ; to its foremost position.

To close: pull cover ; back as far as it will go.

You can remove the cup holder's rubber mat for cleaning. Clean with clear, lukewarm water only.

Temperature-controlled cup holder in the front-compartment center console

X

X

X

X


To switch on the cooling function: press and hold button = until the blue indicator lamp on the button lights up.

To switch on the heating function: press and hold button = until the red indicator lamp on the button lights up.

To switch off the function: press and hold button = until the indicator lamp on the button goes out.

When the heating function is used, the metal insert of the cup holder is heated. Once a certain temperature is reached, residual heat indicator lamp ; lights up. This means that the metal insert of the cup holder is hot. For this reason, you must not reach into the cup holder metal insert.

Do not use hard or sharp objects to clean the cup holder. Use only a soft cloth to clean it.

Cup holder in the rear seat armrest

!

Do not sit on or support your body weight on the rear seat armrest when it is folded down, as you could otherwise damage it.

:

;

=

Cup holder

Residual heat indicator lamp

Switch

The temperature-controlled cup holder can be used to keep cold drinks cool and warm drinks warm.

X

Fold down the rear seat armrest.

Cup holder : is located in the rear seat armrest.

Z

304

Features

Cup holder in the third row of seats Vanity mirror in the sun visor

Mirror light : only functions if the sun visor is clipped into retainer = and mirror cover B has been folded up.

Glare from the side

:

Cup holder

The cup holders are located in the side trim on the left and right-hand sides.

Sun visors

Overview

G

WARNING

If the mirror cover of the vanity mirror is folded up when the vehicle is in motion, you could be blinded by incident light. There is a risk of an accident.

Always keep the mirror cover folded down while driving.

X

X

X

Fold down sun visor :.

Pull sun visor : out of retainer =.

Swing sun visor : to the side.

Vehicles with additional sun visor:

X

X

Slide sun visor : horizontally as required.

Fold down additional sun visor ; to the windshield.

Roller sunblinds on the rear side windows

!

Always guide the roller sunblind by hand. Do not let it snap back suddenly as this would damage the automatic roller mechanism.

!

Do not drive the vehicle with the roller sunblind hooked in and the side windows opened simultaneously. The roller sunblind can jump out of the retainers and spring back suddenly when driving at high speeds, e.g. when driving on the freeway. This could damage the inertia reel. Therefore, either close the side window or retract the roller sunblind before driving at high speeds.

:

;

=

?

A

B

Mirror light

Additional sun visor

Bracket

Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticket

Vanity mirror

Mirror cover

Features

305

X

To extend: pull the roller sunblind out by tab : and hook it onto retainers ; at the back of the window.

The roller sunblind can be hooked back into place should it pop out from the top of the guide rail.

X

X

X

Tilt pull-out profile : as illustrated.

Slip guide bush ; into open area of guide rail

=.

Straighten up pull-out profile : again.

X

X

X

X

X

X

To open: slide cover : to its foremost position.

Fold cover = of the insert upwards.

To remove the insert: push insert = to the left ?.

Insert = slides out slightly to the right.

Lift insert = up ; and out.

To re-install the insert: place insert = into the holder and press it down on the right until it engages.


Rear-compartment ashtray

!

Close the ashtray when it is not in use and before you fold the rear seats forward. You can otherwise damage the ashtray.

Ashtray

Front ashtray

!

The holder under the ashtray is not heat resistant. Before placing lit cigarettes in the ashtray, make sure that the ashtray is properly engaged. Otherwise, the holder could be damaged.

Vehicles without a Rear Seat Entertainment System have an ashtray in the center console in the rear compartment.

X

X

To open: briefly press cover ; at the top.

The ashtray opens.

To remove the insert: push into recess = from the right.

Ashtray insert : slides out slightly to the right.

Z

306

Features

X

X

Lift insert : up and out.

To re-install the insert: place insert : into the holder and press down on the right until it engages.

Cigarette lighter

G

WARNING

You can burn yourself if you touch the hot heating element or the socket of the cigarette lighter.

In addition, flammable materials can ignite if:

R the hot cigarette lighter falls

R a child holds the hot cigarette lighter to objects, for example

There is a risk of fire and injury.

Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob.

Always make sure that the cigarette lighter is out of reach of children. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

!

The cigarette lighter in the center console in the front compartment is not intended for operating the tire inflation compressor.

12 V sockets

General notes

X


Y page 138).

With the exception of the socket in the front center console, all sockets can be used for accessories with a maximum current draw of

240 W (20 A). The socket in the front center console can be used for accessories with a maximum current draw of 180 W (15 A). Accessories include such items as chargers for mobile phones.

If you use the sockets for long periods when the engine is switched off, the battery may discharge.

i

An emergency cut-out ensures that the onboard voltage does not drop too low. If the onboard voltage is too low, the power to the sockets is automatically cut. This ensures that there is sufficient power to start the engine.

Socket in the front center console

X

X

!

The socket is not suitable for operating the tire inflation compressor.

X

To open: slide the cover to its foremost position.

Lift up the cover of the socket.

To close: pull the cover back as far as it will go.

Your attention must always be focused on the traffic conditions. Only use the cigarette lighter when road and traffic conditions permit.

X

X

X

X


Y page 138).

To open: slide cover : to its foremost position.

Press in cigarette lighter ;.

Cigarette lighter ; will pop out automatically when the heating element is red-hot.


Socket in the rear compartment center console

Vehicles with the Rear Seat Entertainment System have two sockets in the center console in the rear compartment.

X

Lift up the cover of the socket.

Features

307

Socket in the cargo compartment

X

Lift up the cover of socket :.

115 V socket


G

DANGER

When a suitable device is connected, the

115 V power socket will be carrying a high voltage. You could receive an electric shock if the connector cable or the 115 V power socket is pulled out of the trim or is damaged or wet. There is a risk of fatal injury.

R

Use only connector cables that are dry and free of damage.

R

When the ignition is off, make sure that the

115 V power socket is dry.

R

Have the 115 V power socket checked or replaced immediately at a qualified specialized workshop if it is damaged or has been pulled out of the trim.

R

Never plug the connector cable into a 115 V power socket that is damaged or has been pulled out of the trim.

G

DANGER

If you reach into the power socket or plug inappropriate devices into the power socket, you could receive an electric shock. There is a risk of fatal injury.

Only connect appropriate devices to the power socket.

!

Note that work and repairs on the 115 V power socket should only be carried out by qualified specialist personnel.

General notes

The 115 V power socket provides an alternating voltage of 115 V so that small electronic devices can be connected. These devices, such as games consoles, chargers and laptops, must not consume more than a maximum of 150 watts altogether.

Requirements for operation of these devices:

R

R

R

R

R the electronic device that you connect has a suitable connector and conforms to standards specific to the country you are in.

the plug of the electronic device is plugged correctly into 115 V power socket.

the maximum wattage of the device to be connected must not exceed 150 watts.

the on-board power supply is within a permissible voltage range.

the 12 V sockets in the rear compartment and the cargo compartment are operational.

Using the 115 V power socket

X

X

X

X

To switch on: switch the ignition on.

Open flap =.

Insert the plug of the electronic device into

115 V power socket :.


To switch off: disconnect the plug from

115 V power socket :.

Ensure that you do not pull on the cord.

Z

308

Features

Problems with the 115 V power socket

Problem

The warning lamp on the

115 V power socket is not lit.


The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak.

X

Start the engine.

or

X

Charge the battery (

Y page 338).

If the indicator lamp still does not light up:

X


The temperature of the DC/AC converter is temporarily too high.

X

X

Remove the electronic device connector from the 115 V socket.

Let the DC/AC converter cool down.

If the indicator lamp still does not light up after cooling down the converter:

X


You have connected an electronic device that has a constant nominal power of less than 150 watts, but has a very high switch-on current.

This device will not work. If you connect such a device, the 115 V power socket will not supply it with power.

X

Connect a suitable electronic device.

mbrace

General notes

The mbrace system is only available in the USA.

You must have a license agreement to activate the mbrace service. Make sure that your system is activated and operational. To log in, press the

ï MB Info call button. If any of the steps mentioned are not carried out, the system may not be activated.

If you have questions about the activation, contact one of the following telephone hotlines:

Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at

1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or

1-866-990-9007

Shortly after successfully registering with the mbrace service, a user ID and password will be sent to you by mail. You can use this password to log onto the mbrace area under "Owners

Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.

The system is available if:

R

R it has been activated and is operational the corresponding mobile phone network is available for transmitting data to the Customer Center

R a service subscription is available

Determining the location of the vehicle on a map is only possible if:

R

R

GPS reception is available.

the vehicle position can be forwarded to the

Customer Assistance Center.

The mbrace system

To adjust the volume during a call, proceed as follows:

X

Press the W or X button on the multifunction steering wheel.

or

X

Use the volume control on the multimedia system.

Features

309

The system offers various services, e.g.:

R

R

Automatic and manual emergency call

Roadside Assistance call

R

MB Info call

You can find information and a description of all available features under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.

System self-test

After you have switched on the ignition, the system carries out a self-diagnosis.

A malfunction in the system has been detected if one of the following occurs:

R

R

R

R

R

The indicator lamp in the SOS button does not come on during the system self-test.

The indicator lamp in the F Roadside

Assistance button does not light up during self-diagnosis of the system.

The indicator lamp in the ï MB Info call button does not light up during self-diagnosis of the system.

-

-

-

The indicator lamp in one or more of the following buttons continues to light up red after the system self-diagnosis:

SOS button

F Roadside Assistance call button

ï MB Info call button

The Inoperative or the Service Not

Activated message appears in the multifunction display after the system self-diagnosis.

If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above, the system may not operate as expected. In the event of an emergency, help will have to be summoned by other means.

Have the system checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or contact the following service hotlines:

Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at

1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or

1-866-990-9007

Emergency call


G

WARNING

It can be dangerous to remain in the vehicle, even if you have pressed the SOS button in an emergency if:

R you see smoke inside or outside of the vehicle, e.g. if there is a fire after an accident

R the vehicle is on a dangerous section of road

R the vehicle is not visible or cannot easily be seen by other road users, particularly when dark or in poor visibility conditions


Leave the vehicle immediately in this or similar situations as soon as it is safe to do so.

Move to a safe location along with other vehicle occupants. In such situations, secure the vehicle in accordance with national regulations, e.g. with a warning triangle.

General notes

Observe the notes on system activation

(

Y page 308).

An emergency call is dialed automatically if an air bag or Emergency Tensioning Device is triggered. You cannot end an automatically triggered emergency call yourself.

An emergency call can also be initiated manually.

As soon as the emergency call has been initiated, the indicator lamp in the SOS button flashes. The Connecting Call message appears in the multifunction display.

The audio output is muted.

Once the connection has been made, the Call

Connected message appears in the multifunction display.

All important information relating to the emergency is transferred, for example:

R

R

R current location of the vehicle (as determined by the GPS system) vehicle identification number information on the severity of the accident

Shortly after the emergency call has been initiated, a voice connection is automatically estab-

Z

310

Features

lished between the Customer Assistance Center and the vehicle occupants.

R

If the vehicle occupants respond, the


R attempts to get more information on the emergency.

If there is no response from the vehicle occupants, an ambulance is immediately sent to the vehicle.

If no voice connection can be established to the

Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center, the system has been unable to initiate an emergency call.

This can occur, for example, if the relevant mobile phone network is not available. The indicator lamp in the SOS button flashes continuously.

The Call Failed message appears in the multifunction display and must be confirmed.

In this case, summon assistance by other means.

Making an emergency call

X

X

X

X

To initiate an emergency call manually:

press cover : briefly to open.

Press and hold the SOS button for at least one second ;.

The indicator lamp in SOS button ; flashes until the emergency call is concluded.

Wait for a voice connection to the Mercedes-

Benz Customer Assistance Center.

After the emergency call, close cover :.

If the mobile phone network is unavailable, mbrace will not be able to make the emergency call. If you leave the vehicle immediately after pressing SOS button ;, you do not know if mbrace has successfully made the emergency call. In this case, always summon assistance by other means.

Breakdown assistance button

X

To call Roadside Assistance: press Roadside Assistance button :.

This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.

The indicator lamp in Roadside Assistance button : flashes while the call is active. The

Connecting Call message appears in the multifunction display. The audio output is muted.

If a connection can be made, the Call Con‐ nected message appears in the multifunction display.

If a mobile phone network and GPS reception are available, the system transfers data to the

Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center, for example:

R

R current location of the vehicle vehicle identification number

The multimedia system display indicates that a call is active. During the call, you can change to the navigation menu by pressing the NAVI button on the multimedia system, for example.

Voice output is not available in this case.

A voice connection is established between the

Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center and the vehicle occupants.

From the remote malfunction diagnosis, the

Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center can ascertain the nature of the problem

(

Y page 313).

The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center either sends a qualified Mercedes-Benz technician or makes arrangements for your vehicle to be transported to the nearest authorized


You may be charged for services such as repair work and/or towing.

Features

311

You can find more information in the separate mbrace manual.

The system has not been able to initiate a Roadside Assistance call, if:

R

R the indicator lamp for Roadside Assistance call button F is flashing continuously.

no voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz

Customer Assistance Center was established.

This can occur if the relevant mobile phone network is not available, for example.

The Call Failed message appears in the multifunction display.

X

To end a call: press the ~ button on the multifunction steering wheel.

or

X

Press the corresponding multimedia system button for ending a phone call.

MB Info call button

X

To call MB Info: press MB Info call button :.

This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.

The indicator lamp in MB Info call button : flashes while the connection is being made.

The Connecting Call message appears in the multifunction display. The audio output is muted.

If a connection can be made, the Call Con‐ nected message appears in the multifunction display.

If a mobile phone network and GPS reception are available, the system transfers data to the

Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center, for example:

R

R current location of the vehicle vehicle identification number

The multimedia system display indicates that a call is active. During the call, you can change to the navigation menu by pressing the NAVI button on COMAND, for example.

Voice output is not available in this case.

A voice connection is established between the

Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center and the vehicle occupants.

You receive information about operating your vehicle, about the nearest authorized

Mercedes-Benz Center and about other products and services from Mercedes-Benz.

You can find further information on the mbrace system under "Owners Online" at http:// www.mbusa.com.

The system has not been able to initiate an MB

Info call, if:

R

R the indicator lamp in MB Info call button ï is flashing continuously.

no voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz

Customer Assistance Center was established.

This can occur if the relevant mobile phone network is not available, for example.

The Call Failed message appears in the multifunction display.

X

To end a call: press the ~ button on the multifunction steering wheel.

or

X

Press the corresponding multimedia system button for ending a phone call.

Call priority

When service calls are active, e.g. Roadside

Assistance or MB Info calls, an emergency call can still be initiated. In this case, an emergency call will take priority and override all other active calls.

The indicator lamp of the respective button flashes until the call is ended.

An emergency call can only be terminated by the

Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.

All other calls can be ended by pressing:

R

R the ~ button on the multifunction steering wheel the corresponding button in the multimedia system to end the voice call

When a call is initiated, the audio system is muted.

Z

312

Features

The mobile phone is no longer connected to the multimedia system.

However, if you want to use your mobile phone, do so only when the vehicle is stationary and in a safe location.

Downloading destinations in COMAND

Downloading destinations

Downloading destinations gives you access to a database with over 15 million points of interest

(POIs). These can be downloaded on the navigation system in your vehicle. If you know the destination, the address can be downloaded.

Alternatively, you can obtain the location of

Points of Interest (POIs)/important destinations in the vicinity.

Furthermore, you can download routes with up to four way points.

You are prompted to confirm route guidance to the address entered.

X

Select Yes by turning 3 or sliding 1 the controller and confirm with 7.

The system calculates the route and subsequently starts the route guidance with the address entered.

If you select No the address can be stored in the address book.

The destination download function is available if:

R

R the vehicle is equipped with a navigation system.

the relevant mobile phone network is available and data transfer is possible.

Route Assistance

This service is part of the mbrace PLUS Package and cannot be purchased separately.

You can use the Route Assistance function even if the vehicle is not equipped with a navigation system.

Within the framework of this service, you receive a professional and reliable form of navigation support without having to leave your vehicle.

The customer service representative finds a suitable route depending on your vehicle's current position and the desired destination. You will then be guided live through the current route section.

Search & Send

General notes

To use "Search & Send", your vehicle must be equipped with mbrace and a navigation system.

Additionally, an mbrace service subscription must be completed.

"Search & Send" is a destination entry service. A destination address which is found on Google

Maps

® can be transferred via mbrace directly to your vehicle's navigation system.

Specifying and sending the destination address

X

X

X

X

Go to the website http://maps.google.com

and enter a destination address into the entry field.

To send the destination address to the email address of your mbrace account:

click on the corresponding button on the website.

Example:

If you select 'Send to vehicle' and then

'Mercedes-Benz', the destination address will be sent to your vehicle.

When the "Send" dialog window appears:

Enter the e-mail address you specified when setting up your mbrace account into the corresponding field.

Click "Send".

Information on specific commands such as

"Address entry" or "Send" can be found on the website.

Calling up a transmitted destination address

X

X


Y page 138).

The transmitted destination address is loaded into the vehicle's navigation system.

A display message appears, asking whether navigation should be started.

Select Yes by turning 3 or sliding 1 the controller and confirm with 7.

The system calculates the route and subsequently starts the route guidance with the address entered.

If you select No the address can be stored in the address book.

Features

313

If you have sent more than one destination address, each individual destination must be confirmed separately.

Destination addresses are loaded in the same order as the order in which they were sent.

If you own multiple Mercedes-Benz vehicles with mbrace and activated mbrace accounts:

If multiple vehicles are registered under the same e-mail address, the destination will be sent to all the vehicles.

Vehicle remote opening

You can use the vehicle remote opening if you have unintentionally locked your vehicle and a replacement SmartKey is not available.

The vehicle can be opened by the Mercedes-


The vehicle can be immediately opened remotely within four days of the ignition being turned off. After this time, the remote unlocking may be delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After

30 days, the vehicle can no longer be opened remotely.

The vehicle remote unlocking feature is available if the relevant mobile phone network is available and a data connection is possible.

X

X

Contact the following service hotlines:

Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007

You will be asked for your password.

Return to your vehicle at the time agreed upon with the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.

Alternatively, the vehicle can be opened via:

R

R the Internet, under the "Owners Online" section the telephone application (e.g. for iPhone

®

,

Android)

To do this, you will need your identification number and password.

Vehicle remote closing

The vehicle remote-closing feature can be used when you have forgotten to lock the vehicle and you are no longer nearby.

The vehicle can then be locked by the Mercedes-


The vehicle can be immediately remotely locked within four days of the ignition being turned off.

After this time, remote closing may be delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After 30 days the vehicle can no longer be locked remotely.

The vehicle remote closing feature is available if the relevant mobile phone network is available and a data connection is possible.

X

Contact the following service hotlines:

Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007

You will be asked for your password.

The next time you are inside the vehicle and you switch on the ignition, the Doors Locked

Remotely message appears in the multifunction display.

Alternatively, the vehicle can be locked via:

R

R the Internet, under the "Owners Online" section the telephone application (e.g. for iPhone

®

,

Android)

To do this, you will need your identification number and password.

Stolen vehicle recovery service

If your vehicle has been stolen:

X

X

Notify the police.

The police will issue a numbered incident report.

This number will be forwarded to the

Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center together with your PIN.

The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance

Center then tries to locate the system. The

Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center contacts you and the local law enforcement agency if the vehicle is located.

However, only the law enforcement agency is informed of the location of the vehicle.

If the anti-theft alarm system is activated for longer than 30 seconds, the Mercedes-Benz

Customer Assistance Center is automatically notified.

Vehicle Health Check

With the Vehicle Health Check, the Customer

Assistance Center can provide improved support for problems with your vehicle. During an

Z

314

Features

existing call, vehicle data is transferred to the

Customer Assistance Center.

The customer service representative can use the received data to decide what kind of assistance is required. You are then, for example, guided to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Service

Center or a recovery vehicle is called.

If vehicle data needs to be transferred during an

MB Info call or a Roadside Assistance call, this is initiated by the Customer Assistance Center.

The Roadside Assistance Connected message appears in the display. If the Vehicle Health

Check can be started, the Request for Vehi‐ cle Diagnostics Received Start vehi‐ cle diagnostics?

message appears in the display.

X

X

X

Press the Yes button to confirm the message.

When the Vehicle Diagnostics Please

Start Ignition message appears: turn the

SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock

(

Y page 138).

If the Please follow the instructions received by phone and move your vehi‐ cle to a safe position.

message appears: please follow the instructions received by phone and move your vehicle to a safe position.

The message in the display disappears.

The vehicle operating state check begins.

During this procedure, you will see the Vehi‐ cle Diagnostics Active message.

If you select Cancel , the Vehicle Health

Check is canceled completely.

When the check is complete, the Sending vehicle diagnostics data. (Voice con‐ nection may be interrupted during data transfer) message appears. The vehicle data can now be sent.

X

Press the OK button to confirm the message.

The voice connection with the Customer

Assistance Center is terminated.

The Vehicle Diagnostics: Transfer‐ ring Data...

message appears.

The vehicle data is sent to the Customer

Assistance Center.

Depending on what the customer service representative agreed with you, the voice connection is re-established after the transfer is complete. If necessary, you will be contacted at a later time by another means, e.g. by e-mail or phone.

Another function of the Vehicle Health Check is the transfer of service data to the Customer

Assistance Center. If a service is due, the display shows a message to this effect together with information about any special offers at your workshop.

This information can also be called up under

"Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.

Information on the data stored in the vehicle

(

Y page 30).

Information on Roadside Assistance

(

Y page 27).

Downloading routes

Downloading routes allows you to transfer and save predefined routes in the navigation system.

A route can be prepared and sent by either a customer service representative or under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.

Each route can include up to four way points.

Once a route has been received by the navigation system, you will see the Do you want to start route guidance? Destination

Received destination has been saved in "Previous destinations".

message on the multimedia system display.

The route is saved.

X

To start route guidance: select Yes .

An overview of the route is shown in the dis-

X play.

If you select No , the saved route can be called up later in the navigation menu.

Select Start .

Route guidance starts.

Downloaded and saved routes can be called up again.

Speed alert

You can define the upper speed limit, which must not be exceeded by the vehicle.

If this selected speed is exceeded by the vehicle, a message will be sent to the Customer Assistance Center. The Customer Assistance Center then forwards this information to you.

You can select the way in which you receive this information beforehand. Possible options include text message, e-mail or an automated call.

Features

315

The data you receive contains the following information:

R

R

R the location where the speed limit was exceeded the time at which the speed limit was exceeded the selected speed limit which was exceeded

Geo fencing

Geo fencing allows you to select areas which the vehicle should not enter or leave. You will be informed if the vehicle crosses the boundaries of the selected areas. You can select the way in which you receive this information beforehand.

Possible options include text message, e-mail or an automated call.

The area can be determined as either a circle or a polygon with a maximum of ten corners. You can specify up to ten areas simultaneously. Different settings are possible for each area.

These settings can be called up under "Owners

Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.

Alternatively, you can trigger an MB Info call and inform the customer service representative that you wish to activate geo fencing.

Currently inactive areas can be activated by text message.

Triggering the vehicle alarm

With this function, you can trigger the vehicle's panic alarm via text message. An alarm sounds and the exterior lighting flashes. Depending on the setting, the panic alarm lasts five or ten seconds. Afterwards, the alarm switches off.

Garage door opener

General notes

The HomeLink

® garage door opener integrated in the rear-view mirror allows you to operate up to three different door and gate systems.

Use the integrated garage door opener only on garage doors that:

R

R have safety stop and reverse features and meet current U.S. federal safety standards

Once programed, the integrated garage door opener in the rear-view mirror will assume the function of the garage door system's remote control. Please also read the operating instructions for the garage door system.

When programming a garage door opener, park the vehicle outside the garage. Do not run the engine while programming.

Certain garage door drives are incompatible with the integrated garage door opener. If you have difficulty programing the integrated garage door opener, contact an authorized Mercedes-

Benz Center.

Alternatively, you can call the following telephone assistance services:

R

R

R

USA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance

Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes

Canada: Customer Service at

1-800-387-0100

HomeLink

® charge) hotline 1-800-355-3515 (free of

More information on HomeLink

® and/or compatible products is also available online at http://www.homelink.com.

Notes on the declaration of conformity

(

Y page 28).

USA: FCC ID: CB2HMIHL4

Canada: IC: 279B-HMIHL4


G

WARNING

When you operate or program the garage door with the integrated garage door opener, persons in the range of movement of the garage door can become trapped or struck by the garage door. There is a risk of injury.

When using the integrated garage door opener, always make sure that nobody is within the range of movement of the garage door.

G

WARNING


Z

316

Features

Programming

Programming buttons

Pay attention to the "Important safety notes"

(

Y page 315).

Garage door remote control A is not included with the integrated garage door opener.

X


Y page 138).

X

X

Select one of buttons ; to ? to use to control the garage door drive.

To start programming mode: press and hold one of buttons ; to ? on the integrated garage door opener.

The garage door opener is now in programming mode. After a short time, indicator lamp : lights up yellow.

X

X

X

X

Indicator lamp : lights up yellow as soon as button ;, = or ? is stored for the first time.

If the selected button has already been programed, indicator lamp : will only light up yellow after ten seconds have elapsed.

Release button ;, = or ?. Indicator lamp : flashes yellow.

To program the remote control: point garage door remote control A towards buttons ; to ? on the rear-view mirror at a distance of 2 to 8 in (5 to 20 cm).

Press and hold button B on remote control

A until indicator lamp : lights up green.

When indicator lamp : lights up green: programming is finished.

When indicator lamp : flashes green: programming was successful. The next step is to synchronize the rolling code (

Y page 316).

Release button B on remote control A for the garage door drive system.

If indicator lamp : lights up red: repeat the programing procedure for the corresponding button on the rear-view mirror. When doing so, vary the distance between remote control

A and the rear-view mirror.

The required distance between remote control A and the integrated garage door opener depends on the garage door drive system.

Several attempts might be necessary. You should test every position for at least

25 seconds before trying another position.

Synchronizing the rolling code

Pay attention to the "Important safety notes"

(

Y page 315).

If the garage door system uses a rolling code, you will also have to synchronize the garage door system with the integrated garage door opener in the rear-view mirror. To do this you will need to use the programming button on the door drive control panel. The programming button may be located in different places depending on the manufacturer. It is usually located on the door drive unit on the garage ceiling.

Familiarize yourself with the garage door drive operating instructions, e.g. under "Programming additional remote controls", before carrying out the following steps.

Your vehicle must be within reach of the garage door or gate opener drive. Make sure that neither your vehicle nor any persons/objects are present within the sweep of the door or gate.

X

Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition

X

X lock (

Y page 138).

Get out of the vehicle.

Press the programming button on the door drive unit.

X

X

Usually, you now have 30 seconds to initiate the next step.

Get into the vehicle.

Press previously programed button ;, = or ? on the integrated garage door opener repeatedly and in quick succession until the door closes.

The rolling code synchronization is then complete.

Notes on programming the remote control

Canadian radio frequency laws require a "break"

(or interruption) of the transmission signals after broadcasting for a few seconds. Therefore, these signals may not last long enough for the integrated garage door opener. The signal is not recognized during programming. Comparable

Features

317

with Canadian law, some U.S. garage door openers also feature a "break".

Proceed as follows:

R

R

X

X

X

X

X

X if you live in Canada if you have difficulties programming the garage door opener (regardless of where you live) when using the programming steps

Press and hold one of buttons ; to ? on the integrated garage door opener.

After a short time, indicator lamp : lights up yellow.

Release the button.

Indicator lamp : flashes yellow.

Press button B of garage door remote control A for two seconds, then release it for two seconds.

Press button B again for two seconds.

Repeat this sequence on button B of remote control A until indicator lamp : lights up green.

When indicator lamp : lights up green: programming is finished.

When indicator lamp : flashes green: programming was successful. The next step is to synchronize the rolling code.

Release button B of remote control A of the garage door drive.

If indicator lamp : lights up red: repeat the programming process for the corresponding button on the rear-view mirror. When doing so, vary the distance between remote control

A and the rear-view mirror.

The required distance between remote control A and the integrated garage door opener depends on the garage door drive system.

Several attempts might be necessary. You should test every position for at least

25 seconds before trying another position.

Problems when programming

If you are experiencing problems programing the integrated garage door opener on the rearview mirror, take note of the following instructions:

R

Check the transmitter frequency used by garage door drive remote control A and whether it is supported. The transmitter frequency can usually be found on the back of remote control A for the garage door drive.

The integrated garage door opener is compatible with devices that have units which

R

R

R

R

R operate in the frequency range of 280 to

433 MHz.

Replace the batteries in garage door remote control A. This increases the likelihood that garage door remote control A will transmit a strong and precise signal to the integrated garage door opener.

When programming, hold remote control A at varying distances and angles and from buttons ; to ? which you are programming. Try various angles at a distance between 2and

8 inches (5to 20 cm) or at the same angle but at varying distances.

If another remote control A is available for the same garage door drive, repeat the same programming steps with this remote control

A. Before performing these steps, make sure that new batteries have been installed in garage door drive remote control A.

Note that some remote controls only transmit for a limited amount of time (the indicator lamp on the remote control goes out). Press button B on remote control A again before transmission ends.

Align the antenna cable of the garage door opener unit. This can improve signal reception/transmission.

Opening/closing the garage door

After it has been programmed, the integrated garage door opener performs the function of the garage door system remote control. Please also read the operating instructions for the garage door system.

X

X

X


Y page 138).

Press buttons ;, = or ? which you have programmed to operate the garage door.

Garage door system with a fixed code: indicator lamp : lights up green.

Garage door system with a rolling code: indicator lamp : flashes green.

The transmitter will transmit a signal as long as the button is pressed. The transmission is halted after a maximum of ten seconds and indicator lamp : lights up yellow.

Press button ;, = or ? again if necessary.

Z

318

Features

Clearing the memory

Make sure that you clear the memory of the integrated garage door opener before selling the vehicle.

X

Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition

X

X lock (

Y page 138).

Press and hold buttons ; and ?.

The indicator lamp initially lights up yellow and then green.

Release buttons ; and ?.

The memory of the integrated garage door opener in the rear-view mirror is cleared.

X

X

To remove: pull the floormat from retainers ;.

Remove the floormat.

Floormats

G

WARNING




X

X

X

X

Driver's seat/front-passenger seat: slide the respective seat back.

Rear seats: slide the corresponding front seat forwards.

To install: place the floormat in the footwell.

Press studs : onto retainers ;.

Engine compartment

319


Hood


G

WARNING

If the hood is unlatched, it may open up when the vehicle is in motion and block your view.


Never unlatch the hood while driving. Before every trip, ensure that the hood is locked.

G

WARNING

When opening and closing the hood, it may suddenly fall into the closed position. There is a risk of injury to persons within range of movement of the hood.

Open and close the hood only when no one is within its range of movement.

G

WARNING

Opening the hood when the engine is overheated or when there is a fire in the engine compartment could expose you to hot gases or other service products. There is a risk of injury.

Let an overheated engine cool down before opening the hood. If there is a fire in the engine compartment, keep the hood closed and contact the fire department.

G

WARNING

The engine compartment contains moving components. Certain components, such as the radiator fan, may continue to run or start again suddenly when the ignition is off. There is a risk of injury.

If you need to do any work inside the engine compartment:

R switch off the ignition

R never reach into the area where there is a risk of danger from moving components, such as the fan rotation area

R remove jewelry and watches

R keep items of clothing and hair, for example, away from moving parts

G

WARNING

The ignition system and the fuel injection system work under high voltage. If you touch components which are under voltage, you could get an electric shock. There is a risk of injury.

Never touch components of the ignition system or fuel injection system when the ignition is switched on.

Opening the hood

G

WARNING

Certain components in the engine compartment, such as the engine, radiator and parts of the exhaust system, can become very hot.

Working in the engine compartment poses a risk of injury.

Where possible, let the engine cool down and touch only the components described in the following.

G

WARNING

When the hood is open and the windshield wipers are set in motion, you can be injured by the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.

Always switch off the windshield wipers and the ignition before opening the hood.

!

Make sure that the windshield wipers are not folded away from the windshield. You could otherwise damage the windshield wipers or the hood.

Z

320


X

X

Make sure that the windshield wipers are turned off.

Pull release lever : on the hood.

The hood is released.

X

Reach into the gap, pull hood catch handle ; up and lift the hood.

If you lift the hood by approximately 15 in

(40 cm), the hood is opened and held open automatically by the gas-filled strut.

Closing the hood

X

X

Lower the hood and let it fall from a height of approximately 8 in (20 cm).

Check that the hood has engaged properly.

If the hood can be raised slightly, it is not properly engaged. Open it again and close it with a little more force.

Engine oil


G

WARNING




G

WARNING

If engine oil comes into contact with hot components in the engine compartment, it may ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.

Make sure that engine oil is not spilled next to the filler neck. Let the engine cool down and thoroughly clean the engine oil off the components before starting the engine.

General notes

Depending on your driving style, the vehicle consumes up to 0.9 US qt (0.8 liters) of oil per

600 miles (1,000 km). The oil consumption may be higher than this when the vehicle is new or if you frequently drive at high engine speeds.

Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick may be in a different location.

When checking the oil level:

R

R

R park the vehicle on a level surface.

the engine should be switched off for approximately five minutes if the engine is at normal operating temperature.

if the engine is not at normal operating temperature, e.g. if the engine was only started briefly, wait about 30 minutes before carrying out the measurement.

Radiator

Vehicles with a diesel engine: do not cover the radiator, for example with a winter front or bug cover. The readings of the on-board-diagnostic system may otherwise be inaccurate.

Some of these readings are required by law and must be accurate at all times.


321

Checking the oil level using the oil dipstick

The following cause engine failure or damage to the exhaust system:

R

Use of engine oils and oil filters that have not been expressly approved for the service system

R

Replacement of engine oil and oil filter after the replacement interval specified by the service system has expired

R

Use of engine oil additives

!

Do not add too much oil. adding too much engine oil can result in damage to the engine or to the catalytic converter. Have excess engine oil siphoned off.

Example: vehicles with a gasoline engine

Example: vehicles with a diesel engine

X

X

X

X

Pull dipstick : out of the dipstick tube.

Wipe off oil dipstick :.

Slowly slide oil dipstick : into the guide tube to the stop, and take it out again.

If the level is between MIN mark = and MAX mark ;, the oil level is correct.

If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark = or below, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) engine oil.

Example: engine oil cap

X

X

X

X

Turn cap : counter-clockwise and remove it.

Add engine oil.

If the oil level is at or below the MIN mark on the oil dipstick, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) of engine oil.

Replace cap : on the filler neck and tighten clockwise.

Ensure that the cap locks into place securely.

Check the oil level again with the oil dipstick

(

Y page 321).

Further information on engine oil (

Y page 381).

Adding engine oil

H


When adding oil, take care not to spill any. If oil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful to the environment.

!

Use only engine oils and oil filters that are approved for vehicles with a service system. A list of the engine oils and oil filters that have been tested and approved in accordance with

Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service

Products is available at any authorized


Additional service products


G

WARNING



Z

322



G

WARNING

The cooling system is pressurized, particularly when the motor is warm. If you open the cap, you could be scalded if hot coolant sprays out.


Let the engine cool down before you open the cap. Wear gloves and eye protection. Slowly open the cap to relieve pressure.

G

WARNING

Windshield washer concentrate could ignite if it comes into contact with hot engine components or the exhaust system. There is a risk of fire and injury.

Make sure that no windshield washer concentrate is spilled next to the filler neck.

Checking coolant level

X

X

X

X

X

X

On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press the

Start/Stop button (

Y page 140).

Press the Start/Stop button (

Y page 140).

Slowly turn cap : half a turn counter-clockwise and allow excess pressure to escape.

Turn cap : further counter-clockwise and remove it.

If the coolant is at the level of marker bar = in the filler neck when cold, there is enough coolant in coolant expansion tank ;.

If the coolant level is approximately 0.6 in

(1.5 cm) above marker bar = in the filler neck when warm, there is enough coolant in expansion tank ;.

If necessary, add coolant that has been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Replace cap : and turn it clockwise as far as it will go.

For further information on coolant, see

(

Y page 382).

Adding washer fluid to the windshield washer system

X

X

X

X

Park the vehicle on a level surface.

Only check the coolant level when the vehicle is on a level surface and the engine has cooled down.


Y page 138).

On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press the

Start/Stop button twice (

Y page 140).

Check the coolant temperature gauge in the multifunction display.

The coolant temperature must be below

158 ‡ (70 †).


Y page 138).

Example: washer fluid reservoir

X

X

X

To open: pull cap : upwards by the tab.

Add the premixed washer fluid.

To close: press cap : onto the filler neck until it engages.

If the washer fluid level drops below the recommended minimum of 1 liter, a message appears in the multifunction display prompting you to add washer fluid (

Y page 273).

Further information on windshield washer fluid

(

Y page 383).

ASSYST PLUS

323

ASSYST PLUS

Service message

The ASSYST PLUS service interval display informs you of the next service due date.

Information on the type of service and service intervals (see the separate Maintenance Booklet).

You can obtain further information from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or at http://www.mbusa.com (USA only).

i

The ASSYST PLUS service interval display does not show any information on the engine oil level. Observe the notes on the engine oil level (

Y page 320).

The multifunction display shows a service message for several seconds, e.g.:

R

R

Service A in .. Days

Service A Due

R

Service A Overdue by .. Days

Depending on the operating conditions of the vehicle, the remaining time or distance until the next service due date is displayed.

The letter A or B , possibly in connection with a number or another letter, shows the type of service.

A stands for a minor service and B for a major service.

You can obtain further information from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

The ASSYST PLUS service interval display does not take into account any periods of time during which the battery is disconnected.

Maintaining the time-dependent service schedule:

X or

X

Note down the service due date displayed in the multifunction display before disconnecting the battery.

After reconnecting the battery, subtract the battery disconnection periods from the service date shown on the display.

Hiding a service message

X

Press the % or a button on the steering wheel.

Displaying service messages

X

X

X


Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Serv.

menu.

Press the 9 or : button to select the

ASSYST PLUS submenu and confirm by pressing the a button.

The service due date appears in the multifunction display.

Information about Service

Resetting the ASSYST PLUS service interval display

!

If the ASSYST PLUS service interval display has been inadvertently reset, this setting can be corrected at a qualified specialist workshop.

Have service work carried out as described in the Maintenance Booklet. This may otherwise lead to increased wear and damage to the major assemblies or the vehicle.

A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, will reset the

ASSYST PLUS service interval display after the service work has been carried out. You can also obtain further information on maintenance work, for example.

Special service requirements

The specified maintenance interval takes only the normal operation of the vehicle into account. Under arduous operating conditions or increased load on the vehicle, maintenance work must be carried out more frequently, for example:

R

R

R regular city driving with frequent intermediate stops if the vehicle is primarily used to travel short distances use in mountainous terrain or on poor road surfaces

R if the engine is often left idling for long periods

Under these or similar conditions, have, for example, the air filter, engine oil and oil filter replaced or changed more frequently. Under arduous operating conditions, the tires must be checked more often. Further information can be

Z

324

Care

obtained at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g.

an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Driving abroad

An extensive Mercedes-Benz Service network is also available in other countries. You can obtain further information from any authorized


Care

General notes

H


Dispose of empty packaging and cleaning cloths in an environmentally responsible manner.

!

For cleaning your vehicle, do not use any of the following:

R dry, rough or hard cloths

R abrasive cleaning agents

R solvents

R cleaning agents containing solvents

Do not scrub.

Do not touch the surfaces or protective films with hard objects, e.g. a ring or ice scraper.

You could otherwise scratch or damage the surfaces and protective film.

!

Do not park your vehicle for a long period of time directly after cleaning, particularly after cleaning the wheel rim with wheel cleaner.

Wheel cleaner can lead to the increased corrosion of the brake discs and pads. Therefore, drive for a few minutes after cleaning. By heating up the brakes, the brake discs and pads dry. The vehicle can then be parked for a long period of time.

Regular care of your vehicle is a condition for retaining the quality in the long term.

Use care products and cleaning agents recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Washing the vehicle and cleaning the paintwork

Automatic car wash

G

WARNING

Braking efficiency is reduced after washing the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.

After the vehicle has been washed, brake carefully while paying attention to the traffic conditions until full braking power is restored.

!

Before driving into an automatic car wash, make sure that it is suitable for the dimensions of the vehicle. In particular, make sure that:

R there is enough ground clearance between the vehicle underbody and the guide rails of the automatic car wash.

R the clearance width of the automatic car wash is sufficient, particularly the width of the guide rails.

R you enter the automatic car wash straight and in the center of the guide rails in order to avoid damaging the tires or wheel rims.

Fold in the exterior mirrors before the vehicle is washed. The exterior mirrors could otherwise be damaged.

!

When DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function is activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations.




R in the car wash

!

Never clean your vehicle in a Touchless

Automatic Car Wash as these use special cleaning agents. These cleaning agents can damage the paintwork or plastic parts.

!

Make sure that:

R the side windows and the sliding sunroof

R are fully closed.

the ventilation/heating is switched off (the

R

OFF button has been pressed).

the windshield wiper switch is in position 0.

Otherwise, the vehicle might be damaged.

Care

325

!

In car washes with a towing mechanism, make sure that the automatic transmission is in transmission position N, otherwise the vehicle could be damaged.

R

Vehicles with a SmartKey:

Do not remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. Do not open the driver's door or front-passenger door when the engine is switched off. Otherwise, the automatic transmission selects park position P automatically and locks the wheels. You can prevent this by shifting the automatic transmission to N beforehand.

R


Do not open the driver's door or frontpassenger door when the engine is switched off. Otherwise, the automatic transmission selects park position P automatically and locks the wheels.

Observe the following to make sure that the automatic transmission stays in position N:

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Make sure the vehicle is stationary and the ignition is switched off.


Y page 138).

Use the SmartKey instead of the Start/Stop button on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO.

Depress and hold the brake pedal.


N.




You can wash the vehicle in an automatic car wash from the very start.

If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it before cleaning it in an automatic car wash.

After using an automatic car wash, wipe off wax from the windshield and the wiper blades. This will prevent smears and reduce wiping noises caused by residue on the windshield.

Washing by hand

In some countries, washing by hand is only allowed at specially equipped washing bays.

Observe the legal requirements in all countries concerned.

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Do not use hot water and do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight.

Use a soft sponge to clean.

Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a car shampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with a gentle jet of water.

Do not point the water jet directly towards the air inlets.

Use plenty of water and rinse out the sponge frequently.

Rinse the vehicle with clean water and dry thoroughly with a chamois.

Do not let the cleaning agent dry on the paintwork.

When using the vehicle in winter, remove all traces of road salt deposits carefully and as soon as possible.

Power washers

G

WARNING

The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage to the tires or chassis components. Components damaged in this way may fail unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident.

Do not use power washers with circular jet nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged tires or chassis components replaced immediately.

!

Always maintain a distance of at least

11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and the power washer nozzle. Information about the correct distance is available from the equipment manufacturer.

Move the power washer nozzle around when cleaning your vehicle.

Do not aim directly at any of the following:

R

Tires

R

Door gaps, roof gaps, joints, etc.

R

Electrical components

R

Battery

R

Connectors

R

Lamps

R

Seals

R

Trim

R

Ventilation slots

Z

326

Care

Damaged seals or electrical components can lead to leaks or failures.

Cleaning the paintwork

!

Do not affix:

R stickers

R films

R magnetic plates or similar items to painted surfaces. You could otherwise damage the paintwork.

Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected by corrosion and damage caused by inadequate care cannot always be completely repaired. In such cases, visit a qualified specialist workshop.

X

X

X

X

X

X

Remove dirt immediately, where possible, while avoiding rubbing too hard.

Soak insect remains with insect remover and rinse off the treated areas afterwards.

Soak bird droppings with water and rinse off the treated areas afterwards.

Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin, oils, fuels and greases by rubbing gently with a cloth soaked in petroleum ether or lighter fluid.

Use tar remover to remove tar stains.

Use silicone remover to remove wax.

If water no longer forms "beads" on the paint surface, use the paint care products recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. This is the case approximately every three to five months, depending on the climate conditions and the care product used.

If dirt has penetrated the paint surface or if the paint has become dull, the paint cleaner recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz should be used.

Do not use these care products in the sun or on the hood while the hood is hot.

X

Use a suitable touch-up stick, e.g. MB Touch-

Up Stick, to repair slight damage to the paintwork quickly and provisionally.

Matte finish care

!

Never polish the vehicle or the light alloy wheels. Polishing causes the finish to shine.

!

The following may cause the paint to become shiny and thus reduce the matte effect:

R strong rubbing of the paintwork with

R unsuitable materials frequent use of automatic car washes

R washing the vehicle in direct sunlight

!

Never use paint cleaner, buffing or polishing products, or gloss preserver, e.g. wax, for the purpose of paintwork care. These products are only suitable for high-gloss surfaces. Their use on vehicles with matte paintwork leads to considerable surface damage or, more specifically, to shiny, spotted areas.

Always have paintwork repairs carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

!

Do not use wash programs with a hot wax treatment under any circumstances.

Observe these notes if your vehicle has a clear matte finish. This will help you to avoid damage to the paintwork due to incorrect treatment.

These notes also apply to light alloy wheels with a clear matte finish.

i

The vehicle should ideally be washed by hand using a soft sponge, car shampoo and plenty of water.

i

Use only insect remover and car shampoo from the range of recommended and approved Mercedes-Benz care products.

Cleaning the vehicle parts

Cleaning the wheels

G

WARNING

The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage to the tires or chassis components. Components damaged in this way may fail unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident.

Do not use power washers with circular jet nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged tires or chassis components replaced immediately.

!

Do not use acidic wheel cleaning products to remove brake dust. This could damage wheel bolts and brake components.

Care

327

!

Do not park your vehicle for a long period of time directly after cleaning, particularly after cleaning the wheel rim with wheel cleaner.

Wheel cleaner can lead to the increased corrosion of the brake discs and pads. Therefore, drive for a few minutes after cleaning. By heating up the brakes, the brake discs and pads dry. The vehicle can then be parked for a long period of time.

Cleaning the windows

G

WARNING

You could become trapped by the windshield wipers if they start moving while cleaning the windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of injury.

Always switch off the windshield wipers and the ignition before cleaning the windshield or wiper blades.

!

Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products, solvents or cleaning agents containing solvents to clean the inside of the windows. Do not touch the insides of the windows with hard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or ring. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the windows.

!

Clean the water drainage channels of the windshield and the rear window at regular intervals. Deposits such as leaves, petals and pollen may under certain circumstances prevent water from draining away. This can lead to corrosion damage and damage to electronic components.

X

Clean the inside and outside of the windows with a damp cloth and a cleaning product that is recommended and approved by Mercedes-

Benz.

Cleaning wiper blades

G

WARNING

You could become trapped by the windshield wipers if they start moving while cleaning the windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of injury.

Always switch off the windshield wipers and the ignition before cleaning the windshield or wiper blades.

!

Do not pull the wiper blade. Otherwise, the wiper blade could be damaged.

!

Do not clean wiper blades too often and do not rub them too hard. Otherwise, the graphite coating could be damaged. This could cause wiper noise.

!

Hold the wiper arm securely when folding back. The windshield could be damaged if the wiper arm smacks against it suddenly.

X

X

X

Fold the windshield wiper arms away from the windshield (

Y page 120).

Carefully clean the wiper blades with a damp cloth.

Fold the windshield wiper arms back again before switching on the ignition.

Cleaning the exterior lighting

!

Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths which are suitable for plastic light lenses.

Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning cloths could scratch or damage the plastic light lenses.

X

Clean the plastic lenses of the exterior lighting using a wet sponge and a mild cleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaning cloths.

Cleaning the mirror turn signals

!

Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning cloths could scratch or damage the plastic lenses of the mirror turn signals.

X

Clean the plastic lenses of the mirror turn signals in the exterior mirror housing using a wet sponge and mild cleaning agent, e.g.

Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaning cloths.

Cleaning the side running board

!

Do not clean the aluminum inserts of the side running board with alkaline or acidic cleaners, such as wheel cleaner. Do not use acidic wheel cleaners to remove brake dust.

The aluminum inserts could otherwise be damaged.

Z

328

Care

Cleaning the sensors

!

If you clean the sensors with a power washer, make sure that you keep a distance of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and the power washer nozzle. Information about the correct distance is available from the equipment manufacturer.

X

Clean sensors : of the driving systems with water, car shampoo and a soft cloth.

Cleaning the rear view camera and 360° camera

!

Do not clean the camera lens and the area around the rear view camera or 360° camera with a power washer.

X

X

X

Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock.

Open the camera cover for cleaning via the multimedia system (see the separate operating instructions).

To clean the camera: use clean water and a soft cloth to clean the camera lens :.

360°camera: if you drive at speeds above

20 mph (30 km/h) or with the SmartKey in position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock, the cover of the

360° camera closes automatically.

Cleaning the exhaust pipe

G

WARNING

The exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim can become very hot. If you come into contact with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn yourself. There is a risk of injury.

Always be particularly careful around the exhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allow these components to cool down before touching them.

!

Mercedes-AMG GLE 63 vehicles with black exhaust pipes: black chromed exhaust tips should not be polished with a chrome polish.

They will otherwise lose their black shine. For optimal care, the faceplates should be rubbed with a lightly oiled cloth after every car wash.

Commercially available engine and care oils are suitable for this.

For heavier soiling, you can apply a fine paintwork polish with a microfiber cloth. Remove the excess polish residue after polishing.

Impurities combined with the effects of road grit and corrosive environmental factors may cause flash rust to form on the surface. You can restore the original shine of the exhaust pipe by cleaning it regularly, especially in winter and after washing.

X

Clean the exhaust pipe with a chrome care product tested and approved by Mercedes-

Benz.

Care

329

Cleaning the trailer tow hitch

H


Dispose of rags soaked in oil and grease in an environmentally responsible manner.

!

Do not clean the ball coupling with a power washer. Do not use solvents.

!

Please note the care instructions in the trailer coupling manufacturer's operating instructions.

X

X

X cleaning. This could lead to irreparable damage to the display.

Before cleaning the display, make sure that it is switched off and has cooled down.

Clean the display surface using a commercially available microfiber cloth and TFT/LCD display cleaner.

Dry the display surface using a dry microfiber cloth.

The ball coupling must be cleaned if it becomes dirty or corroded.

X

X

X

X

Remove rust on the ball of the ball coupling, e.g. with a wire brush.

Remove dirt with a clean, lint-free cloth or a brush.

After cleaning, lightly oil or grease ball coupling :.

Check that the vehicle's trailer tow hitch is working properly.

i

You can also have the maintenance work on the ball coupling and the trailer tow hitch carried out by a qualified specialist workshop.

Interior care

Cleaning the display

!

For cleaning, do not use any of the following:

R alcohol-based thinner or gasoline

R abrasive cleaning agents

R commercially-available household cleaning agents

These may damage the display surface. Do not put pressure on the display surface when

Cleaning the plastic trim

G

WARNING

Care products and cleaning agents containing solvents cause surfaces in the cockpit to become porous. As a result, plastic parts may come loose in the event of air bag deployment. There is a risk of injury.

Do not use any care products and cleaning agents to clean the cockpit.

!

Do not affix the following to plastic surfaces:

R stickers

R films

R scented oil bottles or similar items

You can otherwise damage the plastic.

!

Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent or sunscreen to come into contact with the plastic trim. This maintains the high-quality look of the surfaces.

X

X

Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.

Heavy soiling: use care and cleaning products recommended and approved by

Mercedes-Benz.

The surface may change color temporarily.

Wait until the surface is dry again.

Cleaning the steering wheel and gear or selector lever

X

Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or use leather care agents that have been recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Z

330

Care

Cleaning genuine wood and trim elements

!

Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents such as tar remover, wheel cleaners, polishes or waxes. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the surface.

!

Do not use chrome polish on trim pieces.

The trim pieces have a chrome look but are mostly made of anodized aluminum and can lose their shine if chrome polish is used. Use a damp, lint-free cloth instead when cleaning the trim pieces.

If the chrome-plated trim pieces are very dirty, you can use a chrome polish. If you are unsure as to whether the trim pieces are chrome-plated or not, consult an authorized


X

X

Wipe the wooden trim and trim pieces with a damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.

Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaning products recommended and approved by

Mercedes-Benz.

Cleaning the seat covers

General notes

!

Do not use a microfiber cloth to clean covers made out of real leather, artificial leather or

DINAMICA. If used often, these can damage the cover.

i

Note that regular care is essential to ensure that the appearance and comfort of the covers is retained over time.

Genuine leather seat covers

!

To retain the natural appearance of the leather, observe the following cleaning instructions:

R

Clean genuine leather covers carefully with a damp cloth and then wipe the covers down with a dry cloth.

R

Make sure that the leather does not become soaked. It may otherwise become rough and cracked.

R

Only use leather care agents that have been tested and approved by Mercedes-

Benz. You can obtain these from a qualified specialist workshop.

Leather is a natural product.

It exhibits natural surface characteristics, for example:

R

R differences in the texture marks caused by growth and injury

R slight nuances of color

These are characteristics of leather and not material defects.

Seat covers of other materials

!

Observe the following when cleaning:

R clean artificial leather covers with a cloth moistened with a solution containing 1% detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid).

R clean cloth covers with a microfiber cloth moistened with a solution containing 1% detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid). Rub carefully and always wipe entire seat sections to avoid leaving visible lines. Leave the seat to dry afterwards. Cleaning results depend on the type of dirt and how long it

R has been there.

clean DINAMICA covers with a damp cloth.

Make sure that you wipe entire seat sections to avoid leaving visible lines.

Cleaning the seat belts

G

WARNING

Seat belts can become severely weakened if bleached or dyed. This could cause the seat belts to tear or fail, for instance, in the event of an accident. This poses an increased risk of injury or fatal injury.

Never bleach or dye the seat belts.

!

Do not clean the seat belts using chemical cleaning agents. Do not dry the seat belts by heating at temperatures above 176 ‡ (80 †) or in direct sunlight.

X

Use clean, lukewarm water and soap solution.

Cleaning the headliner and carpets

X

X

Headliner: if it is very dirty, use a soft brush or dry shampoo.

Carpets: use the carpet and textile cleaning agents recommended and approved by

Mercedes-Benz.

Flat tire

331

Where will I find...?

Vehicle tool kit

General notes

The vehicle tool kit can be found in the stowage well under the cargo compartment floor.

Apart from certain country-specific variations, the vehicles are not equipped with a tire-change tool kit. Some tools for changing a wheel are specific to the vehicle. For more information on which tools are required to perform a wheel change on your vehicle, consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Necessary tire-changing tools can include, for example:

R

R

R

R

R

Jack

Wheel chock

Lug wrench

Ratchet wrench

Alignment bolt

Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit

Vehicles with a "Minispare" emergency spare wheel

X

X

A

B

C

D

:

;

=

?

X

Alignment bolt

Velcro fastener

Folding wheel chock

Ratchet wrench

Lug wrench

Jack

Wheel bolts

Towing eye

Open the tailgate.

Lift the cargo compartment floor upwards

(

Y page 301).

Remove the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel (

Y page 373).

X

X

A

B

C

D

E

:

;

=

?

X

Lug wrench

Towing eye

Ratchet wrench

Alignment bolt

Tire sealant filler bottle

Tire inflation compressor

Folding wheel chock

Jack

Wheel bolts

Open the tailgate.


(

Y page 301).

Use the TIREFIT kit (

Y page 333).

Flat tire

Preparing the vehicle

Your vehicle may be equipped with:

R

MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat properties)

Vehicle preparation is not necessary on vehicles with MOExtended tires

R

R a TIREFIT kit (

Y page 331) an emergency spare wheel (only for certain countries)

Information on changing and mounting wheels

(

Y page 366).

X

X

X

Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and level ground, as far away as possible from traffic.

Switch on the hazard warning lamps.

Secure the vehicle against rolling away

(

Y page 159).

332

Flat tire

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

If possible, bring the front wheels into the straight-ahead position.


make sure that the normal vehicle level is selected (

Y page 188).

Vehicles with the Off-Road Engineering

package: make sure that the normal level is selected (

Y page 182).


Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove the


Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door.

The on-board electronics now have status 0.



Start/Stop button from the ignition lock

(

Y page 138).

Make sure that the passengers are not endangered as they do so. Make sure that no one is near the danger area while a wheel is being changed. Anyone who is not directly assisting in the wheel change should, for example, stand behind the barrier.

Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to traffic conditions when doing so.

Close the driver's door.

Unload heavy luggage.

i

Only operate the tire inflation compressor using a 12 V socket, even if the ignition is turned off (

Y page 306).

An emergency cut-out ensures that the onboard voltage does not drop too low. If the onboard voltage is too low, the power to the sockets is automatically cut. This ensures that there is sufficient power to start the engine.

MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat properties)

General notes

With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat characteristics), you can continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one or more tires. The affected tire must not show any clearly visible damage.

You can recognize MOExtended tires by the

MOExtended marking which appears on the sidewall of the tire. You will find this marking next to the tire size designation, the load-bearing capacity and the speed index (

Y page 361).

MOExtended tires may only be used in conjunction with an active tire pressure loss warning system or with an active tire pressure monitor.

If a pressure loss warning message appears in the multifunction display:

R

R

R observe the instructions in the display messages (

Y page 268).

check the tire for damage.

if driving on, observe the following notes.

The driving distance possible in run-flat mode is approximately 50 miles (80 km) when the vehicle is partially laden and approximately 18 miles

(30 km) when the vehicle is fully laden.

In addition to the vehicle load, the driving distance possible depends upon:

R

R vehicle speed road condition

R outside temperature

The driving distance possible in run-flat mode may be reduced by extreme driving conditions or maneuvers, or it can be increased through a moderate style of driving.

The driving distance possible in run-flat mode is counted from the moment the tire pressure loss warning appears in the multifunction display.

You must not exceed a maximum speed of

50 mph (80 km/h).

i

When replacing one or all tires, please observe the following specifications for your vehicle's tires:

R size

R type and

R the "MOExtended" mark

If a tire has gone flat and cannot be replaced with a MOExtended tire, a standard tire may be used as a temporary measure. Make sure that you use the proper size and type (summer or winter tire).

i

Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do not feature runflat properties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop.

Flat tire

333


G

WARNING

When driving in emergency mode, the driving characteristics deteriorate, e.g. when cornering, accelerating quickly and when braking.


Do not exceed the stated maximum speed.

Avoid abrupt steering and driving maneuvers, and driving over obstacles (curbs, potholes, off-road). This applies in particular to a laden vehicle.

Stop driving in emergency mode if:

R you hear banging noises.

R the vehicle starts to shake.

R you see smoke and smell rubber.

R

R

ESP

® is intervening constantly.

there are tears in the sidewalls of the tire.

After driving in emergency mode, have the wheel rims checked at a qualified specialist workshop with regard to their further use. The defective tire must be replaced in every case.

TIREFIT kit


TIREFIT is a tire sealant.

You can use TIREFIT to seal punctures of up to

0.16 in (4 mm), particularly those in the tire tread. You can use TIREFIT at outside temperatures down to Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †).

G

WARNING

In the following situations, the tire sealant is unable to provide sufficient breakdown assistance, as it is unable to seal the tire properly:

R there are cuts or punctures in the tire larger than those mentioned above.

R the wheel rim is damaged.

R you have driven at very low tire pressures or on a flat tire.


Do not drive the vehicle. Contact a qualified specialist workshop.

G

WARNING

The tire sealant is harmful and causes irritation. It must not come into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing or be swallowed. Do not inhale TIREFIT fumes. Keep tire sealant away from children. There is a risk of injury.

If you come into contact with the tire sealant, observe the following:

R

Rinse off the tire sealant from your skin immediately with water.

R

If the tire sealant comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water.

R

If tire sealant is swallowed, immediately rinse your mouth out thoroughly and drink plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting, and seek medical attention immediately.

R

Immediately change out of clothing which has come into contact with tire sealant.

R

If an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical attention immediately.

!

Do not operate the tire inflation compressor for longer than eight minutes at a time without a break. It may otherwise overheat.

The tire inflation compressor can be operated again once it has cooled down.

Comply with the manufacturer’s safety instructions on the sticker on the tire inflation compressor.

Using the TIREFIT kit

X

X

Do not remove any foreign objects which have penetrated the tire, e.g. screws or nails.

Remove the tire sealant bottle, the accompanying TIREFIT sticker and the tire inflation

Z

334

Flat tire

X

X compressor from the stowage well underneath the cargo compartment floor

(

Y page 331).

Affix part : of the TIREFIT sticker to the instrument cluster within the driver's field of vision.

Affix part ; of the TIREFIT sticker near the valve on the wheel with the defective tire.

X

X

X

Pull connector ? with the cable and hose A out of the tire inflation compressor housing.

Screw hose A onto flange B of tire sealant bottle :.

Place tire sealant bottle : head downwards into recess ; of the tire inflation compressor.

X

X

Remove the cap from valve C on the faulty tire.

Screw filler hose D onto valve C.

X

Insert connector ? into a socket in your vehicle.

Cigarette lighter socket: (

Y page 306)

12 V sockets: (

Y page 306)

X

X

Observe the notes on the cigarette lighter

(

Y page 306). Observe the notes on sockets

(

Y page 306).


Y page 138).

Press on and off switch = on the tire inflation compressor to I.

The tire inflation compressor is switched on.

The tire is inflated.

i

First, tire sealant is pumped into the tire. The pressure can briefly rise to approximately

500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi).

Do not switch off the tire inflation compressor during this phase.

X

Let the tire inflation compressor run for a maximum of five minutes. The tire should then have attained a pressure of at least 180 kPa

(1.8 bar/26 psi).

If a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has been attained after five minutes, see "Tire pressure reached" (

Y page 335).

If a tire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has not been attained after five minutes, see "Tire pressure not reached" (

Y page 334).

If tire sealant has escaped, clean it off affected areas as quickly as possible. Use plain water if possible.

If your clothes are soiled with tire sealant, have them cleaned with perchloroethylene at a dry cleaner as soon as possible.

Tire pressure not reached

If a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has not been attained after five minutes:

X

X

X

X

Switch off the tire inflation compressor.

Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the faulty tire.

Note that tire sealant may escape when you unscrew the filler hose.

Very slowly drive forwards or reverse approximately 30 ft (10 m).

Pump up the tire again.

After a maximum of five minutes the tire pressure must be at least 180 kPa (1.8 bar/

26 psi).

G

WARNING

If the required tire pressure is not reached after the specified time, the tire is too badly

Flat tire

335

damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair the tire in this instance. Damaged tires and a tire pressure that is too low can significantly impair the vehicle's braking and driving characteristics. There is a risk of accident.

Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified specialist workshop.

Tire pressure reached

G

WARNING

A tire temporarily sealed with tire sealant impairs the driving characteristics and is not suitable for higher speeds. There is a risk of accident.

You should therefore adapt your driving style accordingly and drive carefully. Do not exceed the specified maximum speed with a tire that has been repaired using tire sealant.

The maximum permissible speed for a tire sealed with tire sealant is 50 mph (80 km/h).

The upper part of the TIREFIT sticker must be affixed to the instrument cluster in the driver's field of vision.

!

Residue from the tire sealant may come out of the filler hose after use. This could cause stains.

Therefore, place the filler hose in the plastic bag which contained the TIREFIT kit.

H


Have the used tire sealant bottle disposed of professionally, e.g. at a qualified specialist workshop.

If a tire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has been attained after five minutes:

X

X

X

X

X

Switch off the tire inflation compressor.

Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the faulty tire.

Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tire inflation compressor.

Pull away immediately.

Stop after driving for approximately ten minutes and check the tire pressure with the tire inflation compressor.

The tire pressure must now be at least

130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi).

G

WARNING

If the required tire pressure is not reached after driving for a short period, the tire is too badly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair the tire in this instance. Damaged tires and a tire pressure that is too low can significantly impair the vehicle's braking and driving characteristics. There is a risk of accident.

Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified specialist workshop.

i

In cases such as the one mentioned above, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the

USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).

X

X

Correct the tire pressure if it is still at least

130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the Tire and

Loading Information placard on the driver's side B-pillar or the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap for values.

To increase the tire pressure: switch on the tire inflation compressor.

X

X

To reduce the tire pressure: press pressure release button E on the filler hose.

The tire pressure is shown on pressure gauge

F.

X

X

X

When the tire pressure is correct, unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the sealed tire.

Screw the valve cap onto the tire valve of the sealed tire.

Pull the tire sealant bottle out of the tire inflation compressor.

The filler hose remains attached to the tire sealant bottle.

Z

336


X

X

X

Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop and have the tire changed there.

Have the tire sealant bottle replaced as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop.

Have the tire sealant bottle replaced every four years at a qualified specialist workshop.


12 V battery - important safety notes

Special tools and expert knowledge are required when working on the battery, e.g. removal and installation. You should therefore have all work involving the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

G

WARNING

Work carried out incorrectly on the battery can lead, for example, to a short circuit and thus damage the vehicle electronics. This can lead to function restrictions applying to safety-relevant systems, e.g the lighting system, the ABS (anti-lock braking system) or the

ESP

®

(Electronic Stability Program). The operating safety of your vehicle may be restricted.

You could lose control of the vehicle, for example:

R when braking

R in the event of abrupt steering maneuvers and/or when the vehicle's speed is not adapted to the road conditions


In the event of a short circuit or a similar incident, contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Do not drive any further. You should have all work involving the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

For further information about ABS and ESP

® see (

Y page 63) and (

Y page 66).

,

G

WARNING

Electrostatic build-up can lead to the creation of sparks, which could ignite the highly explosive gases of a battery. There is a risk of an explosion.

Before handling the battery, touch the vehicle body to remove any existing electrostatic build-up.

The highly flammable gas mixture forms when charging the battery as well as when jump-starting.

Always make sure that neither you nor the battery is electrostatically charged. A build-up of electrostatic charge can be caused, for example:

R

R

R

R by wearing clothing made from synthetic fibers due to friction between clothing and seats if you push or pull the battery across the carpet or other synthetic materials if you wipe the battery with a cloth

G

WARNING

During the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.

R

Make sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with vehicle parts.

R

Never place metal objects or tools on a battery.

R

It is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connecting and disconnecting a battery.

R

When jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected.

R

It is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnecting the jumper cables.

R

Never connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running.

G

WARNING

Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.

Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over the battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash away battery acid immediately with


337

plenty of clean water and seek medical attention.

H


Batteries contain dangerous substances. It is against the law to dispose of them with the household rubbish. They must be collected separately and recycled to protect the environment.

Dispose of batteries in an environmentally friendly manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or a special collection point for used batteries.

!

Have the battery checked regularly at a qualified specialist workshop.

Observe the service intervals in the Maintenance Booklet or contact a qualified specialist workshop for more information.

!

Always have work on batteries carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Should it, in exceptional circumstances, be absolutely necessary to disconnect the 12-volt battery yourself, observe the following:

R secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling

R away.

switch off the ignition.

R always disconnect the negative terminal clamp first, followed by the positive terminal clamp.

After the battery has been disconnected, the transmission is locked in position P.

After the work has been done, install the battery and replace the cover of the positive terminal clamp firmly.

Comply with safety precautions and take protective measures when handling batteries.

Risk of explosion.

Fire, open flames and smoking are prohibited when handling the battery. Avoid creating sparks.

Battery acid is caustic. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing.

Wear suitable protective clothing, especially gloves, apron and faceguard.

Rinse any acid spills immediately with clear water. Contact a physician if necessary.

Wear eye protection.

Keep children away.

Observe this Operator's Manual.

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use batteries which have been tested and approved for your vehicle by

Mercedes-Benz. These batteries provide increased impact protection to prevent vehicle occupants from suffering acid burns should the battery be damaged in the event of an accident.

In order for the battery to achieve the maximum possible service life, it must always be sufficiently charged.

Like other batteries, the vehicle battery may discharge over time if you do not use the vehicle.

In this case, have the battery disconnected at a qualified specialist workshop. You can also charge the battery with a charger recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Contact a qualified specialist workshop for further information.

Have the battery condition of charge checked more frequently if you use the vehicle mainly for short trips or if you leave it standing idle for a lengthy period. Consult a qualified specialist workshop if you wish to leave your vehicle parked for a long period of time.

Remove the SmartKey if you park the vehicle and do not require any electrical consumers.

Z

338

Jump-starting

The vehicle will then use very little energy, thus conserving battery power.

If the power supply has been interrupted, e.g. if you reconnect the battery, you will have to:

R

R set the clock; see the Digital Operator's Manual

On vehicles with a multimedia system and navigation system, the clock is set automatically.

reset the function for folding the exterior mirrors in/out automatically, by folding the mirrors out once (

Y page 108).

Charging the 12 V battery

G

WARNING

During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion.

Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ventilation while charging and jump-starting.

Do not lean over a battery.

G

WARNING


Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over the battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash away battery acid immediately with plenty of clean water and seek medical attention.

G

WARNING

A discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting the vehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion.

Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting.

!

Only use battery chargers with a maximum charging voltage of 14.8 V.

!

Only charge the battery using the jumpstarting connection point.

The jump-starting connection point is in the engine compartment (

Y page 338).

X

X

Open the hood.

Connect the battery charger to the positive terminal and ground point in the same order as when connecting the donor battery in the jump-starting procedure (

Y page 338).

Keep away from fire and open flames. Do not lean over a battery. Never charge the battery if it is still installed in the vehicle, unless you use a battery charger which has been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. A battery charger unit specially adapted for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and tested and approved by Mercedes-

Benz is available as an accessory. It permits the charging of the battery in its installed position.

Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for further information and availability. Read the battery charger's operating instructions before charging the battery.

If, at low temperatures, the indicator lamps/ warning lamps in the instrument cluster do not light up, it is highly likely that the discharged battery has frozen. In this case you may neither jump-start the vehicle nor charge the battery.

The service life of a thawed-out battery may be shorter. The starting characteristics can be impaired, particularly at low temperatures. Have the thawed-out battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Jump-starting

For the jump-starting procedure, use only the jump-starting connection point in the engine compartment, consisting of a positive terminal and a ground point.

G

WARNING


Jump-starting

339

Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over the battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash away battery acid immediately with plenty of clean water and seek medical attention.

G

WARNING

During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion.

Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ventilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery.

G

WARNING

During the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.

R

Make sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with vehicle parts.

R

Never place metal objects or tools on a battery.

R

It is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connecting and disconnecting a battery.

R

When jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected.

R

It is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnecting the jumper cables.

R

Never connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running.

G

WARNING

A discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting the vehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion.

Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting.

!

Vehicles with a gasoline engine: avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, the catalytic converter could be damaged by non-combusted fuel.

If the indicator/warning lamps do not light up at low temperatures, it is very likely that the discharged battery has frozen. In this case you may neither jump-start the vehicle nor charge the battery. The service life of a thawed-out battery may be shorter. The starting characteristics can be impaired, particularly at low temperatures. Have the thawed-out battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Do not start the vehicle using a rapid charging device. If your vehicle's battery is discharged, the engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery using jumper cables.

Observe the following points:

R

R

R

R

R

The battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible, jumpstart the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device.

Vehicles with a gasoline engine: only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaust system are cold.

Do not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first.

Only jump-start from batteries with a 12 V voltage rating.

Only use jumper cables which have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps.

Z

340

Jump-starting

R

If the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connected for a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the battery slightly.

R

Make sure that the two vehicles do not touch.

Make sure that:

R

R

R

X

X

X

X

X

The jumper cables are not damaged.

Bare parts of the terminal clamp do not come into contact with other metal parts while the jumper cables are connected to the battery.

The jumper cables cannot come into contact with parts which can move when the engine is running, such as the V-belt pulley or the fan.

Secure the vehicle by applying the electric parking brake.


Make sure that the ignition is switched off. All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster must be off. When using the SmartKey, turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it

(

Y page 138).

Switch off all electrical consumers, e.g. rear window defroster, lighting, etc.

Open the hood.

Position number B identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jump-starting device.

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Slide cover : of positive terminal ; in the direction of the arrow.

Connect positive terminal ; on your vehicle to positive terminal = of donor battery B using the jumper cable, always begin with positive terminal ; on your own vehicle first.

Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed.

Connect negative terminal ? of donor battery B to ground point A of your vehicle using the jumper cable, connecting the jumper cable to battery of other vehicle B first.

Start the engine.

Before disconnecting the jumper cables, let the engine run for several minutes.

First, remove the jumper cables from ground point A and negative terminal ?, then from positive clamp ; and positive terminal =. Begin each time at the contacts on your own vehicle first.

Close cover : of positive terminal ; after removing the jumper cables.

Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition.

Towing and tow-starting

341

i

Jumper cables and further information regarding jump-starting can be obtained at any qualified specialist workshop.



G

WARNING

Functions relevant to safety are restricted or no longer available if:

R the engine is not running.

R the brake system or the power steering is malfunctioning.

R there is a malfunction in the voltage supply or the vehicle's electrical system.

If your vehicle is being towed, much more force may be necessary to steer or brake.


In such cases, use a tow bar. Before towing, make sure that the steering moves freely.

G

WARNING

When towing or tow-starting another vehicle and its weight is greater than the permissible gross weight of your vehicle, the:

R the towing eye could detach itself

R the vehicle/trailer combination could rollover.


When towing or tow-starting another vehicle, its weight should not be greater than the permissible gross weight of your vehicle.

Details on the permissible gross vehicle weight of your vehicle can be found on the vehicle identification plate (

Y page 377).

!

When Active Brake Assist, Distance Pilot

DISTRONIC or the HOLD function is activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations.

To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate these systems in the following or similar situations:


R in the car wash

!

Make sure that the electric parking brake is released. If the electric parking brake is faulty, visit a qualified specialist workshop.

!

Only secure the tow rope or tow bar at the towing eyes, or the trailer tow hitch, if available. You could otherwise damage the vehicle.

!

Observe the following points when towing with a tow rope:

R

Secure the tow rope on the same side on

R both vehicles.

Ensure that the tow cable is not longer than legally permitted. Mark the tow cable in the middle, e.g. with a white cloth (30 x 30 cm).

This will make other road users aware that the vehicle is being towed.

R

Only secure the tow cable to the towing

R eye.

Observe the brake lamps of the towing vehicle while driving. Always maintain a distance so that the tow rope does not sag.

R

Do not use steel cables or chains to tow your vehicle. You could otherwise damage the vehicle.

!

Do not use the trailer tow hitch for recovery or towing. Do not use the towing eye for recovery. this could damage the vehicle. If in doubt, have the vehicle recovered using a crane.

!

When towing, pull away slowly and smoothly. Pull the towed vehicle as straight as possible and not at an acute angle. Excessive tractive power could damage the vehicles.

When towing, it is preferable to use a rigid towing bar as opposed to a tow rope. A rigid towing bar helps to keep the tractive power low.

!

When towing vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, use the key instead of the Start/Stop button.

Otherwise, the automatic transmission may shift to position P when the driver's or frontpassenger door are opened, which could lead to damage to the transmission.

!

Do not tow with sling-type equipment. This could damage the vehicle.

!

Vehicles with differential locks: make sure the differential locks are in automatic mode.

Z

342


When towing, the differential locks must not be switched on. The transmission may otherwise be damaged.

!

The vehicle can be towed a maximum of

30 miles (50km). The towing speed of 30 mph

(50 km/h) must not be exceeded.

If the vehicle has to be towed more than

30 miles (50km), the entire vehicle must be raised and transported.

It is better to have the vehicle transported than to have it towed away.

If the vehicle has suffered transmission damage, have it transported on a transporter or trailer.

The automatic transmission must be in position

N when the vehicle is being towed.

The battery must be connected and charged.

Otherwise, you:

R

R

R cannot turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock cannot release the electric parking brake cannot shift the automatic transmission to position N

Disarm the automatic locking feature before the vehicle is towed (

Y page 239). You could otherwise be locked out when pushing or towing the vehicle.

Installing/removing the towing eye

Installing the towing eye

The brackets for the screw-in towing eye are located in the bumpers. They are at the front and rear behind covers :;.

X

Remove the towing eye from the vehicle tool

X

X

X

X kit (

Y page 331).

To open the cover at the front: press the mark on cover : inwards in the direction of the arrow.

To open the cover at the rear: insert a flat, blunt object into the cutout and lever cover ; out of the bumper.

Take cover : or ; off the opening.

Screw in the towing eye clockwise as far as it will go and tighten it.

Removing the towing eye

X

X

X

Unscrew and remove the towing eye.

Position cover : or ; in the bumper and press the cover on until it engages.

Place the towing eye in the vehicle tool kit.

Towing a vehicle with both axles on the ground

The automatic transmission automatically shifts to position P when you open the driver's or frontpassenger door or when you remove the Smart-

Key from the ignition lock.

In order to ensure that the automatic transmission stays in position N when towing the vehicle, you must observe the following points:

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Make sure that the vehicle is stationary.


Depress and hold the brake pedal.


N.

Leave the SmartKey in position 2 in the ignition lock.



Switch on the hazard warning lamps

(

Y page 114).

In order to signal a change of direction when towing the vehicle with the hazard warning lamps switched on, use the combination switch as usual. In this case, only the indicator lamps for the direction of travel flash. After resetting

Fuses

343

the combination switch, the hazard warning lamp starts flashing again.

Transporting the vehicle

4MATIC vehicles/vehicles with automatic transmission

Information on 4MATIC vehicles

!

Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed with either the front or the rear axle raised, as doing so will damage the transmission.

Vehicles with 4MATIC may either be towed away with both axles on the ground or be loaded up and transported.

If the vehicle's transmission, front, or rear axle is damaged, have the vehicle transported on a truck or trailer.

In the event of damage to the electrical sys-

tem: if the battery is defective, the automatic transmission will be locked in position P. To shift the automatic transmission to position N, you must provide power to the vehicle's electrical system in the same way as when jump-starting

(

Y page 338).

Have the vehicle transported on a transporter or trailer.

!

When the vehicle is loaded for transport, the front and rear axles must be stationary and on the same transportation vehicle. Positioning over the connection point of the transport vehicle is not permitted. The drive train may otherwise be damaged.

All vehicles

!

You may only secure the vehicle by the wheels, not by parts of the vehicle such as axle or steering components. Otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged.

The towing eye can be used to pull the vehicle onto a trailer or transporter for transporting purposes.

X

X



N.

As soon as the vehicle has been loaded:

X

X

X

X

Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by applying the electric parking brake.

Shift the automatic transmission to position P.

Turn the SmartKey to position 0in the ignition lock and remove it.

Secure the vehicle.

Tow-starting (emergency engine starting)

!

Vehicles with automatic transmission must not be tow-started. You could otherwise damage the automatic transmission.

You can find information on "Jump-starting" under (

Y page 338).

Fuses


G

WARNING

If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if you replace it with a fuse with a higher amperage, the electric cables could be overloaded.

This could result in a fire. There is a risk of an accident and injury.

Always replace faulty fuses with the specified new fuses having the correct amperage.

!

For the fuse boxes in the engine compartment and under the rear bench seat, only use fuses with the suffix "S". Otherwise, components or systems could be damaged.

!

Make sure that no moisture can enter the fuse box when the cover is open.

Z

344

Fuses

!

When closing the cover, make sure that it is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair the operation of the fuses.

The fuses in your vehicle serve to close down faulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the components on the circuit and their functions stop operating.

Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the same rating, which you can recognize by the color and value. The fuse ratings are listed in the fuse allocation chart.

The fuse allocation chart is located in the fuse box under the rear bench seat (

Y page 345).

If a newly inserted fuse also blows, have the cause traced and rectified at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz

Center.

Dashboard fuse box

!

Do not use a pointed object such as a screwdriver to open the cover in the dashboard. You could damage the dashboard or the cover.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have this work performed at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Before changing a fuse

Observe the important safety notes

(

Y page 343)

X

X


Switch off all electrical consumers.

X


or, in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function or KEYLESS‑GO

X


X

The vehicle electronics now have status 0.


The driver’s door can be closed again.

Secure the vehicle against rolling away

(

Y page 159).

All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster must be off.

The fuses are located in various fuse boxes:

R

R

R

Fuse box on the front-passenger side of the dashboard

Fuse box in the engine compartment on the right-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed in the direction of travel

Fuse box under the rear bench seat

X

X

X

X

Open the front-passenger door.

To open: pull cover : outwards in the direction of the arrow and remove it.

To close: clip in cover : on the front of the dashboard.

Fold cover : inwards until it engages.

Fuse box in the engine compartment

G

WARNING

When the hood is open and the windshield wipers are set in motion, you can be injured by the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.

Always switch off the windshield wipers and the ignition before opening the hood.

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Open the hood (

Y page 319).

Use a dry cloth to remove any moisture from the fuse box.

To open: open clamps ;.

Fold up cover : in the direction of the arrow and remove it.

To close: check whether the seal is seated correctly in cover :.

Insert cover : at the side of the fuse box into the retainers.

Fold down cover : and close clamps ;.

Close the hood.

Fuse box under the rear bench seat

X

X

X

Fold the left-hand rear bench seat forward

(

Y page 297).

To open: reach into recesses ; on each side of fuse box cover :.

Fold cover : up in the direction of the arrow and remove it from the fuse box.

i

The fuse allocation chart is located in a recess at the side of the fuse box.

X

X

X

To close: place cover : on the fuse box.

Press cover : down until you feel the clamps engage.

Fold back the left-hand rear bench seat

(

Y page 297).

Fuses

345

Z

346

Operation


G

WARNING

If wheels and tires of the wrong size are used, the wheel brakes or suspension components may be damaged. There is a risk of an accident.

Always replace wheels and tires with those that fulfill the specifications of the original part.

When replacing wheels, make sure to use the correct:

R designation

R model

When replacing tires, make sure to use the correct:

R designation

R manufacturer

R model

G

WARNING

A flat tire severely impairs the driving, steering and braking characteristics of the vehicle.

There is a risk of accident.

Tires without run-flat characteristics:

R do not drive with a flat tire.

R immediately replace the flat tire with your emergency spare wheel or spare wheel, or consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Tires with run-flat characteristics:

R pay attention to the information and warning notices on MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat characteristics).

Accessories that are not approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz or are not being used correctly can impair the operating safety.

Before purchasing and using non-approved accessories, visit a qualified specialist workshop and inquire about:

R

R

R suitability legal stipulations factory recommendations

Further information regarding wheels and tires can be found under "Wheel/tire combinations"

(

Y page 371).

You can ask for information regarding permitted wheel-tire combinations at an authorized


Tire pressure information can be found:

R

R

R on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side in the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap in the "Tire pressure" section

Operation

Information on driving

Check the tire pressure when the vehicle is heavily laden and adjust prior to a trip.

While driving, pay attention to vibrations, noises and unusual handling characteristics, e.g. pulling to one side. This may indicate that the wheels or tires are damaged. If you suspect that a tire is defective, reduce your speed immediately. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible to check the wheels and tires for damage. Hidden tire damage could also be causing the unusual handling characteristics. If you find no signs of damage, have the tires and wheels checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

When parking your vehicle, make sure that the tires do not get deformed by the curb or other obstacles. If it is necessary to drive over curbs, speed humps or similar elevations, try to do so slowly and at an obtuse angle. Otherwise, the tires, particularly the sidewalls, may be damaged.

Regular checking of wheels and tires

G

WARNING

Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pressure loss. As a result, you could lose control of your vehicle. There is a risk of accident.

Check the tires regularly for signs of damage and replace any damaged tires immediately.

Operation

347

Check wheels and tires for damage at least once a month. Check wheels and tires after driving off-road or on rough roads. Damaged wheels can cause a loss of tire pressure. Pay particular attention to damage such as:

R

R

R

R cuts in the tires punctures tears in the tires bulges on tires

R deformation or severe corrosion on wheels

Regularly check the tire tread depth and the condition of the tread across the whole width of the tire (

Y page 347). If necessary, turn the front wheels to full lock in order to inspect the inner side of the tire surface.

All wheels must have a valve cap to protect the valve against dirt and moisture. Do not mount anything onto the valve other than the standard valve cap or other valve caps approved by

Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle. Do not use any other valve caps or systems, e.g. tire pressure monitoring systems.

Regularly check the pressure of all the tires particularly prior to long trips. Adjust the tire pressure as necessary (

Y page 349).

Observe the notes on the emergency spare wheel (

Y page 372).

The service life of tires depends, among other things, on the following factors:

R

R

R

Driving style

Tire pressure

Distance covered

Minimum tire tread depth for:

R

Summer tires: â in (3 mm)

R

M+S tires: ã in (4 mm)

For safety reasons, replace the tires before the legally prescribed limit for the minimum tire tread depth is reached.

Marking : shows where the bar indicator

(arrow) for tread wear is integrated into the tire tread.

Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by law.

Six indicators are positioned on the tire tread.

They are visible once a tread depth of approximately á in (1.6 mm) has been reached. If this is the case, the tire is so worn that it must be replaced.

Notes on tire tread

G

WARNING

Insufficient tire tread will reduce tire traction.

The tire is no longer able to dissipate water.

This means that on wet road surfaces, the risk of hydroplaning increases, in particular where speed is not adapted to suit the driving conditions. There is a risk of accident.

If the tire pressure is too high or too low, tires may exhibit different levels of wear at different locations on the tire tread. Thus, you should regularly check the tread depth and the condition of the tread across the entire width of all tires.

Selecting, mounting and replacing tires

R

R

R

R

R

Only mount tires and wheels of the same type and make.

Exception: it is permissible to install a different type or make in the event of a flat tire.

Observe here the "MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat characteristics)" section

(

Y page 332).

Only mount tires of the correct size onto the wheels.

Break in new tires at moderate speeds for the first 60 miles (100 km). They only reach their full performance after this distance.

Do not drive with tires which have too little tread depth, as this significantly reduces the traction on wet roads (hydroplaning).

Replace the tires after six years at the latest, regardless of wear.

Z

348


Observe the notes on the emergency spare wheel (

Y page 372).

Check the tires regularly for signs of damage and replace any damaged tires immediately.

MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat properties)

With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat characteristics), you can continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one or more tires.

MOExtended tires may only be used in conjunction with an active tire pressure loss warning system or with an active tire pressure monitor and on wheels specifically tested by Mercedes-

Benz.

Notes on driving with MOExtended tires with a flat tire (

Y page 332).

Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g.

winter tires. A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop.


General notes

Have your vehicle winter-proofed at a qualified specialist workshop at the onset of winter.

Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel" section (

Y page 366).

Driving with summer tires

At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), the elasticity of summer tires and therefore also the traction and braking capability are reduced considerably. Change the tires on your vehicle to

M+S tires. Using summer tires at very cold temperatures could cause cracks to form, thereby damaging the tires permanently. Mercedes-

Benz cannot accept responsibility for this type of damage.

G

WARNING

Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pressure loss. As a result, you could lose control of your vehicle. There is a risk of accident.

M+S tires

G

WARNING

M+S tires with a tire tread depth of less than

ã in (4 mm) are not suitable for use in winter and do not provide sufficient traction. There is a risk of an accident.

M+S tires with a tread depth of less than ã in

(4 mm) must be replaced immediately.

At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), use winter tires or all-season tires. Both types of tire are identified by the M+S marking.

Only winter tires bearing the i snowflake symbol in addition to the M+S marking provide the best possible grip in wintry road conditions.

Only these tires will allow driving safety systems such as ABS and ESP ® to function optimally in winter. These tires have been developed specifically for driving in snow.

Use M+S tires of the same make and tread on all wheels to maintain safe handling characteristics.

Always observe the maximum permissible speed specified for the M+S tires you have mounted.

Once the winter tires are mounted:

X

X

X

Check the tire pressures (

Y page 352).

Restart the tire pressure monitor

(

Y page 353).

Vehicles for Canada: restart the tire pressure loss warning system (

Y page 353).

Information about driving with an emergency spare wheel (

Y page 372).

Snow chains

G

WARNING

If snow chains are installed to the front wheels, they may drag against the vehicle body or chassis components. This could cause damage to the vehicle or the tires.


Tire pressure

349

To avoid hazardous situations:

R never install snow chains to the front wheels

R always install snow chains in pairs to the rear wheels.

!

You must drive at raised vehicle level (height

1) if snow chains have been installed. The vehicle may otherwise be damaged.

!

Vehicles with ADS (Adaptive Damping

System): do not use the sport mode when driving with snow chains mounted. The vehicle may otherwise be damaged.

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use snow chains that have been specially approved for your vehicle by

Mercedes-Benz, or are of a corresponding standard of quality. For more information, please contact a qualified specialist workshop.

Install the snow chains on all driven wheels for maximum tractive power and driving stability. If you own snow chains for two driven wheels only, install the snow chains to the wheels on the rear axle. The vehicle then remains more stable under braking.

If you intend to mount snow chains, please bear the following points in mind:

R

R

R

R

Snow chains may not be mounted on all wheel/tire combinations. Permissible wheel/tire combinations (

Y page 371).

Only use snow chains when driving on roads completely covered by snow. Remove the snow chains as soon as possible when you come to a road that is not snow-covered.

Local regulations may restrict the use of snow chains. Observe the appropriate regulations if you wish to mount snow chains.

Do not exceed the maximum permissible speed of 30 mph (50 km/h).

R

Never use Parking Pilot when snow chains are installed (

Y page 193).

You may wish to deactivate ESP ® when pulling away with snow chains installed (

Y page 67).

You can thereby allow the wheels to spin in a controlled manner, achieving an increased driving force (cutting action).

Information about driving with an emergency spare wheel (

Y page 372).

Tire pressure

Tire pressure specifications


G

WARNING

Underinflated or overinflated tires pose the following risks:

R the tires may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase.

R the tires may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire traction.

R the driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired.


Follow recommended tire inflation pressures and check the pressure of all the tires including the spare wheel:

R monthly, at least

R if the load changes

R before beginning a long journey

R under different operating conditions, e.g.

off-road driving


The data on the Tire and Loading Information placard and tire pressure table shown here are examples. Tire pressure specifications are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data shown here. The tire pressure specifications that are valid for your vehicle can be found on the Tire and Loading Information placard and tire pressure table on the vehicle.

General notes

The recommended tire pressures for the tires mounted at the factory can be found on the labels described here.

Operation with emergency spare wheel:

Information on operation with the emergency spare wheel can be found under "Emergency spare wheel" (

Y page 372).

Operation with a trailer: the applicable value for the rear axle is the maximum tire pressure value stated in the table inside the fuel filler flap.

Z

350

Tire pressure

Further information on tire pressures can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.

Tire and Loading Information placard

The load conditions "partially laden" and "fully laden" are defined in the table for different numbers of occupants and amounts of luggage. The actual number of seats may differ.

: Recommended tire pressures

The Tire and Loading Information placard is on the B-pillar on the driver's side (

Y page 356).

The Tire and Loading Information placard contains the recommended tire pressures for cold tires. The recommended tire pressures are valid for the maximum permissible load and up to the maximum permissible vehicle speed.

Tire pressure table

The tire pressure table is on the inside of the fuel filler flap. It shows the tire pressure for all tires permitted at the factory for this vehicle; see illustration (example).

The tire pressure table contains the recommended pressures for cold tires for various operating conditions, i.e. differing load and speed conditions.

If a tire size precedes a tire pressure, the following tire pressure information is only valid for that tire size; see illustration (example).

Some tire pressure tables show only the rim diameters instead of the full tire size, e.g. R18.

The rim diameter is part of the tire size and can be found on the tire sidewall (

Y page 361).

If the tire pressures have been set to the lower values for lighter loads and/or lower road speeds, the pressures should be reset to the higher values:

R if you want to drive with an increased load and/or

R if you want to drive at higher road speeds

The tire pressures for increased loads and/or higher road speeds, shown in the tire pressure table, may have a negative effect on driving comfort.

If the tire pressure is not set correctly, this can lead to an excessive build up of heat and a sudden loss of pressure.

For more information, contact a qualified specialist workshop.

Tire pressure

351

Important notes on tire pressure

G

WARNING

If the tire pressure drops repeatedly, the wheel, valve or tire may be damaged. Tire pressure that is too low may result in a tire blow-out. There is a risk of an accident.

R

Check the tire for foreign objects.

R

Check whether the wheel is losing air or the valve is leaking.

If you are unable to rectify the damage, contact a qualified specialist workshop.

G

WARNING

If you fit unsuitable accessories onto tire valves, the tire valves may be overloaded and malfunction, which can cause tire pressure loss. Due to their design, retrofitted tire pressure monitors keep the tire valve open. This can also result in tire pressure loss. There is a risk of an accident.

Only screw the standard valve cap or other valve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle onto the tire valve.

Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tire pressure. The outer appearance of a tire does not permit any reliable conclusion about the tire pressure. On vehicles equipped with the electronic tire pressure monitor, the tire pressure can be checked in the on-board computer.

The tire temperature and pressure increase when the vehicle is in motion. This is dependent on the driving speed and the load.

Therefore, you should only correct tire pressures when the tires are cold.

The tires are cold:

R

R if the vehicle has been parked with the tires out of direct sunlight for at least three hours and if the vehicle has not been driven further than

1 mile (1.6 km)

The tire temperature changes depending on the outside temperature, the vehicle speed and the tire load. If the tire temperature changes by

18 ‡ (10 †), the tire pressure changes by approximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/1.5 psi). Take this into account when checking the pressure of warm tires. Only correct the tire pressure if it is too low for the current operating conditions. If you check the tire pressure when the tires are warm, the resulting value will be higher than if the tires were cold. This is normal. Do not reduce the tire pressure to the value specified for cold tires. The tire pressure would otherwise be too low.

Observe the recommended tire pressures for cold tires:

R

R

R on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side in the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap

(

Y page 155) printed in yellow on the rim of the emergency/collapsible spare wheel (depending on vehicle equipment)

Underinflated or overinflated tires

Underinflated tires

G

WARNING

Tires with pressure that is too low can overheat and burst as a consequence. In addition, they also suffer from excessive and/or irregular wear, which can severely impair the braking properties and the driving characteristics.


Avoid tire pressures that are too low in all the tires, including the spare wheel.

Underinflated tires may:

R

R

R

R overheat, leading to tire defects adversely affect handling wear excessively and/or unevenly have an adverse effect on fuel consumption

Overinflated tires

G

WARNING

Tires with excessively high pressure can burst because they are damaged more easily by road debris, potholes etc. In addition, they also suffer from irregular wear, which can severely impair the braking properties and the driving characteristics. There is a risk of an accident.

Z

352

Tire pressure

Avoid tire pressures that are too high in all the tires, including the spare wheel.

Overinflated tires may:

R

R

R

R

R increase the braking distance adversely affect handling wear excessively and/or unevenly have an adverse effect on ride comfort be more susceptible to damage

Maximum tire pressures

Checking tire pressures manually

X

X

To determine and set the correct tire pressure, proceed as follows:

X

X

X

X

X

Remove the valve cap of the tire that is to be checked.

Press the tire pressure gage securely onto the valve.

Read the tire pressure and compare it to the recommended value on the Tire and Loading

Information placard or the tire pressure table

(

Y page 349).

If the tire pressure is too low, increase the tire pressure to the recommended value.

If the tire pressure is too high, release air. To do so, press down the metal pin in the valve, using the tip of a pen for example. Then check the tire pressure again using the tire pressure checker.

Screw the valve cap onto the valve.

Repeat these steps for the other tires.

:

Example: maximum permissible tire pressure

Never exceed the maximum permissible tire inflation pressure. Always observe the recommended tire pressure for your vehicle when adjusting the tire pressure (

Y page 349).

i

The actual values for tires are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the values in the illustration.

Checking the tire pressures


Observe the notes on tire pressure

(

Y page 349).

Information on air pressure for the tires on your vehicle can be found:

R

R

R on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side in the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap in the "Tire pressure" section

Tire pressure loss warning system

General notes

While the vehicle is in motion, the tire pressure loss warning system monitors the set tire pressure using the rotational speed of the wheels.

This enables the system to detect significant pressure loss in a tire. If the speed of rotation of a wheel changes as a result of a loss of pressure, a corresponding warning message will appear in the multifunction display.

You can recognize the tire pressure loss warning by the Run Flat Indicator Active Press

'OK' to Restart message which appears in the Service menu of the multifunction display.

Information on the message display can be found in the "Restarting the tire pressure loss warning system" section (

Y page 353).


The tire pressure warning system does not warn you of an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observe the notes on the recommended tire pressure

(

Y page 349).

The tire pressure loss warning does not replace the need to regularly check the tire pressure. An even loss of pressure on several tires at the

Tire pressure

353

same time cannot be detected by the tire pressure loss warning system.

The tire pressure monitor is not able to warn you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tire is penetrated by a foreign object. In the event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoid abrupt steering movements.

The function of the tire pressure loss warning system is limited or delayed if:

R

R

R

R

R snow chains are mounted on your vehicle's tires.

road conditions are wintry.

you are driving on sand or gravel.

you adopt a very sporty driving style (cornering at high speeds or driving with high rates of acceleration).

you are driving with a heavy load (in the vehicle or on the roof).

Restarting the tire pressure loss warning system

Restart the tire pressure loss warning system if you have:

R

R

R changed the tire pressure changed the wheels or tires mounted new wheels or tires

X

X

X

X

X

X

Before restarting, make sure that the tire pressures are set properly on all four tires for the respective operating conditions.

The recommended tire pressure can be found on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar. Additionally, a tire pressure table is attached to the fuel filler flap. The tire pressure loss warning system can only give reliable warnings if you have set the correct tire pressure. If an incorrect tire pressure is set, these incorrect values will be monitored.

Also observe the notes in the section on tire pressures (

Y page 349).

Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock (

Y page 138).

Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Service menu.


Tire Pressure .

Press the a button.

The Run Flat Indicator Active Press

'OK' to Restart message appears in the multifunction display.

If you wish to confirm the restart:

X

X

X

Press the a button.

The Tire Pressure Now OK?

message appears in the multifunction display.

Press the 9 or : button to select Yes .

Press the a button.

The Run Flat Indicator Restarted message appears in the multifunction display.

After a teach-in period, the tire pressure loss warning system will monitor the set tire pressures of all four tires.

If you wish to cancel the restart:

X or

X

X

Press the % button.

When the Tire Pressure Now OK?

message appears, press the 9 or : button to select Cancel .

Press the a button.

The tire pressure values stored at the last restart will continue to be monitored.

Tire pressure monitor

General notes

If a tire pressure monitor is installed, the vehicle's wheels have sensors that monitor the tire pressures in all four tires. The tire pressure monitor warns you if the pressure drops in one or more of the tires. The tire pressure monitor only functions if the corresponding sensors are installed in all wheels.

Information on tire pressures is displayed in the multifunction display. After a few minutes of driving, the current tire pressure of each tire is shown in the Serv.

menu of the multifunction display, see illustration (example).

For information on the message display, refer to the "Checking the tire pressure electronically" section (

Y page 355).

Z

354

Tire pressure


G

WARNING

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked at least once a month when cold and inflated to the pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver's door B-pillar or the tire pressure label on the inside of the fuel filler flap. If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the Tire and Loading Information placard or the tire pressure label, you should determine the proper tire pressure for those tires.

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires are significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if underinflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the

TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

USA only:

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a

TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate if the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the warning lamp will flash for approximately a minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will be repeated every time the vehicle is started as long as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the mounting of incompatible replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

It is the driver's responsibility to set the tire pressure to that recommended for cold tires which is suitable for the operating situation

(

Y page 349). Note that the correct tire pressure for the current operating situation must first be taught-in to the tire pressure monitor. If there is a substantial loss of pressure, the warning threshold for the warning message is aligned to the reference values taught-in. Restart the tire pressure monitor after adjusting the pressure of the cold tires (

Y page 355). The current pressures are saved as new reference values. As a result, a warning message will appear if the tire pressure drops significantly.

The tire pressure monitor does not warn you of an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observe the notes on the recommended tire pressure

(

Y page 349).

The tire pressure monitor is not able to warn you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tire is penetrated by a foreign object. In the event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoid abrupt steering movements.

The tire pressure monitor has a yellow warning lamp in the instrument cluster for indicating pressure loss or a malfunction. Whether the warning lamp flashes or lights up indicates whether a tire pressure is too low or the tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning:

R

R if the warning lamp is lit continuously, the tire pressure on one or more tires is significantly too low. The tire pressure monitor is not malfunctioning.

if the warning lamp flashes for around a minute and then remains lit constantly, the tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning.

Tire pressure

355

In addition to the warning lamp, a message appears in the multifunction display. Observe the information on display messages

(

Y page 268).

It may take up to ten minutes for a malfunction of the tire pressure monitor to be indicated. A malfunction will be indicated by the tire pressure warning lamp flashing for approximately one minute and then remaining lit. When the malfunction has been rectified, the tire pressure warning lamp goes out after a few minutes of driving.

The tire pressure values indicated by the onboard computer may differ from those measured at a gas station with a pressure gauge. The tire pressures shown by the on-board computer refer to those measured at sea level. At high altitudes, the tire pressure values indicated by a pressure gauge are higher than those shown by the on-board computer. In this case, do not reduce the tire pressures.

The operation of the tire pressure monitor can be affected by interference from radio transmitting equipment (e.g. radio headphones, two-way radios) that may be being operated in or near the vehicle.

Checking the tire pressure electronically

X

X

X

X

Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock (

Y page 138).


menu.


Tire Pressure .

Press the a button.

The current tire pressure of each tire is shown in the multifunction display.

If the vehicle has been parked for longer than

20 minutes, the Tire pressure will be displayed after driving a few minutes message appears.

After a teach-in process, the tire pressure monitor automatically detects new wheels or new sensors. As long as a clear allocation of the tire pressure value to the individual wheels is not possible, the Tire Pressure Monitor Active display message is shown instead of the tire pressure display. The tire pressures are already being monitored.

If an emergency spare wheel is mounted, the system may continue to show the tire pressure of the wheel that has been removed for a few minutes. If this occurs, note that the value displayed for the position where the spare wheel is mounted is not the same as the current tire pressure of the emergency spare wheel.

Tire pressure monitor warning messages

If the tire pressure monitor detects a pressure loss in one or more tires, a warning message is shown in the multifunction display. The yellow tire pressure warning lamp then lights up.

R

R

If the Please Correct Tire Pressure message appears in the multifunction display, the tire pressure in at least one tire is too low.

The tire pressure must be corrected when the opportunity arises.

If the Check Tires message appears in the multifunction display, the tire pressure in at least one tire has dropped significantly. The

R tires must be checked.

If the Warning Tire Malfunction message appears in the multifunction display, the tire pressure in at least one tire has dropped suddenly. The tires must be checked.

Be sure to observe the instructions and safety notes in the display messages in the "Tires" section (

Y page 268).

If the wheel positions on the vehicle are rotated, the tire pressures may be displayed for the wrong positions for a short time. This is rectified after a few minutes of driving, and the tire pressures are displayed for the correct positions.

Restarting the tire pressure monitor

When you restart the tire pressure monitor, all existing warning messages are deleted and the warning lamps go out. The monitor uses the currently set tire pressures as the reference values for monitoring. In most cases, the tire pressure monitor will automatically detect the new reference values after you have changed the tire pressure. However, you can also define reference values manually as described here. The tire pressure monitor then monitors the new tire pressure values.

X

Set the tire pressure to the value recommended for the corresponding driving situation on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver's side B-pillar (

Y page 349).

Z

356

Loading the vehicle

X

X

X

X

X

X

You can find more tire pressure values for various operating conditions in the tire pressure table inside the fuel filler flap

(

Y page 349).

Make sure that the tire pressure is correct on all four wheels.

Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock.


menu.


Tire Pressure .

Press the a button.

The multifunction display shows the current tire pressure for the individual tires or the

Tire pressure will be displayed after driving a few minutes message.

Press the : button.

The Use Current Pressures as New Ref‐ erence Values message appears in the multifunction display.

If you wish to confirm the restart:

X

Press the a button.

The Tire Press. Monitor Restarted message appears in the multifunction display.

After driving for a few minutes, the system checks whether the current tire pressures are within the specified range. The new tire pressures are then accepted as reference values and monitored.

If you wish to cancel the restart:

X

Press the % button.

The tire pressure values stored at the last restart will continue to be monitored.

Radio type approval for the tire pressure monitor

Country Radio type approval number

USA

Canada

FCC ID: MRXMW2433A

FCC ID: MRXGG4

FCC ID: MRXMC34MA4

IC: 2546A-MW2433A

IC: 2546A-GG4

IC: 2546A-MC34MA4


Instruction labels for tires and loads

G

WARNING

Overloaded tires can overheat, causing a blowout. Overloaded tires can also impair the steering and driving characteristics and lead to brake failure. There is a risk of accident.

Observe the load rating of the tires. The load rating must be at least half of the GAWR of your vehicle. Never overload the tires by exceeding the maximum load.

Two instruction labels on your vehicle show the maximum possible load.

(1) The Tire and Loading Information placard is on the B-pillar on the driver's side. The Tire and Loading Information placard shows the maximum permissible number of occupants and the maximum permissible vehicle load. It also contains details of the tire sizes and corresponding pressures for tires mounted at the factory.

(2) The vehicle identification plate is on the Bpillar on the driver's side. The vehicle identification plate informs you of the gross vehicle weight rating. It is made up of the vehicle weight, all vehicle occupants, the fuel and the cargo. You can also find information about the maximum gross axle weight rating on the front and rear axle.

The maximum gross axle weight rating is the maximum weight that can be carried by one axle (front or rear axle). Never exceed the maximum load or the maximum gross axle weight rating for the front or rear axle.


357

Number of seats

:

B-pillar, driver's side

Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight rating

Maximum number of seats : indicates the maximum number of occupants allowed to travel in the vehicle. This information can be found on the Tire and Loading Information placard.

i

The specifications shown on the Tire and

Loading Information placard in the illustration are examples. The number of seats is vehiclespecific and can differ from the details shown.

The number of seats in your vehicle can be found on the Tire and Loading Information placard.

X

Specification for maximum gross vehicle weight : is listed in the Tire and Loading

Information placard: "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed

XXX kilograms or XXX lbs."

The gross weight of all vehicle occupants, load and luggage must not exceed the specified value.

i

The specifications shown on the Tire and

Loading Information placard in the illustration are examples. The maximum permissible gross vehicle weight rating is vehicle-specific and may differ from that in the illustration.

You can find the valid maximum permissible gross vehicle weight rating for your vehicle on the Tire and Loading Information placard.

Determining the correct load limit

Step-by-step instructions

The following steps have been developed as required of all manufacturers under Title 49,

Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the "National Traffic and Motor Vehicle

Safety Act of 1966".

X

X

X

X

Step 1: Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle’s

Tire and Loading Information placard.

Step 2: Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

Step 3: Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or

XXX lbs.

Step 4: The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals

1400 lbs and there will be five 150-lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of avail-

Z

358


X able cargo and luggage load capacity is

650 lbs (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).

Step 5: Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4.

Example: steps 1 to 3

The following table shows examples on how to calculate total and cargo load capacities with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. The following examples use a load limit of

1500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only. Make sure you are using the actual load limit for your vehicle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard (

Y page 356).

The greater the combined weight of the occupants, the lower the maximum luggage load.

Additional information when towing a trailer (

Y page 222).

Step 1

Example 1

1500 lbs (680 kg)

Combined maximum weight of occupants and cargo (data from the Tire and Loading

Information placard)

Example 2

1500 lbs (680 kg)

Example 3

1500 lbs (680 kg)

Step 2

Number of people in the vehicle (driver and occupants)

Distribution of the occupants

Weight of the occupants

Gross weight of all occupants

Example 1

5

Front: 2

Rear: 3

Occupant 1: 150 lbs

(68 kg)

Occupant 2: 180 lbs

(82 kg)

Occupant 3: 160 lbs

(73 kg)

Occupant 4: 140 lbs

(63 kg)

Occupant 5: 120 lbs

(54 kg)

750 lbs (340 kg)

Example 2

3

Example 3

1

Front: 1

Rear: 2

Occupant 1: 200 lbs

(91 kg)

Occupant 2: 190 lbs

(86 kg)

Occupant 3: 150 lbs

(68 kg)

Front: 1

Occupant 1: 150 lbs

(68 kg)

540 lbs (245 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg)

All about wheels and tires

359

Step 3

Permissible load (maximum gross vehicle weight rating from the

Tire and Loading Information placard minus the gross weight of all occupants)

Example 1

1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò

750 lbs (340 kg) =

750 lbs (340 kg)

Example 2

1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò

540 lbs (245 kg)

=960 lbs (435 kg)

Example 3

1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò

150 lbs (68 kg) =

1350 lbs (612 kg)

Vehicle identification plate

Even if you have calculated the total cargo carefully, you should still make sure that the gross vehicle weight rating and the gross axle weight rating are not exceeded. Details can be found on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle (

Y page 356).

Permissible Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

(GVWR): the gross weight of the vehicle, all passengers, load and trailer load/noseweight (if applicable) must not exceed the permissible gross vehicle weight.

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): the maximum permissible weight that can be carried by one axle (front or rear axle).

To ensure that your vehicle does not exceed the maximum permissible values (gross vehicle weight and maximum gross axle weight rating), have your loaded vehicle (including driver, occupants, cargo, and full trailer load if applicable) weighed on a suitable vehicle weighbridge.


Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards

Overview of Tire Quality Grading Standards

Trailer load/noseweight

The trailer load/noseweight affects the gross weight of the vehicle. If a trailer is attached, the trailer load/noseweight is included in the load along with occupants and luggage. The trailer load/noseweight is usually approximately 8% of the gross weight of the trailer and its cargo.

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards are U.S.

government specifications. Their purpose is to provide drivers with uniform reliable information on tire performance data. Tire manufacturers have to grade tires using three performance factors: : tread wear grade, ; traction grade and

= temperature grade. These regulations do not apply to Canada. Nevertheless, all tires sold in

North America are provided with the corresponding quality grading markings on the sidewall of the tire.

Quality grades can be found, where applicable, on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width.

Example:

R

R

R

Treadwear grade: 200

Traction grade: AA

Temperature grade: A

Z

360


All passenger car tires must conform to the statutory safety requirements in addition to these grades.

i


Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified U.S.

government course. For example, a tire graded

150 would wear one and one-half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100.

The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction

G

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

!

Avoid wheelspin. This can lead to damage to the drive train.

The traction grades – from highest to lowest – are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icy road is always lower than on dry road surfaces.

You should pay special attention to road conditions when temperatures are around freezing point.

Mercedes-Benz recommends a minimum tread depth of ã in (4 mm) on all four winter tires.

Observe the legally required minimum tire tread depth (

Y page 347). Winter tires can reduce the braking distance on snow-covered surfaces in comparison with summer tires. The braking distance is still much further than on surfaces that are not icy or covered with snow. Take appropriate care when driving.

Further information on winter tires (M+S tires)

(

Y page 348).

Temperature

G

WARNING

The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause excessive heat build-up and possible tire failure.

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety

Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

Tire labeling

Overview


361

tire load rating and speed rating required for your vehicle.

=

?

A

B

C

:

;

D

E

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards

(

Y page 364)

Department of Transportation, Tire Identification Number (

Y page 363)

Maximum load rating (

Y page 363)

Maximum tire pressures (

Y page 352)

Manufacturer

Tire material (

Y page 364)

Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity and speed rating (

Y page 361)

Load index (

Tire name

Y page 363)

The markings described above are on the tire in addition to the tire name (sales designation) and the manufacturer's name.

i

Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data in the example.

Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity and speed rating

G

WARNING

Exceeding the stated tire load-bearing capacity and the approved maximum speed could lead to tire damage or the tire bursting. There is a risk of accident.

Therefore, only use tire types and sizes approved for your vehicle model. Observe the

:

;

=

?

A

B

Tire width

Nominal aspect ratio in %

Tire code

Rim diameter

Load bearing index

Speed rating

General: depending on the manufacturer's standards, the size imprinted in the tire wall may not contain any letters or may contain one letter that precedes the size description.

If there is no letter preceding the size description (as shown above): these are passenger vehicle tires according to European manufacturing standards.

If "P" precedes the size description: these are passenger vehicle tires according to U.S. manufacturing standards.

If "LT" precedes the size description: these are light truck tires according to U.S. manufacturing standards.

If "T" precedes the size description: compact emergency wheels with high tire pressure that are only designed for temporary use in an emergency.

Tire width:tire width : shows the nominal tire width in millimeters.

Height-width ratio: aspect ratio ; is the size ratio between the tire height and tire width and is shown in percent. The aspect ratio is calculated by dividing the tire width by the tire height.

Tire code:tire code = specifies the tire type.

"R" represents radial tires; "D" represents diagonal tires; "B" represents diagonal radial tires.

Optionally, tires with a maximum speed of over

149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" in the size

Z

362


description, depending on the manufacturer

(e.g. 245/40 ZR 18).

Rim diameter: rim diameter ? is the diameter of the bead seat, not the diameter of the rim flange. The rim diameter is specified in inches (in).

Load-bearing index: load-bearing index A is a numerical code that specifies the maximum load-bearing capacity of a tire.

Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit. The maximum permissible load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and

Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side (

Y page 356).

Example:

Load-bearing index 91 indicates a maximum load of 1,356 lb (615 kg) that the tires can bear.

For further information on the maximum tire load in kilograms and lbs, see (

Y page 363).

For further information on the load bearing index, see "Load index" (

Y page 363).

Speed rating:speed rating B specifies the approved maximum speed of the tire.

i


Regardless of the speed rating, always observe the speed limits. Drive carefully and adapt your driving style to the traffic conditions.

Summer tires

Index Speed rating

W

Y

H

V

S

T

Q

R up to 100 mph (160 km/h) up to 106 mph (170 km/h) up to 112 mph (180 km/h) up to 118 mph (190 km/h) up to 130 mph (210 km/h) up to 149 mph (240 km/h) up to 168 mph (270 km/h) up to 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR...Y

up to 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR...(..Y) over 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR over 149 mph (240 km/h)

R

R

Optionally, tires with a maximum speed of over 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" in the size description, depending on the manufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR18).

The service specification is made up of loadbearing index A and speed rating B.

If the size description of your tire includes

"ZR" and there are no service specifications, ask the tire manufacturer in order to find out the maximum speed.

If a service specification is available, the maximum speed is limited according to the speed rating in the service specification. Example:

245/40 ZR18 97 Y. In this example, "97 Y" is the service specification. The letter "Y" represents the speed rating. The maximum

R speed of the tire is limited to 186 mph

(300 km/h).

The size description for all tires with maximum speeds of over 186 mph (300 km/h) must include "ZR",and the service specification must be given in parentheses. Example:

275/40 ZR 18 (99 Y). Speed rating "(Y)" indicates that the maximum speed of the tire is over 186 mph (300 km/h). Ask the tire manufacturer about the maximum speed.

All-weather tires and winter tires

Index

Q M+S

T M+S

2

H M+S

2

V M+S 2

2

Speed rating

up to 100 mph (160 km/h) up to 118 mph (190 km/h) up to 130 mph (210 km/h) up to 149 mph (240 km/h) i

Not all tires with the M+S marking provide the driving characteristics of winter tires. In addition to the M+S marking, winter tires also have the i snowflake symbol on the tire wall. Tires with this marking fulfill the requirements of the Rubber Manufacturers Association (RMA) and the Rubber Association of

Canada (RAC) regarding the tire traction on snow. They have been especially developed for driving on snow.

2

Or M+S i for winter tires.


363

An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehicle from exceeding the following speeds:

R

R

R

All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG GLS 63):

130 mph (210 km/h)

Mercedes-AMG GLS 63: 155 mph (250 km/h)

Mercedes-AMG GLS 63 with increased top speed: 174 mph (280 km/h)

The speed rating of tires mounted at the factory may be higher than the maximum speed that the electronic speed limiter permits.

Make sure that your tires have the required speed rating, e.g. when buying new tires. The required speed rating for your vehicle can be found in the "Tires" section (

Y page 371).

Further information about reading tire data can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop.

Load index

Maximum load rating

Maximum tire load : is the maximum permissible weight for which the tire is approved.

Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit. The maximum permissible load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and

Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side (

Y page 356).

i


DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)

US tire regulations stipulate that every tire manufacturer or retreader must imprint a TIN in or on the sidewall of each tire produced.

In addition to the load bearing index, load index : may be imprinted after the letters that identify speed index B on the sidewall of the tire (

Y page 361).

R

R

If no specification is given: no text (as in the example above), represents a standard load

(SL) tire

XL or Extra Load: represents a reinforced tire

R

R

Light Load: represents a light load tire

C, D, E: represents a load range that depends on the maximum load that the tire can carry at a certain pressure i


The TIN is a unique identification number. The

TIN enables the tire manufacturers or retreaders to inform purchasers of recalls and other safetyrelevant matters. It makes it possible for the purchaser to easily identify the affected tires.

The TIN is made up of manufacturer identification code ;, tire size =, tire type code ? and manufacturing date A.

DOT (Department of Transportation): tire symbol : marks that the tire complies with the

Z

364


requirements of the U.S. Department of Transportation.

Manufacturer identification code: manufacturer identification code ; provides details on the tire manufacturer. New tires have a code with two symbols. Retreaded tires have a code with four symbols.

For further information about retreaded tires, see (

Y page 371).

Tire size: identifier = describes the tire size.

Tire type code: tire type code ? can be used by the manufacturer as a code to describe specific characteristics of the tire.

Date of manufacture: date of manufacture A provides information about the age of a tire. The first and second positions represent the week of manufacture, starting with "01" for the first calendar week. Positions three and four represent the year of manufacture. For example, a tire that is marked "3214" was manufactured in week 32 in 2014.

i


Tire characteristics

This information describes the type of tire cord and the number of layers in sidewall : and under tire tread ;.

i


Definition of terms for tires and loading

Tire ply composition and material used

Describes the number of plies or the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread and sidewall. These are made of steel, nylon, polyester and other materials.

Bar

Metric unit for tire pressure. 14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi) and 100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equivalent of 1 bar.

DOT (Department of Transportation)

DOT-marked tires fulfill the requirements of the

U S Department of Transportation.

Normal occupant weight

The number of occupants for which the vehicle is designed multiplied by 68 kilograms (150 lbs).

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards

A uniform standard to grade the quality of tires with regards to tread quality, tire traction and temperature characteristics. The quality grading assessment is made by the manufacturer following specifications from the U.S. government. The ratings are molded into the sidewall of the tire.

Recommended tire pressures

The recommended tire pressure applies to the tires mounted at the factory.

The Tire and Loading Information placard contains the recommended tire pressures for cold tires on a fully loaded vehicle and for the maximum permissible vehicle speed.

The tire pressure table contains the recommended pressures for cold tires for various operating conditions, i.e. differing load and speed conditions.

Increased vehicle weight due to optional equipment

The combined weight of all standard and optional equipment available for the vehicle, regardless of whether it is actually installed on the vehicle or not.

Rim

This is the part of the wheel on which the tire is mounted.

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)

The GAWR is the maximum gross axle weight rating. The actual load on an axle must never exceed the gross axle weight rating. The gross axle weight rating can be found on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side.


365

Speed rating

The speed rating is part of the tire identification.

It specifies the speed range for which the tire is approved.

GTW (Gross Trailer Weight)

The GTW is the weight of a trailer including the weight of the load, luggage, accessories etc. on the trailer.

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)

The gross vehicle weight includes the weight of the vehicle including fuel, tools, the spare wheel, accessories installed, occupants, luggage and the drawbar noseweight, if applicable. The gross vehicle weight must not exceed the gross vehicle weight rating GVWR as specified on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side.

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)

The GVWR is the maximum permissible gross weight of a fully loaded vehicle (the weight of the vehicle including all accessories, occupants, fuel, luggage and the drawbar noseweight, if applicable). The gross vehicle weight rating is specified on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side.

Maximum loaded vehicle weight

The maximum weight is the sum of:

R

R

R

R the curb weight of the vehicle the weight of the accessories the load limit the weight of the factory installed optional equipment

Kilopascal (kPa)

Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa corresponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tire pressure is bar. 100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equivalent of

1 bar.

Load index

In addition to the load-bearing index, the load index may also be imprinted on the sidewall of the tire. This specifies the load-bearing capacity more precisely.

Curb weight

The weight of a vehicle with standard equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant. It also includes the air-conditioning system and optional equipment if these are installed in the vehicle, but does not include passengers or luggage.

Maximum load rating

The maximum tire load is the maximum permissible weight in kilograms or lbs for which a tire is approved.

Maximum permissible tire pressure

Maximum permissible tire pressure for one tire.

Maximum load on one tire

Maximum load on one tire. This is calculated by dividing the maximum axle load of one axle by two.

PSI (pounds per square inch)

A standard unit of measure for tire pressure.

Aspect ratio

Relationship between tire height and tire width in percent.

Tire pressure

This is pressure inside the tire applying an outward force to each square inch of the tire's surface. The tire pressure is specified in pounds per square inch (psi), in kilopascal (kPa) or in bar.

The tire pressure should only be corrected when the tires are cold.

Cold tire pressure

The tires are cold:

R

R if the vehicle has been parked with the tires out of direct sunlight for at least three hours and if the vehicle has not been driven further than

1 mile (1.6 km)

Tread

The part of the tire that comes into contact with the road.

Bead

The tire bead ensures that the tire sits securely on the wheel. There are several steel wires in the bead to prevent the tire from coming loose from the wheel rim.

Z

366

Changing a wheel

Sidewall

The part of the tire between the tread and the bead.

Weight of optional extras

The combined weight of those optional extras that weigh more than the replaced standard parts and more than 2.3 kg (5 lbs). These optional extras, such as high-performance brakes, level control, a roof rack or a high-performance battery, are not included in the curb weight and the weight of the accessories.

TIN (Tire Identification Number)

This is a unique identifier which can be used by a tire manufacturer to identify tires, for example for a product recall, and thus identify the purchasers. The TIN is made up of the manufacturer's identity code, tire size, tire type code and the manufacturing date.

Load bearing index

The load bearing index (also load index) is a code that contains the maximum load bearing capacity of a tire.

Traction

Traction is the result of friction between the tires and the road surface.

TWR (Tongue Weight Rating)

The TWR specifies the maximum permissible weight that the ball coupling of the trailer tow hitch can support.

Treadwear indicators

Narrow bars (tread wear bars) that are distributed over the tire tread. If the tire tread is level with the bars, the wear limit of á in (1.6 mm) has been reached.

Occupant distribution

The distribution of occupants in a vehicle at their designated seating positions.

Total load limit

Nominal load and luggage load plus 68 kg

(150 lbs) multiplied by the number of seats in the vehicle.


Flat tire

The "Breakdown assistance" section

(

Y page 331) contains information and notes on how to deal with a flat tire. Information on driving with MOExtended tires in the event of a flat tire can be found under "MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat characteristics" (

Y page 332).

Vehicles with an emergency spare wheel: in the event of a flat tire, mount the emergency spare wheel according to the description under

"Mounting a wheel" (

Y page 367).

Rotating the wheels

G

WARNING

Interchanging the front and rear wheels may severely impair the driving characteristics if the wheels or tires have different dimensions.

The wheel brakes or suspension components may also be damaged. There is a risk of accident.

Rotate front and rear wheels only if the wheels and tires are of the same dimensions.

!

On vehicles equipped with a tire pressure monitor, electronic components are located in the wheel.

Tire-mounting tools should not be used near the valve. This could damage the electronic components.

Only have tires changed at a qualified specialist workshop.

Always observe the instructions and safety notes in the "Mounting a wheel" section

(

Y page 367).

The wear patterns on the front and rear tires differ, depending on the operating conditions.

Rotate the wheels before a clear wear pattern has formed on the tires. Front tires typically wear more on the shoulders and the rear tires in the center.

On vehicles that have the same size front and rear wheels, you can rotate the wheels according to the intervals in the tire manufacturer's warranty book in your vehicle documents. If no warranty book is available, the tires should be rotated every 3,000 to 6,000 miles (5,000 to

10,000 km). Depending on tire wear, this may


367

be required earlier. Do not change the direction of wheel rotation.

Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and the brake disc thoroughly every time a wheel is rotated. Check the tire pressure and, if necessary, restart the tire pressure loss warning system or the tire pressure monitor (

Y page 353).

Direction of rotation

Tires with a specified direction of rotation have additional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk of hydroplaning. These advantages can only be gained if the tires are installed corresponding to the direction of rotation.

An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicates its correct direction of rotation.

Storing wheels

Store wheels that are not being used in a cool, dry and preferably dark place. Protect the tires from oil, grease, gasoline and diesel.

X

X

X

X

Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door.

The on-board electronics now have status 0.



Start/Stop button from the ignition lock

(

Y page 138).

If included in the vehicle equipment, remove the tire-change tool kit from the vehicle.

Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away.

i

Apart from certain country-specific variations, vehicles are not equipped with a tirechange tool kit. For information on which tools are required to perform a wheel change on your vehicle, consult an authorized


Necessary tire-changing tools can include, for example:

R

Jack

R

Wheel chock

R

Lug wrench

Securing the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away

Mounting a wheel

Preparing the vehicle

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Vehicle with emergency spare wheel:

when mounting the emergency spare wheel in the event of a flat tire, follow the additional notes on vehicle preparation under "Flat tire"

(

Y page 331).

Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and level ground.

Apply the electric parking brake manually.

Bring the front wheels into the straight-ahead position.

Vehicles with automatic transmission:

shift the automatic transmission to position

P.


make sure that the normal vehicle level is selected (

Y page 188).

Vehicles with the Off-Road Engineering

package: make sure that the normal level is selected (

Y page 182).


Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove the


If your vehicle is equipped with a wheel chock, it can be found in the tire-change tool kit

(

Y page 331).

The folding wheel chock is an additional safety measure to prevent the vehicle from rolling away, for example when changing a wheel.

X

X

X

Fold both plates upwards :.

Fold out lower plate ;.

Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully into the openings in base plate =.

Z

368


X

Place chocks or other suitable items under the front and rear of the wheel that is diagonally opposite the wheel you wish to change.

Raising the vehicle

G

WARNING

If you do not position the jack correctly at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the jack could tip over with the vehicle raised.


Only position the jack at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle. The base of the jack must be positioned vertically, directly under the jacking point of the vehicle.

!

Mercedes-AMG vehicles with

"Minispare" emergency spare wheel: only use the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel

on the rear axle. If you mount the

"Minispare" emergency spare wheel on the front axle, this could result in damage to the brake system.

If a tire on the front axle is defective, an intact wheel from the rear axle must first be replaced with the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel. The damaged wheel on the front axle can then be replaced by the undamaged wheel from the rear axle.

Make sure to note the placard on the

"Minispare" emergency spare wheel.

!

The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up the vehicle at the jacking points. Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged.

Observe the following when raising the vehicle:

R

To raise the vehicle, only use the vehicle-specific jack that has been tested and approved

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R by Mercedes-Benz. If used incorrectly, the jack could tip over with the vehicle raised.

The jack is designed only to raise and hold the vehicle for a short time while a wheel is being changed. It must not be used for performing maintenance work under the vehicle.

Avoid changing the wheel on uphill and downhill slopes.

Before raising the vehicle, secure it from rolling away by applying the parking brake and inserting wheel chocks. Do not disengage the parking brake while the vehicle is raised.

The jack must be placed on a firm, flat and non-slip surface. On a loose surface, a large, flat, load-bearing underlay must be used. On a slippery surface, a non-slip underlay must be used, e.g. rubber mats.

Do not use wooden blocks or similar objects as a jack underlay. Otherwise, the jack will not be able to achieve its load-bearing capacity due to the restricted height.

Make sure that the distance between the underside of the tires and the ground does not exceed 1.2 in (3 cm).

Do not place your hands or feet under the raised vehicle.

Do not lie under the vehicle.

Do not start the engine when the vehicle is raised.

Never open or close a door or the tailgate when the vehicle is raised.

Make sure that no persons are present in the vehicle when the vehicle is raised.

X

Using lug wrench :, loosen the bolts on the wheel you wish to change by about one full turn. Do not unscrew the bolts completely.


369

The jacking points are located just behind the front wheel housings and just in front of the rear wheel housings (arrows).

X

Take the ratchet wrench out of the vehicle tool kit and place it on the hexagon nut of the jack so that the letters AUF are visible.

X

X

Turn ratchet wrench ? until jack = sits completely on jacking point ; and the base of the jack lies evenly on the ground.

Turn ratchet wrench ? until the tire is raised a maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the ground.

Removing a wheel

!

Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a dirty surface. The bolt and wheel hub threads could otherwise be damaged when you screw them in.

When mounting/removing wheels, and for as long as the wheels are removed, avoid applying any external force on the brake disks. This could impair the level of comfort when braking.

X

Position jack = at jacking point ;.

The alignment bolt on the jack must be inserted into the intended opening on the jacking point.

X

Make sure the foot of the jack is directly beneath the jacking point.

X

X

X

X

Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt completely.

Screw alignment bolt : into the thread instead of the wheel bolt.

Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts fully.

Remove the wheel.

Mounting a new wheel

G

WARNING

Oiled or greased wheel bolts or damaged wheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheel bolts to come loose. As a result, you could lose a wheel while driving. There is a risk of accident.

Never oil or grease wheel bolts. In the event of damage to the threads, contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Have the damaged wheel bolts or hub threads replaced/renewed. Do not continue driving.

Z

370


G

WARNING

If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip over. There is a risk of injury.

Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is on the ground.

!

To prevent damage to the paintwork, hold the wheel securely against the wheel hub while screwing in the first wheel bolt.

Always pay attention to the instructions and safety notes in the "Changing a wheel" section

(

Y page 366).

Only use wheel bolts that have been designed for the wheel and the vehicle. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use wheel bolts which have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and the respective wheel.

!

Always use wheel bolts ; to mount the

"Minispare" emergency spare wheel. Using other wheel bolts to mount the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel could damage the brake system.

:

;

Wheel bolts for all wheels supplied by the factory and for the collapsible spare wheel

(Mercedes-AMG GLE 63)

Wheel bolts for the collapsible spare wheel

X

X

X

X

X

X

Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact surfaces.

Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the alignment bolt and push it on.

Tighten the wheel bolts until they are fingertight.

Unscrew the alignment bolt.

Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is fingertight.

Mercedes-AMG vehicles with a collapsi-

ble spare wheel: inflate the collapsible spare wheel (

Y page 374).

Only then lower the vehicle.

Lowering the vehicle

G

WARNING

The wheels could work loose if the wheel nuts and bolts are not tightened to the specified tightening torque. There is a risk of accident.

Have the tightening torque immediately checked at a qualified specialist workshop after a wheel is changed.

!

Mercedes-AMG vehicles with a collapsi-

ble spare wheel: before lowering the vehicle, inflate the collapsible spare wheel with the tire inflation compressor. The wheel rim could otherwise be damaged.

X

X

X

Place the ratchet wrench onto the hexagon nut of the jack so that the letters AB are visible.

Turn the ratchet wrench until the vehicle is once again standing firmly on the ground.

Place the jack to one side.


371

X

X

X

X

Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a crosswise pattern in the sequence indicated (: to A).

The tightening torque must be

110 lb-ft(150 Nm).

Turn the jack back to its initial position.

Stow the jack and the rest of the tire-change tool kit in the stowage well under the cargo compartment floor again.

Check the tire pressure of the newly mounted wheel and adjust it if necessary.

Observe the recommended tire pressure

(

Y page 349).

When you are driving with the collapsible spare wheel mounted, the tire pressure loss warning system or the tire pressure monitor cannot function reliably. Only restart the tire pressure loss warning system or tire pressure monitor when the defective wheel has been replaced with a new wheel.

Vehicles with a tire pressure control sys-

tem: all installed wheels must be equipped with functioning sensors.


You can ask for information regarding permitted wheel/tire combinations at an authorized


!

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use tires and wheels which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz specifically for your vehicle.

These tires have been specially adapted for use with the control systems, such as ABS or

ESP

®

, and are marked as follows:

R

MO = Mercedes-Benz Original

R

MOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended

R

(tires featuring run-flat characteristics)

MO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only certain AMG tires)

Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tires may only be used on wheels that have been specifically approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Only use tires, wheels or accessories tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Certain characteristics, e.g. handling, vehicle noise emissions or fuel consumption, may otherwise be adversely affected. In addition, when driving with a load, tire dimension variations could cause the tires to come into contact with the bodywork and axle components. This could result in damage to the tires or the vehicle.

Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability for damage resulting from the use of tires, wheels or accessories other than those tested and approved.

Information on tires, wheels and approved combinations can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop.

!

Retreaded tires are neither tested nor recommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous damage cannot always be detected on retreaded tires. As a result, Mercedes-Benz cannot guarantee vehicle safety if retreaded tires are mounted. Do not mount used tires if you have no information about their previous usage.

The recommended pressures for various operating conditions can be found:

R on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side

R in the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap

Observe the notes on recommended tire pressures under various operating conditions

(

Y page 349).

Check tire pressures regularly, and only when the tires are cold. Comply with the maintenance recommendations of the tire manufacturer in the vehicle document wallet.

Z

372


Notes on the vehicle equipment – always equip the vehicle:

R

R with tires of the same size on a given axle (left and right) with the same type of tires at a given time

(summer tires, winter tires, MOExtended tires)

Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g.

winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop.

If a tire on the front axle is defective, an intact wheel from the rear axle must first be replaced with the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel. The damaged wheel on the front axle can then be replaced by the undamaged wheel from the rear axle.

Make sure to note the placard on the

"Minispare" emergency spare wheel.

When using an emergency spare wheel or spare wheel of a different size, you must not exceed the maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).

Snow chains must not be mounted on emergency spare wheels.



G

WARNING

The wheel or tire size as well as the tire type of the spare wheel or emergency spare wheel and the wheel to be replaced may differ.

Mounting an emergency spare wheel may severely impair the driving characteristics.


To avoid hazardous situations:

R adapt your driving style accordingly and drive carefully.

R never mount more than one spare wheel or emergency spare wheel that differs in size.

R only use a spare wheel or emergency spare wheel of a different size briefly.

R do not switch ESP

® off.

R have a spare wheel or emergency spare wheel of a different size replaced at the nearest qualified specialist workshop.

Observe that the wheel and tire dimensions as well as the tire type must be correct.

!

Mercedes-AMG vehicles with

"Minispare" emergency spare wheel: only use the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel

on the rear axle. If you mount the

"Minispare" emergency spare wheel on the front axle, this could result in damage to the brake system.

General notes

You can ask for information regarding permitted emergency spare wheels at an authorized


Mounting the emergency spare wheel is described under "Mounting a wheel" (

Y page 367).

You should regularly check the pressure of the emergency spare wheel, particularly prior to long trips, and correct the pressure as necessary (

Y page 349). The value on the wheel is valid.

An emergency spare wheel may also be mounted against the direction of rotation. Observe the time restriction on use as well as the speed limitation specified on the emergency spare wheel.

Replace the tires after six years at the latest, regardless of wear. This also applies to the emergency spare wheel.

When you are driving with the collapsible spare wheel mounted, the tire pressure loss warning system or the tire pressure monitor cannot function reliably. Only restart the tire pressure loss warning system or tire pressure monitor when the defective wheel has been replaced with a new wheel.

Vehicles with tire pressure monitor: after mounting an emergency spare wheel, the system may still display the tire pressure of the removed wheel for a few minutes. The value displayed for the mounted emergency spare wheel is not the same as the current tire pressure of the emergency spare wheel.


373

Removing/stowing the emergency spare wheel

Vehicles with a "Minispare" emergency spare wheel under the cargo compartment floor


(

Y page 367).

Example image: vehicle without a lockable cargo compartment floor.

Removing the emergency spare wheel

X

X

X

X

X

X

X


(

Y page 301).

Vehicles with a lockable cargo compart-

ment floor: remove the stowage tray.

Release the Velcro fastener (

Y page 331).

Take out the jack.

Turn emergency spare wheel retainer : counter-clockwise and remove it.

Remove stowage well ;.

Remove "Minispare" emergency spare wheel

=.

Vehicles with a "Minispare" emergency spare wheel in the emergency spare wheel bag


(

Y page 367).

On vehicles with a Bang & Olufsen sound system, the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel is packed in an emergency spare wheel bag. The emergency spare wheel bag is secured to the cargo tie-down rings in the cargo compartment.


X

X

X

X

Detach fastening straps ;.

Unhook retaining spring hooks : and = of fastening straps ; from the cargo tie-down rings.

Remove the emergency spare wheel bag with the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel.

Open the emergency spare wheel bag and remove the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel.

Stowing the emergency spare wheel

X

X

X

X

Place the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel into the emergency spare wheel bag and close the emergency spare wheel bag.

Place the emergency spare wheel bag with the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel into the cargo compartment with the carrying strap at the back.

Hook retaining spring hooks : and = of fastening straps ; into the cargo tie-down rings.

Tighten fastening straps ;.

Mercedes-AMG vehicles with a collapsible spare wheel under the cargo compartment floor

!

Only place the collapsible spare wheel in the vehicle when it is dry. Otherwise, moisture may get into the vehicle.


(

Y page 367).

The collapsible spare wheel can be found in the stowage well under the cargo compartment floor.

Z

374


On Mercedes-AMG vehicles with a Bang & Olufsen sound system, the collapsible spare wheel is packed in an emergency spare wheel bag. The emergency spare wheel bag is secured to the cargo tie-down rings in the cargo compartment.


X

X

X


(

Y page 301).

Unscrew retaining screw ; counter-clockwise.

Remove collapsible spare wheel : from the spare wheel well.

Inflating the collapsible spare wheel

(

Y page 374).

Take the following steps to stow a used collapsible spare wheel. Otherwise, it will not fit into the spare wheel well. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have this work performed at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. at an authorized



X

X

Unscrew the valve cap from the valve.

If possible, unscrew the valve insert from the valve and release the air.

i

Fully deflating the tires can take a few minutes.

X

X

X

X

X

Screw the valve insert back into the valve.

Screw the valve cap back on.

Lay collapsible spare wheel : in the emergency spare wheel well.

Screw in retaining screw ; clockwise in the collapsible emergency wheel to the stop.

Swing the cargo compartment floor down

(

Y page 301).

Mercedes-AMG vehicles with a collapsible spare wheel in the emergency spare wheel bag


(

Y page 367).


X

X

X

Unhook retaining spring hooks : of fastening strap ; from the cargo tie-down rings.

Remove the emergency spare wheel bag with the emergency collapsible spare wheel.

Open the bag and remove the emergency collapsible spare wheel.

Inflating the collapsible spare wheel

(

Y page 374).


X

X

X

X

Place the collapsible spare wheel into the emergency spare wheel bag and close the emergency spare wheel bag.

Place the emergency spare wheel bag with the collapsible spare wheel into the cargo compartment with the carrying strap at the back.

Hook retaining spring hooks : of fastening strap ; into the cargo tie-down rings.

Tighten fastening strap ;.

Inflating the collapsible spare wheel

(Mercedes-AMG GLS 63)

!

Inflate the collapsible spare wheel using the tire inflation compressor before lowering the vehicle. The wheel rim could otherwise be damaged.

!

Do not operate the tire inflation compressor for longer than eight minutes at a time without a break. It may otherwise overheat.


375

The tire inflation compressor can be operated again once it has cooled down.

Comply with the manufacturer's safety instructions on the tire inflation compressor label and on the tire sealant bottle.

X

X

Mount the collapsible spare wheel as described (

Y page 367).

The collapsible spare wheel must be mounted before it is inflated.

Remove the tire inflation compressor from the stowage space under the trunk floor

(

Y page 331).

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

When the specified tire pressure has been reached, press on and off switch A on the tire inflation compressor to 0.

The tire inflation compressor is switched off.


If the tire pressure is higher than the specified pressure, press pressure release valve button : until the correct tire pressure has been reached.

Unscrew union nut ; on hose B from the valve.

Screw the cap onto the valve of the collapsible spare wheel again.

Stow connector ? and hose B in the lower section of the tire inflation compressor.

Stow the tire inflation compressor in the vehicle.

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Pull connector ? and hose B out of the housing.

Remove the cap from the valve on the collapsible spare wheel.

Screw union nut ; of hose B onto the valve.

Make sure on/off switch A of the tire inflation compressor is set to 0.

Insert connector ? into a socket in your vehicle.

Cigarette lighter socket: (

Y page 306)

12 V sockets: (

Y page 306)

Observe the notes on the cigarette lighter

(

Y page 306). Observe the notes on sockets

(

Y page 306).


Y page 138).

Press on and off switch A on the tire inflation compressor to I.

The tire inflation compressor is switched on.

The tire is inflated. The tire pressure is shown on pressure gauge =.

Inflate the tire to the specified tire pressure.

The specified tire pressure is printed on the yellow label of the emergency spare wheel.

Z

376

Vehicle electronics

Information regarding technical data

i

The data stated here specifically refers to a vehicle with standard equipment. Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the data for all vehicle variants and trim levels.

Vehicle electronics

Installing two-way radios and mobile phones (RF transmitters)

G

WARNING

The electromagnetic radiation from modified or incorrectly retrofitted RF-transmitters can interfere with the vehicle electronics. This can compromise the operational safety of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.

You should have all work to electrical and electronic equipment carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

G

WARNING

The electromagnetic radiation from incorrectly operated RF transmitters can interfere with the vehicle electronics, for example:

R if the RF transmitter is not connected with an exterior antenna

R the exterior antenna has been installed incorrectly or is not a low-reflection type

This can compromise the operational safety of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.

Have the low-reflection exterior antenna mounted at a qualified specialist workshop.

When operating RF transmitters in the vehicle, always connect them with the low-reflection exterior antenna.

!

The operating permit may be invalidated if the instructions for installation and use of RF transmitters are not observed.

In particular, the following conditions must be complied with:

R only approved wavebands may be used.

R observe the maximum permissible output

R in these wavebands.

only approved antenna positions may be used.

Excessive levels of electromagnetic radiation may cause damage to your health and the health of others. Using an exterior antenna takes into account current scientific discussions relating to the possible health hazards that may result from electromagnetic fields.

The following antenna positions may be used if

RF transmitters have been properly installed:

Approved antenna positions

:

;

Rear roof area

Rear fender i

On the rear fenders, it is recommended to position the antenna on the side of the vehicle closest to the center of the road.

Use the Technical Specification ISO/TS 21609 when retrofitting RF transmitters (Road Vehicles

- EMC guidelines for installation of aftermarket radio frequency transmitting equipment).

Observe the legal requirements for accessory parts.

If your vehicle has installations for two-way radio equipment, use the power supply or antenna connections intended for use with the basic wiring. Be sure to observe the manufacturer's Supplement when installing.

Deviations with respect to frequency bands, maximum transmission outputs or antenna positions must be approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Identification plates

377

The maximum transmission output (PEAK) at the base of the antenna must not exceed the following values:

Frequency band Maximum transmission output

Short wave

3 - 54 MHz

4 m waveband

74 - 88 MHz

2 m waveband

144 - 174 MHz

Trunked radio system/

Tetra

380 - 460 MHz

70 cm waveband

400 - 460 MHz

Mobile communications

(2G/3G/4G)

100 W

30 W

50 W

10 W

35 W

10 W

Identification plates

Vehicle identification plate with vehicle identification number (VIN)

X


You will see vehicle identification plate :.

The following can be used in the vehicle without restrictions:

R

R

RF transmitters with a maximum transmission output of up to 100 mW

RF transmitters with transmitter frequencies in the 380 - 410 MHz waveband and a maximum transmission output of up to 2 W

(trunked radio/Tetra)

R

Mobile phones (2G/3G/4G)

There are no restrictions when positioning the antenna on the outside of the vehicle for the following wavebands:

R

R

R

Trunked radio system/Tetra

70 cm waveband

2G/3G/4G

Example: vehicle identification plate (USA only)

;

=

Paint code

VIN

Example: vehicle identification plate (Canada only)

;

=

Paint code

VIN i

The data shown on the vehicle identification plate is used only as an example. This data is different for every vehicle and can deviate

Z

378

Service products and filling capacities

from the data shown here. You can find the data applicable to your vehicle on the vehicle identification plate.

Vehicle identification number (VIN)

X

X

Open the front right-hand door.

Open cover : in the direction of the arrow and remove it.

You will see the VIN.

The VIN can also be found in the following locations:

R

R on the lower edge of the windshield

(

Y page 378) on the vehicle identification plate

(

Y page 377)

Engine number

:

;

=

Emission control information plate, including the certification of both federal and Californian emissions standards

Engine number (stamped into the crankcase)

VIN (on the lower edge of the windshield)



G

WARNING

Service products may be poisonous and hazardous to health. There is a risk of injury.

Comply with instructions on the use, storage and disposal of service products on the labels of the respective original containers. Always store service products sealed in their original containers. Always keep service products out of the reach of children.

H


Dispose of service products in an environmentally responsible manner.

Service products include the following:

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

Fuels

Exhaust gas aftertreatment additives, e.g.

DEF

Lubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil)

Coolant

Brake fluid

Windshield washer fluid

Climate control system refrigerant

Components and service products must match.

You should therefore only use products that have been tested and approved by Mercedes-

Benz.

You can identify service products approved by

Mercedes-Benz by the following inscriptions on the container:

R

R

MB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)

MB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 229.51)

Other designations or recommendations indicate a level of quality or a specification in accordance with an MB Sheet Number (e.g. MB

229.5). They have not necessarily been approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Other identifications, for example:

R

R

R

0 W-30

5 W-30

5 W-40


379

Fuel


G

WARNING

Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explosion.

You must avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before refueling.

G

WARNING

Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.


You must make sure that fuel does not come into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel vapors. Keep fuel away from children.

If you or others come into contact with fuel, observe the following:

R

Wash away fuel from skin immediately using soap and water.

R

If fuel comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water. Seek medical assistance without delay.

R

If fuel is swallowed, seek medical assistance without delay. Do not induce vomiting.

R

Immediately change out of clothing which has come into contact with fuel.

Tank capacity

Model

All models

Total capacity

26.4 US gal

(100.0 l)

Model

Mercedes‑AMG vehicles

All other models

Of which reserve

Approx.

3.7 US gal

(14.0 l)

Approx.

3.2 US gal

(12.0 l)

Gasoline

Fuel grade

!

Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a gasoline engine. Do not switch on the ignition if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel.


Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. Notify a qualified specialist workshop and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely.

!

Only refuel using unleaded premium grade gasoline with at least 91 AKI/95 RON.

i

E10 fuel contains up to 10% bioethanol.

Your vehicle is E10-compatible. You can refuel your vehicle using E10 fuel.

!

Only use the fuel recommended. Operating the vehicle with other fuels can lead to damage to the fuel system, engine and exhaust system.

!

Do not use the following:

R

E15 (gasoline with 15% ethanol)

R

E85 (gasoline with 85% ethanol)

R

E100 (100% ethanol)

R

M15 (gasoline with 15% methanol)

R


R


R

M100 (100% methanol)

R

Gasoline with metalliferous additives

R

Diesel

Do not mix such fuels with the fuel recommended for your vehicle.

!

To ensure the longevity and full performance of the engine, only premium-grade unleaded gasoline must be used.

Z

380


If standard unleaded gasoline is unavailable and you have to refuel with unleaded gasoline of a lower grade, observe the following precautions:

R

Only fill the fuel tank to half full with regular unleaded gasoline and fill the rest with premium-grade unleaded gasoline as soon as

R possible.

Do not drive at the maximum speed.

R

Avoid sudden acceleration and engine speeds over 3,000 rpm.

You will usually find information about the fuel grade on the pump. If you cannot find the label on the pump, ask the staff for assistance.

i

For further information, consult a qualified specialist workshop or visit http://www.mbusa.com (USA only).

As a temporary measure, if the recommended fuel is not available, you may also use regular unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of

87 AKI/91 RON. This may reduce engine performance and increase fuel consumption. Avoid driving at full throttle and sudden acceleration.

Never refuel using gasoline with a lower AKI.

Information on refueling (

Y page 154).

Additives

!

Operating the engine with fuel additives added later can lead to engine failure. Do not mix fuel additives with fuel. This does not include additives for the removal and prevention of residue buildup. gasoline must only be mixed with additives recommended by

Mercedes-Benz. Comply with the instructions for use on the product label. More information about recommended additives can be obtained from any authorized Mercedes-Benz

Center.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use branded fuels that have additives.

The fuel quality available in some countries may not be sufficient. Residue could build up in the fuel injection system as a result. In such cases, and in consultation with an authorized

Mercedes-Benz Center, the fuel may be mixed with the cleaning additive recommended by

Mercedes-Benz. You must observe the notes and mixing ratios specified on the container.

Diesel

Fuel grade

G

WARNING

If you mix diesel fuel with gasoline, the flash point is lower than that of pure diesel fuel.

When the engine is running, exhaust system components could overheat without being noticed. There is a risk of fire.

Never refuel with gasoline. Never mix gasoline with diesel fuel.

!

Only use Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel (ULSD), otherwise it may lead to increased wear and damage to the fuel system, engine and exhaust system.

!

Do not use the following:

R gasoline

R diesel with a bio-diesel content greater

R than 5% (e.g. B20) bio-diesel

R vegetable oil

R paraffin

R kerosene

R marine diesel

R heating oil

Do not mix such fuels with diesel fuel and do not use any special additives. Otherwise, engine damage may occur.

!

In countries outside USA and Canada, only use sulfur-free diesel with a sulfur content under 50 ppm. Otherwise, the emission control system could be damaged.

You will usually find information about the fuel grade on the pump. If you cannot find the label on the pump, ask the staff for assistance.

Information on refueling (

Y page 154).

Low outside temperatures

i

Diesel fuel with improved cold flow properties is available during the winter months.

Further information about fuel properties can be obtained from oil companies, e.g. at gas stations.


381

DEF


Comply with the important safety notes for service products when handling DEF (

Y page 378).

DEF is a water-soluble fluid for the exhaust gas aftertreatment of diesel engines. It is:

R

R not poisonous colorless and odorless

R not flammable

When you open the DEF container, small amounts of ammonia vapor may be released.

Ammonia vapors have a pungent odor and are particularly irritating to the skin, to mucous membranes and to the eyes. You may experience a burning sensation in your eyes, nose and throat. Coughing and watering of the eyes are possible.

Do not inhale ammonia vapors. Fill the DEF tank only in well-ventilated areas.

Low outside temperatures

DEF freezes at a temperature of approximately

12 ‡ (-11 †). The vehicle is delivered from the factory equipped with a DEF preheating system.

Winter operation can thus be guaranteed even at temperatures below 12 ‡ (-11 †).

Additives

!

Only use DEF in accordance with ISO

22241. Do not use additives with DEF and do not dilute DEF with water. This may destroy the BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreatment system.

Purity

!

Impurities in DEF (e.g. due to other service products, cleaning agents or dust) lead to:

R increased emission values

R damage to the catalytic converter

R engine damage

R malfunctions in the BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreatment system

Assuring the purity of DEF is particularly important with respect to avoiding malfunctions in the

BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreatment system.

If DEF is pumped out of the DEF tank, e.g. during repair work, it must not be returned to the tank.

The purity of the fluid can no longer be guaranteed.

Filling capacities

Model

GLS 350 d 4MATIC

Total capacity

10.2 US gal

(38.7 l)

Engine oil

General notes

!

Never use engine oil or an oil filter of a specification other than is necessary to fulfill the prescribed service intervals. Do not change the engine oil or oil filter in order to achieve longer replacement intervals than those prescribed. You could otherwise cause engine damage or damage to the exhaust gas aftertreatment.

Follow the instructions in the service interval display regarding the oil change. Otherwise, you may damage the engine and the exhaust gas aftertreatment.

When handling engine oil, observe the important safety notes on service products (

Y page 378).

The engine oils are matched to the performance of Mercedes-Benz engines and service intervals.

You should therefore only use engine oils and oil filters that are approved for vehicles with maintenance systems.

For a list of approved engine oils and oil filters, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Or visit the website http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

The table shows which engine oils have been approved for your vehicle.

Z

382


Gasoline engines

All models

Diesel engines


Mercedes-AMG vehicles: only use SAE 0W-40 or SAE 5W-40 engine oils.

i

MB approval is indicated on the oil containers.


The following values refer to an oil change including the oil filter.

Model Capacity


GLS 550 4MATIC



8.5 US qt (8.0 l)

9.0 US qt (8.5 l)

7.4 US qt (7.0 l)

Additives

!

Do not use any additives in the engine oil.

This could damage the engine.

Brake fluid

MB-Freigabe or

MB-Approval

229.5

MB-Freigabe or

MB-Approval

228.51, 229.31,

229.51, 229.52

G

WARNING

The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture from the air. This lowers the boiling point of the brake fluid. If the boiling point of the brake fluid is too low, vapor pockets may form in the brake system when the brakes are applied hard. This would impair braking efficiency.


You should have the brake fluid renewed at the specified intervals.

Comply with the important safety notes for service products when handling brake fluid

(

Y page 378).

The brake fluid change intervals can be found in the Maintenance Booklet.

Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes-

Benz in accordance with MB-Freigabe or MB-

Approval 331.0.

Information about approved brake fluid can be obtained at any qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

i

Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop in accordance with the replacement intervals and the replacement confirmed in the Maintenance

Booklet.

Coolant


G

WARNING

If antifreeze comes into contact with hot components in the engine compartment, it may ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.

Let the engine cool down before you add antifreeze. Make sure that antifreeze is not spilled next to the filler neck. Thoroughly clean the antifreeze from components before starting the engine.

!

Only add coolant that has been premixed with the desired antifreeze protection. You could otherwise damage the engine.

Further information on coolants can be found in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products, MB BeVo 310.1, e.g. on the

Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

Or contact a qualified specialist workshop.

!

Always use a suitable coolant mixture, even in countries where high temperatures prevail.

Otherwise, the engine cooling system is not sufficiently protected from corrosion and overheating.

i

Have the coolant regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop and the replacement confirmed in the Maintenance Booklet.


383

Comply with the important safety notes for service products when handling coolant

(

Y page 378).

The coolant is a mixture of water and antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor. It is responsible for the following:

R

R

Anti-corrosion protection

Antifreeze protection

R

Raising the boiling point

If the coolant has antifreeze protection down to

-35 ‡ (-37 †), the boiling point of the coolant during operation is approximately 266 ‡

(130 †).

The antifreeze concentrate/corrosion inhibitor concentration in the engine cooling system should:

R

R be at least 50%. This will protect the engine cooling system against freezing down to approximately -35 ‡ (-37 †).

not exceed 55% (antifreeze protection down to -49 ‡ [-45 †]). Otherwise, heat will not be dissipated as effectively.

Mercedes-Benz recommends an antifreeze/ corrosion inhibitor concentrate in accordance with MB Specifications for Service Products

310.1.

i

When the vehicle is first delivered, it is filled with a coolant mixture that ensures adequate antifreeze and anti-corrosion protection.

i

The coolant is checked with every maintenance interval at a qualified specialist workshop.


Model Capacity


Approx. 11.9 US qt

(11.3 l)


Approx. 12.2 US qt

(11.5 l)

GLS 550 4MATIC

Approx. 12.0 US qt

(11.4 l)


Approx. 10.3 US qt

(9.7 l)

Windshield washer system


G

WARNING

Windshield washer concentrate could ignite if it comes into contact with hot engine components or the exhaust system. There is a risk of fire and injury.

Make sure that no windshield washer concentrate is spilled next to the filler neck.

!

Only MB SummerFit and MB WinterFit washer fluid should be mixed together. The spray nozzles may otherwise become blocked.

Do not use distilled or de-ionized water. Otherwise, the level sensor may give a false reading.

When handling washer fluid, observe the important safety notes on service products

(

Y page 378).

At temperatures above freezing:

X

X

Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture of water and windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB

SummerFit.

Add 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water.

At temperatures below freezing:

Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture of water and washer fluid, e.g. MB WinterFit.

For the correct mixing ratio refer to the information on the antifreeze reservoir.

i

Add windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB WinterFit, to the washer fluid all year round.

Climate control system refrigerant


The climate control system of your vehicle is filled with refrigerant R‑134a.

The instruction label regarding the refrigerant type used can be found on the radiator cross member.

!

Only the refrigerant R‑134a and the PAG oil approved by Mercedes-Benz may be used.

The approved PAG oil may not be mixed with any other PAG oil that is not approved for

Z

384

Vehicle data

R-134a refrigerant. Otherwise, the climate control system may be damaged.

Service work, such as refilling with refrigerant or replacing component parts, may only be carried out by a qualified specialist workshop. All applicable regulations, as well as SAE standard J639, must be adhered to.

Always have work on the climate control system carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Refrigerant instruction label

Vehicle data

General notes

Please note that for the specified vehicle data:

R

-

-

the heights specified may vary as a result of: tires

load condition of the suspension optional equipment optional equipment reduces the maximum

R payload.

Observe the information relating to level control:

R

R

AIRMATIC package (

Y page 188)

Offroad Engineering package (

Y page 218)

Dimensions and weights

Example: refrigerant instruction label

:

;

=

?

A

Warning symbol

Refrigerant filling capacity

Applicable standards

PAG oil part number

Type of refrigerant

Warning symbol : advises you about:

R

R

Possible dangers

Having service work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop


Refrigerant


GLS 550 4MATIC


Capacity

45.9 ± 0.4 oz

(1300 ± 10 g)

37.0 ± 0.4 oz

(1050 ± 10 g)

Missing values were not available at time of going to print.

Model

:

Opening height

;

Max.

headroom

Mercedes-

AMG vehicles

PAG oil

All models

Capacity

3.9 ± 0.4 oz

(110 ± 10 g)

Vehicle data for off-road driving

385

All other models with:


ON&OFFROAD package

:

Opening height

83.9 in -

86.9 in

(2132 mm -

2207 mm)

83.9 in -

88.1 in

(2132 mm -

2237 mm)

;

Max.

headroom

76.1 in -

79.1 in

(1934 mm -

2009 mm)

76.1 in -

80.3 in

(1934 mm -

2039 mm)


Vehicle length

Maximum ground clearance

Minimum ground clearance

Turning radius

Maximum roof load

203.2 in

(5162 mm)

Vehicle width including exterior mirrors

Vehicle width without exterior mirrors

Vehicle height

Wheelbase

72.9 in

1850 mm

121.1 in

3075 mm

7.8 in

(198 mm)

39.7 ft

(12.10 m)

220 lbs

(100 kg)


Vehicle length

Vehicle width including exterior mirrors

Maximum vehicle height

(AIRMATIC package)

202.0 in

(5130 mm)

84.3 in

(2141 mm)

75.2 in

(1910 mm)


Maximum vehicle height

(ON&OFFROAD package)

Minimum vehicle height

Wheelbase

Maximum ground clearance (AIRMATIC package)

Maximum ground clearance (ON&OFFROAD package)

Minimum ground clearance

Turning radius

Maximum roof load

76.4 in

(1940 mm)

72.8 in

(1850 mm)

121.1 in

(3075 mm)

10.9 in

( 276 mm)

12.0 in

(306 mm)

7.9 in

(201 mm)

40.7 ft

(12.40 m)

220 lb

(100 kg)


Fording depth

!

The depth of water must not exceed the value specified in the table. Note that the possible fording depth is less in flowing water.

: Fording depth

On vehicles with the AIRMATIC package or the

Off-Road Engineering package, loads up to the maximum permissible load have no influence on fording capability.

Missing values were not available at the time of going to print.

Z

386


Vehicles without the Offroad Engineering package

Raised level

Vehicles with the Off-Road

Engineering package

Off-road level 1

Off-road level 2

Off-road level 3


For more information about off-road fording, see

(

Y page 167).

Approach/departure angle

Fording depth

19.7 in

(50 cm)

19.7 in

(50 cm)

19.7 in

(50 cm)

23.6 in

(60 cm)

All vehicles (except vehicles with AMG bodystyling)

: ;


Normal level

Raised level

Vehicles with the Off-

Road Engineering package

25°

30°

20°

25°

Normal level

Off-road level 1

Off-road level 2

Off-road level 3


Normal level (in sport mode with AMG adaptive sport suspension system activated)

Raised level

:

25°

28°

30°

33°

19°

22°

Maximum gradient-climbing capability

Note that the vehicle's gradient-climbing capability depends on the off-road conditions and the road surface conditions.

Vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package:

the maximum gradient climbing ability is 100 % when the LOW RANGE off-road gear is selected.

Vehicles without the ON&OFFROAD pack-

age: the maximum gradient climbing ability is

80 %.

;

20°

23°

25°

27°

19°

21°

Vehicles with AMG bodystyling

:


Normal level

Raised level

Vehicles with the Off-

Road Engineering package

Normal level

Off-road level 1

Off-road level 2

Off-road level 3

22°

27°

22°

25°

27°

29°

;

20°

25°

20°

23°

25°

27°

For further information about approach/departure angles, see (

Y page 171).

Trailer tow hitch

387

Accelerate carefully and make sure that the wheels do not spin when driving on steep terrain.

i

If the load on the front axle is reduced when pulling away on a steep uphill slope, the front wheels have a tendency to spin. 4ETS recognizes this and brakes the wheels accordingly.

The rear wheel torque is increased, making it easier to drive off.

For further information about the maximum gradient climbing ability, see (

Y page 171).

Permissible trailer load, braked (at a minimum gradient-climbing capability of12%from a standstill)

Maximum drawbar noseweight (the drawbar noseweight is not included in the trailer load)

Gross rear axle weight rating when towing a trailer

GLS 450 4M

ATIC,

GLS 550 4M

ATIC and

GLS 350 d 4

MATIC

7500 lbs

(3402 kg)

600 lbs

(272 kg)

3968 lbs

(1800 kg)


Mounting dimensions

!

If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted, changes to the cooling system and drive train may be necessary, depending on the vehicle type.

If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted, observe the anchorage points on the chassis frame.

:

;

Anchorage points for the trailer tow hitch

Rear axle center line

Mercedes‑A

MG GLS 63 4

MATIC

Permissible trailer load, braked (at a minimum gradient-climbing capability of12%from a standstill)

Maximum drawbar noseweight (the drawbar noseweight is not included in the trailer load)

Gross rear axle weight rating when towing a trailer

The actual noseweight may not be higher than the value which is given. The value can be found on the trailer tow hitch or trailer identification plates. The lowest weight applies.

The maximum permissible trailer drawbar noseweight is the maximum weight with which the trailer drawbar can be loaded. Limit for

Mercedes-Benz-approved trailer couplings.

Trailer loads

Trailer loads, trailer drawbar noseweights and axle loads

Missing values were not available at the time of going to print.

Z

388


Ball position of the ball coupling

When choosing a ball coupling, the dimensions stated in the illustration must not be exceeded.